Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Permit D09-089 - WESTFIELD SOUTHCENTER MALL - T-MOBILE - TENANT IMPROVEMENT
T- MOBILE 973 SOUTHCENTER MALL D09 -089 Contact Person: Name: AMY DIEKEVERS Address: 75 - 60TH ST SW , WYOMING MI 49548 Phone: 800 285 -7866 X 2 City • Tukwila Parcel No.: 6364200010 Address: 973 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW Suite No: Tenant: Name: T- MOBILE Address: 973 SOUTHCENTER MALL , TUKWILA WA Contractor: Name: HAWK BUILDING CONTRACTORS INC Address: PO BOX 2318 , WOODINVILLE, WA 98072 Phone: 425 402 -1818 Contractor License No: HAWKBCI034PM doc: IBC -10/06 Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us DEVELOPMENT PERMIT Owner: Name: WEA SOUTHCENTER LLC BSIP Address: TOTAL 13 PARCEL NUMBERS , 2010 NEW PLAT MAJOR 920247 00000 Phone: * *continued on next page ** Permit Number: D09 -089 Issue Date: 07/14/2009 Permit Expires On: 01/10/2010 Expiration Date: 12/23/2009 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: TENANT IMPROVEMENT: NEW CASH WRAPS, FIXTURES, CEILING GRID, FINISHES (STOREFRONT TO BE DONE BY LANDLORD/WESTFIELD) Value of Construction: $95,000.00 Fees Collected: $2,236.62 Type of Fire Protection: SPRINKLERS /AFA International Building Code Edition: 2006 Type of Construction: IIB Occupancy per IBC: 0019 D09 -089 Printed: 07 -14 -2009 Public Works Activities: Channelization / Striping: N Curb Cut / Access / Sidewalk / CSS: N Water Meter: Permit Center Authorized Signature: Signature: aN M doc: IBC -10/06 City *Tukwila • Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Fire Loop Hydrant: N Number: 0 Size (Inches): 0 Flood Control Zone: Hauling: N Start Time: End Time: Land Altering: Volumes: Cut 0 c.y. Fill 0 c.y. Landscape Irrigation: Moving Oversize Load: Start Time: End Time: Sanitary Side Sewer: Sewer Main Extension: Private: Public: Storm Drainage: Street Use: Profit: N Non - Profit: N Water Main Extension: Private: Public: Print Name: 5j ry S N Permit Number: D09 -089 Issue Date: 07/14/2009 Permit Expires On: 01/10/2010 Date: 1- l 9-01 I hereby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the of work. I am authorized to sign and obtain this development permit. Date: 7- (¢' O This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. D09 -089 Printed: 07 -14 -2009 Parcel No.: 6364200010 Address: 973 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW Suite No: Tenant: T- MOBILE 1: ** *BUILDING DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * ** • • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us PERMIT CONDITIONS Permit Number: D09 -089 Status: ISSUED Applied Date: 05/29/2009 Issue Date: 07/14/2009 2: No changes shall be made to the approved plans unless approved by the design professional in responsible charge and the Building Official. 3: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center (206/431- 3670). 4: All permits, inspection records, and approved plans shall be at the job site and available to the inspectors prior to start of any construction. These documents shall be maintained and made available until final inspection approval is granted. 5: New suspended ceiling grid and light fixture installations shall meet the non - building structures seismic design requirements of ASCE 7. 6: Partition walls that are tied to the ceiling and all partitions greater than 6 feet in height shall be laterally braced to the building structure. 7: All construction shall be done in conformance with the approved plans and the requirements of the International Building Code or International Residential Code, International Mechanical Code, Washington State Energy Code. 8: There shall be no occupancy of a building until final inspection has been completed and approved by Tukwila building inspector. No exception. 9: Remove all demolition rubble and loose miscellaneous material from lot or parcel of ground, properly cap the sanitary sewer connections, and properly fill or otherwise protect all basements, cellars, septic tanks, wells, and other excavations. Final inspection approval will be determined by the building inspector based on satisfactory completion of this requirement. 10: Water heaters shall be anchored or strapped to resist horizontal displacement due to earthquake motion. Strapping shall be at points within the upper one -third and lower one -third of the water heater's vertical dimension. A minimum distance of 4- inches shall be maintained above the controls with the strapping. 11: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the Cityof Tukwila Permit Center. 12: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206- 431 - 3670). 13: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. 14: ** *FIRE DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * ** doc: Cond -10/06 D09 -089 Printed: 07 -14 -2009 • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us • 15: The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by the Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: 16: The total number of fire extinguishers required for an ordinary hazard occupancy with Class A fire hazards is calculated at one extinguisher for each 1,500 sq. ft. of area. The extinguisher(s) should be of the "All Purpose" (2A, 20B:C) dry chemical type. Travel distance to any fire extinguisher must be 75' or less. (ffC 906.3) (NFPA 10, 3 -2.1) 17: Portable fire extinguishers, not housed in cabinets, shall be installed on the hangers or brackets supplied. Hangers or brackets shall be securely anchored to the mounting surface in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 5 feet (1524 mm) above the floor. Hand -held portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 3.5 feet (1067 mm) above the floor. The clearance between the floor and the bottom of the installed hand -held extinguishers shall not be less than 4 inches (102 mm). (IFC 906.7 and IFC 906.9) 18: Fire extinguishers shall not be obstructed or obscured from view. In rooms or areas in which visual obstruction cannot be completely avoided, means shall be provided to indicate the locations of the extinguishers. (IFC 906.6) 19: Extinguishers shall be located in conspicuous locations where they will be readily accessible and immediately available for use. These locations shall be along normal paths of travel, unless the fire code official determines that the hazard posed indicates the need for placement away from normal paths of travel. (IFC 906.5) 20: Fire extinguishers require monthly and yearly inspections. They must have a tag or label securely attached that indicates the month and year that the inspection was performed and shall identify the company or person performing the service. Every six years stored pressure extinguishers shall be emptied and subjected to the applicable recharge procedures. If the required monthly and yearly inspections of the fire extinguisher(s) are not accomplished or the inspection tag is not completed, a reputable fire extinguisher service company will be required to conduct these required surveys. (NFPA 10, 4 -3, 4 -4) 21: Egress doors shall be readily openable from the egress side without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. (IFC 1008.1.8.3 subsection 2.2) 22: Dead bolts are not allowed on auxiliary exit doors unless the dead bolt is automatically retracted when the door handle is engaged from inside the tenant space. (IFC Chapter 10) 23: Door handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices on doors required to be accessible by Chapter 11 of the International Building Code shall not require tight grasping, tight pinching or twisting of the wrist to operate. (IFC 1008.1.8.1) 24: Exit hardware and marking shall meet the requirements of the International Fire Code. (IFC Chapter 10) 25: Exits and exit access doors shall be marked by an approved exit sign readily visible from any direction of egress travel. Access to exits shall be marked by readily visible exit signs in cases where the exit or the path of egress travel is not immediately visible to the occupants. Exit sign placement shall be such that no point in an exit access corridor is more than 100 feet (30,480 mm) or the listed viewing distance for the sign, whichever is less, from the nearest visible exit sign. (IFC 1011.1) 26: Every exit sign and directional exit sign shall have plainly legible letters not less than 6 inches (152 mm) high with the principal strokes of the letters not less than 0.75 inch (19.1 mm) wide. The word "EXIT" shall have letters having a width not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide except the letter "I ", and the minimum spacing between letters shall not be less than 0.375 inch (9.5 mm). Signs larger than the minimum established in section 1011.5.1 of the International Fire Code shall have letter widths, strokes and spacing in proportion to their height. The word "EXIT" shall be in high contrast with the background and shall be clearly discernible when the exit sign illumination means is or is not energized. If an arrow is provided as part of the exit sign, the construction shall be such that the arrow direction doc: Cond -10/06 D09 -089 Printed: 07 -14 -2009 cannot be readily changed. (IFC 1011.5.1) • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us 27: Exit signs shall be illuminated at all times. To ensure continued illumination for a duration of not less than 90 minutes in case of primary power loss, the sign illumination means shall be connected to an emergency power system provided from storage batteries, unit equipment or on -site generator. (IFC 1006.1, 1006.2, 1006.3) 28: Means of egress, including the exit discharge, shall be illuminated at all times the building space served by the means of egress is occupied. The means of egress illumination level shall not be less than 1 foot - candle (11 lux) at the floor level. The power supply for the means of egress illumination shall normally be provided by the premise's electrical supply. In event of a power failure an emergency power system shall provide power for a duration of not less than 90 minutes and shall consist of storage batteries, unit equipment or on -site generator. (IFC 1006.1, 1006.2, 1006.3) The path of egress shall require emergency lighting until exit discharge is accomplished. 29: Aisles leading to required exits shall be provided from all portions of the building and the required width of the aisles shall be unobstructed. (IFC 1013.4) 30: Maintain sprinkler coverage per N.F.P.A. 13. Addition/relocation of walls, closets or partitions may require relocating and/or adding sprinkler heads. (IFC 901.4) 31: Sprinklers shall be installed under fixed obstructions over 4 feet (1.2 m) wide such as ducts, decks, open grate flooring, cutting tables, shelves and overhead doors. (NFPA 13- 8.6.5.3.3) 32: All new sprinlder systems and all modifications to existing sprinkler systems shall have fire department review and approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. New sprinlder systems and all modifications to sprinkler systems involving more than 50 heads shall have the written approval of the W.S.R.B., Factory Mutual, Industrial Risk Insurers Kemper or any other representative designated and /or recognized by the City of Tukwila, prior to submittal to the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance #2050) 33: A fire alarm system is required for this project. The fire alarm system shall meet the requirements of N.F.P.A. 72 and City Ordinance #2051.(The fire alarm shall be tied to the main mall fire alarm control panel.) 34: Local U.L. central station supervision is required. (City Ordinance #2051) 35: Maintain fire alarm system audible /visual notification. Addition/relocation of walls or partitions may require relocation and/or addition of audible /visual notification devices. (City Ordinance #2051) 36: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #2051) (IFC 104.2) 37: An electrical permit from the City of Tukwila Building Department Permit Center (206- 431 -3670) is required for this project. 38: All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of the National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70) 39: New and existing buildings shall have approved address numbers, building numbers or approved building identification placed in a position that is plainly legible and visible from the street or road fronting the property. These numbers shall contrast with their background. Address numbers shall be Arabic numbers or alphabet letters. Numbers shall be a minimum of 4 inches (102mm) high with a minimum stroke width of 0.5 inch (12.7mm). (IFC 505.1) 40: The maximum flame spread class of finish materials used on interior walls and ceilings shall not exceed that set forth in Table No. 803.5 of the International Building Code. 41: Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (City Ordinances #2050 and #2051) doc: Cond -10/06 D09 -089 Printed: 07 -14 -2009 • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us • 42: Any overlooked hazardous condition and/or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes such condition or violation. 43: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 511. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila (206)575 -4407. * *continued on next page ** doc: Cond -10/06 D09 -089 does not imply approval of Fire Prevention Bureau at Printed: 07 -14 -2009 I hereby certify that I have read these conditions and will comply with them as outlined. All provisions of law and this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provision of any other work construction or the performance of work. Signature: • • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Print Name: 54^1 4 -01411° S doc: Cond -10/06 D09 -089 Date: 7- i 4 . o ordinances governing or local laws regulating Printed: 07 -14 -2009 CITY OF TUKWILA Community Development Department Public Works Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 http: www.ci.tukwila.wa.us t Site Address: k.2 V■A V . Tenant Name: I - `�-- Property Owners Name: te_1(0 Name: -PttrL Jat _Q\ of Mailing Address: 95 " lo6 Sk-- Contact Person: E -Mail Address: Contractor Registration Number: Contact Person: Ub\t"'0 -r E -Mail Address: rj J. C _.'ry\cA \(1J( 0, �tC •CC Company Namer""OzaINTUZX Mailing Address: .1:; UJr_ ( tkUa A Ste-- Contact Person: T -44QQ E -Mail Address: b�u.\ \ \`fN (\e C H:\Applications\rorms- Applications On Line \2009 pplications \I -2009 - Permit Application. doc Revised: 1 -2009 bh Building Permit No. Mechanical Permit No. Plumbing/Gas Perm Public 'Works Perini Project No. or ly) Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. * *Please Print ** SITE LOCATION King Co Assessor's Tax No.: (/ d` 4t a7 tL) Suite Number: CN ' yri/ Floor: New Tenant: Yes l ..No Mailing Address: 1\ O W��S�(\! (� ���. �' -� \ lcx�r -& to CP Q000 `t City State Zip CONTACT PERSON -- who do we c hen your permit: is ready Day Telephone: - o /)l(i �` City �1 State Zip E -Mail Address: CtD- ('CCi -�C W - C- C9r"_ Fax Number: [c- J ? f GENERAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION (Contractor Information for Mechanical (pg 4) for Plumbing and Gas Piping (1 Company Name: Mailing Address: cit Day Telephone: Fax Number: Expiration Date: State Zip CHITECT OF RECORD - Al ns must be wet stamped by Arc are of Record Company Name: }- ACScr■ Mailing Address: \ J? N SCCAk e, t Q.40 • She., 5 .,6 e.. 4Z ..? City State L.f , / Zip Day Telephone: IV0" g - co Fax Number: /--0\ QQ21 ` �� 3 ENGINEER OF RECORD AU plans must be we stamped by Engi er of Recce City tt State Zip Day Telephone: . 2) " 1 Fax Number: 3l (7 - -�2 Page 1 of 6 BUILDING PERMIT INFORMATION -- 206 -431 -3670 Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 6,5 l kr7 Existing Building Valuation: $ Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): ;' '. Cp*t - f-prQ;, , " c1/1 GtitAlAk X 7 f1•1S t'S i. C AV Yt — Di V Litt TAAPP Will there be new rack storage? ❑ Yes Provide All Building Areas in Square Footage Below PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: Compact: Handicap: Will there be a change in use? ❑ Yes ❑ No If "yes ", explain: FIRE PROTECTION /HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: Sprinklers `— Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ None ❑ Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? ❑ Yes ..,....No If `yes', attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8 -1 /2 "x 11" paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM ❑ On -site Septic System — For on -site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. H: \Applications\Forms- Applications On Line\2009 Applications \I -2009 - Permit Application.doc Revised: 1 -2009 bh If yes, a separate permit and plan submittal will be required. Page 2 of 6 Existing ` Interior Addition to Existing Structure New Type of Construction per IBC Type of Occupancy per IBC l' Floor in 4 ~ l , Remodel ‘ i LI Y11C^- n1 c).-- \ _ M. 2 Floor 3' Floor Floors thru Basement Accessory Structure* Attached Garage Detached Garage Attached Carport Detached Carport Covered Deck Uncovered Deck BUILDING PERMIT INFORMATION -- 206 -431 -3670 Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 6,5 l kr7 Existing Building Valuation: $ Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): ;' '. Cp*t - f-prQ;, , " c1/1 GtitAlAk X 7 f1•1S t'S i. C AV Yt — Di V Litt TAAPP Will there be new rack storage? ❑ Yes Provide All Building Areas in Square Footage Below PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: Compact: Handicap: Will there be a change in use? ❑ Yes ❑ No If "yes ", explain: FIRE PROTECTION /HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: Sprinklers `— Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ None ❑ Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? ❑ Yes ..,....No If `yes', attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8 -1 /2 "x 11" paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM ❑ On -site Septic System — For on -site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. H: \Applications\Forms- Applications On Line\2009 Applications \I -2009 - Permit Application.doc Revised: 1 -2009 bh If yes, a separate permit and plan submittal will be required. Page 2 of 6 BUILDING Signature: Print Name: IT�n �l ( �-Q i/Q✓S Mailing Address: riS " (06 Date Application Accepted: ER 0 THORIZED AGENT: H:\Applications\Forms- Applications On Line\2009 Applications \I -2009 - Permit Application.doc Revised: 1 -2009 bh ity PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES — Applicable to all permits in this applica Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. Building and Mechanical Permit The Building Official may grant one or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding 90 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition). Plumbing Permit The Building Official may grant one extension of time for an additional period not exceeding 180 days. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 103.4.3 Uniform Plumbing Code (current edition). I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. Date: J "o) r 7"0 c f' Day Telephone: 02 (4 k.)- S tate Zip Date Application Expires: Staff Initials: Page 6 of 6 Receipt No.: R09 -01123 Payee: HAWK BUILDING ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description PLAN CHECK - NONRES • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Payment Check 70038 60.00 Authorization No. TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount RECEIPT Parcel No.: 6364200010 Permit Number: D09 -089 Address: 973 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW Status: ISSUED Suite No: Applied Date: 05/29/2009 Applicant: T- MOBILE Issue Date: 07/14/2009 Initials: WER Payment Date: 07/20/2009 10:48 AM User ID: 1655 Balance: $0.00 Account Code Current Pmts 000/345.830 60.00 Total: $60.00 Payment Amount: $60.00 PAYMENT REcEIVED doc: Receipt -06 Printed: 07 -20 -2009 Receipt No.: R09 - 01089 Payee: HAWK BUILDING ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description doc: Receiot -06 • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http://www.cLtukwila.wa.us Parcel No.: 6364200010 Permit Number: D09 -089 Address: 973 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW Status: APPROVED Suite No: Applied Date: 05/29/2009 Applicant: T MOBILE Issue Date: Initials: WER Payment Date: 07/14/2009 01:39 PM User ID: 1655 Balance: $0.00 TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount Payment Check 6132 1,357.30 Authorization No. BUILDING - NONRES 000/322.100 STATE BUILDING SURCHARGE 640.237.114 RECEIPT Account Code Current Pmts 1,352.80 4.50 Total: $1,357.30 Payment Amount: $1,357.30 PAYMENT RECEIVE Printed: 07 -14 -2009 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development SET RECEIPT Copy Reprinted on 05 -29 -2009 at 12:37:24 05/29/2009 RECEIPT NO: R09 -00798 Initials: JEM User ID: 1165 Payee: PRECISION PERMIT SERVICE SET TRANSACTIONS: Set Member D09 -089 EL09 -0339 M09 -059 PG09 -048 TOTAL: Amount 879:32 124.50 82.44 39.25 879.32 Payment Date: 05/29/2009 Total Payment: 1,125:51 SET ID: S000001212 SET NAME: Tmp set/Initialized Activities TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Description Amount Payment Check 6808 1,125.51 TOTAL: 1 ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description ELECTRICAL PLAN - NONRES PLAN CHECK = NONRES Account Code Current Pmts 000.345.832.00.0 124.50 000/345.830 1 TOTAL: 1 PAY Jim Haggerton, Mayor Jack Pace, Director ENT ECERIED 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 • Fax: 206 - 431 =3665 COMMENTS: < /earl f c/ L,c,4,- /.Nay— /9ao /AA, Gt z /A/G — .4 Date Called: ?( A1;1 4, //7/6 Special Instructions: Date Wted:� _ Q a.m P.m. Requester: Phone No: y25- 273- /58 Pro'ec / — X /e Type of Inspection: / A/4Z Address: 9 73 .sa)//AePArk. Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wted:� _ Q a.m P.m. Requester: Phone No: y25- 273- /58 •Approved per applicable codes. 5 INSPECTION NO. A ceipt No.: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA °DIVISION - 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 • D Corrections required prior to approval: 5 i z).0-04g5' PERMIT NO. Date: e r, 60.00 REINSPECTION FEEJREQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid,: at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Date: 1.. Project: I — Imo VI I,P Type of Inspection: Si c sfl. .10& d 0.) (.I 3! C Address: q 13 - SrnkroeF+JVf 2 Date Called: 61 o4 Special Instructions: Date Wanted: e - 2-5 - C) „ - . m. Requester: Phone No: yZ5 - 7)/9 Cogs PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION I i III- 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431.3670 COMMENTS: Inspect INSPECTION NO. $6 p INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit proved per applicable codes. El Corrections required prior to approval. x .00 REINSPECTION FEE3tEQUIR . Prior to inspection, fee must be id at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Sui 100. Call to schedule reinspection. ceipt No.: 'Date: Project: T /tea & /r Type oflnspection: i A 2 4 ,4 7iA/ Address: 3 • Sat /h47f.y 1,14 Date Called: / / Special Instructions: Date Wanted: S" / Q — d ..m Requester: Phone No: 4 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit ,LS ION NO. PERMIT NO." CI T7Y OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION p- 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 3670 0 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. •• COMMENTS: p iJ cgs (', 4) 7T Insp-cto eceipt No.: • Date: 0.00 REINSPECTION E REQUII ED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter : lvd., Su' a 100. Call to schedule reinspection. 'Date: /D- Project: ` MO 06 , l Z - Type of Inspection: / Address: Q7_3 /n/9 /( Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: a.m. $: 7_ a E Requester: Phon No: 2 7$ -75 INSPi=CTION O. CITY OF TUK 6300 Southcenter BI Tukwila, 0 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: nspecto 0 REINSPECTION FEE EQUIREQ. Prior to inspection, fee must be pa' at 6300 Southcenter Blv ., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. 60 Ipt No.: INSPECTION RECORD i Retain a copy with permit . -68`i" NO WILA BUILDING DIVISION 0-- Blvd., Tukwila WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 Da 7— Date: v COMMENTS: Type of Inspection: 1;eA.e4. .A../ 6 Ad es ,� 7 t / Called: X49 /S% ' / / ,II 5�, ° a /'6 Date Wanted: 4,4(6 / / 9 / /f' 7 1 7 /, ‘ 14 . - / ?i 1 ;/ . 6 7 /,/ — / '''S I— i0 49 th /el d i l frie /7 ..tea, "7 /5 /Ai _4 ' -i r --..,\ Project: - r roe) 1P Type of Inspection: 1;eA.e4. .A../ 6 Ad es ,� 7 t / Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: Requester: Phone No: ❑ Approved per applicable codes. nspector ❑ $ INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit be F INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)43 1 -3670 Dat& Corrections required prior to approval. 0.9 REINSPECTION FEE R QUIRED. rior to inspection, t e must be id'at 6300 Southcenter Blv. , Suite ' O. Call to schedule reinspection. Project: -.r _7 /)7(A,6,./,- Type of Inspection: F'. ?y„- -1,Av K Address: '7 3 hcs,JI /14 Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: 7 —,3/— 05' � • . Re Phone No: V.2 2 77 -/5 5 j C INSPECTION NO. COMMENTS: Inspector: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit •d4 S 48;7 PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431.3 A/ Date: e�-r•t No.: (Date: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. $ • 3.0E REINSPECT ON FEE • QUIRE . Prior to inspection, fee must be i - t 6300 Southcenter Blvd Suit- 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Project: -7 Type of Inspection: FA/ Sea mg //fits tl >IL Address: q-77 se Suite #: ,A Contact Person: Special Instrucctions: Phone No.: Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: _Permits: Occupancy Type: INSPECTION NUMBER 444 Andover' Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 Approved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: F4 rl� o IL , may' ,: �Pleitiarike t. :the L. t K, Gi{ - D/4, INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT CMS- L bg Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 Inspector: Date: 7. c f_ of etioP PERMIT NUMBERS 206 - 575 -4407 Corrections required prior to approval: F /er @AIAL -oK OR i Wpfit 06 qetleri v�2. Hrs.: / n $80 :00 .REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an Invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection„ T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 /AO Project: - �o$ /L� Type of Ins ection: Y�� Inspection: Address: p..7 SC flM i-t- Suite #: Contact Person: - 7;;; • Lvry -..l Special Instructions: Phone No.: Occupancy Type: Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: . Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: INSPECTION NUMBER • 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206- 575 -4407 n Approved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: Inspector: `i (71JA1( Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT I Date: 9_2. � . Hrs.: PERMIT NUMBERS rrections required prior to approval. $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from e City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. 1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 Project: --r, M oii ) . Sprinklers: Type of Inspection: .5.5r/c- ra/e F; ""4 Address: 9 -i 3 .5 Suite #: M a { I Contact Person: Special Instructions: Pre -Fire: Phone No.: Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: • Hood & D uct: Monitor: /VA_ Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type INSPECTION NUMBER 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206- 575 -4407 FE Approved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT Inspector: Date: 'cc-25-6 `1 Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 a4 l r D PERMIT NUMBERS Corrections required prior to approval. Hrs.: $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. CaII to schedule a reinspection. T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 x MAYES TESTING ENGINEERS, INC. August 27, 2009 City of Tukwila Building Department 6200 South Center Blvd Tukwila, WA 98188 -8188 Attention: Building Official Re: Southcenter Mall Stores #244 & #248 633 Southcenter Boulevard Tukwila, WA Project No. L09235 Gentlemen, This is to inform you that registered special inspections have been completed for this project as per our reports, copies of which have been sent to you. Special inspection was provided for: • Epoxy Grouted Anchors • Expansion Anchors • Structural Steel: Erection Sincerely, Mayes Testing Engineers, Inc. Timothy eckerle, P.E. Branch Manager TGB: anm RECEIVED S1.V 1 4 i009 COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT Final Letter Permit No. D09 - 089 Tacoma Office 10029 S. Tacoma Way Suite E -2 Tacoma, WA 98499 ph 253.584.3720 fax 253.584.3707 Portland Office 7911 NE 33rd Drive Suite 190 Portland, OR 97211 ph 503.281.7515 fax 503.281.7579 To the best of our knowledge, all work inspected was either performed in accordance with, or corrected to conform to, the city approved drawings, or engineer approved changes. We trust that this provides you with the information which you require. Should you have any questions give us a call. Lynnwood Office 20225 Cedar Valley Road Suite 110 Lynnwood, WA 98036 ph 425.742.9360 fax 425.745.1737 MAYES TESTING ENGINEERS, INC. MTE No.: Project: Address: Permit No.: Bldg Dept.: Owner: Architect: Engineer: Contractor: Page 2 Date: Weather: Inspection: Sample(s): Preliminary Inspection REVIEWED BY: L09235 SOUTHCENTER MALL STORES #244 & 248 633 Southcenter Boulevard, Tukwila, WA D 09 -089 City of Tukwila WEA Southcenter LLC Fitch Caruso Turney Scott Hawk Building, Inc. 8/4/09 Overcast Structural steel (visual) N/A CITY RECEIVED T ' B(WIL k AUG 1 U 0009 PERMIT CENTER Lynnwood Office 20225 Cedar Valley Road Suite 110 Lynnwood, WA 98036 ph 425.742.9360 fax 425.745.1737 Tacoma Office 10029 S. Tacoma Way Suite E -2 Tacoma, WA 98499 ph 253.584.3720 fax 253.584.3707 Portland Office 7911 NE 33rd Drive Suite 190 Portland, OR 97211 ph 503.281.7515 fax 503.281.7579 Arrived onsite as requested by the contractor for visual weld inspection. Contacted Ryan with Hawk Building, Inc. via telephone upon site arrival. Ryan informed us that the work has not been completed and he will re- scheduled further inspections. Conducted visual weld inspection of canopy framing at the storefront west half of frame. The east/west horizontal tube steel members were welded to the north /south tube steel members on four sides, except the edge east/west members were welded three sides. Tube steel columns were welded to the horizontal members per details on S1. Base plates have not been welded. The east/west horizontal member directly over columns sets on top of the north /'south members and welded on four sides on the bottom. Welds meet AWS D1.1 criteria for visual acceptance. WABO certification for welder not onsite. INSPECTOR: Mark McBride othy G. Beckerle, P.E. cc: Ryan Adkins — Hawk Building, Inc.; Building Official — City of Tukwila Building Department MAYES TESTING ENGINEERS, INC. MTE No.: Project: Address: Permit No.: Bldg Dept.: Owner: Architect: Engineer: Contractor: Page 1 Date: Weather: Inspection: Sample(s): L09235 SOUTHCENTER MALL STORES #244 & 248 633 Southcenter Boulevard, Tukwila, WA D 09 -089 City of Tukwila WEA Southcenter LLC Fitch Caruso Turney Scott Hawk Building, Inc. 7/30/09 (indoors) Epoxy bolts, expansion anchors N/A w,.© � K LA AUG 10 2009 PERMIT CENTER Lynnwood Office 20225 Cedar Valley Road Suite 110 Lynnwood, WA 98036 ph 425.742.9360 fax 425.745.1737 Tacoma Office 10029 S. Tacoma Way Suite E -2 Tacoma, WA 98499 ph 253.584.3720 fax 253.584.3707 Portland Office 7911 NE 33rd Drive Suite 190 Portland, OR 97211 ph 503.281.7515 fax 503.281.7579 Inspected installation of an expansion anchor inside the third tube steel column, as counted from the south. Anchor is Powers Power -Stud per page S1. Drilling debris was removed from the borehole. The nut was then tightened over the washer and plate steel, to set the wedges. Later, inspected epoxy anchoring of all- thread for the 1st, 2nd, and 4th posts a:; counted from the south. Epoxy is unexpired Simpson SET -XP per page S1. This is per RFI 1 of this date. Embedment was through terrazzo and fill, into sound concrete. To the best of our knowledge, items inspected this date are in accordance with approved plans and specifications. INSPECTOR: Mark Rossow REVIEWED BY: ; / Timothy G. Beckerle, P.E. cc: Ryan Adkin( Hawk Building, Inc.; Building Official — City of Tukwila Building Department 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Ener • Code Com Lightinq Summary 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Enerav Code Camnliance Forms Project Info Compliance Option Alteration Exceptions (check appropriate box - sec. 1132.3) Sales Stock Room Office Corridor Toilet Project Address T- Mobile Southcenter Mall Seattle, Wa 98188 Applicant Name: Don Penn Consulting Engineer Applicant Address: 635 Westport Parkway, Grapevine, TX 76051 Applicant Phone: 817 -410 -2858 Project Description Maximum Allowed Li htin Watts Location (floor /room no.) Sales e I �. /� a COe �� Allowed Occupancy D s � M LI/� \I s per ft " ROWE Office 04 2009 Corridor Toilet Gi () ri gida 1.50 0.80 0.95 0.80 0.80 " From Table 15 -1 (over) - document Proposed Lighting Wattage (Interior) Location (floor /room no.) Sales Sales Sales Sales Cl - 6• Recessed Downlight FF1 - Pendant lighting 5 5 Stock Office Corridor E2 - Fluorescent E2 - Fluorescent 2 1 Toilet Sales E2- Fluorescent AM1 - Recessed Downlight (EXEMPT) 1 9 Sales Fixture Description Number of Fixtures E - Fluorescent 3 EE - Recessed Egress Fixture 3 AM1 - Recessed Downlight 10 f 5 AM2- Recessed Downlight (EXEMPT) Interior Proposed Watts may not exceed Total Allowed Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage (Exterior Location Covered Parking Note: 2006 SEC does not allow trading between covered parking and ext. Itg. Open Parking Outdoor Areas Bldg. (by facade)' Bldg. (by perim) Description Allowed Watts per ft or per If 0.2 W /ft 0.2 W /ft Total Allowed Cove 0.15 W /ft 0.15 W /ft 0.15 W /ft 7.5 W /If 1. Choose either the facade area or the perimeter method, but not both) Proposed Lighting Wattage (Exterior) Date I Location Garage Fixture Description I Number of Fixtures] Iiance Form LTG-SUM For Building Department Use °emu COPY ❑ New Building ❑ Addition l ❑ �� i ■Plans Included See SEC Section 1513 for automatic daylighting, upar s '''o t i gg r j h 'y "t ( �lys ,r 0 Prescriptive 0 Lighting Power Allowance d� OYf <, (See Qualification Checklist (over). Indicate Pres &iptive. &•:Li trspace:; clearly,on,,pl. El No changes are being made to the lighting n %. `:. J c:; •.' ,v 0 Less than 60% of the fixtures new, installed wattage not increased, ti space use not chahged. Allowed x Area 1707 294 108 3 2 72 2213 Ama in ft Total Allowed Interior Watts rm t� 01r(Ist14 maximum input wattage. For hard -wired ballasts only, the default table in the NREC Technical Reference Manual may also be used 2. Include exit lights unless less than 5 watts per fixture. 3. List all fixtures. For exempt lighting, not exception and leave Watts /Fixture blank. Watts Proposed 210 400 200 315 168 112 56 56 1517 Watts/ Fixture 1138.0 367.0 114.0 40.0 90.0 70 40 40 63 56 56 56 56 Total Proposed Interior Watts Area in (or If for perimeter) red Parh:ing Watts Total Allowed B dg. Exterior Watts Revised Dec 2007 5/21/2009 and or Use mfgr listed maximum input wattage. For fixtures with hard -wire' •a asts on y, the default table in the NREC Technical Reference Manual may also be used. WattslFixture I Watts Proposed . 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Ener C ode Garage Proposed Watts may not exceed Allowed Total Proposed Covered Parking Watts Location Fixture Description Number of Fixtures Watts /Fixture Watts Proposed Exterior Proposed Watts may not exceed Allowed Watts Total Proposed Exterior Watts . 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Ener C ode Use' LPA (W /sf) Use' LPA 0.95 (�a--0)) Automotive facility 0.9 Office buildings, office /administrative areas in facilities of other use types (including but not limited to schools, hospitals, institutions, museums, banks, churches) Convention center 1.2 Penitentiary and other Group 1 -3 Occupancies 1.0 Courthouse 1.2 Police and fire stations" 1.0 Cafeterias, fast food establishments', restaurants /bars 1.3 Post office 1.1 Dormitory 1.0 Retail', retail banking, mall concourses, wholesale stores (pallet rack shelving) 1.5 Exercise center 1.0 School buildings (Group E Occupancy only;, school classrooms, day care centers 1.2 Gymnasia'', assembly spaces" 1.0 Theater, motion picture 1.2 Health care clinic 1.0 Theater, performing arts 1.6 Hospital, nursing homes, and other Group 1 -1 and 1 -2 Occupancies 1.2 Transportation 1.0 Hotel /motel 1.0 Warehouses ', storage areas 0.5 Hotel banquet/conference /exhibition hall 2.0 Workshops 1.4 Laboratory spaces (all spaces not classified "laboratory" shall meet office and other appropriate categories) 1.8 Parking garages 0.2 Laundries 1.2 Libraries 1.3 Plans Submitted for Common Areas Onhr' Manufacturing facility 1.3 Main floor building lobbies' (except mall concourses) 1.2 Museum 1.1 Common areas, corridors, toilet facilities and washrooms, elevator lobbies 0.8 Prescriptive Spaces Occupancy: 0 Warehouses, storage areas or aircraft storage hangers 0 Other Q ualification Checklist Note: answer If is occupancy cked type is u "other and resin answer is checked, the number of fixtures in the space is not limited by Code. Clearly indicate these spaces on plans. If not qualified, do LPA Calculations. Lighting Fixtures: (Section 1521) ❑ Check if 95% or more of fixtures comply with 1,2 or 3 and rest are ballasted. 1 . Fluorescent fixtures which are non - lensed with a) 1 or 2 two lamps, b) reflector ) p ) or louvers, c) 5 -60 watt T -1, T -2, T-4, T -5, T -8 lamps, and d) hard -wired elec- tronic dimming ballasts. Screw -in compact fluorescent fixtures do not qualify. 2. Metal Halide with a) reflector b) ceramic MH lamps <= 150w c) electronic ballasts 3. LED lights. 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Ener • Code Com Lighting Summary (back) 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms TABLE 15 -1 Unit Lighting Power Allowance (LPA ootnotes or 1 able 15- liance Form LTG -SUM Revised Dec 2007 1) In cases in which a general use and a specific use are listed, the specific use shall apply. In cases in which a use is not mentioned specifically, the Unit Power Allowance shall be determined by the building official. This determination shall be based upon the most comparable use specified in the table. See Section 1512 for exempt areas. 2) The watts per square foot may be increased, by two percent per foot of ceiling height above twenty feet, unless specifically directed otherwise by subsequent footnotes. 3) Watts per square foot of room may be increased by two percent per foot of ceiling height above twelve feet. 4) For all other spaces, such as seating and common areas, use the Unit Light Power Allowance for assembly. 5) Watts per square foot of room may be increased by two percent per foot of ceiling height above nine feet. 6) Reserved. 7) For conference rooms and offices less than 150ft with full height partitions, a Unit Lighting Power Allowance of 1.10 w /ft may be used. 8) Reserved. 9) For indoor sport tournament courts with adjacent spectator seating over 5,000, the Unit Lighting Power Allowance for the court area is 2.60 W /ft 10) Display window illumination installed within 2 feet of the window, provided that the display window is separated from the retail space by walls or at least three - quarter- height partitions (transparent or opaque). and lighting for free - standing display where the lighting moves with the display are exempt. An additional 1.5 w /ft of merchandise display luminaires are exempt for individual tenant spaces less than 3.000 gross square feet and 1.2 W /ft2 for larger tenant spaces provided that they comply with all three of the following: a) located on ceiling - mounted track or directly on or recessed into the ceiling itself (not on the wall). b) adjustable in both the horizontal and vertical axes (vertical axis only is acceptable for fluorescent and other fixtures with two points of track attachment). c) fitted with LED, tungsten halogen, fluorescent, ceramic metal halide or other high intensity discharge lam ps. This additional lighting power is allowed only if the lighting is actually installed. 11) Provided that a floor plan, indicating rack location and height, is submitted, the square footage for a warehouses may be defined, for computing the interior Unit Lighting Power Allowance, as the floor area not covered by racks plus the vertical Bice area (access side only) of the racks. The height allowance defined in footnote 2 applies only to the floor area not covered by racks. 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Ener . Code Com Lighting Power Allowance Adjustments 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Project Address I Mobile Use this form if you are claiming any ceiling height adjustments for your Lighting Power Allowances for interior lighting. The Occupancy Description should agree with the "Use" listed on Code Table 15 -1. Identify the appropriate Ceiling Height Limit (9 feet, 12 feet or 20 feet) on which the adjustment is based. The Adjusted LPA is calculated from this number and from the Allowed Watts per ft Carry the Adjusted LPA to the corresponding "Allowed Watts per ft location on LTG -SUM. Adjusted Lighting Power Allowances (Interior) Date Location (floor /room no.) Occupancy Description Allowed Watts per ft Ceiling Height for this room ** From Table 15 -1 based on exceptions listed in footnotes liance Form LTG -LPA Ceiling Height limit for this exception" Revised Dec 2007 5/21/2009 Adjusted LPA Watts per ft2 Lighting,, Motor, and Transformer.. Permit Plans Checkli •. t LTG -CHK 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised Dec 2007 Project Address T- Mobile IDatE. 5/21/2009 The following information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the lighting, motor, and transformer requirements in the 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code. Applicability (yes, no, n.a.) Code Section Component Information Required Location on Flans Building Department Notes LIGHTING CONTROLS (Section 1513) yes 1513.1 Local control /access Schedule with type, indicate locations E -2 yes 1513.2 Area controls Maximum limit per switch E -2 n.a. 1513.3 Daylight zone control Schedule with type and features, indicate locations n.a. vertical glazing Indicate vertical glazing on plans n.a. overhead glazing Indicate overhead glazing on plans yes 1513.4 Display /exhib /special Indicate separate controls E -2, E- 8, E -9 1513.5 Exterior shut -off Schedule with type and features, indicate location n.a. (a) timer w /backup Indicate location n.a. (b) photocell. Indicate location 1513.6 Inter. auto shut -off Indicate location n.a. 1513.6.1 (a) occup. sensors Schedule with type and locations n.a. 1513.6.2 (b) auto. switches Schedule with type and features (back -up, override capability); Indicate size of zone on plans n.a. 1513.7 Commissioning Indicate requirements for lighting controls commissioning EXIT SIGNS (Section 1514) yes I 1514 Max. watts 'Indicate watts for each exit sign IE -2 I LIGHTING POWER ALLOWANCE (Section 1530 -1532) n.a. 1530 Lighting Power For incandescent luminaires, provide calculations based on the maximum labeled wattage of the fixture (not the lamp). For track lighting, provide calculations based on 50 W /foot of track or the actual luminaire wattage, whichever is n.a. 1531 Interior Lighting Summary Fomi Completed and attached. Schedule with fixture types, lamps, ballasts, watts per fixture n.a. 1532 Exterior Lighting Summary Form Completed and attached. Schedule with fixture types, lamps, ballasts, watts per fixture MOTORS (Section 1511) n.a. I 1511 IElec motor efficiency IMECH -MOT or Equipment Schedule with hp, rpm, efficiency I I TRANSFORMERS (Section 1540) n.a. I 1540 (Transformers 'Indicate size and efficiency I 1 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form If "no" is circled for any question, provide explanation: 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Ener • Code Com • fiance Form Lighting, Motor, and Transformer Permit Plans Checkli 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Lighting - General Requirements 1513 Lighting Controls: Lighting, including exempt lighting in Section 1512, shall comply with this section. Where occupancy sensors are cited, they shall have the features listed in Section 1513.6.1. Where automatic time switches are cited, they shall have the features listed in Section 1513.6.2. 1513.1 Local Control and Accessibility: Each space, enclosed by walls or ceiling - height partitions, shall be provided with lighting controls located within that space. The lighting controls, whether one or more, shall be capable of tuming off all lights within the space. The controls shall be readily accessible, at the point of entry/exit, to personnel occupying or using the space. EXCEPTIONS: The following lighting controls may be centralized in remote locations: 1. Lighting controls for spaces which must be used as a whole. 2. Automatic controls when provided in addition to manual controls. need not he accessible to the users and may be centralized in a remote location.. 3. Controls requiring trained operators. 4. Controls for safety hazards and security. 1513.2 Area Controls: The maximum lighting power that may be controlled from a single switch or automatic control shall not exceed that which is provided by a 20 ampere circuit loaded to not more than 80 %. A master control may be installed provided the individual switches retain their capability to function independently. Circuit breakers may not be used as the sole means of switching. EXCEPTIONS: 1. Industrial or manufacturing process areas, as may be required for production. 2. Areas less than 5% of the building footprint for footprints over 100,000 ft 1513.3 Daylight Zone Control: Lighting in ((AIl))all daylighted zones, as defined in Chapter 2 (see Exhibits 1513,3a and 1513.3b), both under overhead glazing and adjacent to vertical glazing, shall be provided with controls that comoly with Sections 1513.3.1 and 1513.3.2 (( , )) 1513.3,1 Separate Control: Daylight zones shall have controls which control the lights independent of general area Iightl g. Contiguous daylight zones adjacent to vertical glazing are allowed to be controlled by a single controlling device provided that they do not include zones facing more than two adjacent cardinal orientations (i.e. north, east, south, west). Daylight zones under overhead glazing more than 15 feet from the perimeter shall be controlled separately from daylight zones adjacent to vertical glazing. For daylight zones under overhead glazing that exceed 5.000 square feet. there must be at least two independent photocontrol systems with each system having a dedicated ohotosensor. EXCEPTION: Daylight spaces enclosed by walls or ceiling height partitions and containing 2 or fewer lighting fixtures are not required to have a separate switch for general area lighting. 1513.3.2 Automatic Control: Daylight zones shall have controls which automatically reduce Ilahtina power in response to available daylight by either, a. a combination of dimming ballasts and daylight - sensing automatic controls. which are capable of dimmi g the lights continuously. or I?, a combination of stepped switching and daylight - sensing automatic controls which are capable of incrementally reducing the light level in steps automatically and turning the lights off automatically, j. Single -lamp luminaire systems shall have three levels of automatic control: all lamps on. approximately half of the luminaires tumed off in a relatively uniform ttpa em and then all of the luminaires off. As an alternate. where the daylight zone contains two rows of luminaires and they are parallel to a window. three levels of automatic control may also be achieved by having both rows on. the row closest to the window off and the other row on. and both rows off. For rooms such as small offices. which contain only a single one -lamp luminaire, it is acceptable for the davilahtina control system to automatically switch off the entire luminaire. 11. Two -lamp luminaires shall have three levels of automatic control: both lamps on. one lamo on and one lamo off. and both lamps off. As an alternate where the daylight zone contains two rows of luminaires and they are parallel to window. three levels of automatic control may also be achieved by having both rows on. the row closest to the window off and the other row on. and both rows off, For rooms, such as small offices. which contain only a single two -lamp luminaire, it Is acceptable for the davliahtina control system to automatically switch off the entire luminaire rather than switching off one lamo. then both lamos jii. Three -lamp luminaires shall have four levels of automatic control: all three lamps on. two lamos on and one lamo off. one lamo on and two lamos off. and all three lamps off, jv. For other multi -lamp luminaries with four or more lamps. the number of reauired incremental steps shall be eaual to one plus the number of lamos in the luminaire AmLswitching devices installed to override the automatic daylighting control shall comoly with the criteria in Section 1513.6.2a -e EXCEPTIONS: 1. The following are exemot from the requirements for automatic daylighting controls in Section 1513.3.2 a, retail spaces adlacent to vertical glazing 'retail spaces under overhead glazing are not exempt) b. lighting exempted by Section 1512, and c. display, exhibition, and specialty lighting complying with Section 1513.4, 2, The following spaces are exempt from the reauirements for automatic davlightina controls in Section 1513.3.2 provided that they have occupancy Tensor controls that comply with Section 1513.6.1 1 a. small spaces in the daylight zone that ;ire normally unoccupied (such as a storage room with a window. or restnroms), r. .0 11 . _ -- Revised Dec 20071 c. conference rooms 300 sauare feet and Jarger that have a lighting control system with at least four scene options. 3. HID lamps with automatic controls that are .aoable of reducing the power consumption by at least 50% in lieu of continu tus dimming controls in 1513.3.2 4. 1110 lamos 150 watts or less are exempt frC In the dimming reauirements in 1513.3.2. 1513.4 Display, Exhibition and Specialty Lighting i :ontrols: All display, exhibition or specialty lighting shall be controlled independently of 1leneral area lighting. 1513.5 Automatic Shut -off Controls, Exterior: Lighting for all exterior applications shall have automatic controls capable of turning off er terior lighting when sufficient daylight is available or when the lighting is not require during nighttime hours. Lighting not designated for dusk -to -dawn operation shall be controlled by either. a. A combination of a photosensor and a time swit:h; or b. An astronomical time switch. Lighting designated for dusk -to -dawn operation shall be controlled by an astronomical time switch or photosensor. All time switches shall be capable of retaining programming and the time setting during loss of power for a period i rf at least 10 hours. EXCEPTION: Lighting for covered vehicle entrr:nces or exits from buildings or parking structures where required for safety, security, or eye adaptation. 1513.6 Automatic Shut -Off Controls, Interior: Buildings greater than 5,000 ft and all school classrooms shall be equipped with separate automatic controls to shut off the lighting during unoccupied hours. Within these buildings, all office areas less than 300 ft` enclosed by walls or ceiling - height partitions, and a meeting and conference rooms, and all school classrooms, shall be equipped with occupancy sensors that comply with Section 1513.6.1. For other spaces, automatic control:; may be an occupancy sensor, time switch or other device capable of automatically sl tutting off lighting. EXCEPTIONS: 1. Areas that must be continuously illuminated (e.g., 24 -hour convenience stores), or illuminated in a manner requiring manual operation of the lighting. 2. Emergency lighting systems. 3. Switching for industrial or manufacturing process facilities as may be required for production. 4. Hospitals and laboratory spaces. 5. Areas in which medical or dental tasks are performed are exempt from the occupancy sensor requirement. 1513.6.1 Occupancy Sensors: Occupancy sensors :;hall be capable of automatically turning off all the lights in an area, no more than 30 minutes after the area has been vacated. Light fixtures controlled by occupancy sensors shall have a wall- mounted, manual switch capable of tuming off lights when the space is occupied. EXCEPTION: Occupancy sensors in stairwells are allowed to have two step lighting (high -light and low - light) provided the control fails in the high -light position. 1513.6.2 Automatic Time Switches: Automatic time switches shall have a minimum 7 day clock and be capable of being set for 7 different driy types per week and incorporate an automatic holiday "shutoff" feature, which tums off all loads for at least 24 hours and then resumes normally scheduled operations. Automatic time switches shall also have program back -up capabilities, which prevent the loss of program and time settings for at least 10 hours, if power is interrupted. Automatic time switches shall Incorporate an over -ride switching device which: a. is readily accessible; b. is located so that a person using the device can ser: the lights or the areas controlled by the switch, or so that the area being illuminated is annunciated; c. is manually operated; d. allows the lighting to remain on for no more than 2 hours when an over -ride is initiated; and e. controls an area not exceeding 5,000 ft or 5% of th s building footprint for footprints over 100,000 ft whichever is greater. 1513.7 Commissioning Requirements: For lighting controls which include daylight or occupant sensing automatic controls, automatic shut -&f controls, occupancy sensors, or automatic time switches, the lighting controls shall be fisted to ensure that control devices, components, equipment and systems are calibrated, adjusted and operate in accordance with approved plans and specifications. Suquences of operation shall be functionally tested to ensure they operate in accordancs with approved plans and specifications. A complete report of test procedures and results shall be prepared and filed with the owner. Drawing notes shall require comniissioning in accordance with this paragraph. 1514 Exit Signs: Exit signs shall have an input power demand of 5 Watts or less per sign. Motors - General Requirements 1511 Electric Motors: All permanently wired polyphase motors of 1 hp or more, which are not part of an HVAC system, shall comply with Secdon 1437. EXCEPTIONS: 1. Motors that are an integral part of specialized process equipment. 2. Where the motor is integral to a listed piece of equipment for which no complying motor has been approved. Transformers - General Requirements 1540 Transformers: The minimum efficiency of a low \ oltage dry-type distribution transformer shall be the Class I Efficiency Levels for di: tribution transformers specified in Table 4-2 of the "Guide for Determining Energy Effici ancy for Distribution Transformers' published by the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA TP -1- 2002). 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Ener Lighting Power Allowance Adjustments • 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Project Address I T- Mobile Adjusted Lighting Power Allowances (Interior) Location (floor /room no.) Occupancy Description Allowed Watts per ft Ceiling Height for this room ** From Table 15 -1 based on exceptions listed in footnotes Code Com 'Date liance Form LTG -LPA Use this form if you are claiming any ceiling height adjustments for your Lighting Power Allowances for interior lighting. The Occupancy Description should agree with the "Use" listed on Code Table 15 -1. Identify the appropriate Ceiling Height Limit (9 feet, 12 feet or 20 feet) on which the adjustment is based. The Adjusted LPA is calculated from this number and from the Allowed Watts per ft Carry the Adjusted LPA to the corresponding "Allowed Watts per ft location on LTG -SUM. Ceiling Height limit for this exception** Revised Dec 2007 5/21/2009 Adjusted LPA Watts per & Lighting, Motor, and Transformer Permit Plans Checkli - LTG -CHK 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised Dec 2007 Project Address T- Mobile 'Date, 5/21/2009 The following information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the lighting, motor, and t ansf rmer requirements in the 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code. Applicability (yes, no, n.a.) Code Section Component Information Required Location on Plans Building Department Notes LIGHTING CONTROLS (Section 1513) yes 1513.1 Local controUaccess Schedule with type, indicate locations E -2 yes 1513.2 Area controls Maximum limit per switch E -2 n . a . 1513.3 Daylight zone control Schedule with type and features, indicate locations n. a. vertical glazing Indicate vertical glazing on plans n.a. overhead glazing Indicate overhead glazing on plans yes 1513.4 Display /exhib /special Indicate separate controls E -2 ,E- 8, ]: -9 1513.5 Exterior shut -off Schedule with type and features, indicate location n.a. (a) timer w /backup Indicate location n.a. (b) photocell. Indicate location 1513.6 Inter. auto shut -off Indicate location n.a. 1513.6.1 (a) occup. sensors Schedule with type and locations n.a. 1513.6.2 (b) auto. switches Schedule with type and features (back -up, override capability); Indicate size of zone on plans n.a. 1513.7 Commissioning Indicate requirements for lighting controls commissioning EXIT SIGNS (Section 1514) yes I 1514 IMax. watts 'Indicate watts for each exit sign IE_2 I LIGHTING POWER ALLOWANCE (Section 1530- 1532) n.a. 1530 Lighting Power For incandescent luminaires, provide calculations based on the maximum labeled wattage of the fixture (not the lamp). For track lighting, provide calculations based on 50 W /foot of track or the actual luminaire wattage, whichever is n.a. 1531 Interior Lighting Summary Form Completed and attached. Schedule with fixture types, lamps, ballasts, watts per fixture n. a. 1532 Exterior Lighting Summary Form Completed and attached. Schedule with fixture types, lamps, ballasts, watts per fixture MOTORS (Section 1511) n.a. 1511 IElec motor efficiency'MECH -MOT or Equipment Schedule with hp, rpm, efficiency I ' TRANSFORMERS (Section 1540) n.a. 1540 'Transformers 'Indicate size and efficiency 1 I 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Enemy Code Compliance Form If "no" is circled for any question, provide explanation: 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Ener• Code Com • liance Form Lighting, Motor, and Transformer Permit Plans Checkli 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Lighting - General Requirements 1613 Lighting Controls: Lighting, including exempt lighting in Section 1512, shall comply with this section. Where occupancy sensors are cited, they shall have the features listed in Section 1513.6.1. Where automatic time switches are cited, they shall have the features listed in Section 1513.6.2. 1613.1 Local Control and Accessibility: Each space, enclosed by walls or ceiling - height partitions, shall be provided with lighting controls located within that space. The lighting controls, whether one or more, shall be capable of tuming off all lights within the space. The controls shall be readily accessible, at the point of entry/exit, to personnel occupying or using the space. EXCEPTIONS: The following lighting controls may be centralized in remote locations: 1. Lighting controls for spaces which must be used as a whole. 2. Automatic controls, when provided in addition to manual controls. need not be accessible to the users and may be centralized in a remote location.. 3. Controls requiring trained operators. 4. Controls for safety hazards and security. 1613.2 Area Controls: The maximum lighting power that may be controlled from a single switch or automatic control shall not exceed that which is provided by a 20 ampere circuit loaded to not more than 80 %. A master control may be installed provided the individual switches retain their capability to function independently. Circuit breakers may not be used as the sole means of switching. EXCEPTIONS: 1. Industrial or manufacturing process areas, as may be required for production. 2. Areas less than 5% of the building footprint for footprints over 100,000 ft 1513.3 Daylight Zone Control: Lighting in ((AII))all daylighted zones, as defined in Chapter 2 (see Exhibits 1513.3a and 1513.3b) both under overhead glazing and adjacent to vertical glazing, shall be provided with controls that comply with Sections 1513.3.1 and 1513.3.2 ((' )) 1613.3.1 Separate Control: Daylight zones shall have controls which control the lights independent of general area lighting. Contiguous daylight zones adjacent to vertical glazing are allowed to be controlled by a single controlling device provided that they do not include zones facing more than two adjacent cardinal orientations (i.e. north, east, south, west). Daylight zones under overhead glazing more than 15 feet from the perimeter shall be controlled separately from daylight zones adjacent to vertical glazing. For daylight zones under overhead glazing that exceed 5.000 square feet, there must be at least two independent photocontrol systems with each system having a dedicated photosensor. EXCEPTION: Daylight spaces enclosed by walls or ceiling height partitions and containing 2 or fewer lighting fixtures are not required to have a separate switch for general area lighting. 1613.3.2 Automatic Control: Daylight zones shall have controls which automatically reduce lighting power in response to available daylight by either a. a combination of dimming ballasts and daylight- sensing automatic controls. which are capable of dimming the lights continuously. or J. a combination of stepped switching and daylight- sensing automatic controls which are capable of incrementally reducing the light level in steps automatically and tuming the lights off automatically. i. Single -lamp luminaire systems shall have three levels of automatic control: all lamps on, approximately half of the luminaires tumed off in a relatively uniform pattern. and then all of the luminaires off. As an altemate. where the daylight zone contains two rows of luminaires and they are parallel to a window, three levels of automatic control may also be achieved by having both rows on, the row closest to the window off and the other row on, and both rows off. For rooms such as small offices. which contain only a single one -lamp luminaire. it is acceptable for the davlightinq control system to automatically switch off the entire luminaire ii. Two-lamp luminaires shall have three levels of automatic control: both lamps on. one lamp on and one lamp off. and both lamps off. As an alternate where the daylight zone contains two rows of luminaires and they are parallel to a window. three levels of automatic control may also be achieved by having both rows on. the row closest to the window off and the other row on. and both rows off. For rooms, such as small offices. which contain only a single two -lamp luminaire, it is acceptable for the dayliahtinq control system to automatically switch off the entire luminaire rather than switching off one lamp. then both lamps. iii. Three -lamp luminaires shall have four levels of automatic control: all three lamps on. two lamps on and one lamp off. one lamp on and two lamps off, and all three lamps off. iv. For other multi -lamp luminaries with four or more lamps, the number of required incremental steps shall be equal to one plus the number of lamps in the luminaire . Any switching devices installed to override the automatic davlighting control shall comply with the criteria in Section 1513.6.2a -e. EXCEPTIONS: 1. The following are exempt from the requirements for automatic davlightinq controls in Section 1513.3.2: a. retail spaces adiacent to vertical glazing (retail spaces under overhead glazing are not exempt) b. lighting exempted by Section 1512. and c. display, exhibition, and specialty lighting complying with Section 1513.4. 2. The following spaces are exempt from the requirements for automatic davlightina controls in Section 1513.3.2 provided that they have occupancy sensor controls that comply with Section 1513.6,1: 1 Revised Dec 2007 a. small spaces in the daylight zone that are normally unoccupied (such as a storage room with a window, or restrooms), b, rooms less than 300 square feet, and c. conference rooms 300 square feet an I larger that have a lighting control system with at least four scene option a. 3. HID lamps with automatic controls that area capable of reducing the power consumption by at least 50% in lieu of contimious dimming controls in 1513.3.2 4. HID lamps 150 watts or less are exempt from the dimming requirements in 1513.3.2. 1613.4 Display, Exhibition and Specialty Lighting Controls: All display, exhibition or specialty lighting shall be controlled independently 01' general area lighting. 1613.6 Automatic Shut-off Controls, Exterior: Lighting for all exterior applications shall have automatic controls capable of tuming off exterior lighting when sufficient daylight is available or when the lighting is not required during nighttime hours. Lighting not designated for dusk -to -dawn operation shall be controlled by either. a. A combination of a photosensor and a time switch; or b. An astronomical time switch. Lighting designated for dusk -to -dawn operation shall be controlled by an astronomical time switch or photosensor. All time switches shall bir capable of retaining programming and the time setting during loss of power for a period of at least 10 hours. EXCEPTION: Lighting for covered vehicle entrances or exits from buildings or parking structures where required for safety, security, or eye adaptation. 1613.6 Automatic Shut -Off Controls, Interior: Buildings greater than 5,000 ft and all school classrooms shall be equipped with separate automatic controls to shut off the lighting during unoccupied hours. Within these buildings, all office areas less than 300 fe enclosed by walls or ceiling- height partitions, and all meeting and conference rooms, and all school classrooms, shall be equipped with occupancy sensors that comply with Section 1513.6.1. For other spaces, automatic contras may be an occupancy sensor, time switch or other device capable of automatically :;hutting off lighting. EXCEPTIONS: 1. Areas that must be continuously illuminated (e.g., 24 -hour convenience stores), or illuminated in a manner requiring manual operation of the lighting. 2. Emergency lighting systems. 3. Switching for industrial or manufactunng process facilities as may be required for production. 4. Hospitals and laboratory spaces. 5. Areas in which medical or dental tasks ale performed are exempt from the occupancy sensor requirement. 1613.6.1 Occupancy Sensors: Occupancy sensor shall be capable of automatically tuming off all the lights in an area, no more than 30 niinutes after the area has been vacated. Light fixtures controlled by occupancy sensors shall have a wall- mounted, manual switch capable of tuming off lights when the apace is occupied. EXCEPTION: Occupancy sensors in stairwells are allowed to have two step lighting (high -light and low - light) provided the amtrol fails in the high-light position. 1613.6.2 Automatic Time Switches: Automatic time switches shall have a minimum 7 day dock and be capable of being set for 7 different I lay types per week and incorporate an automatic holiday "shut -off" feature, which tums o f all loads for at least 24 hours and then resumes normally scheduled operations. Automatic time switches shall also have program back -up capabilities, which prevent the loss of program and time settings for at least 10 hours, if power is interrupted. Automatic time switches shall incorporate an over-ride switching device which: a. is readily accessible; b. is located so that a person using the device can s:e the lights or the areas controlled by the swatch, or so that the area being illuminated is annunciated; c. is manually operated; d. allows the lighting to remain on for no more than i hours when an over -ride is initiated; and e. controls an area not exceeding 5,000 ft or 5% of the building footprint for footprints over 100,000 ft whichever is greater. 1513.7 Commissioning Requirements: For lightingi controls which include daylight or occupant sensing automatic controls, automatic shutoff controls, occupancy sensors, or automatic time switches, the lighting controls shall be tested to ensure that control devices, components, equipment and systems are calibrated, adjusted and operate in accordance with approved plans and specifications. Sequences of operation shall be functionally tested to ensure they operate in accordance with approved plans and specifications. A complete report of test procedures nand results shall be prepared and filed with the owner. Drawing notes shall require commissioning in accordance with this paragraph. 1614 Exit Signs: Exit signs shall have an input power demand of 5 Watts or less per sign. Motors - General Requirements 1511 Electric Motors: All permanently wired polyphase motors of 1 hp or more, which are not part of an HVAC system, shall comply with Section 1437. EXCEPTIONS: 1. Motors that are an integral part of specialized process equipment. 2. Where the motor is integral to a listed paene of equipment for which no complying motor has been approved. Transformers - General Requirements 1540 Transformers: The minimum efficiency of a low voltage dry-type distribution transformer shall be the Class I Efficiency Levels for distribution transformers specified in Table 4 -2 of the "Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers" published by the National Electncal Ma nufacturers Association (NEMA TP -1- 2002). w _ Compliance Option 0 Prescriptive Path 0 Systems Analysis Seattle no longer has a separate simple system path. See reverse for economizer flowchart. Equipment Schedules The following information is required to be incorporated with the mechanical equipment schedules on the plans. For projects without plans, fill in the required information below. Cooling Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Brand Name' Model No. Capacity Btu/h Total CFM OSA CFM or Econo? SEER or EER R 0' D . i = � AHD -1 YORK MA MA62 COIL 60000 2000 465 13 4,, i,, JUN p, 'i �.. Heating Equipment Schedule �I r _' - II Equip. ID Brand Name' Model No. Capacity Btu/h Total CFM OSA cfm or Econo? Input Btuh Output Btuh ' Ii�4^ Efficiencif CU -i YORK TCGD60 61434 2000 465 Fan Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Brand Name' Model No.' CFM SP HP /BHP Flow Control'' Location ii ,i4 k . El r l . 1 EF -1 Greenheck GB -071 -6 150 0.13 0.17 EP-2 Greenheck GB -071 -6 100 0.13 0.17 Telcom Room rl4r i 2• 11 _ I PIIIIIIIINg vo ,,,„,,,,,,,, ■ � ///1111 :Mech anical Summary er • Code Com • 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Project Info T- Mobile 2006 Seattle Nonresidential E • ❑ Includes Plans Project Address Southcenter Mall . scant Na e•• �y t � � c �`�� � j ' ,Don Penn Consulting Engineer It NOe � ��� tg'"O (d'j( S �•'t' 7 835 Westport Parkway, Grapevine, TX 76051 p ® Ja, �S sub ��� applicant' Phone: 817- 410 -2858 'r • sc riptio n . CV r B i efl y describe mechanical system type and features. Seattle, WA 98188 York Split System w/ elec. heating. .1 Include documentation requiring compliance with commissioning requirements, Sectlo Hance Form MECH =SUM If available. 2 As tested according to Table 14-IA through 14-1 G. 3 If required. ° COP, HSPF, Combustion Efficiency, or AFUE, as applicable. 5 Flow control types: variable air volume(VAV), constant volume (CV), or variable speed (VS). Revised Dec 2007 Date 5/21/2009 For Building Dept. Use 009 2006 Seattle Nonresidential E Econornizer Summary 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Economizer Summary Check box(es) for exceptions being claimed. List the system /equipment that qualifies for each exception. See Section 1433 for full description of Economizer requirements. Decision Flowchart caption . Cooling 75% Site R or Sol nit Ca <33,000 Btuh ER 15% Over Code g. Ca /o economize <72,000 Btuh o 5 %? ception •. edicated Server r Eq R LV 10 o ver Co ception . Special OA • ration Ne erved b 14 -1A or 14-1B quipme ptio Served by 14 -1C, K,L hill Air Cooled PLV 5 °0 ver Co ptio ehumidificatio with supportin an xception 9a. ER 15% Ove od Waterside Economizer ptio SHRAE 12 ipment Pass' 4 -1 xception Ei EER 5% Over Code . ptio eat Pump Loo • Yes Meeting All riteri stage! etter pact loa r cap >85,00 Btu h? V No Does Not Comply Yes ❑ Full Air Econo ? ❑ Ex 1: ❑ Ex 2: ❑ Ex 4: ❑ Ex 5: ❑ Ex 6: 1] Ex 7: ❑ Ex 8: ❑ Ex 9a: C] Ex 9b: ❑ Ex 9c: ❑ Ex 9d: [] Use this flowchart to determine if project complies with Economizer requirements. If not, the Systems Analysis Option must be used. Yes Yes No ( Reference Section 1433 Yes Yes No ER Yes Hance Form MECH -SUM Fltll Air Economizer - Complies Qualifies for Full Air Economizer Exception - Complies Revised Dec 2007 Project Address T- Mobile Date 1 5/21/2009 The following additional information is necessary to check a mechanical permit application for a complex mechanical system for compliance with the mechanical requirements in the Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code. Use the checklist as a reference for notes added to the mechanical drawings (see the MECH -CHK checklist for additional system requirements). This information must be on the plans since this is the official record of the permit. Having this information in separate specifications alone is NOT an acceptable alternative. For Building Department Use Applicability (yes, no, n.a.) Code Section Component Information Required Location on Plans Building Department Notes ADDITIONAL CHECKLIST ITEMS FOR COMPLEX SYSTEMS ONLY 1431.1 Field assem. sys. Provide calculations 1431.2 System Sizing Provide design heating and cooling load calculations 1432.1 Setback & shut -off Indicate separate systems or show isolation devices on plans 1432.2.1 Air system reset Indicate automatic reset 1432.2.2 Hydronic System Indicate automatic reset, cooling tower, & heat pump loop valves 1433 Air Economizer Indicate economizer on equipment schedule or specify exception claimed and provide calculations to justify qualification 1434 Separate air sys. Indicate separate systems on plans 1435 Simul. htg. & clg. Indicate that simultaneous heating and cooling is prohibited, unless use of exception is justified 1436 Heat recovery Indicate heat recovery on plans; complete and attach heat recovery calculations 1437 Elec. motor effic. MECH -MOT or Equip. Schedule with hp, rpm, efficiency 1438 All fans and pumps Indicate variable speed drive on fan and pump schedules 1439.1 Kitchen Hoods Indicate uncooled and unheated make -up air 1439.2 Fume Hoods Indicate VAV, unheated /uncooled or heat rec. makeup 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Ener MECH -COMP, 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms no is circled for any question, provide explanation: Decision Flowchart Start Here • Section 1411.1 Equipment Efficiency Shall Meet Tables 14-1A through 14-1G as/Oil Fuma input > 225,000 tuh or Gas/O' ' Heat Air System Serving Multiple Zones? opacity of H Heating System > 0,000 Btuh Section 1432.2.2 Hot Water Supply Temperature Reset Required Yes • 1411.1 Intermittent Ignition Device & Power Venting or Damper. If input 225,000 Btuh then 1412.6 Modulating or Staged Combustion Controls Required Use this flowchart to determine how the requirements of the Complex Systems Option apply to the project. Refer to the indicated Code sections for more complete information on the requirements. Yes 1411.1 0.75% Maximum Jacket Loss Yes Section 1431.1 Calculations of Total On -Site Energy Input & Ouput Required (continued on back) Code Com • Hance Form Yes Section 1432.2.1 Supply Air Reset Controls Required Revised Dec 2007 Yes No 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Ener• Code Com Mechanical - Co; mp lex.Sys,tems,(back) , ' 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms ly Air and ,000 cfm & OSA 0,000 cfm & OS 0 cfm & otor Incl. in Eqpmt. Coved by Tbl 14 -1 A -14- 1G7 Section 1436 50% Effective Heat Recovery Required S Yes Yes No DONE SA % Yea 0% A >30% Multi -speed Motor in Multi - eed system? ystem or Zone w/ Simultaneous tg. & Clg. i Yes Section 1438 Variable Flow Devices Required Yes • Section 1435 Zone Controls Must Reduce Supply Air Quantity Before Reheating /Recooling Section 1439.1 No Heating or Cooling for at Least 50% of Make -up Air Section 1437 Motors Must Meet Efficiencies in Table 14-4 Yes Section 1439.2 One Required: a. 50% VAV Exhaust & Make -up b. 75% Direct Makeup wl Tempering Only c. Heat Recovery per 1436 d. Constant Volume w/ < 50fpm Face Velocity Yes Iiance Form ME -COMP Revised Dec 2007 Complete the following for all design A & 8 squirrel -cage, T -frame induction permanently wired polyphase motors from 1 hp to 200 hp having synchronous speeds of 3600, 1800 or 1200 rpm (unless one of the exceptions below applies). For Building Department Use Motor No. or Location HP Type (open /closed) Description of Application or Use Syrich. Spaced Min.Nom. Full load Efficiency Minimum Nominal Full -Load Efficiency Open Motors Closed Motors Exceptions: 1. Motors in systems designed to use more than one speed of a niulti-speed motor. 2. Motors already included in the efficiency requirements for HVAC equipment (Tables 14- 1A or 14-1B) 3. Motors that are an integral part (i.e. not easily removed and re placed) of specialized process equipment (i.o. equipment which requires a special molor, such as an explosion - proof motor). 4. Motors integral to a listed piece of equipment for which no qualifying motor has been approved (i.e. if C:he only U.L. listing for the equipment is with a leas-efficient motor and there is no energy -effigy :lent motor option). For motors claiming an exception, list motor and note which exception applies. Synchronous Speed (RPM) 3,600 I 1,800 1 1,200 3,600 1 1,800 1 1,200 HP Efficiency ( %) Efficiency ( %) 1.0 - 82.5 80.0 75.5 82.5 80.0 1.5 82.5 84.0 84.0 82.5 84.0 85.5 2.0 84.0 84.0 85.5 84.0 84.0 86.5 3.0 84.0 86.5 86.5 85.5 87.5 87.5 5.0 85.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 7.5 87.5 88.5 88.5 88.5 89.5 89.5 10 88.5 89.5 90.2 89.5 89.5 89.5 15 89.5 91.0 90.2 90.2 91.0 90.2 20 90.2 91.0 91.0 90.2 91.0 90.2 25 91.0 91.7 91.7 91.0 92.4 91.7 30 91.0 92.4 92.4 91.0 92.4 91.7 40 91.7 93.0 93.0 91.7 93.0 93.0 50 92.4 93.0 93.0 92.4 93.0 93.0 60 93.0 93.6 93.6 93.0 93.6 93.6 75 93.0 94.1 93.6 93.0 94.1 93.6 100 93.0 94.1 94.1 93.6 94.5 94.1 125 93.6 94.5 94.1 94.5 94.5 94.1 150 93.6 95.0 94.5 94.5 95.0 95.0 200 94.5 95.0 94.5 95.0 95.0 95.0 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Ener • Code Com • Hance Form 'Electric Motors 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Project Address T- Mobile Date Dec 2007 5/21/2009 The following information is necessary to check a mechanical permit application for compliance with the mechanical requirements in the 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code. Applicability (yes, no, n.a.) Code Section Component Information Required Location on Plans Building Department Notes HVAC REQUIREMENTS (Sections 1401 -1424) 1411 Equipment performance n.a 1411.4 Pkg. elec. htg.& clg. List heat pumps on schedule yes. 1411.1 Minimum efficiency Equipment schedule with type, capacity, efficiency M n.a. 1411.1 Combustion htg. Indicate intermittent ignition, flue /draft damper & jacket loss 1412 HVAC controls yes 1412.1 Temperature zones Indicate locations on plans 14-1 a .a . 1412.2 Deadband control Indicate 5 degree deadband minimum n.a. 1412.3 Humidity control Indicate humidistat n.a. 1412.4 Automatic setback Indicate thermostat with night setback and 7 diff. day types yes 1412.4.1 Dampers Indicate damper location and auto. controls & max. leakage M - 1 yes 1412.4.2 Optimum Start Indicate optimum start controls M - 1 n.a. 1412.5 Heat pump control Indicate microprocessor on thermostat schedule n.a. 1412.6 Combustion htg. Indicate modulating or staged control n.a. 1412.7 Balancing Indicate balancing features on plans 1412.8 Ventilation Control Indicate demand control ventilation for high- occupancy areas M -1 1413 Economizers n.a. 1413.1 Air Econo Operation Indicate 100% capability on schedule n.a. 1413.1 Wtr Econo Operation Indicate 100% capacity at 45 degF db & 40 deg F wb n.a. 1413.2 Water Econo Doc Indicate clg load & water econo & clg tower performance n.a. 1413.3 Integrated operation Indicate capability for partial cooling n.a 1413.4 Humidification Indicate direct evap or fog atomization w/ air economizer 1414 Ducting systems yes 1414.1 Duct sealing Indicate sealing necessary M -1 yea 1414.2 Duct insulation Indicate R -value of insulation on duct M -1 n.a. 1415.1 Piping insulation Indicate R -value of insulation on piping - 1416 Completion Requirements a.a. 1416.2.1 Commissioning Provide commissioning plan yes 1416.2.2 -3 Sys.Bal & Func.Test Indicate air and water system balancing & functional testing IM -1 n.a. 1416.2.4 Commissioning Indicate O &M manuals, record drawings, staff training n.a. 1416.2.5 Comm. Report Indicate requirements for prelim. & final commissioning report n.a. 1434 Separate air sys. Indicate separate systems on plans I n.a. Mechanical Completed and attached. Equipment schedule with types, Summary Form l input/output, efficiency, cfm, hp, economizer SERVICE WATER HEATING AND HEATED POOLS (Sections 1440 -1454) 1440 Service water htg. yes 1441 Elec. water heater Indicate R -10 insulation under tank 1)-1 n.a. 1442 Shut -off controls Indicate automatic shut -off n.a. 1443 Pipe Insulation Indicate R -value of insulation on piping n.a. 1452 Heat Pump COP Indicate minimum COP of 4.0 n.a. 1452 Heater Efficiency Indicate pool heater efficiency n.a. 1453 Pool heater controls Indicate switch and 65 degree control n.a. 1454 Pool covers Indicate vapor retardant cover n.a. 1454 Pools 90+ degrees Indicate R -12 pool cover, and R -12 sides and bottom 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Ener• Code Com•liance Form 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Project Address T- Mobile If "no" is circled for any question, provide explanation: I Date 5/21 /2009 2006 Seattle Nonresidential apical Permit Plans Checklist's 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms 1411 HVAC Equipment Performance Requirements 1411.1 General: Equipment shall have a minimum performance at the specified rating conditions not less than the values shown in Tables 14 -IA through 14-1G. If a nationally recognized certification program exists for a product covered in Tables 14 -1A through 14 -1G, and it includes provisions for verification and challenge of equipment efficiency ratings, then the product shall be listed in the certification program. l If equipment is subiect to an ARI Standard. it shall be listed in the ARI certification program. EXCEPTION: Water - cooled centrifugal water - chilling packages that are not designed for operation at ARI Standard 550/590 test conditions of 44 °F leaving chilled water temperature and 85 °F entering condenser water temperature with 3 gpm/ton condenser water flow shall have a minimum NPLV rating as shown in Tables 14 -1K, L. and M. The table values are only specified for the following full load design ranges: Leaving Chiller Water Temp.: 40 to 48 °F Entering Condenser Water Temp.: 75 to 85 °F Condensing Water Temp. Rise: 5 to 15 °F Glycol percent 0% Chillers designed to operate outside of these ranges shall have a code compliant selection at the nearest table operating point based on an all -water system. Non - standard Part Load Value (NPLV) is defined as single number part -load efficiency figure of merit for chillers references to conditions other than IPLV conditions. Design condenser water flow rate shall not be less than 2.5 gpm /ton. Equipment not listed in Tables 14 -1A to 14-1G is allowed to be used. Gas -fired and oil -fired forced air furnaces with input ratings Z 225,000 Btu/h (65 kW) and all unit heaters shall also have an intermittent ignition or interrupted device (llD), and have either mechanical draft (including power venting) or a flue damper. A vent damper is an acceptable alternative to a flue damper for furnaces where combustion air is drawn from the conditioned space. All furnaces with input ratings >_ 225.000 Btu/h (65 kW), including electric fumaces, that are not located within the conditioned space shall have jacket losses not exceeding 0.75% of the input rating. Electric furnaces over 15kW shall have a minimum of two stages of control for heating. Cooling towers serving chilled water systems with airside economizer complying with Section 1433 without using the exceptions shall be selected to be able to maintain a return condenser water temperature to the tower of 86 °F or less at peak design conditions. Hydronic heat pump and other cooling and refrigeration equipment (e.g. icemakers. walk -in coolers) shall not use domestic water only one time before dumping it to waste (no single pass water cooling systems are allowed). The only exceptions are: medical and dental equipment; equipment using less than 1 gpm: replacement of existing icemakers: or use of single pass cooling during power outages and other emergencies. 1411.2 Rating Conditions: Cooling equipment shall be rated at ARI test conditions and procedures when available. Where no applicable procedures exist, data shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer. If equipment is rated in accordance with an ARI Standard, it shall be rated at Standard (not "design ") ARI Rating Conditions. 1411.3 Combination Space and Service Water Heating: For combination space and service water heaters with a principal function of providing space heat, the Combined Annual Efficiency (CAE) may be calculated by using ASHRAE Standard 124 -1991. Storage water heaters used in combination space heat and water heat applications shall have Iliance Form Revised Dec 2007 either an Energy Factor (EF) or a Combined Annual Efficiency (CAE) of not less than the following: 1411.4 Packaged and Split System Electric Heating and Cooling Equipment: Packaged and split sy:.tem electric equipment providing both heating and cooling with a total cooling capacity greater than 20,000 Btu/h shall be a heat pump. EXCEPTION: Unstaffed , ;quipment shelters or cabinets used solely for personal wireless service facilities. 1411.5 Heating Systems in Unencl'osed Spaces. Where heating is provided to unenclosed spaces. only radiant heating systems shall be used unless otherwise approved by the building official The heating system shall be controlled by an occupancy sensor. An unenclosed space is one that is not substantially surrounded by solid surfaces such as walls. floors, roofs. and openable devices such as doors and operable windows. Warehouses and repair garages are considered enclosed spaces. 1412 Controls 1412.1 Temperature Controls: Each system shall be provided with at least one temperature control device. Each zone shall be controlled by individual thermostatic controls responding to temperature within the zone. At a minimum, each floor of a building shall be considered as a separate zone. 1412.2 Deadband Controls: When used to control both comfort heating and cooling, zone thermostatic controls shall be capable of a deadband of at least 5 °F within which the supply of heating and cooling energy to the zone is shut off or reduced to a minimum. EXCEPTIONS: 1. Special occupancy. special usage or code requirements where deadband controls are not appropriate. 2. Thermostats that require manual changeover between heating and cooling modes. 1412.3 Humidity Controls: If a system is equipped with a means for adding moisture, a humidistat shall b: provided. 1412.4 Setback and Shut -Off: HVAC systems shall be equipped with automatic controls capable of accomplishing a reduction of energy use through control setback or equipment shutdown during periods of non -use or alternate use of the spaces served by the system. The automatic controls shall: a. Have a minimum seven -day clo :k and be capable of being set for seven different day types per week, b. Be capable of retaining programming and time settings during loss of power for a period of at least ten hours, and c. Include an accessible manual override, or equivalent function (e.g., telephone interface), that allows temporary operation of the system for up to two hours. EXCEPTIONS: 1. System: serving areas which require continuous operation at the same: temperature setpoint. 2. Equipment with full load domands of 2 kW (6,826 Btu/h) or less may be controlled by readily accessible manual off -hour controls. 3. Systems controlled by an ol:cupant sensor that is capable of shutting the system off when no occupant is sensed for a period of up to 30 minutes. 4. Systems controlled solely by a manually operated timer capable of operating the system for no more than two hours. 1412.4.1 Dampers: Outside air intakes, exhaust outlets and relief outlets serving conditioned spaces shall be equipped with motorized dampers which close automatically when the system is off or upon power failure. Energy Factor (EF) Combined Annual Efficiency (CAE) < 50 gallon storage 0.58 0.71 50 to 70 gallon storage 0.57 0.71 a> 70 gallon storage 0.55 0.70 2006 Seattle Nonresidential apical Permit Plans Checklist's 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms 1411 HVAC Equipment Performance Requirements 1411.1 General: Equipment shall have a minimum performance at the specified rating conditions not less than the values shown in Tables 14 -IA through 14-1G. If a nationally recognized certification program exists for a product covered in Tables 14 -1A through 14 -1G, and it includes provisions for verification and challenge of equipment efficiency ratings, then the product shall be listed in the certification program. l If equipment is subiect to an ARI Standard. it shall be listed in the ARI certification program. EXCEPTION: Water - cooled centrifugal water - chilling packages that are not designed for operation at ARI Standard 550/590 test conditions of 44 °F leaving chilled water temperature and 85 °F entering condenser water temperature with 3 gpm/ton condenser water flow shall have a minimum NPLV rating as shown in Tables 14 -1K, L. and M. The table values are only specified for the following full load design ranges: Leaving Chiller Water Temp.: 40 to 48 °F Entering Condenser Water Temp.: 75 to 85 °F Condensing Water Temp. Rise: 5 to 15 °F Glycol percent 0% Chillers designed to operate outside of these ranges shall have a code compliant selection at the nearest table operating point based on an all -water system. Non - standard Part Load Value (NPLV) is defined as single number part -load efficiency figure of merit for chillers references to conditions other than IPLV conditions. Design condenser water flow rate shall not be less than 2.5 gpm /ton. Equipment not listed in Tables 14 -1A to 14-1G is allowed to be used. Gas -fired and oil -fired forced air furnaces with input ratings Z 225,000 Btu/h (65 kW) and all unit heaters shall also have an intermittent ignition or interrupted device (llD), and have either mechanical draft (including power venting) or a flue damper. A vent damper is an acceptable alternative to a flue damper for furnaces where combustion air is drawn from the conditioned space. All furnaces with input ratings >_ 225.000 Btu/h (65 kW), including electric fumaces, that are not located within the conditioned space shall have jacket losses not exceeding 0.75% of the input rating. Electric furnaces over 15kW shall have a minimum of two stages of control for heating. Cooling towers serving chilled water systems with airside economizer complying with Section 1433 without using the exceptions shall be selected to be able to maintain a return condenser water temperature to the tower of 86 °F or less at peak design conditions. Hydronic heat pump and other cooling and refrigeration equipment (e.g. icemakers. walk -in coolers) shall not use domestic water only one time before dumping it to waste (no single pass water cooling systems are allowed). The only exceptions are: medical and dental equipment; equipment using less than 1 gpm: replacement of existing icemakers: or use of single pass cooling during power outages and other emergencies. 1411.2 Rating Conditions: Cooling equipment shall be rated at ARI test conditions and procedures when available. Where no applicable procedures exist, data shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer. If equipment is rated in accordance with an ARI Standard, it shall be rated at Standard (not "design ") ARI Rating Conditions. 1411.3 Combination Space and Service Water Heating: For combination space and service water heaters with a principal function of providing space heat, the Combined Annual Efficiency (CAE) may be calculated by using ASHRAE Standard 124 -1991. Storage water heaters used in combination space heat and water heat applications shall have Iliance Form Revised Dec 2007 either an Energy Factor (EF) or a Combined Annual Efficiency (CAE) of not less than the following: 1411.4 Packaged and Split System Electric Heating and Cooling Equipment: Packaged and split sy:.tem electric equipment providing both heating and cooling with a total cooling capacity greater than 20,000 Btu/h shall be a heat pump. EXCEPTION: Unstaffed , ;quipment shelters or cabinets used solely for personal wireless service facilities. 1411.5 Heating Systems in Unencl'osed Spaces. Where heating is provided to unenclosed spaces. only radiant heating systems shall be used unless otherwise approved by the building official The heating system shall be controlled by an occupancy sensor. An unenclosed space is one that is not substantially surrounded by solid surfaces such as walls. floors, roofs. and openable devices such as doors and operable windows. Warehouses and repair garages are considered enclosed spaces. 1412 Controls 1412.1 Temperature Controls: Each system shall be provided with at least one temperature control device. Each zone shall be controlled by individual thermostatic controls responding to temperature within the zone. At a minimum, each floor of a building shall be considered as a separate zone. 1412.2 Deadband Controls: When used to control both comfort heating and cooling, zone thermostatic controls shall be capable of a deadband of at least 5 °F within which the supply of heating and cooling energy to the zone is shut off or reduced to a minimum. EXCEPTIONS: 1. Special occupancy. special usage or code requirements where deadband controls are not appropriate. 2. Thermostats that require manual changeover between heating and cooling modes. 1412.3 Humidity Controls: If a system is equipped with a means for adding moisture, a humidistat shall b: provided. 1412.4 Setback and Shut -Off: HVAC systems shall be equipped with automatic controls capable of accomplishing a reduction of energy use through control setback or equipment shutdown during periods of non -use or alternate use of the spaces served by the system. The automatic controls shall: a. Have a minimum seven -day clo :k and be capable of being set for seven different day types per week, b. Be capable of retaining programming and time settings during loss of power for a period of at least ten hours, and c. Include an accessible manual override, or equivalent function (e.g., telephone interface), that allows temporary operation of the system for up to two hours. EXCEPTIONS: 1. System: serving areas which require continuous operation at the same: temperature setpoint. 2. Equipment with full load domands of 2 kW (6,826 Btu/h) or less may be controlled by readily accessible manual off -hour controls. 3. Systems controlled by an ol:cupant sensor that is capable of shutting the system off when no occupant is sensed for a period of up to 30 minutes. 4. Systems controlled solely by a manually operated timer capable of operating the system for no more than two hours. 1412.4.1 Dampers: Outside air intakes, exhaust outlets and relief outlets serving conditioned spaces shall be equipped with motorized dampers which close automatically when the system is off or upon power failure. 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Ener ll e ' ch'anical Permit Plans Checklist 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms These dampers shall remain closed until activated by the fire alarm system or other approved smoke detection system. EXCEPTIONS: 1. Systems serving areas which require continuous operation. 2. Combustion air intakes. 3. Gravity (nonmotorized) dampers are acceptable in systems with a design outdoor air intake or exhaust capacity of 300 cfm or less.( :. :'•_ :• )) )) Reserved. 5. Type I Grease hoods exhaust. Dampers installed to comply with this section, including dampers integral to HVAC equipment, shall have a maximum leakage rate when tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 of: a. Motorized Dampers: 10 cfm/f1 of damper area at 1.0 inch w.g. b. Nonmotorized Dampers: 20 cfm/ft of damper area at 1.0 inch w.g., except that for nonmotorized dampers smaller than 24 inches in either dimension: 40 cfnt/ft of damper area at 1.0 inch w.g. Dampers used as a component of packaged HVAC equipment shall comply with the damper leakage requirements, unless it is the lowest leakage available as a factory option. Drawings shall indicate compliance with this section. 1412.4.2 Optimum Start Controls: Heating and cooling systems with design supply air capacities exceeding 10,000 cfm shall have optimum start controls. Optimum start controls shall be designed to automatically adjust the start time of an HVAC system each day to bring the space to desired occupied temperature levels immediately before scheduled occupancy. The control algorithm shall, as a minimum, be a function of the difference between space temperature and occupied setpoint and the amount of time prior to scheduled occupancy. 1412.5 Heat Pump Controls: Unitary air cooled heat pumps shall include microprocessor controls that minimize supplemental heat usage during start-up, set -up, and defrost conditions. These controls shall anticipate need for heat and use compression heating as the first stage of heat. Controls shall indicate when supplemental heating is being used through visual means (e.g., LED indicators). 1412.6 Combustion Heating Equipment Controls: Combustion heating equipment with a capacity over 225,000 Btu/h shall have ((medulating))modulated or staged combustion control. Boilers shall have proportionately - modulated or staged combustion control to control both the fuel and the air. EXCEPTIONS: 1. Boilers under 1,000,000 Btu/h input capacity. 2. Radiant Heaters. 3. Systems with multiple boilers which are sequentially- staged. Boilers shall comply with the reset requirements in Section 1432.2. 1412.7 Balancing: Each air supply outlet or air or water terminal device shall have a means for balancing, including but not limited to, dampers, temperature and pressure test connections and balancing valves. 1 412.8 Ventilation Controls for High- Occupancy Areas: Demand control ventilation (DCV) is required for spaces that are larger than 500 ft 2 , have a design occupancy for ventilation of greater than 40 people for 1000 ft of floor area, and are served by systems with one or more of the following: a. b. c. An air -side economizer, Automatic modulating control of the outdoor air damper, or A design outdoor airflow greater than 3000 cfm. EXCEPTIONS: 1.Systems with energy recovery complying with Section 1436. 2. Multiple -zone systems without direct - digital control of individual zones communicating with a central control panel. 3. Systems with a design outdoor airflow less than 1200 cfm. 4. Spaces where the supply airflow rate minus any makeup or outgoing transfer air requirement is less than 1200 cfm. Code Com • liance Form NOTE THAT THIS REQUIREMENT WILL RESULT I IN A LARGER COOLING TOWER lowai Revised Dec 2007 1412.9 Enclosed Parking Garage Ventilation. See the Seattle Mechanical Code, Section 404 for requirements for controls for parking garage ventilation. 1413 Economizers 1413.1 Operation: Air economizers shall be capable of automatically modulating outside and return air dampers to provide 100% of the design supply air as outside air to reduce or eliminate flu: need for mechanical cooling. Air economizers shall be used for RS -29 analysis base case for all systems without exceptions in Sections 1413, 1423, or 1433. Water economizers, when allowed by Section 1132.2 exception 1 or Section [433 exception 9, shall be capable of providing the total concurrent cooling load served by the connected terminal equipment lacking airside economizer, at outside air temperatures of 45 °F dry- bulb/40°F wet -bulb and below. For this calculation, all factors including solar and internal load shall be the same as thos': used for peak load calculations, except for the outside temperatures. (( -)) 1413.2 Documentation: Water economiz :rs plans submitted for approval shall include the following information: I. Maximum outside air conditions for [which economizer is sized to provide full cooling. 2. Design cooling load to be provided by economizer at this outside air condition. 3. Heat rejection and terminal equipment performance data including model number, flow rate, capacity, entering and leaving temperature in full economizer cooling mode. 1413.3 Integrated Operation: The HVAC system and its controls shall allow economizer operation when mechanical cooling is required simultaneously. Air and water economizers shall be capable of providing partial cooling even when additional mechanical cooling is required to meet the remainder of the cooling load. EXCEPTIONS: 1. Individual, direct expansion units that have a rated capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h and u;e nonintegrated economizer controls that preclude simultaneous operation of the economizer and mechanical cooling. 2. Water - cooled water chillers with waterside economizer. 1413.4 Humidification: If an air economi:rer is required on a cooling system for which humidification equipment is to hi: provided to maintain minimum indoor humidity levels, then the humidifier shall be of the adiabatic type (direct evaporative media or fog atomization type). EXCEPTIONS: 1. Health care facilities where WAC 246 - 320 -525 allows only steam injection humidifiers in ductwork downstream of final filters. 2. Systems with water economizer 3. 100% outside air systems with no provisions for air recirculation to the central supply fan. 4. Nonadiabatic humidifiers cumulatively serving no more than 10% of a building's air economizer capacity as measured in cfm. This refers to the system cfm serving rooms with stand alone or duct mounted humidifiers. 1413.5 Economizer Heating System Impact: Any HVAC system that increases the building heating energy use during economizer operation is not allowed (e.g. single- fan /dual -duct systems a nd multizone systems). EXCEPTIONS: 1. Where the heating is allowed by Section 1435. 2. Water source heat pump system; that comply with Section 1433, Exception 2. 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Ener• Code Com • Iiance Form °MECH -CHK ,coos NOTE THAT SINGLE - FAN/DUAL -DUCT SYSTEMS AND MULTIZONE SYSTEMS DO NOT COMPLY WITH THIS REOUIREMENT. THIS IS BECAUSE ECONOMIZER OPERATION LOWERS THE TEMPERATURE OF THE AIR ENTERING THE HOT DECK HEATING COIL, INCREASING ITS ENERGY USE. IN ORDER TO USE THIS TYPE OF SYSTEM, THE SYSTEM MUST MEET ONE OF THE ECONOMIZER EXCEPTIONS AND HAVE NEITHER TYPE OF ECONOMIZER. (ANOTHER RESOLUTION IS TO USE A DUAL - FAN/DUAL -DUCT SYSTEM WHERE THE HOT DECK FAN SUPPLIES ONLY RETURN AIR OR RETURN AIR PLUS MINIMUM VENTILATION AIR.) THIS REOUIREMENT WILL NOT AFFECT THREE - DECK MULTIZONE SINCE THEY CANNOT WORK WITH AN AIR ECONOMIZER IN ANY CASE (IT WOULD MAKE THE NEUTRAL DECK A COLD DECK). AN EXCEPTION TO THE HEATING IMPACT IS PROVIDED FOR ECONOMIZERS ON VAV SYSTEMS THAT CAUSE ZONE LEVEL HEATING TO INCREASE DUE TO A REDUCTION IN SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE. REDUCING SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURES ON A COOLING -VAV SYSTEM WILL REDUCE FAN ENERGY (PARTICULARLY IF THE SYSTEM HAS A VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE), OFFSETTING THE ENERGY LOST DUE TO INCREASED REHEAT ENERGY. SEE THE DISCUSSION AND DIAGRAMS OF SECTION 6.5.1.4 OF ASHRAE /IESNA STANDARD 90.1 IN THE USERS MANUAL. 1414 Ducting Systems 1414.1 Sealing: Duct work which is designed to operate at pressures above %I inch water column static pressure shall be sealed ((ip-auser-Elapee-with )) as follows: 1. (( : .))(Reserved.) 2. Static pressure: ((2))Y inches to 3 inches; seal all transverse joints and longitudinal seams. Spiral lock seams in round and flat oval ductwork do not require sealing. however, other seams shall be sealed. 3. Static pressure: above 3 inches; seal all transverse joints, longitudinal seams and duct wall penetrations. (( er- r.)) All low - pressure supply and return air systems not located entirely within the conditioned space, including the unconditioned side of enclosed stud bays or joist cavities /spaces used to transport air. shall be securely fastened and sealed. Ductwork shall be sealed using welds. gaskets. mastic. or mastic -plus- embedded -fabric tape. Enclosed stud bays or joist cavities /spaces used to transport air shall be sealed using mastic -plus- embedded- fabric tape or. when drywall is used to enclose the air system. drywall mud and tape. Duct tape is not permitted as a sealant on any ducts. EXCEPTION: Fibrous glass duct systems installed in accordance with standard UL 181A and flexible duct systems installed in accordance with standard UL 181B may use tapes listed for these systems. NOTE THAT LONGITUDINAL SEAMS ARE JOINTS ORIENTED IN THE DIRECTION OF AIRFLOW. TRANSVERSE JOINTS ARE CONNECTIONS OF TWO DUCT SECTIONS ORIENTED PERPENDICULAR TO AIRFLOW. DUCT WALL PENETRATIONS ARE OPENINGS MADE BY ANY SCREW FASTENER, PIPE, ROD OR WIRE. ALL OTHER CONNECTIONS ARE CONSIDERED TRANSVERSE JOINTS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPIN -INS, TAPS AND OTHER BRANCH CONNECTIONS, ACCESS DOOR FRAMES 4-3)). Outside air ducts serving individual supply air units with less than 2,800 cfm of total supply air capacity shall be insulated to a minimum of R -7 and are not considered building envelope. Other outside air duct runs are considered building envelope until they, I. connect to the heating or cooling equipment, or 2. are isolated from the exterior with an automatic shut -off damper complying with Section 1412.4.1. Once outside air ducts meet the above listed requirements, any runs within conditioned space shall comply with Table 14 -5 requirements. Other ducts and plenums shall be therrally insulated per Table 14 -5. EXCEPTIONS: 1. Within the HVAC equipment. 2. Exhaust air ducts not subject to condensation. 3. Exposed ductwork within a zone that serves that zone. 1415 Piping Systems 1415.1 Insulation: Piping shall be thermally insulated in accordance with Table 14 -6. EXCEPTION: Piping installed within unitary HVAC equipment. Cold water pipes outside the conditioned space shall be insulated in accordance with the Washington State Plumbing Code (WAC 51 -56) 1416 Mechanical Systems Commissioning and Completion Requirements 1416.1 General: Commissioning is a systematic process of verification and documentation that ensures that the select :d building systems have been designed, installed and function properly, efficiently, and can be maintained in accordance with the contract documents ill order to satisfy the building owner's design intent and operational requirements. Drawing notes shall require commissioning and completion requirements in accordance with Section 1416. Drawing notes may refer to specifications for further requirements. 1416.1.1 Simple Systems: For simple sy::tems, as defined in Section 1421, and for warehouses and semi - heated spaces, commissioning shall include, as a minimum: a. A Commissioning Plan, b. System Testing and Balancing, c. Controls Functional Performance Testing, d. A Preliminary Commissioning Report, e. Post Construction Documentation in the form of O &M and Record Drawing Review, and f. A Final Commissioning Report. 1416.1.2 All Other Mechanical Systems: For all other mechanical systems, commissioning shall include, as a minimum: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. A Commissioning Plan, System Testing and Balancing, Equipment Functional Performance Testing, Controls Functional Performance Te::ting, A Preliminary Commissioning Report, Post Construction Documentation (all), and A Final Commissioning Report. Revised Dec 2007 AND JAMBS, DUCT CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT. 1414.2 Insulation: Ducts and plenums that are constructed and function as part of the building envelope, by separating interior space from exterior space, shall meet all applicable requirements of Chapter 13. These requirements include insulation installation, moisture control, air leakage, and building envelope insulation levels. ((Unheated -ec 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms 1416.2 Commissioning Requirements 1 416.2.1 Commissioning Plan: The plans shall require tests mandated by this section be performed and the results recorded. The plans shall require preparation of preliminary and final reports of test procedures and results as described herein. At a minimum, the plans shall identify the following for each test: a. A detailed explanation of the original design intent, b. Equipment and systems to be tested, including the extent of tests, c. Functions to be tested (for example, calibration, economizer control, etc.), d. Conditions under which the test shall be performed (for example, winter and summer design conditions, full outside air, etc.), e. Measurable criteria for acceptable performance. 1416.2.2 Systems Balancing 1416.2.2.1 General: Construction documents shall require that all HVAC systems be balanced in accordance with generally accepted engineering standards. Air and water flow rates shall be measured and adjusted to deliver final flow rates within 10% of design rates, except variable flow distribution systems need not be balanced upstream of the controlling device (for example, VAV box or control valve). Construction documents shall require a written balance report be provided to the owner. Drawing notes may refer to specifications for further systems balancing requirements. 1416.2.2.2 Air System Balancing: Air systems shall be balanced in a manner to first minimize throttling losses then, for fans with system power of greater than 1 hp, fan speed shall be adjusted to meet design flow conditions. 1416.2.2.3 Hydronic System Balancing: Hydronic systems shall be proportionately balanced in a manner to first minimize throttling losses, then the pump impeller shall be trimmed or pump speed shall be adjusted to meet design flow conditions. EXCEPTIONS: 1. Pumps with pump motors of 10 hp or less. 2. When throttling results in no greater than 5% of the nameplate horsepower draw above that required if the impeller were trimmed. Each hydronic system shall have either the ability to measure pressure across the pump, or test ports at each side of each pump. 1416.2.3 Functional Performance Testing 1 416.23.1 Equipment/Systems Testing: Functional Performance Testing shall demonstrate the correct installation and operation of each component, system, and system -to- system intertie relationship in accordance with approved plans and specifications. This demonstration is to prove the operation, function, and maintenance serviceability for each of the Commissioned systems. Testing shall include all modes of operation, including: a. All modes as described in the Sequence of Operation, b. Redundant or automatic back -up mode, c. Performance of alarms, and d. Mode of operation upon a loss of power and restored power. 1 416.23.2 Controls Testing: HVAC control systems shall be tested to ensure that control devices, components, equipment and systems are calibrated, adjusted and operate in accordance with approved plans and specifications. Sequences of operation shall be functionally tested to ensure they operate in accordance with approved plans and specifications. 1416.2.4 Post Construction Commissioning 1416.2.4.1 General: Construction documents shall require post construction commissioning be provided to the building owner. Drawing notes may refer to specifications for further commissioning requirements. Post construction commissioning shall include, as a minimum, review and approval of Operation and Maintenance Materials, Record Drawings, and Systems Operational Training. 1416.2.4.2 Operation and Maintenance (0 & M) Manuals: The 0 & M manual shall be in accordance with industry accepted standards and shall include, at a minimum, the following: a. b. c. d. 2006 Seattle Nonresidential Ener • Code Com • fiance Form Submittal data stating equipment size and selected options for each piece of equipment requiring maintenance. Operation and maintenance manuals for each piece of equipment requiring maintenance, except equipment not furnished as part of the project. Required routine maintenance actions shall be clearly identified. Names and addresses of at least one service agency. HVAC controls system maintenance and calibration information, including wiring diagrams, schematics, and control sequence descriptions. Desired Revised Dec 2007 or field determined set points shall be permanently recorded on control drawings at control devices, or, for digital control systems, in programming comments. e. A complete narrative of how each system is intended to operate including: i. A detailed explanation of the original design intent. ii. The basis of design (how the design was selected to meet the design intent). A detailed explanation of how new equipment is to interface with existing equipment or systems (where applicable). iv. Suggested set points. NOTE: Sequence of Operation is not acceptable as a narrative for this requirement. 1416.2.4.3 Record Drawings: Record drawings shall include as a minimum the location and performance data on each piece of equipment, general configuration of duct and pipe distribution system, including sizes, and the terminal air and water design flow rates of the actual installation. 1416.2.4.4 Systems Operational Training: The training of the appropriate maintenance staff for each equipment type and/or system shall include, as a minimum, the following: a. System/Equipment overview (what it is, what it does and which other systems and/or equipment does it interface with). b. Review of the available O &M mat trials. c. Review of the Record Drawings on the subject system/equipment. d. Hands -on demonstration of all normal maintenance procedures, normal operating modes, and all emergency shutdown and start-up procedures. 1416.2.5 Commissioning Reports 1416.23.1 Preliminary Commissioning; Report: A preliminary report of commissioning test procedures and resubs shall be completed and provided to the Owner. The preliminary commissioning report shall identify: a. Deficiencies found during testing required by this section which have not been corrected at the time of report preparation and the anticipated date of correction. b. Deferred tests which cannot be performed at the time of report preparation due to climatic conditions. c. Climatic conditions required for performance of the deferred tests, and the anticipated date of each deferred te::t. 1416.23.2 Final Commissioning Report: A complete report of test procedures and results shall be prepared and filed with the owner. The Final Commissioning Report shall identify: a. Results of all Functional Performance Tests. b. Disposition of all deficiencies found during testing, including details of corrective measures used or propos :d. c. All Functional Performance Test procedures used during the commissioning process including measurable criteria for test acceptance, provided herein for repeatability. EXCEPTION: Deferred tests w iich cannot be performed at the time of report preparation due to climatic conditions. 14163 Acceptance Requirements 1416.3.1 Acceptance: Buildings or portions thereof, required by this code to comply with this section, shall not be isst!ed a final certificate of occupancy until such time that the building official detern tines that the preliminary commissioning report required by Sectioti 1416.2.5.1 has been completed CARUSO TURLEY SCOTT consulting structural engineers YOUR VISION IS OUR MISSION PARTNERS Richard D. Turley, PE Paul G. Scott, PE, SE Sandra J. Herd, PE, SE Chris J. Atkinson, PE, SE Thomas R. Moms, PE Richard A. Dahlmann, PE 1215 W. Rio Salado Pkwy. Suite 200 Tempe, AZ 85281 T: (480) 774 -1700 F: (480) 774 -1701 www.ctsaz.com Job No. 09 -390 By KAR FILE COPY CLIENT: FITCH 16435 N Scottsdale Rd. #195 Scottsdale, AZ PROJECT: T Mobile T.I. — Storefront Support Southcenter Mall Tukwila, WA GENERAL INFORMATION: BUILDING CODE: 2006 IBC Sheet No. 1 Date 6 / 2009 REVIEWED COMPL FOR CODE CE APPROVED JUL 16 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION cilvoF JUL 15 2009 PERMIT CENTER REVISION Na i PO1 g- 0S1 ' • . -1 • - 1 - • , . • ,,,, 1 • CARUSO 1215 W. Rio Salado Pkwy TURLEY Suite 200 Tempe. AZ 85281 SCOTT T: 480-774-1700 consulting F:480-774-1701 structural engineers - 1 . '• - i_ - _!..1 - _ - -. ...._...,._ , _. ----,- _ 1. , :- , .L :. 1. .. i , • 1 • • • • • • - • - • • • 1 • 1 1 • • - 1 ■ • • • • • • • • • , ■ • • _ • • • • ; • I • . . • I: —1 4 ---, • I 4 • • 1 4 31 • -1 - • Astv i ! ie.ir*It.:.HL It-6 ick:sttLi :. di. F IiCtsi-if\ca, St40. ' ! 1 - • • • 4 4 • c . : -1- • - 1 - • ,-; Job Name - r- Job No. 09 - a9C) Sheet No. 2. By V.,4 Date Gs (09 I I ! . • • • • • • • - I - 4 - I - ; • i • ! • , .1 : • . • - r ; T .• - • • . • • • . • 1 • , . . • ' i • : 1 • •• I 1 ' ! ; I , : . . . • ' + i -- I- . I- -• 1 . . .: _ if_ . .,..— i ._, ..,.. . -I - : ' 4—, , 1 i :- : I_ i ! . i- ... !,... ..,. i . 1- . I . L. ... i . . ' . .1 - - •1 I - -i , -■ l. 1 - I 1 • . 1 . . . . I . . . „ 1 • ..I • L. —1.. • 1 ; 1 I • - • . : I- • - • -.• - . • : . , I • ' , H I i 1 , , 1 1 .1 ' • ,. ; .; I, : • • , 1 1 ' 'I ' " north S 138th St Seatac Park Sunset Plaelds Atle• to I ntemstitingi rp .North Ent � I t t , =-. 9'4$th -fit Riverton HethiS I S 152nd �t 633' 633 5outhcenter Mall Seattle, WA 98188 1 / (Road Map 518 11 1 �- '11th � k:: 162nd 1 � Ts 4 J. �3 SF — h vy 11 a Y _ ! 1 , g 132i d $t :, 3 6F 13fth, St 1> 1 58 ��� It I L ' `__�� �3T195tt31!#''� ' _ ,Ai [ oi t"'Wt _ p 1 I: 4 Gther - i<irig yp 4i6; ). : ra d- 3, 900 _ ;11.1 it : M4irrklei`$tyr� Fb .. Edit Ybw iata Rce4: rook "4 11 Southcenter Mall Blvd., Seattle, 'WA Fnd ' y Thursday, Jun 18, 2009 02:50 PM "4j I Onus ' .n Frolussir d P rk SW 27th-St SW 34th St- aS c CO I'> fork tj, m Kent 3 i c ¢' - tii 0 N .:Draw. $ - A \ 1 6 :U ©1 I . -_le.A -= +. starth @ g;S rA " 4 Irbox - Microsoft Outlook I Email taKeep l faprogeCAo NOS Wewa+ 1:1.1, IVAMap - Microsoft Street._ it o92 in ie :SW .4ist St ... m w 1 S ifi..'St V11..E1ENIA4r3 2:50 PM Conterminous 48 States 2006 International Building Code Latitude = 47.46105 Longitude = - 122.26031 Spectral Response Accelerations Ss and S1 Ss and S1 = Mapped Spectral Acceleration Values Site Class B - Fa = 1.0 ,Fv = 1.0 Data are based on a 0.05 deg grid spacing Period Sa (sec) (g) 0.2 1.430 (Ss, Site Class B) 4 S� 1.0 0.490 (S1, Site Class B) onterminous 48 States 20►, International Building Code Latitu • > = 47.46105 Longitude 122.26031 Spectral Resp• e Ac - erations Ss and S1 Ss and S1 = Mapp- pectral Acceleration Values Site Class B - F r - 1. I , v = 1.0 Data are bas on a 0.05 • • grid spacing Period (sec _ (g) 1.430 (Ss, Site Class B) CARUSO 1215 W. Rio Salado Pkwy TURLEY Suite 200 Tempe, AZ 85281 SCOTT T: 480-774-1700 consulting F: 480- 774 -1701 structural engineers Job Name .` Map', �e Job No. 09- ag Sheet No. 5 1Q Date (/O9 By ■ Ni i L I ._ • I• i • I ■� i r A � - i �- "� (�c � . _ r i 1 _. I- _ . _ in I 1 1- -1 Cam. 19' { ...' -. !• �� ■ 4 ! M' 1 1 I I .,•. -..III ! I , . ■ i i � •. I I. I L_ - 4 1 i -. i _. . ■ .' 1 1 1111 . ' I 1 . i i . .. 1 III 1- , . l : 1 j 1 --+ ■_ --: fi a i I I - i - i i I 1 i I i ? I . 1 . f. j - -_ • 1 I I - - - - -- - - - ----- - - - - - . . ; I 1- - - - 4 - , 1 i • , - r T l+ fi . _. -... + - 1 I i . . 1 CARUSO 1215 W. Rio Salado Pkwy TURLEY Suite 200 Tempe, AZ 85281 SCOTT T: 480-774-1700 consulting F: 480- 774 -1701 structural engineers Job Name .` Map', �e Job No. 09- ag Sheet No. 5 1Q Date (/O9 By ►� -Sr CARUSO 1215 W. Rio Salado Pkwy TURLEY Suite 200 Tempe, AZ 85281 SCOTT T: 480 -774 -1700 consulting F:480- 774 -1701 structural engineers Job Name 744: 401 le. Job No. C31-1 Sheet No. ,C By YAIZ, Date (.4,inct Project: Model: Storefront Joists R1 Loads have not been modified for strength checks Loads have not been modified for deflection calculations Iexural and Deflection Check Combined Bending and Web Crippling Combined Bending and Shear 2001 NASPEC w/2004 Supplement 20 :0`. 7.00 ft Date: 6/23/2009 Section : 362S162 -43 Single C Stud (X -X Axis) Fy = 33.0 ksi Maxo = 612.0 Ft -Lb Moment of Inertia, I = 0.710 inA4 Va = 1739.1 Ib Unif Ld Ib /ft R2 Mmax Mmax/ Mpos Bracing Ma(Brc) Mpos/ Deflection Span Ft -Lb Maxo Ft -Lb (in) Ft -Lb Ma(Brc) (in) Ratio Center Span 122.5 0.200 122.5 Full 612.0 0.200 0.052 L/1628 Reaction or Load Brng Pa Pn Mmax Intr. Stiffen Pt Load P(Ib) (in) (Ib) (Ib) (Ft -Lb) Value Req'd ? R1 70.0 3.50 385.0 673.7 0.0 0.09 No R2 70.0 3.50 385.0 673.7 0.0 0.09 No Reaction or Vmax Mmax Va Intr. Intr. Pt Load (Ib) (Ft -Lb) Factor VNa M /Ma Unstiffen Stiffen R1 70.0 0.0 0.39 0.10 0.00 0.01 NA R2 70.0 0.0 0.39 0.10 0.00 0.01 NA CARUSO TURLEY SCOTT, INC. 130 S PRIEST DRIVE TEMPE, AZ 85281 (480)774 -1700 (480)774 -1701 Rev: 580002 User KW- 0600624. Ver 5 8 0. 1- Dec -2003 (c)1983.2003 ENERCALC Engineering Software Description B1 General Information Steel Section : TS4X3X3 /16 Center Span Left Cant. Right Cant Lu : Unbraced Length Distributed Loads DL LL ST Start Location End Location Point Loads #1 0.120 9.500 5.50 ft 0.00 ft 4.00 ft 5.50 ft #2 Steel Beam Design Pinned - Pinned Bm Wt. Added to Loads LL & ST Act Together #3 #1 Dead Load 0.300 Live Load Short Term Location 9.500 Force & Stress Summary Maximum 2.22 k -ft Max. M + Max. M - Max. M @ Left Max. M @ Right Shear @ Left 0.05 k Shear @ Right 0.81 k Center Defl. 0.033 in Left Cant Defl 0.000 in Right Cant Defl 0.265 in ...Query Defl @ 0.000 ft Reaction @ Left -0.05 Reaction @ Rt 1.57 Fa calc'd per Eq. E2 -2, K`L/r> Cc #2 DL Only -2.22 -2.22 0.05 0.81 0.033 0.000 -0.265 0.000 -0.05 1.57 #3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 #4 #4 Title : T- Mobile Dsgnr: KAR Description : Scope : Code Ref: AISC 9th ASD, 1997 UBC, 2003 IBC, 2003 NFPA 5000 0.033 0.000 -0.265 0.000 -0.05 1.57 #5 #5 Fy Load Duration Factor Elastic Modulus Job # 09 -390 Date: 8:44AM, 24 JUN 09 d Page 1 t -mobi I e. ecw:Calculations 46.00 ksi 1.00 29,000.0 ksi Note! Short Term Loads Are WIND Loads. #6 #7 k/ft k/ft k/ft ft ft Note! Short Term Loads Are WIND Loads. Summary Using: TS4X3X3/16 section, Span = 5.50ft, Fy = 46.0ksi, Left Cant. = 0.00ft, Right Cant. = 4.00ft End Fixity = Pinned - Pinned, Lu = 5.50ft, LDF = 1.000 Actual Allowable Moment 2.225 k -ft 6.026 k -ft fb : Bending Stress 10.191 ksi 27.600 ksi Length //DL DL Defl Max. e f l fb / Fb 0.369:1 Length /(D1. +LL Defl) Shear fv : Shear Stress fv / Fv 0.808 k 0.538 ksi 0.029 : 1 13.800 k 18.400 ksi Beam OK Static: Load Case Governs Stress 0.265 in 362.8 : 1 362.8 : 1 « -- These columns are Dead + Live Load placed as noted -» LL LL +ST LL LL +ST (5 Center (M Center (M. Cants Cants 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 #6 #7 k k k ft 0.033 in 0.000 in -0.265 in 0.000 in -0.05 k 1.57 k k -ft k -ft k -ft k -ft k k • CARUSO TURLEY SCOTT, INC. • 130 S PRIEST DRIVE TEMPE, AZ 85281 (480)774 -1700 (480)774 -1701 Rev: 580002 User: KW- 0600624, Ver 5.8.0, 1- Dec -2003 (c)1983 -2003 ENERCALC Engineering Software Description B1 Section Properties TS4X3X3/16 Depth Thickness Width Area Rt Values for LRFD Design J 4.000 in 0.188 in 3.000 in Weight Ixx I yy Sxx 2.39 in2 Syy 1.500 in R -xx R -yy 6.670 in4 Zx Zy Title : T- Mobile Dsgnr: KAR Description : Scope : Steel Beam Design 8.12 #/ft 5.230 in4 3.340 in4 2.620 in3 2.230 in3 1.480 in 1.180 in 3.200 in3 2.620 in3 Job # 09 -390 Date: 8:44AM, 24 JUN 09 Page 2 t- mobile. ecw: Calcu lati on s `.1 CARUSO TURLEY SCOTT, INC. 130 S PRIEST DRIVE TEMPE, AZ 85281 (480)774 -1700 (480)774 -1701 Rev: 580002 User: KW- 0600624, Ver 5.8.0, 1- Dec -2003 (c)1983 -2003 ENERCALC Engineering Software Description B2 General Information Steel Section : TS4X3X3/16 Center Span Left Cant. Right Cant Lu : Unbraced Length Distributed Loads Summary [Force & Stress Summary Center Defl. -0.508 in Left Cant Defl 0.000 in Right Cant Defl 0.000 in ...Query Defl @ 0.000 ft Reaction @ Left 0.70 Reaction @ Rt 0.70 Fa calc'd per Eq. E2 -2, K'Llr > Cc Section Properties TS4X3X3/16 Depth Thickness Width DL LL ST Start Location End Location Using: TS4X3X3 /16 section, Span = 13.50ft, Fy = 46.0ksi End Fixity = Pinned - Pinned, Lu = 13.50ft, LDF = 1.000 Actual Allowable Moment 2.349 k -ft 6.629 k -ft fb : Bending Stress 10.760 ksi 30.360 ksi fblFb 0.354:1 Shear 0.696 k 13.800 k fv : Shear Stress 0.464 ksi 18.400 ksi fv / Fv 0.025: 1 Max. M + Max. M - Max. M @ Left Max. M @ Right Shear @ Left Shear @ Right Area Rt Values for LRFD Design.... #1 #2 #3 0.095 13.50 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 13.50 ft «- These columns are Dead + Live Load placed as noted -» DL LL LL +ST LL LL +ST Maximum Only e Center at7. Center e Cants (a. Cants 2.35 k -ft 2.35 0.70 k 0.70 k 4.000 in 0.188 in 3.000 in 2.39 in2 1.500 in 0.70 0.70 -0.508 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.70 0.70 J 6.670 in4 Zx Zy Weight Ixx Iyy Sxx Syy R -xx R -yy Steel Beam Design Pinned - Pinned Bm Wt. Added to Loads LL & ST Act Together 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 #4 Title : T- Mobile Dsgnr: KAR Description : Scope : Code Ref: AISC 9th ASD, 1997 IBC, 2003 IBC, 2003 NFPA 5000 8.12 #/ft 5.230 in4 3.340 in4 2.620 in3 2.230 in3 1.480 in 1.180 in 3.200 in3 2.620 in3 -0.508 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.70 0.70 #5 Fy Load Duration Factor Elastic Modulus 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 #6 Job # 09 -390 Date: 8:44AM, 24 JUN 09 Page 1 t -mobi Ie.ecw:Calcu lations 46.00 ksi 1.00 29,000.0 ksi Note! Short Term Loads Are WIND Loads. #7 k/ft k/ft k/ft ft ft Beam OK Static Load Case Governs Stress Max. Deflection Length /DL Defl Length /(DL *LL Defl) k -ft k -ft k -ft k -ft k k 0.000 in 0.000 in 0.000 in 0.000 in k k -0.508 in 318.8:1 318.8:1 to CARUSO 1215 W. Rio Salado Pkwy TURLEY Suite 200 Tempe, AZ 85281 SCOTT T: 480-774-1700 consulting F: 480-774-1701 structural engineers Job Name T -"\oh', le Job No. CM -390 Sheet No. By ‘CAR Date Co109_ u tARUSO TURLEY SCOTT, INC. 130 S PRIEST DRIVE TEMPE, AZ 85281 (480)774 -1700 (480)774 -1701 Rev: 580003 User: KW- 0600624, Ver 5.8.0, 1- Dec -2003 (c)1983 -2003 ENERCALC Engineering Software Description General Information Loads Steel Section Column Height 14.000 ft End Fixity Pin -Pin Live & Short Term Loads Combined Axial Load... Dead Load Live Load Short Term Load P1 TS3X3X3 /16 1.57 k k k Section : TS3X3X3/16, Height = 14.00ft, Axial Loads: DL = Unbraced Lengths: X -X = 14.00ft, Y -Y = 14.00ft Combined Stress Ratios AISC Formula H1 - 1 AISC Formula H1 - 2 AISC Formula H1 - 3 0.1739 XX Axis : Fa calc'd per Eq. E2 -2, K *LIr > Cc YY Axis : Fa calc'd per Eq. E2 -2, K *LIr > Cc Stresses Allowable & Actual Stresses Fa : Allowable fa : Actual Fb:xx : Allow [F1 -6] Fb:xx : Allow [F1 -7] & [F1 -8] fb : xx Actual Fb:yy : Allow [F1 -6] Fb:yy : Allow [F1 -71 & [F1 -8] fb : yy Actual Analysis Values F'ex : DL +LL,� Fey : DL +LL F'ex : DL +LL +ST F'ey : DL +LL +ST Max X -X Axis Deflection Dead 6,810 psi 6,810 psi 6,810 psi 6,810 psi -0.038 in at Fy Duration Factor Elastic Modulus X -X Unbraced Y -Y Unbraced Dead 6.81 ksi 0.78 ksi 30.36 ksi 30.36 ksi 0.91 ksi 30.36 ksi 30.36 ksi 0.91 ksi Steel Column Ecc. for X -X Axis Moments Ecc. for Y -Y Axis Moments Column Design OK 1.57, LL = 0.00, ST = O.00k, Ecc. = 1.000in Live Title : T- Mobile Dsgnr: KAR Description : Scope: 46.00 ksi 1.000 29,000.00 ksi 14.000 ft 14.000 ft 0.1739 Cm:x DL +LL 0.60 Cm:y DL +LL 0.60 Cm:x DL +LL +ST 0.60 Cm:y DL +LL +ST 0.60 8.120 It Max Y -Y Axis Deflection X -X Side sway : Y -Y Sidesway : Kxx Kyy Job # 09 -390 Date: 8:44AM, 24 JUN 09 Cb:x Dt. +LL Cb:y DI. +LL Cb:x Dl ±LL +ST Cb:y Dt. +LL +ST -0.038 in at 1 Page 1 t -mobi l e.ecw:Calcu l ati ons Code Ref: AISC 9th ASD, 1997 UBC, 2003 IBC, 2003 NFPA 5000 1.000 in 1.000 in DL + LL DL + ST + (LL if Chosen) 0.1739 Live DL + LL DL + Short 0.00 ksi 6.81 ksi 6.81 ksi 0.00 ksi 0.78 ksi 0.78 ksi 0.00 ksi 30.36 ksi 30.36 ksi 0.00 ksi 30.36 ksi 30.36 ksi 0.00 ksi 0.91 ksi 0.91 ksi 0.00 ksi 30.36 ksi 30.36 ksi 0.00 ksi 30.36 ksi 30.36 ksi 0.00 ksi 0.91 ksi 0.91 ksi Restrained Restrained 1.000 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 8.120 ft I IVCARUSO TURLEY SCOTT, INC. 130 S PRIEST DRIVE TEMPE, AZ 85281 (480)774 -1700 (480)774 -1701 Rev: 580003 User: KW- 0600624, Ver 5.8.0, 1- Dec -2003 (c)1983 -2003 ENERCALC Engineering Software Description Section Properties Depth Thickness Width Area Rt P1 TS3X3X3/1 6 Weight Ixx Iyy Sxx 2.02 in2 Syy 1.500 in Rxx Ryy Section Type = TS- Square 3.000 in 0.188 in 3.000 in Steel Column Title : T- Mobile Dsgnr: KAR Description : Scope : 6.86 #/ft 2.600 in4 2.600 in4 1.730 in3 1.730 in3 1.130 in 1.130 in Values for LRFD Design.... J Zx Zy Job # 09 -390 Date: 8:44AM, 24 JUN 09 Page 2 I -mobi l e. ecw: Ca lcul ations 4.280 in4 0.00 2.100 in3 2.100 in3 0.000 tARUSO TURLEY SCOTT, INC. 130 S PRIEST DRIVE TEMPE, AZ 85281 (480)774 -1700 (480)774 -1701 Rev: 580002 User: KW- 0600624, Ver 5.8.0, 1- Dec -2003 (c)1983 -2003 ENERCALC Engineering Software ..., «........r,....,.1067.,,w,.r ... ..3. ..1.;.0.x tiw 0...b,, Description General Information Depth Thickness Width Area Rt Steel Section : TS3X3X3 /16 Center Span Left Cant. Right Cant Lu : Unbraced Length Point Loads Dead Load Live Load Short Term Location L Force & Stress Summary Max. M + Max. M - Max. M @ Left Max. M @ Right Shear @ Left Shear @ Right Center Defl. Left Cant Defl Right Cant Defl ...Query Defl @ Connection at Roof #1 0.400 Reaction @ Left 0.43 Reaction @ Rt 0.03 Fa calc'd per Eq. E2 - 2, K *Ur > Cc 0.03 k 0.03 0.03 k 0.03 -0.008 in -0.008 0.000 in 0.000 0.000 in 0.000 0.000 ft 0.000 Section Properties TS3X3X3/16 Weight Ixx Iyy Sxx 2.02 in2 Syy 1.500 in R =xx R -yy 3.000 in 0.188 in 3.000 in 8.00 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 8.00 ft #2 Values for LRFD Design.... J 4.280 in4 Zx Zy Steel Beam Design Pinned - Pinned Bm Wt. Added to Loads LL & ST Act Together Title : T- Mobile Dsgnr: KAR Description : Scope : Code Ref: AISC 9th ASD, 1997 IJBC, 2003 IBC, 2003 NFPA 5000 Fy Load Duration Factor Elastic Modulus #3 II Summary Using: TS3X3X3/16 section, Span = 8.00ft, Fy = 46.0ksi End Fixity = Pinned - Pinned, Lu = 8.00ft, LDF = 1.000 Actual Allowable Moment 0.055 k -ft 3.979 k -ft fb : Bending Stress 0.381 ksi 27.600 ksi fb / Fb 0.014: 1 Shear 0.027 k 10.350 k fv : Shear Stress 0.024 ksi 18.400 ksi fv / Fv 0.001 : 1 Beam OK Static; Load Case Governs Stress Max. Deflf:ction Length /DL Defl Length /(DL ±LL Defl) -0.008 in 11,447.3: 1 11,447.3 : 1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 #4 «- These columns are Dead + Live Load placed as noted -» DL LL LL +ST LL Maximum Only Center 4 Center Cants 0.05 k -ft 0.05 6.86 #/ft 2.600 in4 2.600 in4 1.730 in3 1.730 in3 1.130 in 1.130 in 2.100 in3 2.100 in3 -0.008 0.000 0.000 0.000 #5 Note! Short Term Loads Are WIND Loads. 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 #6 Job # 09 -390 Date: 8:44AM, 24 JUN 09 46.00ksi 1.00 29,000.0 ksi 0.43 0.43 k 0.03 0.03 k 1 Page 1 I- mobile. ecw:Calcu lations #7 k k k ft LL +ST no. Cants k -ft k -ft k -ft k -ft k k 0.000 in 0.000 in 0.000 in 0.000 in CARUSO 1215 W. Rio Salado Pkwy TURLEY Suite 200 Tempe, AZ 85281 SCOTT T: 480-774-1700 consulting F: 480-774-1701 structural engineers Job Name ^ r-Malo•, 141L Job No. pq4 -act.0 Sheet No. \ B By 1 'l� Date (p/C5::i 1 (Seat. Factored design loads N -2297 V 438 V 0 Mux 0.000 Muy 0.000 M 0.000 pw Powers Design Assist" Version: V 1.1 Geometry and load Geometry (not full-scale) [in.] /•z View A t = 0.375 her = 2.000 Load [lb], [ft-lb] A111•1111111111111MM I = 5.000 Company name: Project: T-Mobile Project No.: 09-390 1. N Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing conditions, with national standards/guidelines and for plausibility! Powers Fasteners, 2 Powers Lane, Brewster, NY 10509, http://www.powers.com View B Date: 6/17/2009 Page :2W 1 40 Eccentric profile E x 0.000 e = 0.000 in. PDA Powers Design Assist"' Version: V 1.1 Calculations Selected anchor: Effective embedment depth: Nominal embedment depth: Approval: Design basis: Load distribution / resultant factored loads Max. concrete compressive strain: Max concrete compressive stress: Resulting tension load: Resulting compression Toad: Summary: Anchor plate: Strength reduction factors: Steel strength: Concrete breakout i pullout: Company name: Project: T- Mobile Project No.: 09-390 Power -Stud+ SDI 3/8 (2.00) h = 2.000 in. hnom = 2.375 in. Design method: Concrete: Loading combination: Seismic loading: Reinforcement: Stand -off installation: Corrpression load Tension load 0.02 %o] 92 psi 0 Ib 2298 Ib Verification Demand Tensile force: Shear force: 438 Ib Interaction: Material: Length xwidth: Input plate thickness: Calculated plate thickness: Tensile force: Shear force: Tensile force: Shear force: O Powers Fasteners, 2 Powers Lane, Brewster, NY 10509, http: / /www.powers.com ACI 318 -05 (Appendix D) Normal- weight concrete, craGked, = 2500 psi taken from section 9.2 no no supplementary reinforcement to control splitting present no longitudinal edge reinforcement or <= #4 bar Condition B (D.4.4 / D.4.5) no stand -off Anchor No. Tensile force Shear force #1 0 lb 438 Ib Capacity Status 4)=0.75 4) = 0.65 = 0.65 4)=0.70 1378 Ib S235, f = 34084 psi 5.000 in. x5.000 in. 0.375 in. 0.157 in., OK 0.32 < 1.0 OK Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing conditions, with national standards /guidelines and for plausibility! Date: 6/17/2009 Page Reference D.4.4a D.4.4c PD A, Powers Design Assist" Version: V 1.1 Tensile strength determination Pullout strength: N p = N/A (c/2500)0 = N/A pn =4)* (y2500)°.5°° * N p = N/A Check: N„ / 4)N pn = N/A Company name: (6 Project: T- Mobile Date: 6/17/2009 Project No.: 09 -390 Page;,doe Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing conditions, with national standards /guidelines and for plausibility! Powers Fasteners, 2 Powers Lane, Brewster, NY 10509, http: / /www.powers.com Reference D.5.3.2 I Version: V 1.1 PD, Powers Design Assist Shear strength determination Reference Steel strength (w /o lever arm): V =21201b D.6.1 +Vsa =4)* Vsa = 0.650 * 2120 Ib = 1378 Ib D.6.1.2 Check: Vua / 4) Vsa = 438 Ib / 1378 Ib = 0.32 < 1.0 Concrete breakout strength, dir. x +: l = 2.000 in. D.6.2 d = 0.375 in. c = 32.000 in. Vb =7 (le /d0)0.2 *d0o.5 *fc.0.5 *ca15 = 7 * 1. 398 * 0.612 * 50.00 * 181.019 = 54226 Ib D.6.2.2 Avco = 4608.000 in. A =432.000 in. Wec,V = 1 D.6.2.5 a,v = 1 D.6.2.1c Wed,V = 1 D.6.2.6 Wc,v = 1 D.6.2.7 4 Vcbg =4 (Avc / Avco) * �ec,V * wa,V * wed,V * Wc,V * Vb = 0.700* (432.000 in. / 4608.000 in. * 1* 1* 1* 1* 54226 Ib = 3559 Ib D.6.2.1 Check: Vua / 4 Vcbg = 438 lb /3559 lb = 0.12 < 1.0 Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing conditions, with national standards /guidelines and for plausibility! Powers Fasteners, 2 Powers Lane, Brewster, NY 10509, http: / /www.powers.com Company name: 19 Project: T- Mobile Date: 6/17/2009 Project No.: 09 -390 Page i Company name: PDh Powers Design Assist' Project: T- Mobile Version: V 1.1 Project No.: 09-390 Concrete pryout strength: h = 2.000 in. k = 17 N b = kc * fc'o. * h ef = 17 * 50.00 * 0.000 = 2404 Ib A Nco = 81.000 in. AN = 81.000 in. Ved,N = 1 Wc,N = 1 C a,min = 48.000 in. W = 1 k = 1 4)V cp _� * (ANC /ANco) * W ed,N * Wc,N * WcpN * Nb * kcp /n = 0.650 * (81.000 in. / 81.000 in. * 1* 1* 1 * 0 Ib * 1 / 1 = 1683 Ib Check: V / 4V = 438 Ib / 1683 Ib = 0.26 < 1.0 WarningslNotes Fastening OK! Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing conditions, with national standards /guidelines and for plausibility Powers Fasteners, 2 Powers Lane, Brewster, NY 10509, http: / /www.powers.com Date: 6/17/2009 Page; D.6.3 D.6.3.1 D.5.2.5 D.5.2.6 D.5.2.7 D.6.3.1 D.6.3.1 PWA Powers Design Assist" Version: V 1.1 Anchor plate Size of clearance hole: 0.438 in. Input plate thickness: 0.375 in. Calculated plate thickness: 0.157 in., OK Company name: Project: T- Mobile Project No.: 09-390 Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing conditions. with national standards /guidelines and for plausibility) Powers Fasteners, 2 Powers Lane, Brewster, NY 10509, http: / /www.powers.com 21 Date: 6/17/2009 Page tARUSO TURLEY SCOTT, INC. 130 S PRIEST DRIVE TEMPE, AZ 85281 (480)774 -1700 (480)774 -1701 Rev: 580002 User: KW- 0600624, Ver 5.8.0, 1- Dec -2003 (c)1983 -2003 ENERCA .0 Engineering Software Description General Information Steel Section TS4X3X3 /16 Center Span Left Cant. Right Cant Lu : Unbraced Length Distributed Loads DL LL ST Start Location End Location Force & Stress Summary Depth Thickness Width Area Rt Max. M + Max. M - Max. M @ Left Max. M © Right Shear @ Left Shear @ Right Cehter Defl. Left Cant Defl Right Cant Defl ...Query Defl @ B2 with Lateral Load 0.039 Reaction © Left 0.32 Reaction © Rt 0.32 Fa calc'd per Eq. E2 -1, K *Ur < Cc 13.50 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 2.00 ft 0.32 k 0.05 0.32 k 0.05 -0.364 in -0.063 0.000 in 0.000 0.000 in 0.000 0.000 ft 0.000 Section Properties TS4X3X3 /16 4.000 in 0,188 in 3.000 in 0.05 0.05 Weight Ixx Iyy Sxx 2.39 in2 Svv 1.500 in R -xx R -yy Steel Beam Design Pinned - Pinned Bm Wt. Added to Loads LL & ST Act Together Minor Axis Bending ! 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Title : T- Mobile Dsgnr: KAR Description : Scope : Values for LRFD Design.... J 6.670 in4 Zx 3.200 in3 Zy 2.620 in3 Code Ref: AISC 9th ASD, 1997 IJBC, 2003 IBC, 2003 NFPA 5000 8.12 #/ft 5.230 in4 3.340 in4 2.620 in3 2.230 in3 1.480 in 1.180 in 0.32 0.32 -0.364 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.32 0.32 Fy Load Duration Factor Elastic Modulus Job # 09 -390 Date: 8:53AM, 24 JUN 09 Page 1 t- mobite.ecw: Calcu I a lions 46.00ksi 1.00 29,000.0 ksi Note! Short Term Loads Are WIND Loads. #7 Summary Using: TS4X3X3/16 section, Span = 13.50ft, Fy = 46.0ksi End Fixity = Pinned - Pinned, Lu = 2.00ft, LDF = 1.000 Actual Allowable Moment 1.073 k -ft 5.642 k -ft ft) : Bending Stress 5.776 ksi 30.360 ksi fb / Fb 0.190: 1 Shear fv : Shear Stress fv /Fv 0.318 k 0.283 ksi 0.015 : 1 10.350 k 18.400 ksi Beam OK Short Terni Load Case Governs Stress Max. Deflection Length /DL Defl Length /(DL ±LL Defl) -0.364 in 2,586.4 : 1 445.6 : 1 0.000 0.000 0.000 «- These columns are Dead + Live Load placed as noted -» DL LL LL +ST LL LL +ST Maximum Only @C1. Center (@. Center A. Cants A Cants 1.07 k -ft 0.18 1.07 0.000 in 0.000 in 0.000 in 0.000 0.000 in k -ft k -ft k -ft k -ft k k k k k/ft k/ft k/ft ft ft "L ACTIVITY NUMBER: D09 -089 DATE: 07 -15 -09 PROJECT NAME: T - MOB ILE SITE ADDRESS: 973 SOUTHCENTER MALL DEPARTMENTS: Building Division El Public Works DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete Comments: Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter # Response to Correction Letter # X Revision # 1 After Permit Issued TUES /THURS ROUTING: Please Route ri APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Documents/routing slip.doc 2 -28 -02 • PERMIT COORD COPYM PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP Fire Prevention Structural n Planning Division ❑ Permit Coordinator ri DUE DATE: 07-16 -09 Incomplete ❑ Not Applicable REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: Structural Review Required ❑ No further Review Required ❑ DUE DATE: 08-13-09 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions ❑ Not Approved (attach comments) n Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: •PERMIT COORD COPY M PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D09 -089 DATE: 05 -29 -09 PROJECT NAME: T - MOBILE SITE ADDRESS: 973 SOUTHCENTER MALL X Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # DEPARTMENTS: AT / VC Ott •01•0 Glf Bill ding Division P lic Works DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: Complete Comments: 'Permit Center Use Only • • INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: TUES/THURS RO TING: Please Route Structural Review Required E No further Review Required n REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved ❑ Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Documents/routing slip.doc 2 -28 -02 Approved with Conditions 5 ,, 1 , A V C ' a i • Fire rev ntion Structural (Tues., Thurs.) Incomplete U Response to Incomplete Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued DATE: Planning Division Permit Coordinator ❑ DUE DATE: 06-02-09 Not Applicable DUE DATE: 06-30 -09 Not Approved (attach commen s) ❑ Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: RIEVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS 1 61 1 -2n -nc Summary of Revision: iAyz, Gyi-p Ki--(112 ur Fels 1 fivi9vapp Summary of Revision: Received by: R A.,.) A- 41,Js Received by: REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE IMI girt 1 61 1 -2n -nc Summary of Revision: iAyz, Gyi-p Ki--(112 ur Fels 1 fivi9vapp Summary of Revision: Received by: R A.,.) A- 41,Js REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Sununary of Revision: Received by: REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: RIEVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS S ummary of Revision: Received by: PROJECT NAME: 1� PERMIT NO:111 b0 SITE ADDRESS: � �L/�. tfYL ORIGINAL ISSUE DATE: 0x11-1 REVISION LOG (please print) (please print) (,please print) (please print) (edema v rintt City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us REVISION SUBMITTAL 1 Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: 7 / - Plan Check/Permit Number: 0 09 — O 8 I ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # ❑ Response to Correction Letter # Ef Revision # after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Project Name: - I- /t4D BI L E 5 O itk A t -L Project Address: 777 .5 O STN G Z AA. ld I--L E Lttr .d% Z'- l +- l - g Contact Person: I y 14r A.T5 Phone Number: Li ZS Z.73 1 S°-) ? Summary of Revision: Ll- ivDLoq-b &lr1%!' Tfrl& 5 T - 0 0-) '7 GH,41,,a4..eb o NnfLE TV Es E 3Y EL LA)k ADDED A-ND 7 Lei 0 V7 - GMA -.r4 - .1, Sheet Number(s): A - (o , A - ( • ) A- - (o _ Z "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: Entered in Permits Plus on nAtclA C \applications \forms - applications on Tine \revision submittal Created: 8 -13 -2004 Revised: 1 -2009 R� _ Cm, °F' 1 1.4 'JUL 151009 PERMIT CENTER Kind of Fixture Fixture Units No. of Fixtures Total Fixture Units Public Private Public Private Bathtub and Shower 4 4 Shower, per head 2 2 Dishwasher 2 2 Drinking fountain (each head) 1 .5 Hose bibb (interior) 2.5 2.5 Clotheswasher or laundry tub 4 2 Sink, bar or lavatory 2 1 1 2. Sink, Clinic flushing 8 8 Sink, kitchen 3 2 1 3 Sink, other (service) 3 1.5 Sink, wash fountain, circle spray 4 3 Urinal, flush valve, 1 GPF 5 2 Urinal, flush valve, >1 GPF 6 2 Water closet, tank or valve, 1.6 GPF 6 3 I CD Water closet, tank or valve, >1.6 GPF 8 4 • Non - Residential Sewer Use Certification Pursuant to King County Code 28.84, all sewer customers who establish a new service which uses metropolitan sewage facilities shall be subject to a capacity charge. The amount of the charge is established annually by the King County Council at a rate per month per residential customer or residential customer equivalent for a period of fifteen years. The purpose of the charge is to recover costs of providing sewage treatment capacity for print or pe) Owner's , �\ Owner's Name �a (Last, First, , Middle Initial) �] /1 Subdivision Name SICt VOL NV_ _ML d Lot # C t 1 Subdiv. # Block # Building Name (if applicable) T - Mob; It_ Property Street Address p22 a &t.)'f# (t lif i $ 4.L I elk City, State, ZIP )Y- LOt \CL \p,)IN � Owner's Phone Number ( ) 551 eisol Owner's Mailing Address (if different from above) 1 ) t40) W, ItS11irL $ivdL 14 A. Fixture Units Fixture Units x Number of Fixtures = Total Fixture Units Total Fixture Units I Residential Customer Equivalent (RCE) 20 fixture units equal 1.0 RCE Total No. of Fixture Units _ 20 RCE For King County use: Account # Monthly Rate '. Six Month City or Sewer District Date of Connection Side Sewer Permit # A B r n King County (To be completed for all new sewer connections, reconnections or change of use of existing connections. This form does not apply to repairs or replacements of existing sewer connections within five years of disconnect.) new sewer customers. The charge is collected semi - annually. All future billings can be prepaid at a discounted amount. Questions regarding the capacity charge or this form should be referred to King County's Wastewater Treatment Division at (206) 684 -1740. Property Tax ID # Party to be Billed (if different from owner) Party's Mailing Address: or Property Contact Phone # ( ) Demolition of pre- existing building? 0 Yes Ty440 Type of building demolished Sewer disconnect date B. Other Wastewater Flow (in addition to Fixture Unit; identified in Section A) Type of Facility /Process: WirCUkk - nb 40.2 1 Estimated Wastewater Discharge: 140 Gallons /days Residential Customer Equivalents (RCE): 187 gallons per day equal:3 1.0 RCE Total Discharge (gal /dad') 187 C. Total Residential Customer Equivalents: (add A & B) RCE I certify that the information gi n is corm t. I understan that the capacity charge lei ied will be based on this information and any deviation will require resubmission of corrected data for determination of a revised capacity charge. Signature of Owner/ Representative Print Name of Owner / ��k��trS Representative Department of Natural Resources and Parks MAY 0 TU LA 9. 20U9 rl RCE License Name Type Specialty 1 Specialty 2 Effective Date Expiration Date Status SOUNDS1055KD SOURCES INC CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR GENERAL UNUSED 5/4/1995 5/3/'1998 ARCHIVED CHIEFCI998CL CHIEF CONSTRUCTION INC CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR GENERAL UNUSED 2/13/2001 2/9/2003 EXPIRED Name Role Effective Date Expiration Date ADKINS, DAYLE PRESIDENT 10/14/1997 Bond Amount ADKINS, SAM VICE PRESIDENT 10/14/1997 445499C Bond Bond Company Name Bond Account Number Effective Date Expiration Date Cancel Date Impaired Date Bond Amount Received Date 2 DEVELOPERS SURETY &t INDEM CO 445499C 10/10/2001 Until Cancelled $12,000.00 10/12/2001 DEVELOPERS Untitled Page General /Specialty Contractor Name Phone Address Suite /Apt. City State WOODINVILLE WA Zip 98072 County KING Business Type Corporation Parent Company Other Associated Licenses Business Owner Information Bond Information • A business registered as a construction contractor with LEtI to perform construction work within the scope of its specialty. A General or Specialty construction Contractor rnust maintain a surety bond or assignment of account and carry general liability insurance. Business and Licensing Information HAWK BUILDING CONTRACTORS INC 4254021818 PO BOX 2318 UBI No. Status License No. License Type Effective Date Expiration Date Suspend Date Specialty 1 Specialty 2 • 601822387 ACTIVE HAWKBCI034PM CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR 10/14/1997 12/23/2009 GENERAL UNUSED Page 1 of 2 https: // fortress .wa.gov /lni/bbip/Detail.aspx 07/14/2009 449 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. 0 :0 0 DATE: SCALE: C 1 C w t n C e m's u 0111 IA mug iaC ILA c l o al a V g _D; - 4 �m C GP v) DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 11 z 0 1 TMOOaOQq KAY 22 '09 05,22.Q SHEET: Z kip Z V W G W CC J W 1/4" =1' -O" 26 A -3 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 a 10 11 12 ALL STOREFRONT LIGHTING MUST BE INCANDESCENT AND ON SEPARATE CIRCUIT AND ON 1 DAY TIME CLOCK SET TO MALL'S OPERATING HOURS I I a ALL SPRINKLER HEAPS IN THE FORWARD SELLING. AREA ARE TO BE CONGEALED POP OFF COVER TYPE. "' ""'°' """ 0,004 " .. � E ALL SUPPORT TO BE FROM STRUCTURAL BEAMS AND JOISTS AND NOT FROM DECK ABOVE STOREFRONT SI6NA6E MUST BE ON AND 1 DAY SEPARATE CIRCUIT ON TIME CLOCK SET TO MALL'S OPERATING HOURS. i VERIFY WITH WESTFIELD'S ON SITE TENANT COORDINATOR ON ALL LOCATIONS OF ACCESS PANELS LANDLORD'S EQUIPMENT .. -- : ._.....m .: - ::. . - ,.. -.... -..n.- . ,, . 5' -I" CL - 4 ACP - 1 COORDINATE WITH CA VENDOR FOR ADJACENT CEILING SUPPORT SHALL COMPLY I. WIT SEISMIC BRACING REQUIREMENTS FOR THAT REGION 10' A.F.F. 10' 0' - 6" � TENANT FIXTURES REQUIREMENTS. — — 11 • � _ Jl• ,_. •_ • E, r - I - .1 L_ r r 1 . i ' ' . In I - t i �I `r xti n- ` I I INVENTORY ? ___ - : EQ. • Ea. AMI H _ i i I i I ❑ i AMI d AMI EE I 1 GI n EQ. EQ. ( • _w r ._ _ _ __ —, ' i I • E• TELECOM ROOM I 1 FFI I I ^ • = o m . O O o AMI • 1 - - t f I� I — - _ _ _ 11111 I f n 4 L F.e; f = RECESSED AY SS D DISPL mo. ( ~1 (� ,, 1 1 1 1 _ -� 11 — - - REG GI ' WINDOW GABLE SYSTEM, FOIL. _ PROVIDE BLOCKING O PER MANUFACTURERS ' RECOMMENDATIONS m —', L ' \ 11 , I 1 U I— • EX� L \ I I I i I 1 EE _ • / I '/ • • \\ • \\ • o m � /i - 0 0 BACK OF I— A �. 111111E 111111111 A M 1 I MI A 1 _ / / // .r' /AiI I' ' I -f HOUSE J I \ G ; 10' -8" A.F.F. 1 ,-- -. 111111111 ` „,../ 1 E MI 1111 � 1 Mil 1_,_ _ s �� I - >! -� • AtA2 1 I I � I EX II � 1 O O . I/ ��• ��: ' CL -2 � SALES AREA I 1 10' -0" A.F.F. � ;� � I <T CORRIDOR _ MALL ; // AMI 1 r I k D _, 1 _1 • 8' -0" A.F.F. // . • � . 0 — RECESSED DISPLAY m l a i3s , +; AMI e EE �3 I Mil 4 L II k `, ( EX 11 ' I O O / / f f • ' .......... WINDOW GABLE \ 11 a -- it ' TOILET ROOM `` AMI 0 AMI I® ®I AM2 AMI O AMI F3D AM2 O O AMI A MI SYSTEM, FOIE. = P BLOCKING O PER MANUFACTURER'S I RECOMMENDATIONS ttl a' £8 I CU . Y s . • EM i EQ. EQ. — - G I lf El a au � i'.: t�sia�' arl y ,st3�7tii - • . 1, ____ _ . , adl SPe ,•i me�113i�icC 4¢id4iN�°�U'�krad�lkdkR - 01 ' • � �dta: 5�3S.!"' �` o:^ Gd: �f�'. ��v' �sj`.biw4 / ��.1'eui�s' , 'E�l�� Lkks7; A 1 t �. C NCE J? JUN E. EQ. HALLWAY ADJACENT TENANT COORDINATE WITH START AGP -I LAYOUT - CASEWORK VENDOR FOR COORDINATE EXACT CASEWORK MOUNTED LIGHT LOCATION TO 10' -6" A.F.F. O C FIXTURES REQUIREMENTS. ACCOMMODATE LIGHT 2009 F I XTURES City of ukwl BUIL , DIVISioity D1 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN . 1/4 " =1' -0" CEILING # CEILING TYPE FLAME SPREAD RATING SYMBOL DESCRIPTION - EQUIPMENT, HVAG EQUIPMENT, AN I. LIGHTING, ELECTRICAL D SPRINKLERS ARE TO BE MOUNTED AT POINTS IN ACT-I AS NOTED IN GRAPHIC BELOW UNLESS OTHERWISE DIMENSIONED ON RCP. 2X4 ACT TILE 2X2 ACT TILE SALES AREA - LAY -IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM: ARMSTRONG - DESIGNER SERIES 1'161, FINE FISSURED SECOND LOOK; GLASS A, 24 "X48" TEGULAR EDGE, 15/16" TEE GRIP. GLASS A AMI SEMI - RECESSED DOWN LIGHT l® *DI SEMI - RECESSED DOWN LIGHT AM2 all CEILING OUTLET 0 COMPACT FLUORESCENT CI LIGHT FIXTURE (ACP -1I v IACP BACK -OF HOUSE / HALLWAY - LAY -IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM - LAY -IN ACOUSTICAL GEILIN6 SYSTEM: ARMSTRONG - ARMATUFF 862, 24 "X48" SQUARE LAY -IN, 15/16" TEE GRID GLASS A (1 - 2I + + + 1 I + zefol e- \ 1 I 3/4" WEATHER HEAD 3/4" RIGID GALV. CONDUIT I I C't' Q' Q. Q. Q. PITCH POCKET OR FLASHING IACP-3I SALES AREA - LAY -IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM: ARMSTRONG - ARMATUFF 860, 24 "X48" SQUARE LAY -IN, 15/16" TEE GRID GLASS A COMPATIBLE WITH ROOF EXISTING. ROOFING EXISTING ROOF DECK �— _' 2X2 FLUORESCENT -' LIGHT FIXTURE 2. CENTER ACT GRID WITHIN EACH ROOM UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 3. INSTALL ACT CEILING SYSTEMS PER DETAIL GI /A -12. 4. REFER TO DETAIL DI /A -12 FOR INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED GYP. BD. CEILING. 5. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR FIXTURE TYPES. TOILET ROOM - GYP. BD.: 'TYPE 'X' GYP. D. CEILING ON 3 -5/8" X 20 ga. METAL STUDS AT 16" O.G. 5/8" T B W/ TAPED JOINTS, SANDED SMOOTH TO A LEVEL 5 FINISH. PAINT P -2. CLASS A 1 CL-1 I E 2X4 FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURE EXI'TIN6 STRUCTURE I "X I" UNISTRUT SUPPORT STEEL STRAP OR I/4" ALL THREAD KICKERS TO UNISTRUT @ 4 PLACES TYPICAL STOREFRONT SOFFIT: - GYP. BD 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. CEILING ON 3 -5/8" X 20 ga. METAL STUDS AT 16" O.G. W/ TAPED JOINTS, SANDED SMOOTH TO A LEVEL 5 FINISH. PAINT P -2. SALES AREA - SUSPENDED GYP. BD.: 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. CEILING ON USG OR ARMSTRONG SUSPENDED DRYWALL GRID SYSTEM W/ TAPED JOINTS, SANDED SMOOTH TO A LEVEL 5 FINISH. PAINT P -3. CLASS A CLASS A CA E2 1X4 FLUORESCENT WRAP CL I EE 1 REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE. 0 0 RECESSED EMERGENCY EGRESS LIGHT E SURFACE MTD. DUAL HEAD >r(� EMERGENCY LIGHT UNIT W/ COMPACT BATTERY PACK. ILLUMINATED EXIT SIGN; EX INSTALL AS SHOWN ON PLAN �T 3/4" CLAMP I CL - 3 MAXIMUM COMPRESSION STRUT SIZES , NYLON BUSHING SIZE 1/2" $ X 22 SA. MAX HT 3'-0" LOW VOLTAGE BY AUDIO VENDOR TO DATA INVENTORY ROOM: - GYP. BD.: 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. OVER 1/2" CEMENT BOARD OVER AMIGO SECURITY MESH (ASH .5 -I3F) CEILING ON 3 -5/8 X 20 ga. METAL STUDS AT 16 O.G. P -2 FINISH GLASS A BACKBOARD - ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILING CL - 4 I 3/4" 3/4 f X 22 SA. 4 -3 1" X 20 SA 6 4'-0"0 SURFACE DOWN LIGHT NOTE: SURFACE MTD PENDANT KARTELL KART-0 1 W ATT MAX FF2 CARDINAL RED SUSPENSION 2.5 ' WIDE WITH 6 FOOT CORD U.L. LISTED. 1 1/4" $ X 20 SA. T-0" TENANT G.G. TO COORDINATE LOCATION AND ROOFING REQUIREMENTS WITH LANDLORD. RECESSED ENTRY: - METAL.: M -3 METAL PANEL OVER 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP. 52. CEILING ON 3 -5/8" X 20 ga. METAL STUDS AT 16" O.G. 1 CL -5 I 1 V2" 4 x 20 SA. 0'-0" .� 2 X 20 SA. tt -0 ., .n _ ...:..... RECEIVED CITY OF TUKi�iILA MAY 'MAY 19 NO9 q 11. PERMIT CENTER 069f 1 HR RATEa: (2) LAYERS 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP BP OVER METAL STUD FRAMING PER PLANS. TAPE JOINTS, SAND SMOOTH, AND PREPARE SURFACE FOR FINISH AND PAINT P -2. 2 1 /2" 4 X 10 SA. w - 0" 1 CL -6 I 3" ¢X10 QA. 3 1/2" $ X 10 SA. 1T -3" 23'-3" I pCp -1 CEILING SYSTEM /FINISH A•F'F•I CEILING HEIGHT 1101 -6" Al CEILING SCHEDULE A4 SYMBOL LEGEND A7 GENERAL NOTES A9 WEATHER HEAD NOT ALL USED AT THIS LOCATION NOT ALL USED AT THIS LOCATION N.T.S. MUSIC SYSTEM 2 5 4 5 6 T 8 a 10 11 12 449 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. 0 :0 0 DATE: SCALE: C 1 C w t n C e m's u 0111 IA mug iaC ILA c l o al a V g _D; - 4 �m C GP v) DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 11 z 0 1 TMOOaOQq KAY 22 '09 05,22.Q SHEET: Z kip Z V W G W CC J W 1/4" =1' -O" 26 A -3 QTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION 1 HP1 EQUIPMENT CABINET 40 CAB / 1 TOTAL SQ. FOOTAGE: 5 0 INVENTORY SHELVING - BRIGHT BASIC CARBON STEEL WIRE SHELVES. SHLV 1,139 SQ. FT. BACK OF HOUSE: 1 PBD PEG BOARD 1 1 59 SQ. FT. 1 119 SQ. FT. COUNTERTOP PHOTOCOPIER PSP (KIDS TABLE) P 1 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER - SEE SPECIFICATIONS 1 3 HON 500 SERIES 36" WIDE FOUR - DRAWER LATERAL FILE, 53 -1/4H X 19 -1/40, BLACK. ANS FCAB "ANSWERS" SIGNAGE CL1 0 1 WB (6X4) QUARTET 6X4 MARKER DRY -ERASE BOARD WITH ALUMINUM FRAME. ITEM #518928; MODEL #8537 LINE UP WALL 1 0 30" ROUND TABLE & 2 CHAIRS CL2 0 SIDEKICK LOUNGE CHAIR RT1 1 RECTANGLE PLAYGROUND TABLE FG2 0 LAYOUT SUMMARY TOTAL # OF POS STATIONS: 4 ACCESSORIES CASE HP1 TOTAL OCCUPANTS: 40 T27 1 TOTAL SQ. FOOTAGE: 1,749 SQ. FT. 0 HIDEOUT ACRYLIC PANEL SALES AREA: 1,139 SQ. FT. BACK OF HOUSE: 314 SQ. FT. INVENTORY: 118 SQ. FT. TELCO: 59 SQ. FT. HALLWAY / TOILET ROOM: 119 SQ. FT. 0 PSP (KIDS TABLE) BW4 FIXTURE, FURNITURE, & GRAPHIC SCHEDULE AC2 3 ACCESSORIES CASE HP1 0 HIDEOUT WALL PANEL T27 1 MANAGERS DESK ACR1 0 HIDEOUT ACRYLIC PANEL HT1 0 HIDEOUT TABLE T28R 1 KITCHENETTE - RIGHT BPK 1 BILL PAY KIOSK KT1 0 PSP (KIDS TABLE) BW4 1 BACK WRAP (4- PERSON) LS1 3 LIFESTYLE WALL ANS 1 "ANSWERS" SIGNAGE CL1 0 HIDEOUT LOUNGE CHAIR LU1 5 LINE UP WALL FG1 0 FIXTURE DIGIT GRAPHIC #1 CL2 0 SIDEKICK LOUNGE CHAIR RT1 1 RECTANGLE PLAYGROUND TABLE FG2 0 FIXTURE DIGIT GRAPHIC #2 CL3 0 GATEWAY LOUNGE CHAIR RW1 1 RATE WALL PLAN W/ SOLID PANEL FG3 0 FIXTURE DIGIT GRAPHIC #3 CS1 0 PSP OTTOMAN STOOL RW2 1 ACCESSORY WALL W /SLAT PANEL FG4 0 FIXTURE DIGIT GRAPHIC #4 CS3 0 TECH CHAT STOOL ( +1 FUTURE) SB4 1 SERVICE BAR (4- PERSON) FG5 0 FIXTURE DIGIT GRAPHIC #5 CT1 1 CIRCULAR PLAYGROUND TABLE SKI , 0 SIDEKICK TABLE GWG 0 GATEWAY GRAPHIC CT2 1 CIRCULAR PLAYGROUND TABLE ST1 0 GATEWAY SIDE TABLE STS 0 "STICK TOGETHER" SIGN (STACKED) CW3 0 CASH WRAP (3- PERSON) SW1 0 23" FRAMED SLAT WALL T89 2 WINDOW CABLE DISPLAY SW2 2 43" FRAMED SLAT WALL WR 0 WINDOW WRAP TC1 0 TECH CHAT ( +1 FUTURE) A -4 1/4 " =1' -0" QTY 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 0 SYMBOL X L 00 CART SAFE FIXTURE PLAN DESCRIPTION U/C REFRIGERATOR SINK MICROWAVE LOCKERS 2 WATER COOLER W/ 2 EXTRA BOTTLES BUSH VISIONS PERSONAL COMPUTER STATION, GALAXY FINISH U/C SAFE. 24 "W X 27 "H X 16 "D. WEIGHT 120LBS, G.C. TO BOLT TO FLOOR AS REQUIRED. 42" ROUND TABLE & 4 CHAIRS Al FIXTURE PLAN TELECOM ROOM TENANT IS TO CONTACT WESTFIELD'S ON SITE TENANT COORDINATOR TO GET REQUIREMENTS FOR TRANSPORTING SAFE INCLUDING ROUTE TO TENANT SPACE A5 CORRIDOR (1) NEW H.C. TOILET ROOMS W/ NEW H.C. GRAB BARS AND PLUMBING FIXTURES. GENERAL NOTES 16'-10 1/4" L 15' -0 1/4" tesNUMEBEMIGINNI ,i4 „, nraE s D Pu3i?iEl tk+^�e ISE: ? i . T- li°.O:.t£ w$!i 0 2. ALL SERVICE COUNTERTOPS TO COMPLY W/ TAS / ANSI / ADA. SCHEDULE & NOTES 1 HALLWAY 1. PROVIDE BLOCKING AND BACKING AS DEFINED IN SPECIFICATION SECTION 06100 IN EXISTING WALLS AND NEW PARTITIONS FOR ALL CASEWORK, SHELVING, COUNTERTOPS, TOILET ACCESSORIES, AND OWNER SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT. COORDINATE W/ ALL SHOP DRAWINGS. ADJACENT TENANT ADJACENT TENANT 16'- 101/4” FURNITURE & FIXTURE NOTES 14' -10" 10 1. FIXTURES FURNISHED BY OWNER AND INSTALLED BY OWNER VENDOR (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED), COORDINATE ALL FIXTURE LOCATIONS WITH FIXTURE VENDOR. 2. FIXTURE QUANTITIES LISTED ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. IT IS OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL QUANTITIES AND COORDINATE WITH CASEWORK VENDOR. 3. FURNITURE FURNISHED BY OWNER AND INSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED). COORDINATE ALL FURNITURE LOCATIONS WITH FURNITURE VENDOR. 4. FURNITURE QUANTITIES LISTED ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. IT IS THE OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL QUANTITIES AND COORDINATE WITH CASEWORK VENDOR. 5. ATTACH ALL FIXTURES TO FLOOR AND WALL BLOCKING PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS. SEE GENERAL NOTE #1 ON SHEET A-2 FOR BLOCKING. 6. REFER TO RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX ON SHEET A -0 FOR COORDINATION OF BACK OF HOUSE ITEMS. 7. BACK OF HOUSE FURNITURE FURNISHED BY OWNER'S VENDOR AND INSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED). 8. FOR VIDEO SCREENS, PROVIDE BLOCKING AND BACKING AS DEFINED IN SPECIFICATIONS AND MFR'S REQUIREMENTS. COORDINATE WITH OWNER. 10 FIXTURES: FURNITURE: 2' -5 1/2" LEGEND SHEET SYMBOLS FIXTURE TAG FURNITURE TAG Do9ocf MALL REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE AP ROVE JUN 0 4 2009 12 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY. ``9 Z009 PERMIT CEN 12 DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 449 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as on "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. • m - • _ ea � 2 4+ ^ C 11.1 .0 • u °� v CU el z w M to to v z 0 oc II AY 22 1y, 05.22.041 SHEET: TM00 z W re La. N Ln N b 01 CO tPt eL m ° - o • LL 43) N 03 c o O . N CO O .c C O1 0 o ▪ d 01 L o to H as 41 ' an H l7 = O E 0 I 1/4" = I' -O" DG A -4 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 449 to iv 1-; _ C 44 cn C CI 11/1 V 0/1 t IA a Q o �w VI g M ea la El7r z 0 Tit 05.22.Oq SHEET: TM00 -100 NAT 22 '09 v- vl o Ln w N 'u co 0 p N o o s o p Ln -° ti 00 " NTS D6 A-5 DOOR SCHEDULE CONSULTING ENGINEER 1 2 5 4 5' 6 "! 8 q 1 0 1 1 12 7 DOOR UL# FRAME FINISH THRSLD. HARDWARE A. HARDWARE FINISHES SHALL BE SATIN CHROME 626 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. B. ALL LOCKSETS & LATCH SETS SHALL BE LEVER HANDLES C. VERIFY ALL EXISTING DOOR HARDWARE TO COMPLY WITH CURRENT CODE. SHALL NOT REQUIRE TIGHT GRASPING, TIGHT PINCHING OR TWISTING OF THE WRIST TO OPERATE. VERIFY EXISTING DOOR HANDLES, PULLS, LATCHES, LOCKS & OTHER OPERATING DEVICES ARE INSTALLED BETWEEN 34" - 48" AFF. D. GC TO INSTALL OWNER PROVIDED CORES PER HARDWARE SCHEDULE AT TIME OF STORE TURNOVER. E. AT EXISTING DOORS TO REMAIN, VERIFY THAT EXISTING DOOR HARDWARE MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SPECIFIED HARDWARE. REPLACE AS REQUIRED. F. DOORS WITH CLOSERS SHALL COMPLY WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1. 5LBF MAXIMUM FORCE FOR OPENING DOOR 2. FROM AN OPEN POSITION OF 70 °, DOOR SHALL TAKE AT LEAST 3 SECONDS TO MOVE TO A POINT 3 INCHES FROM THE LATCH, MEASURED TO THE LEADING EDGE OF THE DOOR. * aooa 3du aooa LOCATION DM MAT./ FLASH MAT./ FNSH DETALS DOOR FRAME QTY. ITEM DESCRIPTION MFG. NUMBER MFG. FINISH REMARKS WIDTH HEIGHT THICKNESS HEAD JAMB S LL. 1 E MALL ENTRY PAIR 3' -0" 9' -0" 3/4" TEMP ALUM/ GLASS - - - - - 2 PUSH /PULL BARS BF15847 -1 ROCKWOOD 626 3/8" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS ALUMINUM BOTTOM RAIL WITH LOCK CRL DRASS A38CL OR EQUAL . 2 TRANSOM PATCH PH34BS CRL 626 2 TRANSOM PATCH WALL BRACKET 1NT304BS CRL • 626 2 TOP DOOR PATCH PH2OBS CRL 626 2 BOTTOM DOOR RAIL LOCK 777SL CRL 626 2 THUMBTURN CYLINDER DRA6OBS CRL 626 2 DUSTPROOF STRIKE AMR208BN CRL 626 2 DOOR BOTTOM RAIL DR1OSBS34SL CRL 626 _ * 2 BOTTOM PIVOT CRL8010ADJ CRL 626 2 A EXISTING EXTERIOR REAR EXIT 3 -0 VIF 7 -0" VIF 1 3/4" VIF EXIST. - EXIST. EXIST. EXIST. EXIST. _ NT1 EXT TO MATCH EXIST. _ 1 EXT TO MATCH EXIST. REPLACE DAMAGED OR EXCEEDS 1/2" HEIGHT 1 EXITING DEVICE* TRIDENT TL21OS* SECURITECK 628 KICK PLATE TO BE PROVIDED ON PUSH SIDE. VERIFY ALL EXISTING DOOR HARDWARE TO COMPLY WITH CURRENT CODE. *LOCK HARDWARE PURCHASED & INSTALLED BY NSBS (VENDOR). DOOR PREP BY GC. PROVIDE NON REMOVABLE PINS (NRP). PEEP HOLE - WIDE ANGLE SET AT 60" AFF. EXISTING DOOR - VERIFY EXISTING HARDWARE MEETS REQUIREMENTS OF, OR IS EQUAL TO SPECIFIED HARDWARE. REPLACE WITH SPECIFIED HARDWARE AS REQUIRED. H1O GENERAL NOTES 3 HINGES 461191 NRP 4.5 X 4.5 HAGER 626 1 CLOSER 1 PEEP HOLE 4000 SERIES LCN ALU AA AUDIBLE ALARM DV DOOR VIEWER AC ALARM CONTACT HM HOLLOW METAL AL ALUMINUM MHO MAGNETIC HOLD OPEN CGL CLEAR GLASS WD WOOD CONC CONCRETE CPT CARPET CWGL CLEAR WIRE GLASS 3 - NOT USED 4 A HALLWAY 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" WD - HM - - - P -1 / P -2 P -1 / P -2 1 PASSAGE LOCKSET ND1OS RHODES SCHLAGE 626 KICK PLATE TO BE PROVIDED ON PUSH SIDE. PROVIDE RISER AS REQUIRED FOR CARPET INSTALLATION. 3 BUTT HINGES TA2714 4.5 X 4.5 McKINNEY 626 _ tV 3 SILENCERS SR -64 IVES 1 CLOSER 4000 SERIES LCN ALU 1 DOORSTOP FS436 IVES 626 G10 ABBREVIATIONS 1 KICK PLATE 8X34 8400 IVES 626 5 A INVENTORY ROOM 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" HM16GA - HM16GA G7/A -11 D7/A -11 - P - 2 P -2 1 4- POINT LOCK* 4850- MP4812* SECURITECK 626 PROVIDE NON REMOVABLE PINS (NRP), PIANO TYPE HINGE OR GEARED HINGE (ROTON) AS APPROVED BY T- MOBILE. PROVIDE LATCH GUARD USE "BG" GUARD PLATE. PROVIDE 5 1/2" THROAT. VERTICALLY STIFFED HOLLOW METAL DOOR RECOMMENDED FOR SECURITY AND EASE OF INSTALLATION. *ALARM LOCK - TRILOGY 4100 DL4100, FINISH 656. * LOCK HARDWARE PURCHASED & INSTALLED BY NSBS (VENDOR), DOOR PREP BY GC. 3 PIVOT HINGE 253 HAGER 626 1 CLOSER 4000 SERIES LCN ALU p52. 12" VP \ \\ 3 SILENCERS SR -64 IVES 1 DOOR STOP FS436 IVES 626 1 KICK PLATE 8X36 8400 IVES 626 6 A RESTROOM 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" WD - HM G10/A -11 D10/A -11 - P -2 P -2 1 PRIVACY LOCKSET ND4OS RHODES SCHLAGE 626 KICK PLATE TO BE PROVIDED ON PUSH SIDE. PROVIDE APPROPRIATE RESTROOM SIGNAGE , SEE G8 /A -9. _ 3 BUTT HINGES TA2714 4.5 X 4.5 McKINNEY 626 LOUVRE 1 ii 3 SILENCERS SR -64 IVES 1 CLOSER 4000 SERIES LCN ALU - cr VENT- -' 1 DOORSTOP WS406 CLV IVES 626 TYPE "A" "A1" TYPE 'B" 1 KICK PLATE 8400 IVES 626 TYPE 7 A BACK OF HOUSE 3' -0 7' -0 „ 1 3/4 WD - HM G10/A -11 D10/A -11 - P -1 / P -2 P -1 / P- 2 1 PASSAGE LOCKSET ND7OS RHODES SCHLAGE 626 KICK PLATE TO BE PROVIDED ON PUSH SIDE. 3 BUTT HINGES TA2714 4.5 X 4.5 McKINNEY 626 G: w.�w ■rw Iww�wiwwGl■ir7ii . ■ r ww wr .S�' w wwrw w 'ii"i'""i"'"i r..,".. 3 SILENCERS SR -64 IVES . ' "� C�C' w ' + ��5 "'r "='rw i r M ■ « «rCi' .Trr�.�w A w U Mw r llwll r11rlrrww �� 1 w, w w ' www.rwwwww "'.�IIM,w1Yw,Irlllr / w 11 MMRY M I w .' rrwww�.w. w :! :: wr f i CLOSER 4000 SERIES LCN ALU 1 DOORSTOP FS436 IVES 626 j �1�+w+�� � 1 .:=5:1:::=1::::::::41:1::::: .�. «:"w I:C=, ....m....=2:=1":1:4" .�,rr■k.r.wiii.*..wi.�'w.wi ■ wiwwt»'L"�wi'«M"'ww�■' �ir.� ■r� rrr . rrrw�wTiiw r � iri�.wii='i•..N ■ ■wwwrrwwrrwr. 1 w "wwwr. .ri.r.rwiww.w..■.ww 1 KICK PLATE 8X34 8400 IVES 626 8 A JANITORS CLOSET �� 2'-6" ' " 7-0 1 3 4' / � WD HM G10 A -11 / D10 A -11 / - P -2 P -2 1 PASSAGE LOCKSET ND1OS RHODES SCHLAGE 626 KICK PLATE TO BE PROVIDED ON PUSH SIDE. 1 ( J J ■ ■r " wwwwr..r.Mr�.,wwwr2r ' .: w "K. ■» Mwi:.::: 3 BUTT HINGES TA2714 4.5 X 4.5 McKINNEY 626 - iu ■w ■ ■rrw w •rir ww «�r' 'w r "w`"cwwr+""w�"w w' ""`"`"` "_ 3 SILENCERS SR -64 IVES 1 DOORSTOP WS406 CLV IVES 626 Wr rwwrr���� w ...�Frw.� "" "'"" "` '"` """"�""" 1 KICK PLATE 8X28 8400 IVES 626 "C' TYPE TYPE "D" 9 Al TELCO ROOM 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" WD - HM G10/A -11 D10/A -11 - P -2 P -2 1 CLASSROOM LOCKSET ND7OS RHODES SCHLAGE 626 KICK PLATE TO BE PROVIDED ON PUSH SIDE. 3 BUTT HINGES TA2714 4.5 X 4.5 McKINNEY 626 J 3 SILENCERS SR -64 IVES 1 CLOSER 4000 SERIES LCN ALU 7 /// IA T o- 1 DOORSTOP FS436 IVES 626 1 KICK PLATE 8X34 8400 IVES 626 Q 1 TYPE "E" TYPE "G" TYPE "F" 1/4" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS D1 DOOR SCHEDULE D10 DOOR TYPES N.T.S. V TACTILE EXIT SIGNS: CI OMPLIANCE +� J�r O r �Q 3" HIGH INDIVIDUAL VINYL LETTERS, p o r a f EK[1 OMR 00Mk1 �� CEMU MO o o �r N U P J o CEMIT ROO M` E J � O C��i ) ` WALL MOUNTED TACTILE SIGNAGE o A o e 0 0 D D :2D=T N P OO'EI `) ( OCn1�� n &KT MP , e OF DOOR CLEAR OF DOOR O SWING. (T© EMIT �`) MOUNT © 60" TO CENTER LINE OF SIGN REQUIREMENTS: CORRESPONDING GRADE 2 SIGN TO FLOOR. BRAILLE REFER TO TACTILE 1. EACH GRADE -LEVEL EXTERIOR DOOR SHALL BE IDENTIFIED BY A TACTILE SIGN WITH THE WORD "EXIT ". NOTES (THIS DETAIL) FOR 2. EACH EXIT DOOR THAT LEADS DIRECTLY TO A GRADE -LEVEL EXTERIOR EXIT BY MEANS OF AN EXIT ENCLOSURE LETTERING ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. RAISED 1/32" / c / O / \ \ �\ � \ >v CENTERED ABOVE ENTRY DOOR; rr COLOR AND TEXT TO MATCH U MVIta BUILDING STANDARD LI g � � OR AN EXIT PASSAGEWAY IS IDENTIFIED BY A TACTILE EXIT SIGN WITH THE WORDS, EXIT ROUTE . "EXIT (1003.2.8.6.1.3) LETTERS AND NUMBERS 3. EACH EXIT DOOR THAT LEADS DIRECTLY TO A GRADE EXTERIOR EXIT BY MEANS OF A STAIRWAY OR RAMP 6 "����� Q ]� -LEVEL IS IDENTIFIED BY A TACTILE EXIT SIGN THAT STATES "EXIT STAIR DOWN ", "EXIT RAMP DOWN ", "EXIT STAIR UP" OR SHALL BE AT LEAST "EXIT RAMP UP ", AS APPROPRIATE. (1003.2.8.6.1.2) 5/8" HIGH, BUT NO 4. EACH EXIT ACCESS DOOR FROM AN INTERIOR ROOM OR AREA TO A CORRIDOR OR HALLWAY THAT IS REQUIRED TO HIGHER THAN 2" 1 11 , •..a.,"„�b _ -I � ' HAVE A VISUAL EXIT SIGN IS IDENTIFIED BY A TACTILE EXIT SIGN WITH THE WORDS, "EXIT ROUTE ". (1003.2.8.6.1.4) • 5. EACH EXIT DOOR THROUGH A HORIZONTAL EXIT SHALL BE IDENTIFIED BY A SIGN WITH THE WORDS, TO EXIT'. SIGN BACKGROUND (1003.2.8.6.1.5) COLOR: PMS262C. LETTERS AND 6. LETTERS ON SIGNS ARE RAISED 1 /32 ", SANS SERIF UPPERCASE CHARACTERS AND ARE ACCOMPANIED BY GRADE REFER TO SPEC FOR NUMBERS SHALL 2 BRAILLE. (1003.2.8.6 & 11178.5.5.2) ADDITIONAL BE UPPER CASE, 7. RAISED CHARACTERS ARE BETWEEN 5/8" AND 2" HIGH. (1003.2.8.6 & 1117B.5.5.2) SANS SERIF TYPE •, - THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED WHEN BUILDING IS OCCUPIED 0 '`� SIGN REQUIREMENTS INFORMATION. 8. BRAILLE DOTS ARE 1 /10" ON CENTER IN EACH CELL WITH 2/10" SPACE BETWEEN CELLS, MEASURED FROM THE COLOR: WHITE SECOND COLUMN OF DOTS IN THE FIRST CELL TO THE FIRST COLUMN OF DOTS IN THE SECOND CELL. (1003.2.8.6 & 1117B.5.6) [NOTE: CA AND OTHER JURISDICTIONS ONLY] 9. BRAILLE DOTS ARE RAISED A MINIMUM OF 1/40" ABOVE THE BACKGROUND. (1003.2.8.6 & 1117B.5.2) EXIT SIGN DETAIL B 1 READILY VISIBLE AND DURABLE SIGN SHALL BE PLACED ON THE STOREFRONT FRAME ABOVE DOOR. 2. HEIGHT OF LETTERS 1" MIN. BLACK LETTERS TO CONTRAST WITH STOREFRONT FINISH. ()EXIST DOOR SIGNAGE (INTERIOR SIDE OF DOORS) 10. CHARACTERS AND BACKGROUND OF SIGNS IS EGGSHELL, MATTE, OR OTHER NON -GLARE FINISH. (1003.2.8.6 & 11178.5.2) 11. CHARACTERS CONTRAST WITH THEIR BACKGROUND (LIGHT CHARACTERS ON A DARK BACKGROUND, OR DARK CHARACTERS ON A LIGHT BACKGROUND. (1003.2.8.6 & 1117B.5.2) 12. LETTERS ON SIGNS HAVE A WIDTH -TO- HEIGHT RATIO BETWEEN 3:5 AND 1:1 AND A STROKE WIDTH -TO- HEIGHT BETWEEN 1:5 AND 1:10. (1003.2.8.6 & 1117B.5.7) _ 13. SIGNS ARE TO BE INSTALLED ON THE WALL ADJACENT TO THE LATCH SIDE OF THE DOOR. (AT DOUBLE LEAF _ AND WHEN THERE IS NO WALL SPACE AT THE LATCH SIDE, SIGNS SHALL BE PLACED ON THE NEARE ADJACENT WALL, PREFERABLY ON THE RIGHT.) 1003.2.8.6 & 1117B.5.7 14. MOUNTING HEIGHT IS 60" FROM THE FINISHED FLOOR TO THE CENTERLINE OF THE SIGN. (1003.2.8.6 & 11178.5.7) 15. MOUNTING STANDING WITHIN APPROACH HE SWING OFT A DOOR. (1003.2.8.6 A & 1 WITHOUT 78.5 )ENCOUNTERING TACTILE EXIT SIGNAGE (PLASTIC SIGN) ()ENTRY DOOR SIGNAGE (INTERIOR SIDE OF DOORS) CITY T MAY 2rg 2019 PERMIT CENTER A SIGNAGE N ®TES Al TACTILE EXIT SIGNAGE A8 DOOR SIGNAGE N.T.S. N.T.S. 1 2 5 4 1 5 6 '1 8 cl 10 11 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 449 to iv 1-; _ C 44 cn C CI 11/1 V 0/1 t IA a Q o �w VI g M ea la El7r z 0 Tit 05.22.Oq SHEET: TM00 -100 NAT 22 '09 v- vl o Ln w N 'u co 0 p N o o s o p Ln -° ti 00 " NTS D6 A-5 DOOR SCHEDULE CONSULTING ENGINEER V2 " =1' -O" 0 in O i O h dJ 0 METAL PANEL OVER NEW STOREFRONT CONSTRUCTION. M -3 FINISH. 1/2" STAINLESS STEEL METAL REVEAL - LEASE LINE METAL PANEL OVER NEW STOREFRONT CONSTRUCTION. M -4 FINISH. 1/2" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS BY TENANT G.G. STOREFRONT ELEVATION LEASE LINE I M-4 M - 3 -6. Al ENLARGED STOREFRONT PLAN M -4 M-4 7 V" `I V r 11P 7 IV Ner II II 7 ■ 17 I 1 1/ ITV NI ■I `IIr Nir '► 1 lati I AA. AL. Alk .I►Alb. `.AL .11h, ` L' AI, AIL A r A. A. M-4 [M-4 JL I/2 u 1 -I 13/4 "� II I /2" I/2 1/2" 1/2" 2 - 0 " STAINLESS STEEL METAL .• REVEAL 10" CLEAR ANODIZED BASE (M -2) id a 4 LINE OF SOFFIT 7 ABOVE. SEE SHEET A -3 METAL PANEL OVER NEW STOREFRONT CONSTRUCTION. M - 3 1 3' -0" X 0 1' -0" "HERCULITE" GLASS AND ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOORS LINE OF DISPLAY GABLE SYSTEM ATTACHMENT 11 1/2" 11 I /2 " c.1/2" • LEASE LINE ....r .............._ ...I .... m ......... (2) EQUAL GLAZING PANELS = 4 V-6 1/4" 6' -3 1/2" 1/2" 6' -0" ILLUMINATED StGNAGE. STAINLESS .STEEL • • METAL REVEAL. • PAINT •P -2 //I 32' -ot 1 /4" 6' -4 1/2" SURFACE .MOUNTED, • INTERNALLY 3' -0" X ci' -O" 'HERCULITE" GLASS AND ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOORS M -4 " I /2" 11 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" �I 2 ' -4 1/2 11 1/2L.1.\ // 4/, //•- LEASE LINE I/2•" STAINLESS STEEL METAL REVEAL II 1/2" \-- ---10" CLEAR ANODIZED BASE (M -2) EXISTING STRUCTURAL COLUMN $ ENCLOSURE. PAINT P -I. LINE OF DISPLAY CABLE SYSTEM ATTACHMENT < C-- - - - - �_ AN APPROVED GLAZING CLIP OR GLAZING SUPPORT DEVICE SHALL BE INSTALLED WHERE ONE OR MORE SIDES OF ANY PANE OF GLASS ARE NOT FIRMLY SUPPORTED. CLIPS SHALL RESIST A FORCE OF 50 POUNDS PER LINIER FOOT APPLIED HORIZONTALLY TO ONE PANEL AT ANY POINT UP TO 42 INCHES ABOVE THE WALKING SURFACE. (IBC SECTION 2403) (3) EQUAL 6LAZIN6 PANELS = 13' -3" it /2" 11 1/2 "� 1/2' -4 1/2" 1/2" i XXXX 1/2" II 1/2" ,, 1' -11 3/4" 2' -0" 1/2" BLACK METAL REVEAL METAL PANEL OVER NEW STOREFRONT CONSTRUCTION. M -4 FINISH. M -3 1/2" STAINLESS STEEL METAL REVEAL LEASE LINE GIO -6. METAL PANEL OVER NEW STOREFRONT CONSTRUCTION. M -3 FINISH. M - 3 1/2" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS BY TENANT G.G. EASE LINE 9 lV METAL PANEL OVER NEW STOREFRONT CONSTRUCTION. to9OS9 10 10 0 0 ctl 9 O TENANT IS TO INSTALL ADDRESS VINYL. VINYL TO BE INSTALLED ON 2ND SURFACE (INTERIOR SIDE OF GLASS). NUMBERS TO BE 4" HIGH, ARIAL FONY, MOUNTED ON LOWER RIGHT HAND OF STOREFRONT FLAZING 8" FROM THE EDGE OF GLASS; 18" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR NEW TENANT SIGN CONTRACTOR TO REVIEW THE LANDLORD'S SIGN CRITERIA AND SUBMIT SHOP DINGS. FOR THE PROPOSED SIGN TO THE L.L. AND ANY OTHER GOVERNING AUTHORITIES. THE S.G. SHALL SECURE ANY AND ALL PERMITS REQ'D. FOR THE INSTALLATION AND DISPLAY OF THE PROPOSED SIGNAGE. • I EP -I I 1 EP -2 I EP -3 I M -1 i I M -2 I I M - 3 I M -4 I All SIGN MANUFACTURER'S SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE REVIEWED UNDER SEPARATE SUBMITTAL. 11 ALL MATERIALS TO BE A CLASS A RATING WITH A FLAME SPREAD INDEX OF 0 -25 AND A SMOKE DEVELOPED INDEX OF 0 -450. PANTONE COOL GRAY /U BENJAMIN MORE PAINT *2121 -30 PEWTER (MED LIGHT GRAY) PANTONE COOL GRAY 0 1U BENJAMIN MORE PAINT *2124 -30 PEEP SILVER (MED PARK GRAY) SHERMAN WILLIAMS PAINT ORDER *104S-0035418 MAGENTA KAWNEER CO. CLEAR ANODIZED *14 BRUSHED ANODIZED ALUMINUM FINISH CARDINAL INDUSTRIAL FINISHED 0031 - WH120 POLYESTER POWDER COATING SEMI GLOSS TEXTURE EXTERIOR DURABLE 12 REVIEWED CODE APP OM) COMPLIANCE JUN 0 4 2809 City of Tukwila VILPIiNG D1Vie vt ,a CARDINAL INDUSTRIAL FINISHED TO041-WHI I POLYESTER TGIG POWDER COATING FULL GLOSS SMOOTH EXTERIOR DURABLE RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY 2'g 2009 PERMIT CEN STOREFRONT FINISHES 12 C ID C -C a n C ilso C . �: n u °� 15 at a oz w M o. w tOVIVI COPYRIGHT NOTICE; These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. cc 0 9 - 1= p 0 co re o Q ai m LLi 0 N: E N W m DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 449 1 z 0 O'✓'.22.0q SHEET: 1/2 =r-0" DG T MO NAT 22 ti9 A -6 Ilu l0 Al O O EXISTING STEEL BEAM CEILING -� HANGER WIRE STOP GYP BD 6" ABOVE CEILING SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING. SEE SHEET 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUDS ® 16" O. .. I— H L._ r —� TENANT TENANT FLOORING ENLARGED STOREFRONT PLAN i 1 L EXISTING MALL BULKHEAD. G.G. TO VERIFY IN FIELD AND NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY OBSTRUCTIONS PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION 1/2" BLACK METAL REVEAL SURFACE MOUNTED, INTERNALLY ILLUMINATED SIGNAGE. REFER TO STOREFRONT ELEVATION FOR FURTHER INFORMATION 20 GA. SHEET METAL PANEL W/ ADHESIVE BACKING OVER 3/8" MDF. OVER I/2" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUDS ® 16" O.G. 3 5/8" X 20 GA METAL STUD DIAGONAL BRACING ® 48" O.G. ® 45° TO FRAMING ABOVE (AS SHOWN) -I/2" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS BY TENANT G.G. MALL LEASE LINE -NEW PAIR OF 3' -0" X 1' -O" "HERGULITE" GLASS AND ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOORS. REFER TO DOOR SCHEDULE ON SHEET A005 MALL FLOORING 1/2 "= I CO" 2 5 6 10 12 EXISTING STEEL BEAM CEILING HANGER WIRE - STOP GYP BD 6" ABOVE CEILING SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING. SEE SHEET A -3: 5/8" TYPE 'x' GYP. BD. OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUDS ® 16" O.G. A7 STOREFRONT SECTION LOCATION OF CEILING ATTACHMENT FOR DISPLAY GABLE SYSTEM L-- r ---1 TENANT 7 . '2 TENANT FLOORING i I EXISTING MALL BULKHEAD. G.G. TO VERIFY IN FIELD AND NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY OBSTRUCTIONS PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION 1/2" BLACK METAL REVEAL 20 GA. SHEET METAL PANEL W/ ADHESIVE BACKING OVER 3/8" M. OVER 1/2" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUDS ® 16" O.G. 3 5/8" X 20 GA METAL STUD DIAGONAL BRACING ® 48" O.G. ® 45° TO FRAMING ABOVE (AS SHOWN) MALL -1/2" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS BY TENANT G.G. LEASE LINE REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APR ,>s JUN 0 4 2809 City of Tukwila 8 ,IIJ.P!! DIVIc. Ir um Ni -MALL FLOORING RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY 211 /um ERMIT CENTER I/2 "= I' -0" 10 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessatlon of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. Ce 0 O 0 e co 1 - o `^Q ai m w o h uj . 00 2 3 c 10 ?CA � . o 0$ vi a S c` H �' M m e0 CL W 4A 4A >, 449 z 0 V DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 1/2 " =1' -0" TH00 05.22.0 SHEET: , A -6.1 G1 NOT USED 6"=1 D1 = I' -O" Al 1/2 " =1' -O" NOT USED / / , 1/2" -5 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUDS ® 16" O.G. - 1/2" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. 3/8" FR MDF 20 GA. SHEET METAL PANEL W/ ADHESIVE BACKING. - FRY REGLET -1/2" REVEAL MOLDING - DRM -50 -50 - FINISH 6063 T5 ALUMINUM METAL PANEL VERTICAL REVEAL G4 6"=1'-0" TENANT 5/8" TYPE "X" GYP BD OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUDS AT 16" D.G. CONTINUOUS BLOCKING AS REQUIRED STOREFRONT BASE BELOW. REFER TO Al /A -6.2 LEASE LINE (FACE OF SOFFIT ABOVE) D4 6 " = I - 0 " A4 6 " =1' -0" NOT USED 1/2" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS BY TENANT G.G. ENLARGED STOREFRONT PIER DETAIL TENANT LINE OF STOREFRONT BASE BELOW BUTT GLAZING MALL 1/4" 1/2" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS IN ALUM. BASE BY TENANT G.G. IMALLI 20 GA. SHEET METAL PANEL W/ ADHESIVE BACKING OVER 3/8" MDF. OVER 1/2" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUDS 0 16" O.G. G7 II _ I' -O II 6 " =1' -0" A7 NEUTRAL PIER DETAIL 5/8" TYPE "X" GYP BD OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.G. D7 GLAZING ATTACHMENT DETAIL 5"=1 I tIOROVIII:arnTien•%141,11.141 . 111 , 7^C1:341.11.11 1: 1 � TENANT 35/8 "X20 GA. METAL STUD FRAMING 16" O.G. 1/2" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS IN ALUM. BASE BY TENANT G.C. 10" M -2 STOREFRONT BASE LOCATION OF DISPLAY GABLE SYSTEM TENANT'S FLOORING 1' - 0" LINE OF SOFFIT ABOVE. SEE SHEET A -3. 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUDS @ 16" o.C. LEASE LINE 5/8" TYPE "X" GYP BD 3 S /8" X 20 GA. METAL STUDS @ 16" O.G. 5/8" TYPE "X" GYP BD -20 6A. SHEET METAL PANEL W/ ADHESIVE BACKING OVER 3/8" MDF. OVER 1/2" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUDS 0 lb" O.G. 1/2" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS BY TENANT G.G. TENANT STOREFRONT BASE BELOW. REFER TO Al /A -6.2 -� STOREFRONT BASE DETAIL O MALL -. - -- LEASE LINE TENANT -LEASE LINE MALL MALL FLOORING LINE OF DISPLAY f .--- GABLE SYSTEM ATTACHMENT 1/2" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS BY TENANT G.G 20 GA. SHEET METAL PANEL W/ ADHESIVE BACKING OVER 3/8" MDF. OVER 1/2" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUDS O 16" D.G. -BLOCKING AS REQUIRED MALL 11/2" x 5/4" CONT. ALUMINUM "U" CHANNEL G10 _ I' -0" D10 5"=1 A10 1/2 " =1' -0" 10 TENANT MALL STOREFRONT BASE BELOW. REFER TO Al /A -6.2 1/2" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS BY TENANT G.G. NEUTRAL PIER DETAIL NOT USED NOT USED 10 11 INE OF SOFFIT L ABOVE. SEE SHEET A -3. LEASE LINE 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUDS 16" O.G. 5/8" TYPE "X" GYP BD LEASE LINE OcIO89 12 20 GA. SHEET METAL PANEL W/ ADHESIVE BACKING OVER 3/8" MDF. OVER 1/2" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUDS 16" O.G. flEVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED JUN 0 4 2009 City of Tukwila I :.DING f. IlIQJr RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY Llg 2009 PERMIT CENTER 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE; These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to oopyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. m M C cn •C 40 4.0 ^ C • C 4 ei O GP mpg INC 111 5 p a Erl pp to el v) fn DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 449 N z 0 MAT 22 '09 05.22.041 SHEET: TM00 m N N I- CO O1 O U- AS NOTED A-6•2 OG IExn1 =, O / EXISTING REAR SERVICE DOOR TO BE WELDED SHUT REMOVE ALL HARDWARE r r # t / / / ! 1 J, 1 Ij/ ! I I Ir/f �,/' P i f/ 0 i/ ' I// / /� / ' 'J / / 0 / w ' J / I \ / (IV ( I 1/ ot[dol. \ / &., 7 ' �J / •...•T ' / //, f� b di --- / r1 \\ '-� u 01—,Z „9 T 1 1 'f �� ^. i M I GRG IExn1 / EXISTING REAR SERVICE DOOR TO BE WELDED SHUT REMOVE ALL HARDWARE „Z - , G C I E.X111 „O -,e <1 /\ / \ _ \ / \ \ / / . \ °)I J I B / J I :, - --I l )I )I I L 1 I \/ „9 — ,OI 4 \\ '-� u 01—,Z „9 �° j �� ^. i M I GRG i l -- Fi P - . 4" . F`i iI / n01—,Z —" G1 IN ELEVATION CP � �Q. IL IU v iA I/4 "= I -O" I/4 "= I' -O" 1/4 "= I -O" r5t31 r tt3 mmaut Ek�:imask FILE 4X6 WHITE GAB. BOARD. INSTALLED BY G.G. Fr GART 1 F— — — 11 1 _ JJ I r r- - - CP 2 Cl INTERIOR ELEVATION C4 INTERIOR ELEVATION �--- -FRY REGLET - 1/4" REVEAL MOLDING. SEE DETAIL GI /A -13 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE ppr JUN 0 4 2059 Ci ty of Tukwila MONI TOR BRACKET m 2' -8" 4 r SEE E SHEETS FOR POWER LOCATIONS 2 4' -I 1/2" 1 2 ' -O 3/4" VIDEO MONITORS G7 INTERIOR ELEVATION RECESSED DISPL WINDOW GABLE SYSTEM (FOI NEW ENTRY DOORS P 2 NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM. SEE SHEET A -6. RECESSED DI SPLAY WI NDOW GABLE SYSTEM (FOIL) C 4 El INTERIOR ELEVATION E4 INTERIOR ELEVATION 1/4 " =1 -O" 1/4 " =1' -0" 30 "X30" FLUSH ACCESS PANEL OR J.L. INDUSTRIES MODEL # ATM 30300 W/ SGREWDRI VER GAM OR EQUAL. CENTER ABOVE DOOR. I. LOCKERS. INSTALLED BY G.G. WATER COOLER MGR DESK P 2 PRINTER ON TOP OF SAFE RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY _'2.9 2009 PERMIT CENTEF Al INTERIOR ELEVATION 1/4"=1'-0" 3 4 S A5 1/4"= 1 S I/4 "= I' -O" a 7 .U1 I.UI a LUI FRY REGLET - 1/4" REVEAL MOLDING. SEE DETAIL G I /A -IS LUI Pig SPK INTERIOR ELEVATION I A10 I/4 " =1' -0" 0 O 0 12 INTERIOR ELEVATION 1 I I 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. p 449 arl M t C w an S .^ C • C .0 # u °� Ai me EC 4•0 N OO O 6 . n o m ] a °/ m a a • Co In 1#1 N z 0 Z FIN- < W W J ce rtl W H Z m L , n crt - m 0 - O cc Ln Ln C O CO E O N 'd 00 O _c u O d 0.1 s • cp -a DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: OE.2 2.Oci SHEET: 1/4 "= I -0" DG A TMO0 T0Oci CONSULTING ENGINEER / EXISTING REAR SERVICE DOOR TO BE WELDED SHUT REMOVE ALL HARDWARE I E.X111 „O -,e I \ 1 1 1 \ 1 1 1 I ° )II �/ J I B / F i r \1\1\1 � o )I � , �0 / _ \ °)I J I B / J I :, - --I l )I )I I L 1 I \/ n 1 '-� u 01—,Z „9 F IRE EXT. :. i l l G1 IN ELEVATION CP � �Q. IL IU v iA I/4 "= I -O" I/4 "= I' -O" 1/4 "= I -O" r5t31 r tt3 mmaut Ek�:imask FILE 4X6 WHITE GAB. BOARD. INSTALLED BY G.G. Fr GART 1 F— — — 11 1 _ JJ I r r- - - CP 2 Cl INTERIOR ELEVATION C4 INTERIOR ELEVATION �--- -FRY REGLET - 1/4" REVEAL MOLDING. SEE DETAIL GI /A -13 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE ppr JUN 0 4 2059 Ci ty of Tukwila MONI TOR BRACKET m 2' -8" 4 r SEE E SHEETS FOR POWER LOCATIONS 2 4' -I 1/2" 1 2 ' -O 3/4" VIDEO MONITORS G7 INTERIOR ELEVATION RECESSED DISPL WINDOW GABLE SYSTEM (FOI NEW ENTRY DOORS P 2 NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM. SEE SHEET A -6. RECESSED DI SPLAY WI NDOW GABLE SYSTEM (FOIL) C 4 El INTERIOR ELEVATION E4 INTERIOR ELEVATION 1/4 " =1 -O" 1/4 " =1' -0" 30 "X30" FLUSH ACCESS PANEL OR J.L. INDUSTRIES MODEL # ATM 30300 W/ SGREWDRI VER GAM OR EQUAL. CENTER ABOVE DOOR. I. LOCKERS. INSTALLED BY G.G. WATER COOLER MGR DESK P 2 PRINTER ON TOP OF SAFE RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY _'2.9 2009 PERMIT CENTEF Al INTERIOR ELEVATION 1/4"=1'-0" 3 4 S A5 1/4"= 1 S I/4 "= I' -O" a 7 .U1 I.UI a LUI FRY REGLET - 1/4" REVEAL MOLDING. SEE DETAIL G I /A -IS LUI Pig SPK INTERIOR ELEVATION I A10 I/4 " =1' -0" 0 O 0 12 INTERIOR ELEVATION 1 I I 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. p 449 arl M t C w an S .^ C • C .0 # u °� Ai me EC 4•0 N OO O 6 . n o m ] a °/ m a a • Co In 1#1 N z 0 Z FIN- < W W J ce rtl W H Z m L , n crt - m 0 - O cc Ln Ln C O CO E O N 'd 00 O _c u O d 0.1 s • cp -a DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: OE.2 2.Oci SHEET: 1/4 "= I -0" DG A TMO0 T0Oci CONSULTING ENGINEER I 1 I I 1 I i i LINE OF ACOUSTICAL TILE I CEILING. SEE SHEET A -3. j - I 5/8" TYPE 'x' GYP BD �o o 1111 = WATER I 1 WATER HEATER 1 METAL DRIP PAN , W/ 3/4" 4 DRAIN ! _ - ‘II 3/4" FIRE TREATED PLYWOOD j 1 i I 1 t 1 I i '' I 5/8" ::':: D 6" X STUDS ® 24" O.G. (2) #10 TEK SGREWS AT EAGH CONNECTION (TYP) 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP BP (TYPICAL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED). d• 3 5/8" X 20 GA METAL STUDS @ 24" O.G. FRP BOARD TO BE INSTALLED 1I9 - ,OI y - ON VERTICAL SURFACES INSIDE OF JANITOR'S CLOSET BELOW PLATFORM. FLOOR MOP SINK TENANT FLOORING I. " � 'HILTI' DN OR DS SHOT PIN SEE SHEET A -2 5 1" EMBEDMENT INTO SLAB AT 24" O.G. (I.C.B.O. #2388)- - X IL O In Fl 1/2 " =1' -0" 1 2 2 - 6 " 3 18 "XI2 "X36" LOCKABLE CABINET ABOVE BY G.G. ML -I DOOR GOAT HOOK 4 Z9 4 3 - 3 " 4'-0" 5 V —I 5 6 6 1 RESTROOM ELEVATIONS SOAP DISPENSER ACCESSORIES: I. FRAMED MIRROR: BOBRICK 8- 1652436 2. SEAT COVER DISPENSER: ITEM #420660, MODEL #HGI2 HEALTH GUARDS 3. GRAB BAR: BOBRICK 8 -6806 4. PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER: ITEM #4 GEORGIA PACIFIC GOMBI -FOLD VISTA G FOLD /MULFIFOLD DISPENSER TOILET PAPER DISPENSER: BOBRIGK 5- 16851 DOOR GOAT HOOK: BOBRIGK B- 1682"1 SOAP DISPENSER: BOBRIGK B -2112 5. 6. "1. HIGHEST OPERABLE PART OF ACCESSORY- PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER- - �_ PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER \ WASTE RECEPTACLE TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER n TOILET PAPER DISPENSER AND SANITARY NAPKIN RECEPTACLE SEAT COVER DISPENSER (FOIL) GOAT HOOK / PURSE HOOK GRAB BAR. SEE DETAIL A8 /A -8. i FRAMED MIRROR WALL MOUNTED LAVATORY WATER CLOSET VERIFY 2' -5 "CLEAR MINIMUM AT TYPICAL FIXTURE ____411 m MOP AND BROOM HOLDER MOP SINK FAUCET -MOP SINK D1 TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS N.T.S. FLOOR MOP SINK WATER HEATER ON PLATFORM ABOVE LINE OF PLATFORM ABOVE 6" 5" GEE SHEET A -2 -5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP BD (TYPICAL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED). 3 5/8" X 20 GA METAL STUDS ® 24" O.G. -FRP BOARD TO BE INSTALLED ON VERTICAL SURFACES INSIDE OF JANITOR'S CLOSET BELOW PLATFORM. JANITOR'S CLOSET DOOR BY TENANT G.G. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE. SECTION 4 I/4 =., i SEE SHEET A -2 SECTION i LINE OF ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING. SEE SHEET A -3. 30 "X3O" FLUSH ACCESS PANEL J.L. INDUSTRIES MOPE # ATM 30500 W/ SCREWDRIVER GAM OR EQUAL -WATER HEATER 3/4" FIRE TREATED PLYWOOD dJ METAL DRIP PAN •/ 5/4" 42 PRAIN UNDER WATER HEATER 6" X16 GA METAL STUDS @ 24" O.G. (2) *10 TEK SCREWS AT EACH CONNECTION (TYP) 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP BD (TYPICAL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED). �--- JANITOR'S CLOSET DOOR BY TENANT G.G. SEE POOR SCHEDULE. 3 5/8" X 20 GA METAL STUDS g 24" O.G. (USE 6" X 20 GA. STUDS PLUMBING WALL) FRP BOARD TO BE INSTALLED ON VERTICAL SURFACES INSIDE OF JANITOR'S CLOSET BELOW PLATFORM. FLOOR MOP SINK TENANT FLOORING Al MOP SINK / WATER HEATER DETAILS 1 /2 1 - 0 " F8 1/2"=I'-0" D8 1/2 " =1' -0" A8 1/2 " =1' -0" 5 -0" MIN. GLR. 10 10 18 "X12 "X36" LOCKABLE CABINET ABOVE BY G.G. TOILET ROOM ACCESSIBILITY SI GNAGE NOTE: SEE DETAIL DI /A - FOR ACCESSORY 4 FIXTURE MOUNTING HEIGHTS 12 ENLARGED TOILET ROOM PLAN NiVIEWED Fag CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED JUN 0 4 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION I NOT USED 11/2" PIA STAINLESS STEEL I 1 /2" t2O'?O8 20 GA. TRACK SECURED TO STUDS GRAB BAR NOTES: THE STRUCTURAL STRENGTH OF GRAB BARS SHALL MEET THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS: (I) BENDING STRESS IN A GRAB BAR INDUCED BY THE MAXIMUM BENDING MOMENT FROM THE APPLICATION OF 250 IbP (11I2N) SHALL BE LESS THAN THE ALLOWABLE STRESS FOR THE MATERIAL OF THE GRAB BAR. (2) SHEAR STRESS INDUCED IN A GRAB BAR BY THE APPLICATION OF 250 IbP (1112N) SHALL BE LESS THAN THE ALLOWABLE SHEAR STRESS FOR THE MATERIAL OF THE GRAB BAR. IF THE CONNECTIONS BETWEEN THE GRAB BAR AND ITS MOUNTING BRACKET OR OTHER SUPPORT IS CONSIDERED TO BE FULLY RESTRAINED, THEN DIRECT AND TORSIONAL SHEAR STRESSES SHALL BE TOTALED FOR THE COMBINED SHEAR STRESS, WHICH SHALL NOT EXCEED THE ALLOWABLE SHEAR STRESS. (5) SHEAR FORGE INDUCED IN A FASTENER OR MOUNTING DEVICE FROM THE APPLICATION OF 250 IbP (1112N) SHALL BE LESS THAN THE ALLOWABLE LATERAL LOAD OF EITHER THE FASTENER OR MOUNTING DEVICE OR THE SUPPORTING STRUCTURE, WHICHEVER IS THE SMALLER ALLOWABLE LOAD. (4) TENSILE FORGE INDUCED IN A FASTENER BY A DIRECT TENSION FORGE OF 250 IbP (11I2N) PLUS THE MAXIMUM MOMENT FROM THE APPLICATION OF 250 Hof (11I2N) SHALL BE LESS THAN THE ALLOWABLE WITHDRAWAL LOAD BETWEEN THE FASTENER AND THE SUPPORTING STRUCTURE. (5) GRAB BARS SHALL NOT ROTATE WITHIN THEIR FITTINGS. CITY OF TUKWILA MAY 2 2009 PERMIT CENTER GRAB BAR MOUNTING DETAIL 11 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. 0 U 0 E to T L m a • �o c w a. ,� C (10 NC 2 Cw VI u m IsC ^ kal a. Emu CL 10 VI 449 a �n O d ZD a o z O 0 � W > J W O � W OZ w a 5 he z _ W IA z 0 DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 05.22.01 SHEET: TM00 u' cu 5 trs CO -o a N oo 2 O N N •� s Q o • cu z-a u 4 < Q Q a. W ar O a in 6 A O ro E 0 F= G 0 0 0o o o. U L 0 � co y 1/4"=1'-0" DG A -8 F+1 480 998 7223 CONSULTING ENGINEER DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 449 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. I- m C w iloo 4a N c _ H u ° � e15 'v= ^ 'S El! csl V I E a; M O. W V H H NAY 2219 05.22.0-1 SHEET: TMOO-100g1 as g g d 3 W. Xi "0 O • E G 1/4"=1'-0" DG A-9 F+1 480 998 7223 CONSULTING ENGINEER to I I 12 � 44" MIN. hil 60" MIN. 2' -0" UPPER CHARACTERS 5 �� `� � , 4" BACKSPLASH ON WALL SIDE 3/4" 1' -II 1/4" PUSH SIDE IS „ MIN. r PROVIDE THIS ADDITIONAL SPACE IF DOOR O IS EQUIPPED WITH BOTH A LATCH AND A CLOSER. SINGLE LEVER, SINGLE HOLE MOUNT �= „� l�j \ `� � LAVATORY P'AUGET RE: PLUMBING � PULL SIDE 1 24" MIN. CLEAR AT � - II RAISED I/32" y 1 EXTERIOR DOORS. 12 18" MIN. CLEAR AT � � INTERIOR DOORS F RONT APPROACH " S �. �� I ♦ HEIGHT OF LETTERING n � 5/8 MIN. TO 2 MAX. NEW LAVATORY NEW SINK DRAINAGE PIPE N - - , _ W ; 1 ' G II BRAILLE GRADE II BRAILLE _ M EN WOMEN - i 0 ' isi S IGN VIEW GRADE 2 ACCESSIBILITY �'— C O • BRAILLE SYMBOL TO BE ET E ROOM ENTRANCE r PULL SIDE * I IY V 1 1- N 1- It) z Q I- 9 2 SIGN VIEW 0 LIM O ----., 1 j:i s:MN. ._. ♦+� ��, ♦� / i� A 4 i re / �� } PROVIDE ACRYLIC REVERSE - SILK SCREENED SIGNS WITH ACCESSIBILITY, RAISED ill INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF LETTERS, AND BRAILLE, AT ACCESSIBLE TOILET FACILITIES; ONE FOR EACH SEX OR ONE UNISEX. I' -5 1/2" - mJIMININIIIIIIIIIIIMII --Ni X _ SINK ' R M - - _!a Wi �- G3 SECTION THROUGH — o x �m.. _. PLAQUE ELEVATION VIEW N.T.S. PUSH SIPE O 54" MIN. 4 ® RESTROOM « I` -WALL SI DE APPROACH f kk 41 I -- 45" MIN. 45" MIN. Ism ==�' .� 4 : ∎` � � �; . - ,/`— - z ,, . __ _. . b G8 ACCESSIBLE RESTROOM SIGNAGE G1 MANEUVERING z �� ) - •� ; N.T.S. '�-- - m N.T.S. in....- • • _ DOOR I. LAVATORY FIXTURES - A CLEAR FLOOR SPACE OF 30" X 48" COMPLYING WITH SECTION 4.1'1.3 ADA SHALL BE PROVIDED IN FRONT OF A LAVATORY TO ALLOW FORWARD APPROACH. SUCH CLEAR FLOOR SPACE SHALL ADJOIN OR OVERLAP IN AN ACCESSIBLE ROUTE AND SHALL NO EXTENT INTO KNEE AND TOE SPACE UNDERNEATH THE LAVATORY. 2. MIRRORS SHALL BE MOUNTED WITH THE BOTTOM EDGE NO HIGHER THAN 40 INCHES FROM THE FLOOR. 3. TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER SHALL NOT BE LOCATED ON THE W IN ALL WITH 12 INCHES OF THE FRONT EDGE OF THE TOILET SEAT. DISPENSERS THAT CONTROL DELIVERY OR THAT DO NOT PERMIT CONTINUOUS PAPER FLOW SHALL NOT BE USED. 4. INTERIOR SURFACES - TOILET ROOM FLOORS SHALL HAVE A SMOOTH, HAS NON - ABSORBENT SURFACE SUCH AS PORTLAND CEMENT, CONCRETE, CERAMIC TILE, OR OTHER APPROVED MATERIALS WHICH EXTEND UPWARD ONTO THE WALLS AT LEAST 5 INCHES. 4 $ r LIMIT 5" KNEE CLEARANCE MIN. A HIGH FORWARD REACH ADA TRAP GUARD 6" MAX. CL TOE EARANCE. yyALL H.G. GHEGKSTANDS REQUIRE:, X 48 MIN. NUMBER OF REGULAR GHEGKSTANDS NUMBER TO BE ACCESSIBLE MOUNTING HEIGHTS �U �j ` S' -O" MIN. } ' "'�i� ?te Z_ ` I TO 4 I _�` = O m �.� FINISH FLOOR EVEN. Ni 5 TO 8 2 „ k�'I = , ' CLEAR FLOOR SPACE -VI / Z ims. ���� %/ '1 TO 15 3 ` OVER I5 3 PLUS 20% OF ADDITIONAL AISLES THRESHOLD '!'111111 " � ) COMPRESSED CARPET IN NEW CONSTRUCTION, CHECK STANDS, INCLUDING SERVICE COUNTERS REQUIRING A SURFACE FOR TRANSACTIONS, SHALL BE MADE ACCESSIBLE BY PROVIDING A 36" AISLE ON THE CUSTOMER SIDE OF THE GHEGKSTAND. WHERE QUICK CHECK STANDS ARE PROVIDED, AT LEAST ONE SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE. WHERE REGULAR CHECK STANDS ARE PROVIDED, THE NUMBER OF GHEGKSTANDS THAT AE ACCESSIBLE SHALL BE AS SHOWN IN TABLE ABOVE. IN NEW AND EXISTING CONSTRUCTION, ACCESSIBLE GHEGKSTANDS SHALL PROVIDE A CLEAR CHECKOUT ISLE WIDTH OF 36" WITH A MAXIMUM ADJOINING COUNTER HEIGHT NOT EXCEEDING 35" A.F.F. THE TOP OF THE COUNTER LIP SHALL NOT EXCEED 40" A.F.F. ACCESSIBLE GHEGKSTANDS SHALL ALWAYS BE OPEN TO CUSTOMERS WITH DISABILITIES AND SHALL BE IDENTIFIED BY A SIGN CLEARLY VISIBLE TO THOSE IN WHEELCHAIRS. THE SIGN SHALL DISPLAY THE INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY IN WHITE ON A BLUE BACKGROUND AND SHALL STATE "THIS CHEGKSTAND TO BE OPEN AT ALL TIMES FOR CUSTOMERS WITH DISABILITIES." IN EXISTING BUILDINGS, AT LEAST ONE CHECKOUT ISLE SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE IN FACILITIES WITH LESS THAN 5,000 SQ. FT. OF SELLING SPACE. IN FACILITIES OF 5,000 SQ. FT. OR MORE OF SELLING SPACE, AT LEAST ONE OF EACH DESIGN OF CHECKOUT AISLE SHALL BE MADE ACCESSIBLE WHEN ALTERED UNTIL THE NUMBER OF ACCESSIBLE CHECKOUT AISLES OF EACH DESIGN EQUALS THE NUMBER REQUIRED IN NEW CONSTRUCTION. \111 \1111 � I/4" MAX. BELOW THRESHOLD. ', TO 25 INCHES. Z TO X. WHEN X IS SHALL BE 45" MAXIMUM. Y SHALL BE 44 REACH - O m r �- I Z m 111 v -- ■i DOOR THRESHOLD I/4" MAX. FLOOR FINISH 1 1 _ V p et O Q l 48" MIN. / /• -' J - X SHALL BE LESS THAN OR EQUAL SHALL BE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL LESS THAN 20 INCHES. THEN Y WHEN X IS 20 TO 25 INCHES, THEN INCHES MAXIMUM. MAXIMUM FORWARD OVER AN OBSTRUCTION - IL J � ` CLEAR FLOOR SPACE pl \� El TOILET ROOM NOTES E3 LAVATORY DETAIL E6 REACH DETAIL � •A /2" MAX ®1:2 SLOPE MAX. /4" MAX. ..... REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE °d''' �t JUN 0 4 10A , g _ i o f1ttn1 „A,-, �__�� ��� warm "151•1 �'� N.T.S. N.T.S. N.T.S. Q ADJACENT TENANT D8 CHECK STAND NOTES D10 t 7 4 d N DOOR THRESHOLD i • i s 4ga _ . ( ... .:.ptltl .. _ . i... .. p.0 ...: yPP I N.T.S. N.T.S. �., • . i n ‘..i i_ _ i = > ---- i I' -6” MIN. T r e" MAX. ROUTE OF TRAVEL DISTANCE = 51'-0" ��� Imo: <f 1 A ? T'"'"1;::E .... >... - - - - -i 1 ___ ' - -- c :_x .._ I x • .. -, ___' ■ n °� I 111011111 fik IF' EQUIPMENT IN SHADED PERMITTED AREA . ' • yl `: : Iii s � � j �f' �� Q i _ __._.� - t I; ;, r / I j y , I?" PLUS TREAD 2" MIN. • N.:.:.,:..._......‹..,—...,..1 , DISTANCE BETWEEN EXITS = 54' -O" 1 • I: I I i /i > it/ MALL DEPTH MIN. y CORRIDOR ( Rh. l �� i., Z z T t. i „o-Is 1 `" � TO WALL HANDRAIL VISUALLY IMPAIRED WARNING STRIPING. I" MAX FROM EDGE �' >' ?; ! : " t � i ACCESSIBLE ROUTE OF MAX. TRAVE DISTANCE 52 3 DIAGONAL DISTANCE OF SPACE = 62 -4 DIVIDED BY 2 3I' -2" (MIN. DISTANCE ) BETWEEN EXISTS : 031 1 •'t / `'I��� •i ir 1 0 m k :/ _ m Q �� ` I A � r: ► — - 14.6'' N � NI ��Ll� I ) �` ___ ° .: :: •`_ I u 1 -� - 5" MIN. ' ♦ 6 " MAX. \ m OF TREAD. 2" TO 4" STRIP WIDTH. 1 i I 0 1 1 1 V J - SPOUT HEIGHT AND KNEE CLEARANCE I I I I f • T J 1- I II J `" r -�' "� "^"^' t lip 5 MN. ,,, ° - ,...,.... .. �.. -- - - - - -- : rr CLEAR FLOOR SPACE I NOTE: NOTE: ADJACENT TENANT z ' in 4 < O p II I. INTERIOR STAIR - UPPER APPROACH 4 THE LOWER TREAD TO HAVE WARNING STRIP. 2. WARNING STRIPS MUST BE CLEARLY CONTRASTING ADJOINING SURFACES. THE STRIP MUST COLOR FROM ADJO RESISTANT AS THE OTHER TREADS OF THE STAIR. BE MADE OF A MATERIAL THAT 15 AT LEAST AS SLIP ACCESSIBILITY ROUTE OF TRAVEL SLOPES NOT TO EXCEED RUNNING SLOPE OF 1:20 (5. %) MAX. GROSS SLOPE OF 1:50 (2.0%). SITE ACCESSIBILITY PROVIDED BY L.L. — �n - � � I 1 8 cf c m, OF T UKVViLA tF II► Ay , l 2009 PERMITCENTER I 6" MAX. 3' MIN. CLEAR FLOOR SPACE Al EGRESS PLAN A8 DRINKING FOUNTAIN A10 STAIR RAILING N.T.S. N.T.S. N.T.S. I 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 10 II 12 DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 449 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. I- m C w iloo 4a N c _ H u ° � e15 'v= ^ 'S El! csl V I E a; M O. W V H H NAY 2219 05.22.0-1 SHEET: TMOO-100g1 as g g d 3 W. Xi "0 O • E G 1/4"=1'-0" DG A-9 F+1 480 998 7223 CONSULTING ENGINEER 3 "= H.M. JAMB DETAIL EXISTING CMU WALL EQUAL NEW OPENING 3' -6" MAX. EQUAL till 'i l+ -SAW CUT EXISTING CMU F BENT PL. DO NOT CUT THROUGH VERTICAL REINF. H.M. HEAD DETAIL EXISTING CONCRETE PARTITION SCHEDULED. REFER TO HEFT A -2. EXIST' G CONCRETE PAN}- . SEE PLANS FOR O NING LOCATION. OTIFY ARCHITECT IF OPENING OS CLOSER THAN 3' -O" FROM A PANEL JOINT. CONTINUOUS I/4" CAULK JOINT. .L.�IIa STING S SCHEDULED 71 B JAMB, MIN.) H.M. JAMB DETAIL 3 "= I ' -0" EXISTING CONCRETE 1/2" PARTITIONS AS SC PULED. REFER TO SHEET -2. CONTINUOUS SEALANT TYP.) F - E, PAINTED. /4" CLEAR TEMPERED GLAZING HOLL...0Yi METAL. DOOR ingtilLit y t i1llllll p 4 ii l) NNW a:� 1 PIPPIAN .1 Ill . I . II'I 1116 FJ D10 H.M. JAMB DETAIL GYP. BD. PARTITION CONTINUOUS SEALANT. (TYP.) DOUBLE STUDS AT JAMBS, TYP. PARTITIONS AS REFER TO SHE Gil H.M. HEAD DETAIL 3"=1 EXISTING CMU WALL (3) 3/4" PIA. THREADED ROD EPDXY AND GROUT SOLID PARTITION AS SCHEDULED. REFER TO SHEET A -2. AU CONTINUOUS 1/4" CAULK JOINT. HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAME, PAINTED. BACKER ROD AND SEALANT. PARTITIO► AS SCHEDULED. REFER rO SHEET A -2. E STING CMU. SEE LANS FOR OPENING LOCATION, CONTINUOUS 1/4" CAULK JOINT. XISTI 3/ -" X6 "X6 "X(WIDTH OF 4 ING + 8 "). SEE DETAIL THIS SHEET. EE PLANS LOCATION. R AS SCHEDULED. AS SCHEDULED AMB R JAMB, MIN.) H.M. HEAD DETAIL 3"=r-0" SIDE LITE GLAZING EXISTING CON TE PANEL. SEE 'LANS FOR OPENING L(9GATION. NOTIFY CHITECT IF OPENI . 05 CLOSER THA 3' -O" FROM A P "EL JOINT. PARTITION AS SCHEDULED. REFER TO SHEET A -2. f I n tilleitil t L K JO , iketrylighll HOLLOW METAL POOR FRAME, PAINTED. POOR AS SCHEDULED G7 H.M. HEAD DETAIL 3"=r-0" INVENTORY ROOM INVENTORY ROOM 3"=P-0" SIDE LITE GLAZING HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAME, PAINTED. CONTIN . US HOLD ME • L STOP. 5 1/2" THROAT D7 H.M. JAMB DETAIL SCHEDULED DOOR. 1/4" CLEAR TEMPERED GLAZING AND GASKETS. H.M. JAMB DETAIL PARTITION A5 SCHEDULED. REFER TO SHEET A -2. 1/2 " 1/2" SECURITY MESH CONTINUOUS SEALANT. (TYP) WELDED HOLLOW METAL POOR FRAME, PAINTED. 51/2" THROAT. DOOR AS SCHEDULED PARTITION AS SCHEDULED. REFER TO SHEET A -2. SECURITY MESH DOUBLE STUDS AT JABS. TYP. STEEL STUD JAMB ANCHOR (3 PER JAMB, MIN.) DOOR AS SCHEDULED. WELDED HOLLOW METAL. POOR FRAME, PAINTED. 51/2" THROAT G10 H.M. HEAD DETAIL 3"=I'-0" GYP. BD. PARTITION H.M. JAMB DETAIL 3"=I'-0" SIDE LITE GLAZING 1/2" - PARTITION A5 SCHEDULED. REFER TO SHEET A -2. CONTINUOUS SEALANT. (TYP) HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAME, PAINTED DOOR AS SCHEDULED DOUBLE STUDS AT JABS. TYP. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPL 1t C JUN 0 4 2009 PARTITION AS SCHEDULED. REFER TO SHEET A -2. - CONTINUOUS SEALANT. (TYP) - STEEL STUD JAMB ANCHOR (3 PER JAMB, MIN.) DOOR AS SCHEDULED. HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAME, PAINTED. PER JAMB, MIN) HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAME, PAINTED. C. TINUOUS HOLLOW MET STOP. 1/4" CLE TEMPEREr GLAZING AND GASKE . . HEDULED. A -2. COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. ae 0 O 1- O W 0 E H co u Q ai m • 0 m N j t o � DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 449 lis C j C 411 ta ^ C i7 C 0 40 0 21 In 41 1. 0 via N O o W a mi w m 41 ED M Q. w te1 1 101 H z 0 05.22.00i SHEET: AS SHOWN T IA/ 22 '09 Ln a co 1c V/ y N — Lf1 D co P3 0 U N „, o z U in • • • W 0 ry w rn rn 0 -I- I- 0 u s A -10 STOP GYP BD 6" ABOVE CEILING Al 0 " = — CEILING HANGER WIRE ZsIt Als • o i \ \�\ \ \` \; \ • P -2 2 - 0 " • �— SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING. SEE SHEET A -5. EXISTING STEEL BEAM 2 P -2 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUDS @ 16" O.G. EXISTING MALL BULKHEAD. G.G. TO VERIFY IN FIELD AND NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY OBSTRUCTIONS PRI TO START OF CONSTRUCTION 3 5/8" X 20 GA METAL STUD DIAGONAL BRAG ING @ 48" O.G. @ 45° TO FRAMING ABOVE (AS SHOWN) 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. OVER 3 5/8" X 20 G.A. METAL STUDS ® 16" O.G. TENANT TENANT FLOORING ENLARGED STOREFRONT PLAN 5 "I' -4 3/4" • • • • • 4 RE TO STRUCTURAL fiRAIAIINGS SI to SS I=OR STEEL FRAMING AN SETA I LS OF NSW STOREFRONT S ®FI° I T. (TYF.) 2' -6" � 7 •• �• \ / , • 7/ 7 • �' • — LEASE LINE 3 5/8" X 20 GA METAL STUD DIAGONAL BRAGING @ 48" O.G. @ 45° TO FRAMING ABOVE (AS SHOWN) 20 GA. SHEET METAL �— PANEL W/ ADHESIVE BACKI OVER 3/8" M. OVER 1/2" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUDS @ 16" O.G. MALL FLOORING 5 MALL 1/2" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS BY TENANT G.G. 0 CEILING HANGER WIRE STOP GYP BD 6" ABOVE CEILING- �0 A7 1 " =1' -0" 7 0 0 EXISTING STEEL BEAM SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING. SEE SHEET A -3. STOREFRONT SECTION 8 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUDS @ 16" O.G. EXISTING MALL BULKHEAD. G.G. TO VERIFY IN FIELD AND NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY OBSTRUCTIONS PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION 3 5/8" X 20 GA METAL STUD DI AGONAL BRACING @ 48" O.G. @ 45° TO FRAMING ABOVE (AS SHOWN) 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUDS 16" O.G. TENANT TENANT FLOORING 1 0 10 REFER TO STRUCTURAL r,RAI»I I NGS S I to SS FOR STEEL RM I NG AN TA I LS ® NEIAI STOREFRONT SOF I T. (TYP.) 2 ' - 6 " I — O " / 3 5/8" X 20 GA METAL STUD DIAGONAL BRAG ING ® 4S" O.G. @ 45° TO FRAMING ABOVE (A5 SHOWN) 20 GA. SHEET METAL PANEL W/ ADHESIVE BACKING OVER 3/8" MDF. OVER 1/2" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUDS 0 16" O.G. LOCATION OF CEILING ATTACHMENT FOR DISPLAY GABLE SYSTEM MALL 1/2" CLEAR. TEMPERED GLASS BY TENANT G .G. LEASE LINE 7 - (91 MALL FLOORING 12 City Of TUkwilh i BUILDING DIVISION 12 in FILE COPY Permit No..3101 Plan review approval is subject to error s and orris lions. Approval of construction documents do es not autt.orize the violation of any adopted code or ordinance. Roceipt of approved Field Copy and ns s acknowle aged: By Date: REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED JUL 1 62009 (:IT'1l�QFT� UI(WILA JUL 15 X009 City of Tukwi BUILDING DIVISION PE RMIT CE NT .R. D01 " -- 01 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and sub]ect to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection Includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. REVISION NO, re 0 9 LL L O E 1- o < ai o -� m Lu o O J N w c— CO DATE: 05.22.0°I SHEET: 449 m ` m C O w fri C N y V t To O �. A r M ( N `I CL a1 VI v7 Z 0 (IM) 0-N cu •6 Lf1 w 0 fa 0 t 0 in in L(1 co JUL 7 139 Z 0 W H Z 0 ce LL W ce 0 IA 1-� m N N 00 Q1 Ol 0 LL E 0 s ■ 1 2 B 4 5 6 ? 8 q 10 H I 12 - 1 _ • GYP. BD. X •Q tV 1 AT DOOR OPENING: LOCATION OF FLOORING GYP. BD. TRANSITION UNDER DOOR LEAF. LOCATE AS SHOWN DEPENDING UPON DOOR LEAF LOGATI ON -..I MATERIAL CHANGE PER PLANS LEN O F BUILT -UP • • - � \ \ \ WOOD BASE OOP OR M TAL BLOCKING N �' .� � ,ii... ,, /�. ,,,,,,, /�� y (TAPERED) AREA VARIES. L V_ %A �.., //i__ O 0 - m z iu 1 Q SLOPE MAY NOT EXCEED I/8" PER FOOT THINNER FLOORING TO RISE TO MEET THICKER FLOORING BY GRADUAL THICKENING OF THIN F a L O ORING OR BY USING A TAPERED FILL BENEATH THINNER FLOORING 2 X n . • �! ' ,? ( ? I iI I I 1 ' , ; ` ` ' 1 � � ., 4 - i tfi�IIII \ $� � Il a4 A5 NECESSARY f , IA; PAS (� I K TOP OR $ r i.y�tf �� � `, � r ��'r�� 1 NIN } t I rr i H • V4'•� P t ?F 1 FOR ltd : rl ' III .; i Off 4 th ids k l k : i �IIr11Itli�J '. 1113(IU:':1!(< r' 4 MIN IC`Ii p I � E ! i •110 t ! COVED RESILIENT BASE -. VCT FLOORING A _,�A �, Ay- - 1 AT CASED OPENING: TRANSITION AT END OF JAMB A5 LOCATED ON PLANS ""� ����� ®�'Il1lY� F • ,. , t � P ' '� `� .� i EXISTING CONCRETE PAD � EXISTING CONCRETE PAD Z A: EXISTING CONCRETE PAD G1 DOOR SILL DETAIL G4 BUILD UP OF THICKER FLOORING WOOD BASE G10 RESILIENT COVE BASE — BACK OF HOUSE e ,„ = ,,_. 0 ,. 6 "= I' -O" TO MEET THINNER FLOORING 6"=1 6 " =1' -0" IL CARPET SGHLUTER TRANSITION STRIP - RENO -V (AVTIOOB30AM) VCT CARPET. BUILD UP FLOOR - SGHLUTER TRANSITION WITH LATEX FILL AS STRIP - RENO -V REQUIRES TO ALIGN (AEVTI25550) CARPET CRUSH LINE WITH TOP OF ADJACENT FLOORING. SLOPE MAY NOT EXCEED I /8" PER 12" WOOD FLOORING BD. RESILIENT BASE HARD FLOORING I FRP BOAR C A ULKED TO WALL WITH J- MOLDING AT TOP OF PANEL BRUSHED STAINLESS I METAL TRIM GYP _ . . , \ �9 Ac--- . . WATERPROOF MEMBRANE WHERE SPECIFIED y 'l ' GYP BP J U N 0 20 COVED SHEET VINYL BASE �� lU SHEET VINYL : y � F { � � FOR l jI• . in I Ii 1 , L , rl ►. IL ii iIi I 1 AIL 1N �YNItIW�IIW1�11111Vi�IIMJUIV�I�IIt, �V�YH�t�WIII� ;���ViIIIM1uIWI�IIhVI �I i� .II .111ii1:ill : ,1 I.I I, 1.1 • v . • �� • . : ° d : °' • ° a ° ' a CARPET - TO - VCT V� a v V ° : : ' .. a .. ° .. °' < v c 1 ' • ° � `� ° ° CARPET - TO - WOOD • - COVED TOP OF OR CARPET A��f F "4 t ':F'. • : t, EXISTING CONCRETE PAD 4 b f 9�.ry I t r � EXISTING CONCRETE PAD Q HALLWAY TO ROOM _______/V______ DOOR IN CLOSED OR i DOOR IN CLOSED BACK OF HOUSE I --- P051TION POSITION VCT HALLWAY TOILET ROOM 2" X 1/2" MARBLE THRESHOLD PIECE STRIP CENTERED UNDER POOR. CARPET { # 1 2" X1/2" MARBLE THRESHOLD PIECE STRIP °' ` CENTERED UNDER DOOR. D7 RESILIENT COVE BASE — SALES AREA D10 SHEET VINYL BASE — TOILET ROOMS 2 SHEET VINYL EXISTING CONCRETE SHEET VINYL EXISTING 6 " =1' -0" 6" =1' -0" 1 CONCRETE ,• NEW CONCRETE SLAB (MIN 5500 PSI) ON GRADE TO ALIGN W/ EXISTING. FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING. #3 X24" LING SLAB DOWEL AT 52" O.G. INSTALLED IN I/2" DIA. X 4" DEEP HOLES EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE \ \ v in // I% r � SLAB L . 1110 ii 11 „r i 41 1 111 `` .11t it. : SLAB �Ae�k�d d. A d 4 d • Q . 4 ' „ VCT TO SHEET Q d • d Q d d 4 • a • Q Q 4 • A VINYL CARPET TO SHEET Q. • 4 < d v d ' . d VINYL G.G. NOTE: G.D. SHALL KEEP TRENCHING TO A MINIMUM TO PROVIDE STUB -UPS FOR ALL FIXTURES. EXISTING SLAB ON GRADE A5 OCCURS ' SAW GUT AND REMOVE 1' EXISTING SLAB FOR TRENCH I' AS REQUIRED A / \ w n . ... x.xxru"sr ...a e,:14sn0^111,.. M *n.V .. .:,� r• n'+.. CONCRETE SLAB ON GRAPE TO MATCH DEPTH OF EXIST., WITH #5 BARS AT 16" O.G. EACH WAY AT MIDDLE DEPTH OF SLAB. DRILL EPDXY 6" INTO EXIST. LOCATE CONDUIT ABOVE VAPOR BARRIER 4 SLAB. c I Ct. HALLWAY AREA SALES AREA ______ DOOR IN CLOSED �---" POSITION EXTERIOR OR SEALANT OR BACK OF HOUSE MALL CORRIDOR STAINLESS STEEL TRIM SMOKE FASTENED TO SUBSTRATE Q SWEEP MALL FLOORING - DOOR IN CLOSED WOOD FLOORING CEMENTITIOUS UNDERLAYMENT --' — POSITION LOW PROFILE ALUM. THRESHOLD • ,i q . - " . � r ' d 4 y ILIIL1it: • 4 ' �� �i •• IN, � � a :• �••% , O , iI • e �• I •• �c Vii% i� . �ij � GASKET ��•�� ; �•a �•� _ • , �. �� - q r ` �I4 � .r r �+ �s , �;/ '... - �• �.rs' • eM +a..Mlec -i r ak fi sll � � +. . lis �il R t f f �rii ". I� ' =: _ u I _- , I f I � I f---1 • I I I I I f I I I I I I I I I I V I I I 36" V I MAXIMUM I I I 11 V I I I I III I I I TO CLOSURE VCT I I.r-1 11, 11 I-- III I i 1 I... I .. I -- I I. Ill 111. I i !-- 1 = I --I _ •III -- --I - I2X12 MESH COMPACTED FILL AS REQUIRED. PROVIDE COMPACTION TO '45% MODIFIED PROCTOR MIN 6 MIL VAPOR TO MATCH EXIIST NG ,IIF EXISTING 05 DAMAGED ��J \ . »� ' ` •' d •` '•\ �. .S EXI5TING CONCRETE p p SLAB ON < • " d Q • 0 b a d Q p 5" \ COMPACTED FILL AS REQUIRED VAPOR BARRIER TO RECEIVED MATCH EXISTING CITY OFTUKWILA b 0 C V 0 8 C i MAY 2009 PERMIT CENTER . • a D 4 • V • • . V : a ' • p p , .. . • . • . N.1 • p . • EXISTING CONCRETE REAR v - . • : p • q • r7 DOOR THRESHOLD GRADE v . • AT VCT SLAB ON GRADE ENTRY THRESHOLD - MALL TO WOOD Al FLOORING TRANSITION DETAILS A7 SLAB INFILL AT LEAVE OUT A10 SLAB DOWELING AT TRENCH N.T.S. N.T.S. N.T.S. 1 . 2 5 4 5 6 '1 8 ci lo I I 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. 0 0 E 449 RI ma _ C w .• cn # V k E . 4 vv' tre a MaCV 10 111 VI Is DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: Z 0 vs NAY 29 '09 05.22.0g SHEET: AS SHOWN TM00 Ln rn co - o O Ln N NI - `O5 ao so 0 0 U N O d Z Cu L w m 0 0 rsi co 0 m u m 0 12, d "- 7 a s g g L. d 7 a iA �a V' _ 0 E 0 p6 A -11 MAXIMUM COMPRESSION STRUT SIZES SIZE MAX HT V2" +X22 GA. 3'-0" 3/4" $ x 22 GA. 4' -3" T'$ 5'-0" 1 V4" + X 20 GA. T-0" 1 V2" 4 X 20 GA. 5'-6" 2" + X20GA. 11.-6" 2 V2" $X15 GA. 14' -6" 3" It X 15 GA. 1T -3" 3 y $X10GA. 23' -3" A PERIMETER SUPPORT G1 N.T.S. D1 N.T.S. Al N.T.S. 7 3/4" CLEAR AT ONE END IN EACH DIRECTION. DO NOT FASTEN THIS END TO THE CLOSURE ANGLE. AT OTHER END IN EACH DIRECTION, FASTEN TEES TO CLOSURE ANGLE. 8" MAX 2 HANGER WIRE AT EACH PERIMETER MAIN TEE AND PERIMETER CR055 TEE I STABILIZER BAR TO MAINTAIN PERIMETER TEE SPACING MAIN TEE OR CROSS TEE (SUSPENSION SYSTEM) HEAVY DUTY 2X2 CLOSURE ANGLE, MIN. SEE NOTE AT TOP. A PERIMETER SUPPORT USING GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEM O GENERAL SUPPORT FASTEN TO STEEL FRAMING, WOOD 7 ---- FRAMING, CONCRETE STRUCTURE, CONCRETE DECK, OR STEEL DECK DETAIL A10 AND All THIS PAGE. 12 GA. MIN. HANGER WIRES, RODS, 7. _____--- OR FLATS - MAX. •' - O.G. AND NO MORE THAN 6" FROM MAIN RUNNER ENDS 2" X 2" SHEET METAL ANGLE GRID -TYPE SUSPENSION SYSTEM - 5/5" GYP. BD. I MIN. FROM MASONRY OR CONCRETE WALLS COMPLY WITH ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS OF IBC SECTION 2505 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED GYP. BD. CEILING (IBC) FASTEN TO STEEL FRAMING, WOOD FRAMING, CONCRETE STRUCTURE, CONCRETE DECK, OR STEEL DECK DETAIL A10 AND All THIS PAGE. 12 GA. MIN. HANGER WIRES AT 4' -0" O.G. EACH DIRECTION - NO MORE THAN 1:6 OUT -OF- PLUMB. TYP. WIRE LOOPED AND WRAPPED AROUND ITSELF 3 TIMES MIN. AT EACH END OF HANGER WIRE COMPLY WITH ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS OF ASTM C. AND CG636. COMPLY WITH ALL ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS OF IBC SECTION 1621, ASGE 1.6.2.6, AND GISGA 5 -4. RIGID VERTICAL STRUT, MAY BE STEEL STUD, BLACK IRON, EMT OR OTHER APPROVED EQUAL GOOD FOR UP TO 4' -0" HIGH. 12 GA. WIRE SPLAYED IN FOUR DIRECTIONS ® 45° ® 12' -0" O.G. EA. WAY. 12 GA. VERTICAL WIRE HANGER ® 4' -0" O.G. EA. WAY, TYP. CEILING PANELS, TYP. NOTES: I. VERTICAL STRUT: A STRUT FASTENED TO THE MAIN RUNNER, SHALL BE EXTENDED $ FASTENED TO THE STRUCTURAL MEMBERS SUPPORTING THE ROOF OR FLOOR ABOVE. THE STRUT SHALL BE ADEQUATE TO RESIST THE VERTICAL COMPRESSION INDUCED BY THE BRACING WIRES. 2. THESE HORIZONTAL RESTRAINT POINTS SHALL BE PLACED 12' -0" OR LESS O.G. IN BOTH DIRECTIONS WITH POINTS WITHIN 6' - F ROM ANY WALL. TYPICAL CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM WHERE HANGER WIRES ARE MORE THAN 1:6 OUT -OF- PLUMB, PROVIDE COUNTER- SLOPING WIRE 0 TRAPEZE AS NECESSARY TO AVOID OBSTRUCTIONS MAINTAIN HANGER WIRE SPACING AND CAPACITY BELOW OBSTRUCTION ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS AT FRAMING INTERSECTION: FOUR WIRES SPLAYED 1 ;10° (IN PLAN) FROM EACH OTHER. LOOP AND WRAP EACH END OF EACH WIRE AROUND ITSELF 4 TIMES. FOR SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY C AND D USE 12 A. WIRE. FOR SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY E AND F USE a GA. WIRE. IS" X 18" FIBERGLASS DROP -IN DOOR PANEL 3 5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING SHEET METAL SCREW, TYP. CENTERLINE OF METAL STUD BLOCKING ABOVE, TYP. A4 N.T.S. INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS IN IBC SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY C, D, E, AND F i FOR SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES G,D,E, AND F, PROVIDE LATERAL BRACING PER ES REPORT ER -4011 PARA 2.2.1 WHERE ANY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS EXISTS: -THE CEILING 15 NOT ATTACHED TO WALLS AT ALL SIDES, -WHERE BRACING WALLS ARE MORE THAN 50' -O" APART IN BOTH DIRECTIONS, - WHERE CEILING PROVIDES ACCESS PANEL MANUFACTURED BY: INTEX FORMS INC, (510) 881 -8000 18" x I8" GFRG FIBERGLASS ACCESS PANEL, 12 "X12" GFRG FIBERGLASS ACCESS PANEL I' - 6" ACCESS OPENING 24" ROUGH OPENING 5 AIR TERMINALS AND SERVICES WEIGHING BETWEEN 20 AND 56 POUNDS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO STRUCTURE ABOVE, BY TWO b GA. TAUT OR SLACK WIRES LIGHTING FIXTURES WEIGHING LESS THAN 56 LBS. SHALL BE CONNECTED TO STRUCTURE ABOVE, BY TWO 8 GA. TAUT OR SLACK WIRES - PENDANT -HUNG LIGHT FIXTURES AND ALL OTHER LIGHT FIXTURES, AIR TERMINALS AND SERVICES WEIGHING MORE THAN 56 LBS. SHALL BE SUPPORTED DIRECTLY FROM STRUCTURAL FRAMING, MASONRY, OR CONCRETE USING APPROVED HANGERS LIGHTING FIXTURES, AIR TERMINALS, AND SERVICES SHALL BE POSITIVELY ATTACHED TO THE CEILING SYSTEM @ LIGHT FIXTURE AND MECHANICAL SERVICE SUPPORT 20 GA. S 5/5" STUD COMPRESSION STRUT FASTENED TO MAIN TEE AND TO STRUCTURAL FRAMING OR CONCRETE (2 STUDS NESTED AT PLENUMS GREATER THAN 6' -0 ") COMPRESSION STRUTS WITHIN 4" OF BRACING WIRES FILL, TAPE AND SAND SMOOTH AT JOINT BETWEEN FRAME AND DRYWALL, TYP. PUSH OUT CEILING ACCESS PANEL ACCESS PANEL FRAME, BY MFR NOTE: THIS ACCESS PANEL 15 NOT TO BE USED IN FIRE -RATED LOCATIONS. D7 I "= I - 0 " A7 N.T.S. 2X4 PRISMATIC ACRYLIC LENSE FLOUR. FOUR 12 GA. MIN. WIRES SPLAYED 10° (IN PLAN) FROM EACH OTHER. EACH END OF EACH WIRE TO BE LOOPED AND WRAPPED AROUND ITSELF 4 TIMES MIN. COMPRESSION STRUT FASTENED TO MAIN TEE AND TO STRUCTURAL FRAMING OR CONCRETE LOCATE BRACING AT 12' -0" O.G. EACH DIRECTION AND WITHIN 6' -O" OF PERIMETER PARTITIONS MAIN RUNNER 2X4, 2X2 FLUORESCENT FIXTURE (2, 5, OR 4 TUBES) DRILL 5/52" HOLE FOR I/8" BOLT 4 LOCK NUT AFTER CEILING IS LEVELED. (4) 12 GA., 45° SPLAY WIRES AT EVERY STRUT, 12' -0" O.G. EA. DIRECTION. 1 Q • GROSS TEE SUSPENDED CEILING DETAIL BRACING WIRES WITHIN 2" OF GROSS TEE COMPRESSION STRUTS WITH 4" OF BRACING WIRES @ LATERAL BRACING FOR CEILINGS EXCEEDING 1000 SF 5/4 #6 SCREWS (4) OR MANUFACTURER SUPPLIED RESTRAINS GROSS RUNNERS LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT DETAIL ANCHOR TO STRUCTURE ABOVE 8 GA. VERTICAL HANGER WIRE ® 48" O.G. 5/4" EMT. COMP. STRUT TIGHT TO STRUCT. ABOVE. COMPRESSION STRUT REQ'D. ® EACH SEISMIC RESTRAINT 12' -0" O.G. EACH WAY. I" EMT NOTCH OVER MAIN RUNNER. T -BAR MAIN RUNNERS PROVIDE CEILING EXPANSION JOINTS AS NECESSARY, DIVIDING CEILING INTO AREAS NO GREATER THAN 2500 SF 12 GA WIRE FASTENED TO CEILING JOIST OF CONCRETE (4) WITHIN 3" OR ALL FOUR CORNERS OF LIGHT FIXTURE 12 GA WIRE FIXTURE SUPPORT WIRES TYP. OPPOSITE CORNERS OF LIGHT FIXTURE (2 REQUIRED), PAINTED RED. - -4 8" MAX. EACH SIDE• @ EXPANSION JOINT FOR CEILINGS EXCEEDING 2500 SF D10 N.T.S. DO NOT ATTACH TO METAL DECK OR BOTTOM CHORD OF TRUSSES. ATTACH TO EXISTING TOP CHORD OF TRUSSES PER GISGA 0 -2- ELEVATION A10 N.T.S. 10 3 #12 WIRES AT EACH COR ER- 5/5 ' FRT PLYIN OP 4$8 SCREWS AT 12" O.G. MAX. O SECTION 0 PLAN d' N 10 —.- - I I ^�II 4' -0" I2' -O" MAX. 4' -0" MIN. PROVIDE FLEXIBLE CONNECTION TO SPRINKLER HEAD THAT ALLOWS CEILING TO MOVE I" IN ALL HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONS txwo8' SUSPENDED CEILING BRACING I 12 O SPRINKLER HEADS UNISTRUT SYSTEM OR TOP CHORD OF TRUSSES PENDANT FIXTURE BELOW 5/S" FRT PLY/NO A45° / SUSPENDED CEILING. FINISH FLOOR CODE COMPLIANCE JUN 0 4 2009 BLOCKING AT PENDANT LIGH DING DIVi , COMPRESSION STRUTS ®12' -0" O.G. EA. WAY 3/8" MIN. CLEAR GROSS RUNNER OR MAIN RUNNER NOTE: TIE TWO ADJACENT WALL TO CEILING MAIN 4 GROSS RUNNERS. MIN. 8 GAUGE WIRES. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWMLA MAY 2`91009 PERMIT CENTER 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. w wa ▪ m G r 7 C i. 41 c c o .E 40 CA ▪ H V �+ wM �.w W 449 z 0 oc Ln Gl o CC Lrl LA ' 2 0 0 o • m z m l0 u m N N 1. co 0 L as g g cn z a f" r • -O O t9 E 0 1- 0 DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: AS SHOWN DG A-12 05.22.01 SHEET: TMOOa00'1 G1 FULL 3 = ' - O Al 6 " =1 ' -0" METAL REVEAL FRAMI NG GLAZED WALL, CONFIGURATION VARIES DRYWALL MOLDIN ND CLOSURE - FRY GLET - DMEG 48/5 - 1/8" PARTITION DETAIL AT STOREFRONT MULLION ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING SYSTEM. SEE SHEET A- SECTION ACRYLIC PANEL (SCHEMATIC) STRUCTURE DRYWALL FRY REGLET - I/4" REVEAL MOLDING - ORM -25 -25 - FINISH 6063 T5 ALUMINUM SCREW TAPE +€ SPACKLE T ' r� SEALAN EACH SIDE PARTITION ? S SCHEDULED GC. TO PROVIDE TWO 12 GAGE WIRE AT 8' -0" O.G. MAX ACRYLIC PANEL, ATTACHMENT CLIPS AND ALL INSTALLATION OF PANEL BY OWNER'S FIXTURE VENDOR ATTACHMENT OF SPLAY WIRES TO STRUCTURE: ST STEEL STRUCTURE: BEAM CLAMPS. AT GIP CONCRETE STRUCTURE: EMBED THIGE- LOOPED WIRE EMBEDDED INTO CONCRETE (10" MINIMUM EMBEDDED LENGTH) OR CEILING MANUFACTURE'S CLIP, FASTENED TO CONCRETE WITH POWDER - AGUATED FASTENERS. AT PRECAST OR POST TENSIONED CONCRETE: CEILING MANUFACTURE'S CLIP, FASTENED TO CONCRETE WITH POWDER - AGUATED FASTENERS. AT WOOD JOISTS (2" NOMINAL MINIMUM WIDTH): 1/4" DIAMETER X 3" LONG CLOSED -EYE SCREWS WITH 1" MINIMUM PENETRATION. OR (3 )STAPLES MINIMUM ONTO LOOPED WIRE INTO SIDE OF JOIST. NOTE: ALL POWDER - AGUATED FASTENERS HILTI PER ES REPORT ESR -1663. G4 5"=1 W.: c ..1.14 Y:.13.4.N',�.'.M: H re. ,T..16 A1.414';: fdsA JNiA2! +. dIYF.FCvv iKT.tGIm. -. <C ?' i4! C:YM /• Ra?bY.YY1FtYC: d?a pJF A4 3"= I ' -O" FASTENERS: AT PLYWOOD FLOOR (MIN. 3/4" GDX): PROVIDE (2) NO. 8 X 3/4" WOOD SCREWS AT 24" O.G. MAX. STAGGERED FOR (I) LAYER GYP. BD. EACH SIDE, 16" O.G. MAX. STAGGERED FOR (2) LAYERS GYP. BD. EACH SIDE. AT GIP CONCRETE FLOOR: PROVIDE HILTI X-PNI .145 "0 X I" EMBED (POWDER - ACTUATED FASTENERS PER ES REPORT ESR -1663) AT 24" O.G. MAX. STAGGERED FOR (I) LAYER GYP. BD. EACH SIDE, I6" O.G. MAX. STAGGERED FOR (2) LAYERS GYP. BD. EACH SIDE. AT POST- TENSIONED CONCRETE FLOOR: PROVIDE HILTI X -DNI .1454 X 3/4" EMBED (POWER - ACTUATED FASTENERS PER ES REPORT ESR -1665) AT 24" O.G. MAX. STAGGERED FOR (I) LAYER GYP. BD. EACH SIDE, 16" O.G. MAX. STAGGERED FOR (2) LAYERS GYP. BD. EACH SIDE, AT ALL ACOUSTICAL PARTITIONS (PARTITIONS CONTAINING ACOUSTICAL INSULATION), APPLY A FILLET OF ACOUSTICAL SEALANT AT BOTTOM CORNER OF TRACK, EACH SIDE, PRIOR TO APPLICATION OF GYP. BD.� 20 GA. MIN. TRACK_ PARTITION TO FLOOR CONNECTION FOR SEISMIC SITUATIONS 10' -6" A.F.F. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING. SEE SHEET A- LIGHT FIXTURE TO BE Ir SUBSTITUTED WITH: FLUORESCENT WRAP BY LIGHTOLIER # W3413-2 -32- 120 -50. I C d RI !' ?1 III l L .. PARTITION DETAIL AT STOREFRONT GLAZING 5/8" TYPE "X" GYPSUM BOARD. TAPE, SAND, PREPARE FOR FINISH PER SPECS. USE W.P. 'GREEN' GYP. BD. I N ALL AREAS WITH POSSIBLE EXPOSURE TO MOISTURE. MIN. 5/8" TYP '><l GYP. BD. MAT STORE K METAL TO EXISTING ONT SYSTEM 1/2" FIBER CEMENT BOARD ON INVENTORY ROOM SIDE METAL STUDS (PER E5 REPORT 4 MAX. HEIGHT 20'0 ". PARTITION AS SCHE ►SLED FINISH MATERIALS VARY (MAX. WEIGHT EQUAL TO (2) LAYERS GYP. BD. EACH SIDE PLUS APPLIED FINISHES - CONTINUOUS 20GA BOTTOM TRACK WITH 'HILTI' DN OR D5 SHOT PIN INTO SLAB AT 24" O.G. (IGG 4 FIRE TREATED BLOCKING A REQUIRED 3 5/8" METAL STUDS @ 16" O.G. SM -I EXPANDED METAL SECURITY MESH INSULATION IF NOTED INVENTORY ROOM WALL & CEILING 5/8" TYPE "X" GYPSUM BOARD EXISTING ROOF DECK VERIFY EXACT CONDITION IN FIELD. 3 -5/8" X . 2O a. MET. STUD SECTION ArrAGHED TO UNISTRUT W/ (5) *10 SCREWS EXISTIIs' TRUSS BEYOND. VERIFY EXACT CONDITIONS. 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUD BRACING @ 4' -0" 0.G. CLIP Itt BEND G7 N.T.S. D7 A7 5"=.1 ATTACHMENT TO STRUCTURE ABOVE J_L (SCHEMATIC) STRUCTURE TWO 12 GAGE WIRES AT 8' -0" OG MAX ALONG PARTITION ALL WIRES TWISTED 3 TIMES AT EACH ATTACHMENT POINT ACOUSTICAL CEILING- - CASING BEAD TOP TRACK, 20 GAGE MINIMUM 11 PTN ORIENTED PERPENDICULAR O OR DIAGONAL TO CEILING TEES PARTITION HEAD ATTACHED TO SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM FOR WALLS TO 10' -O" - BRACE WITH 3625151 -33 AT 4' -0" O.G. MAX. ALTERNATE DIRECTION OF BRACES ALONG LENGTH OF WALL WHERE POSSIBLE. FOR WALLS TO 15' -O" - BRACE WITH DOUBLED 3625151 -33 AT 4' -0" O.G. MAX. ALTERNATE DIRECTION OF BRACES ALONG LENGTH OF WALL. FASTEN DOUBLED STUDS TOGETHER WITH NO. 8 SCREWS AT 24" O.G. MAX. O SECTION ACROSS PARTITION UNISTRUT P5000 HS ®6' -0" O.G. AFFIX TO TOP CHORD OF TRUSS W/ UNISTRUT BEAM CLAMPS AT EACH END. / - BEAM CLAMP CHANNEL NUT (5) #10 TEK SCREWS. EA. CONN. G.G. SHALL VERIFY THAT THE SHOWN METHOD OF ATTACHMENT 15 ACCEPTABLE WITH THE ON -SITE COORDINATOR. IF NOT, CONTACT ARCHITECT FOR ALTERNATE DETAIL. WmM^ um„.4 gowtA:R".N1tragimatza .atfAILi"w"ata.total tY 'IIIazimtGR;: ,^..r4 PARTITION ATTACHMENT CLIP AT 4' -0" OC, MAXIMUM 5" X 5" X 5" ANGLE (20 GA. MIN.), FASTENED TO TRACK AND BRACE PER DETAIL AT RIGHT 20 GA. MIN. TRACK (PER ES REPORT ESR-I042) METAL STUDS, GUT I/2" SHORT FOR I/2" DEFLECTION - FINISH MATERIALS VARY (MAX. WEIGHT EQUAL TO (2) LAYERS GYP. BD. EACH SIDE PLUS APPLIED FINISHES) EXISTING ROOF DECK. VERIFY EXACT CONDITION IN FIELD. 1/4" STEEL PLT. EACH CONN. EXIST. BAR JOIST. (VERIFY CONDITION) -- ) CONT. 20 GA. TO TRACK ATTACH TO STEEL 'L' W/ (I) HILTI EDN OR ED5 SHOT PIN. (IGG *226x) G.G. SHALL VERIFY THAT THE SHOWN METHOD OF ATTACHMENT 15 ACCEPTABLE WITH THE ON -SITE COORDINATOR. IF NOT, CONTACT ARCHITECT FOR ALTERNATE DETAIL. G10 N.T.S. (SCHEMATIC) STRUCTURE PARTITION ORIENTED O PARALLEL TO CEILING TEES T T 1 10 ATTACHMENT TO STRUCTURE ABOVE J L I I (2) 3/8" HARDENED STEEL 'U' BOLTS @ EACH CONN. AT STEEL STRUCTURE: BEAM CLAMPS. O SECTION ACROSS BRACING C iti. 0 81 I I ATTACHMENT OF SPLAY WIRES TO STRUCTURE: AT GIP CONCRETE STRUCTURE: EMBED THRICE - LOOPED WIRE EMBEDDED INTO CONCRETE (10" MINIMUM EMBEDDED LENGTH). OR CEILING MANUFACTURER'S CLIP, FASTENED TO CONCRETE WITH POWDER - ACTUATED FASTENERS. AT PRECAST OR POST - TENSIONED CONCRETE: CEILING MANUFACTURER'S CLIP, FASTENED TO CONCRETE WITH POWDER - ACTUATED FASTENERS. AT OPEN WEB JOISTS OR TRUSSES: WIRES LOOPED AROUND BOTTOM CHORD. AT WOOD JOISTS (2" NOMINAL MINIMUM WIDTH): 1/4" DIAMETER X 3" LONG CLOSED -EYE SCREWS WITH I" MINIMUM PENETRATION. OR (5) STAPLES MINIMUM ONTO LOOPED WIRE INTO SIDE OF JOIST. NOTE: ALL POWDER - ACTUATED FASTENERS HILTI PER ES REPORT ESR -1663. AT SINGLE BRACE - FASTEN ANGLE TO BRACE WITH (3) NO. 8 SCREWS. - AT DOUBLE BRACE - FASTEN DOUBLE BRACE TO BOTH ANGLES WITH (6) NO. 8 SCREWS THROUGH BRACE AND BOTH ANGLES AT SINGLE BRACE - FASTEN ANGLE TO TRACK WITH (4) NO. 8 SCREWS AT DOUBLE BRACE - FASTEN (2) ANGLES TO TRACK WITH (4) NO. 8 SCREWS AT EACH ANGLE TOP OF PARTITION WHERE BRACED TO STRUCTURE ABOVE FOR SEISMIC SITUATIONS 2" X 2" X /4" METAL 'L' 0 6' -O" O.G. ATTACH TO TOP CHORD OF EXIST. BAR JOISTS. (VERIFY CONDITION) 3 5/5" x 20GA. METAL STUD FRAMING. SEE FLOOR PLAN. RE VIE ED FOR CO MPLIANCE APPROU .,.. JUN 0 4 2009 City of Tukwila 8 1 l CITY OF TUKWI MAY g 2009 PERMIT CENTER 12 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. oc O LL, to 0 E I. u 0 : w o N N W co N W $z5 DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 449 tn z 0 OS.22.Oct SHEET: AS SHOWN TMOO Aay 22 '09 F W ei 0 CC W Ems Z V) - a o �t c y N o o0 0 0 u N zcu L A 3 �nl ++ 0 0 co dN a c) rn� 0 CO A -13 ; ; ' n O ` a o COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. DATE: x 0 O u � iu O ce 00 I- 0) vi Q s Co g m w w ° W Ell SCALE: V ti 0 E DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 449 as se m 0 f 4 . 0 cn „yam C • C IsC VU ID .c LA O 01 W Z IA V PI CI 0 t cc 05 22 04i SHEET: NTS TMOO DDc:%i Wier 22 10 rn a) - v �� N N Ln v CO C o E co O -= Q 01 u • cn • o In !n u � �s A -14 2 3 4 5 6 I "1 e 0 1 I O I I 12 DIVISION 0 - CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS the "General Conditions of the Work. elements which do not the specified element applies with Owner. Owner. Representative who will entirely with the Owner. and telephone. /or architect. with all components shall be reviewed with the fireproofing to match the fire and procedures. slabs indicate ?as- built? sheets. Final Payment, will be as work. Where demolition structural members beyond continued demolition substantially from those or potentially demolition in such areas, demolished, and with demolished materials. and components not noted claimed by the Owner for be claimed. work, cut in uniform straight cost to the Owner. line, and all conductors shall be panel, unless indicated be removed. Leave floor line. Patch flush with the Leave abandoned piping specified in Division 01. p materials from site daily as necessary to receive new floor finishes free of unless approved otherwise. strength. and support of than 2 places along long side of stress. continuous vapor barriers and operations. by ASTM D1557. maximum water /cement ratio floor substrates, as indicated to receive F for 24 hours before, during, minimum 28 day following as recommended by or approved: 3701 Latex Mortar E. Cementitious Toppings: For concrete surfaces at locations indicated to receive otherwise covered by flooring material; one of the following or approved: 1. Self- Leveling Types: a Mapei Corporation "Ultratop ". Self- Leveling Abrasion- Resistant Topping. b Ardex Inc. "K -500" Self- Leveling Concrete Topping. 2. Trowelable Types: a Mapei Corporation "Marecem 100" Fast- Setting Topping Mortar b Ardex Inc. "CD" Self- Drying Concrete Dressing. F. Accessories: Furnish primers, patching compounds, and sand fillers as recommended manufacturer for the conditions of the project. G. Preparation: 1. Thoroughly mix underlayment materials for each type of product in proper proportions smooth homogeneous mix, free of lumps. 2. With the exception of areas where leveling can be accomplished by use of latex specified in other sections, install cementitious underlayment to concrete slabs Drawings, and as necessary to level slabs or bring substrates to proper elevation. 3. Inspect floor to verify that demolition is complete to the point where work may P Y P P 4. Survey floor as necessary to set screeds and reference points. Identify construction underlayment at all locations where floor does not meet specified tolerance requirements. 5. Ensure that subfloor is clean, dry, hard, sound, and free of oils, or other substance Y proper bonding and curing. 6. Verify that all areas to be leveled are at or below final design elevation. Grind necessary to meet specified tolerance requirements. 7. Set screeds, markers, and reference blocks. Set screeds at all construction and weakened plane joints in underlayment. 8. Apply primer to all areas to receive underlayment pp y p yment and toppings; repeat application achieve proper build. H. Installation: 1. Install trowelable underlayment at locations where slopes are indicated and at tapered fill is necessary to align the finished surfaces of the various floor finish 2. Install self - leveling underlayment at existing concrete slab surfaces to correct levelness. 3. Provide cementitious toppings at locations to remain exposed in the finished 4. Install underla ents and toppings; finish to a smooth uniform surface. Ym PP 9 5. Cure in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 6. Tolerances: Very flat; level to within 1/8? in 10 feet. I. Cleaning: As work proceeds, clean up excess materials, rubbish, and splash. DIVISION 4 - MASONRY concrete sealer or not by the underlayrnent to achieve underlayrnent, as as indicated on the progress. y p g joints. Prepare for that would affect down high spots as control joints to establish if necessary to other locations where materials. slab flatness and work. the Drawings, and at soffit Structural Drawings. requirements. awnings, and other items deflection of L/720. loads, with a safety and temperature or heavier gage. or I closer spacing as P 9 members as required to " Specification for the engineer licensed to by the code structural drawings; G60 er coated steel. ", or approved. or specified system stem components or and trim accessories. greater than 1/8 inch shall not be used. items. mechanical and electrical shall visit the site to that connections and graded in whose least unless indicated or indicated on the oriented strand board, conditions. Site treat sawn in moist conditions. Site (ACQ) or C Copper with 0.25 pounds per by the jurisdictil jurisdictional as indicated or and other a label from an approved C -20 Type A for %; treated plywood shall be Treated Wood Proof LHC." E. Blocking and Nailers: 1. Provide blocking, nailers for all sheathing, roof construction, metal flashing, and other construction as indicated. 2. Wood Blocking: Install wood blocking to receive mechanical fasteners for support of electrical fixtures and equipment, cabinets, doorstop plates, wood base, wainscots, coat hooks, and all other wall and ceiling mounted components, unless specified otherwise. 3. Backing: a Plywood backing shall be used in lieu of blocking at locations of wall- mounted standards, shelving and counters. b Backing shall be mounted over face of studs beneath gypsum board and shall be continuous over entire ,plane of wall; 1/2 inch thickness. c Secure backing with all edges on firm bearing. 9 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION _ E. MANUFACTURERS 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject may be incorporated into the Work 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance a. Dryvit Systems, Inc. b. Senergy Inc.; SKW -MBT Construction c. STO Corp. 3. Basis -of- Design Product: The design requirements. Subject to compliance product by one of the following manufacturers F. MATERIALS 1. Compatibility Provide substrates, � finish -coat systems, sealants, and by EIFS manufacturer for Project. 2. Water - /Weather- Resistive - Barrier 3. Primer /Sealer: Substrate conditioner improve the bond between substrate 4. Drainage Mat: Designed to drain recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer[ mechanical fasteners suitable for intended 5. Spacers: Furring strips; EIFS manufacturer's manufacturer[ with manufacturer's intended substrate]. 6. ZAdhesive for Application of Insulation: 7. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene ASTM C 578 for Type I, and EIMA's Insulation Board." a. Channeled Board Insulation: EIFS vertical drainage channels, slots, 8. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali- other EIFS materials and complying a. Standard - Impact Reinforcing Mesh: b. High- Impact Reinforcing Mesh: c. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not d. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not 9 9. Base -Coat Materials: Standard mixture. 10. Waterproof Adhesive /Base -Coat Materials: 11. Primer: Factory -mixed elastomeric-polyrner finish coat. 12, Finish -Coat Materials: [Standard Textures, and Patterns: Reference 13. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion - resistant shaft attachments, and fastener suitable 14. Trim Accessories: Manufactured from ASTM C 1063. G. INSTALLATION 1. General: Comply with ASTM C 1397 as applicable to each type of substrate 2. Insulation: [Adhesively and mechanically] 3. Expansion Joints: Install at locations joints are indicated in substrates behind construction; at floor lines in multilevel 4. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 5. Reinforcing Mesh: Completely embed necessary, so reinforcing -mesh color 6. Double -Layer Reinforcing Mesh Application: [standard] impact reinforcing mesh. 7. Double Base -Coat Application: Where except without reinforcing mesh. 8. Finish Coat: Apply over dry [primer] pp y y [p ' appearance, in thickness required by PP q matching approved sample g pp pie and free Textured Finish). H. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. The contractor shall be responsible p 2. Manu facturer assumes no responsibility P 3. If required, the contractor shall certify q system,details, installation procedures, 4. If required, the EPS supplier shall 5. If required, the sealant contractor the sealant manufacturer ?s and manufacturer I. CLEANING 1. All excess Outsulation System materials ys accordance with contract provisions 2. All surrounding areas, where the 9 foreign substances resulting from the J. PROTECTION 1. The Outsulation System shall be protected and permanent protection in the form SECTION 07415 - COMPOSITE WALL PANELS A. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1. Delegated Design: Design metal -faced engineering analysis by a qualified professional 9 9 Y Y q P criteria indicated. Structural Performance: of withstanding the effects of the following indicated, based on testing according g accor 2. Wind Loads: Determine loads based 3. Uniform pressure of acting (957 4. Deflection Limits: Metal -faced composite deflections no greater than [1/175 panel] < of the span. B. Product Data: For each type of product of metal -faced composite wall panels; p P es anchors , attachment system, trim, anchorages, Y among factory -, shop -, and field- assembled Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal performance requirements and design by the qualified professional engineer Y q P 9 elevations, drawn to scale, on which C. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: 2. Minimum 5 years continuous experience production processes. 3. ISO 9001 Certified. 4. Fabricator Qualifications: Minimum capable of providing representation P P 9 field service years experience on projects of comparable representation during construction. composite wall panels identical to those qualified testing agency. Identify products Preinstallation Conference: Conduct D. WARRANTY 1. Special Warranty. Manufacturer's standard components of metal -faced composite specified P warranty period. 2. Warranty Period: years from Y [Ten] ] Y 3. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: finish or replace metal -faced composite finishes within specified warranty period. 4. Finish Warranty Period: [20] > years PRODUCTS E. PANEL MATERIALS 1. Aluminum Sheet: Coil- coated sheet, required to suit forming operations 2. Surface: [Smooth, flat] [Embossed] 3. Exposed Coil- Coated Finishes: a Two -Coat FEVE F nish o ntain b Three polymer finish containing c Three -Coat FEVE Flu ontai ymer: d Fluoropolyrner finish containing e Two -Coat PVDF Fluoro of er: P Ym f Fluoropolymer finish containing of g Three -Coat PVDF Fluoro P Ym h Fluoropolyrner finish containing clear topcoat 4. Exposed Anodized Finishes: II, 0.010 mm] or thicker. b Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment polyester backer finish, consisting thickness of . (0.013 mm) 5. Panel Sealants: ASTM C 920. Ctilkawi to compliance with requirements, manufacturers include, but are not limited to, the following: with requirements, provide products by one Chemicals. for EIFS[ with drainage] is based on Dryvit with requirements, provide the named product listed above. adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing � accessories that are compatible with one another Coating: Formulation and accessories designed designed to seal substrates from moisture of type indicated and adhesive used for application incidental moisture by gravity, EIFS manufacturer's with manufacturer's standard corrosion substrate]. standard or product recommended standard corrosion - resistant mechanical fasteners MFR's Standard. Board Insulation: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene manufacturer's standard factory - fabricated or waves on the back side of board. resistant, open -weave glass -fiber mesh treated with EIMA 105.01 and ASTM D 578. Not less than [4.0 oz. /sq. yd. (136 g /sq. Not less than [15 oz. /sq. yd. (509 g /sq. m)] less than [4.0 oz. /sq. yd. (136 g /sq. m)]. less than oz./sq. g/sq. m [7.2 oz. s yd. [ / q y ( 9/ q m)]. Waterproof mixture. primer for preparing base -coat surface acrylic -based coating with enhanced mildew resistance].Colors, exterior finish schedule on drawings. fasteners consisting of thermal cap, standard 9 P• for substrate. UV- stabilized PVC and complying with ASTM and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions indicated. attach to substrate. indicated; where required by EIFS manufacturer; EIFS; where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, wood - framed construction; and where wall of insulation in minimum thickness recommended [1/16 -inch (1.6 -mm)] dry -coat thickness. mesh in wet base coat, applying additional and pattern are not visible. Where indicated, apply second base indicated, apply in same manner and thickness and [base coat], maintaining g ] [ ], g a wet edge at EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish Y P of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture variations. for the proper application ali of Outsulation p p the for on -site inspections or application y p pp ication of in writing the quality of work performed Y 9 q Y P workmanship and as to the specific products certify in writing that the EPS meets manufacturer shall certify in writing that the sealant application ?s recommendations. shall be removed from the job site by and as required by applicable law. S Y Outsulation System has been installed, shall be contractor ?s work. from inclement weather and other sources of flashings, sealants, etc. are installed. (if noted on drawings) ( composite wall panel assembly, including engineer, using performance requirements 9 9 P q Provide metal -faced composite wall panel P P loads and stresses within limits and under 9 to ASTM E 330: on the following 9 minimum design 9 wind pressures: Pa) inward or outward. wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind of the span at the perimeter and 1/60 of the indicated. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, 9 P flashings, closures, and accessories; and special 9 P work. Samples: For each type of exposed -faced composite wall panel assembly indicated P P Y criteria, including analysis data and calculations responsible for their preparation. Coordination P P P the following items are shown and coordinated manufacturing the panel material specified, 3 years experience on projects of comparable during construction. Installer Qualifications: P 9 scope and scale, and capable of providing Fire - Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide of assemblies tested for fire resistance per with appropriate markings of applicable conference at Project site form in which manufacturer agrees to wall panel assemblies that fail in materials date of Substantial Com le p tion. Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer wall panels that show evidence of deterioration from date of Substantial Completion. ASTM B 209), alloy as standard with manufacturer, and structural performance required. finish. AAMA pert 100 percent FEVE resin in color coat. AAMA 620. 100 percent FEVE resin in both color coat and AAMA 620. not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight er: AAMA 620. not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight [AA-M12C22A42/A44, [ / , Class I, 0.018 mm ] [AA-M12C22A32/A34, and manufacturer's standard white or of prime coat and wash coat 0.5 mil with a f ' 81 offering products that of the following: Outsulation System or a comparable 9 meshes, base- and and approved for use for indicated use. penetration and to of insulation. standard or product - resistant in writing by EIFS suitable for requirements, (EPS) profile with linear, for compatibility with m)] 7' -0? down to FF. for application of washer and D 1784 and for installation of EIFS where expansion materials, and height changes. in writing by base -coat material if coat and second layer of as first application all times for uniform of color and texture (Fine Sand materials. its products. relative to the substrate used. ?s s ecifications. is in accordance with the contractor in left free of debris and of damage until dry comprehensive and design 9 assemblies capable P conditions 20 lbf/sq. q ft. loads with horizontal span anywhere in the and installation layouts corners, details. Distinguish 9 finish required. to comply with signed and sealed Drawings: Exterior 9 with each other. with no outsourced scope and scale, and Minimum 3 field service metal -faced ASTM E 119 by a testing agency. repair or replace or workmanship within agrees to repair of factory - applied with temper as clear topcoat. in color coat. in both color coat and / A34, Class light- colored acrylic or minimum total dry film RECEIVED CITY OF TUKVVILA NAY- 9 2009 ER PERMI-- --N-�- 007200 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. Unless otherwise agreed upon by Contractor and Owner, in part or in whole, Contract for Construction," AIA Document A201, 1997 Edition, shall govern the B. References to the ?Owner? shall mean ?T- Mobile ?. DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY A. This specification identifies requirements for several Projects, and may contain apply to this particular project. Refer to the Drawings to determine whether to this Project. B. Definitions: 1. Landlord: Mall Developer or Building Owner. 2. Owner: T- Mobile or owners representative (JCI), Tenant. 3. Use of Premises: Coordinate with Owner. 4. Special Work Requirements (including allowable times for Work): Coordinate 5. Work performed by Owner under separate contracts (F010): Coordinate with 6. Owner Furnished Contractor Installed (FDIC) Items: Coordinate with Owner. 7. Applications for Payment: Coordinate with Owner. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs): RFIs shall be submitted to the Owner's contact the Architect on an as- needed basis. 013119 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Project Meetings between Owner and Contractor will be scheduled by the Owner B. Architect's attendance will be upon written request of owner's representative. 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL A. All temporary facilities and controls, including the following, are to be coordinated 1. Temporary Utilities, including electricity, lighting, heating and ventilation, water 2. Dust control. 3. Barriers and enclosures. 4. Security. 5. Contractor designated areas, including parking and storage. 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Substitutions: Substitutions will not be allowed unless approved by owner and 017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Repair existing surfaces and construction as necessary to make Work complete, matching and consistent. B. Provide a smooth, even, and invisible transition to new construction. C. Seal all penetrations in walls, floors and ceilings. Major patching procedures Owner and the Building Owner, prior to proceeding. D. Existing Sprayed Fireproofing where occurs: Patch and repair existing sprayed rating of the existing construction. Hand patch using UL- approved materials E. Patching of Existing Concrete Slabs on Grade: In accordance with Section 030133. F. X -Ray concrete slabs prior to any sawcutting for areas with possible post tensioned 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. As -Built Documents: Record documents, provided by the Contractor, which exactly conditions, will be as required by Owner and located per notes on the floor plan B. Operation and maintenance manuals will be as required by the Owner. C. Project Closeout Documents, including Warranty, Guarantees and request for required by the Owner. DIVISION 2 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 072100 THERMAL INSULATION A. Summary Building insulation when indicated on the Drawings. B. Materials 1. Unfaced Batt and Blanket Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I; preformed unfaced glass fiber roll; flame spread of 25 or less and smoke developed of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84; oversize widths for friction -fit between metal framing. 9 2. Board Insulation: Extruded polystyrene; Dow Chemical Company "Styrofoam" or Owens Corning "Foamular Foamular 250. Accessories: 3. Separate Vapor Barrier for Batt Insulation: Foil scrim kraft FSK 25; flame spread of 25 or less and a smoke developed of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Tape: To match insulation facing; 2 inch width. 5. Acoustic Insulation: See Section 098100. C. Installation: 1. Install irsulation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated. 2. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Install without gaps or voids. 3. Installation of Thermal Batt Insulation: a Instal insulation with vapor barrier toward warm side of building spaces. Vapor barrier shall be continuous. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor barrier. b At metal stud framing, insert the insulation edges tightly into the stud channels for a friction fit. Where insulation butts the backside of stud channels, continuously tape insulation flanges to the exposed metal stud flange. P 9 c Mechanical Fastening: 4. At locations where no framing is present to support the insulation, provide metal impaling pins and retainers to hold the insulation firmly in position. 5. Mechanically or adhesively bond the retaining pins to the substrate in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Space 6. p pins at maximum 24 inches on center along the edges and within the field of the blanket. Place edge pins within 6 inches from the edge of the batt. a Pack batt insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of window assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. 7. Separate Vapor Barrier Installation: a Install separate vapor barrier over unfaced insulation. b Install vapor barrier toward warm side of building spaces. c Vapor barrier shall be continuous. d At locations where insulation is mechanically fastened by impaling pins, place vapor retarder over impaling pins and hold in position with additional retainers. The installation shall present a tight, continuous, and wrinkle free appearance. e At light gage support framing, secure to studs with double stick tape or spray adhesive. f Lap joints in vapor barrier 2 inches, except provide tape sealed joints at locations where vapor barrier will remain exposed in the finished work, g Tape seal vapor barrier to adjacent construction at perimeter edges. " h Tape and seal tears or cuts in vapor barrier. D. R Value Schedule: 1. Batt Insulation: Provide minimum 6 inch insulation thickness (R19) to fill stud cavity or greater to match in similar applications, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Rigid Insulation: Provide minimum 2 inch insulation thickness (R10) or to match existing in similar applications. A. Summary DIRECT APPLIED EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM (DEFS) A. 1. Where Cement Plaster is indicated on the Drawings over existing CMU, provide direct applied exterior finish system (DEFS) over existing concrete masonry units as specified. B. Applicator Qualifications: REVIEWED 1. Minimum of 5 years experience in the application of DEFS re similar scope to the work indicated. �w } � 2. Installer shall have been trained by the product manufacturer prior to bidding, and shall be curr n IZ e �l9��� C. Protection: Protect adjacent materials and this system from damage during installation, while curin or D. Approved Manufacturers: when unattended. JUN 0 00I: � 1. Dryvit Systems Inc. 2. STO Industries, Inc. 3. Senergy, Inc. E. Materials: Tukwila 1. Provide manufacturer's standard materials as recommended for the installation. BUILDING ® � 2. Base Coat: Manufacturers standard polymer modified cementitious base coat; maximum 30% cement--- - �� dry factory pre -mixed formula, or pre- measured packaged materials for consistent site mixing. 3. Finish Coat: Manufacturer's standard; 100% acrylic; custom integral color as selected by the Architect; listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. as having a flame spread of 25 or less. 4. Reinforcing Mesh: Manufacturer's standard alkaline resistant open weave glass fiber mesh; standard duty and heavy duty. 5 Substrate Mesh Tape: Alkaline resistant open weave fiber mesh surfaced side . pp glass mes surace on one se w pressure sensitive adhesive; type as recommended by system manufacturer. 6. DEFS Trim: a. Products of Vinyl Corporation (800- 648 -4695) are listed as a standard of approval. Similar and equal products by Plastic Components (800- 327 -7077) may be used. Fabricate from exterior grade vinyl; provide manufacturers standard splice plates and connector clips for butt joint connections. b. Corner Bead: CB158E. F. Installation: 1. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with overspray and spatter of primers, adhesives, and finish coats. P Y P P 2. At concrete and CMU surfaces to receive finish coat only, remove all dirt, dust, form release agents, efflorescence, and other elements which would impair bond. Acid etch with muriatic acid. 3 Install DEFS in accordane with th ft dti . accordance manufacturer recommendations. 4. Provide finish coat only over existing concrete block surfaces as indicated on the drawings. 5. Fini Finish coating shall be applied as recommended by the exterior insulation and finish system manufacturer. 6 Trowel alki f ft ' 6. apply skim coat of manufacturer's recommended fiber reinforced polymer modified mortar to obtain smooth and flat surfaces within a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet, and to fill surface imperfections. Use bonding agent as necessary for adequate bond. 7, Apply color match primer. 8. Provide finish coat to match existing. G. Clean -Up: Remove dirt and stains from DEFS surfaces and adjacent surfaces without damaging finishes. 07241 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB A. SUMMARY 1. This Section includes Class PB exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS)[ with drainage] applied over Substrate as indicated on drawings. a. Use, manufacturer, extent, texture and color are subject to T- Mobile/ Johnson Controls review, and approval 2. Acceptable Substrates For Outsulation Systems. a. Unglazed brick, cement plaster, concrete, or masonry. b. Exterior grade gypsum sheathing meeting ASTM C79 requirements for water- resistant core or Type X C. core at the time of application of the Outsulation System. d. Silicone treated gypsum core sheathing surfaced with inorganic fiberglass mats meeting ASTM C1177. e. Exterior fiber reinforced cement and calcium silicate boards. f. APA Exterior or Exposure 1 rated Plywood, Grade C -D or better, nominal 13 mm (1/2 in), minimum 4 ply. g. APA Exposure 1 rated Oriented Strand Board (OSB), nominal 13 mm 4 in). h. Galvanized expanded metal lath 1.4 or 1.8 kg /m2 (2.6 or 3.3 Ibs /yd2) installed over a solid substrate. i. Deflection of substrate systems shall not exceed L/240. j. The slope of inclined surfaces shall not be less then 6:12. k. The length of inclined surfaces shall not exceed 305 mm (12in). B. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1. Class PB EIFS: Comply with performance characteristics in EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, Class PB." a. Standard Impact Resistance: 25 -49 inch -lb (2.8 -5.6 J) for areas above 7' -0 ?. b. High Impact Resistance: 90 -150 inch -lb (10.2 -17 J) for areas below 7' -0 ?. C. Positive and Negative Wind -Load Performance: Capability to withstand wind loads indicated when tested per ASTM E 330. 2. Drainage: 3 samples capable of draining water, and average minimum true drainage 9 ' P P 9 having an aversg 9 a efficienc Y of [90] percent when tested per EIMA 200.2. 3. Water - /Weather- Resistive- Barrier Coating: Comply with ICBO -ES AC24. C. SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: For each roduct indicated. P 2. Sho Drawin s: Include Ions, elevations, sections, details, penetrations, terminations, fasteners, and attachments to other work. 3. Samples: For each EIFS and for each color and texture required. 4. Field ualit - control test re arts. q Y P 5, Product test re arts . 6. Maintenance data. ] D. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Installer Qualifications: Certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer to install manufacturer's system using trained workers. 2. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS through one source from a single EIFS manufacturer and from sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components. 3. Fire- Test - Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide EIFS and system components identical to those of EIFS and system components tested per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 9 PP 9 P 9 s a. Flame Spread of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 25 or less when tested individually per ASTM E 84. b. Smoke Developed of Insulation Board and Finish Coats; 450 or less when tested individually per ASTM E 84. X 0 Not Used DIVISION 5 - METALS 054000 COLD- FORMED METAL FRAMING A. Summary. 1. Light gage structural steel metal framing at exterior walls where indicated on construction supporting storefronts, display windows, and signage elements. 2. Structural design of cold formed metal framing systems not indicated on the B. System Description: 1. Structural Design: a Size and arrange members to support dead and live loads in accordance code b Design system to resist dead and live loads from windows, display cases, indicated to be supported by cold formed metal framing. c Design system to resist 100 percent of the design load with a maximum d Anchorages shall be designed to simultaneously resist all vertical and lateral f actor of 2. 2. Design system to accommodate building deflection, dynamic building movement, variations without damage to system components. 3. Configuration: a Provide framing of depth indicated on the Drawings. b Where stud gage is indicated on the Drawings, provide studs of indicated c Where stud spacing is indicated d cated on the Drawings, provide additional e add tional studs P 9 9 P necessary to meet design requirements. y g d In addition to cold formed metal framing, provide additional structural steel support the loads imposed. C. Quality Assurance: 1. Use only ertified welders. 2. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with the AISI Design of Cold Formed Steel Members " , 3. Structural Design: Structural Design of the framing system shall be by a structural practice in the State where the Project is located. 4. Regulatory Requirements: a Framing system shall meet the requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities. b Furnish all calculations, engineer s stamps, drawings, and other items required authorities to obtain approval of the installation. D. Components: P 1. Cold Formed Light -gage Steel Framing: ASTM A653; types as indicated on the galvanized coating. 2. Screws: ASTM C954; self drilling, self tapping; pan head; galvanized or fluoropolym 3. Zinc Rich Touch -up Paint: "Gale- weld ", "Galvican ", "ZRC Cold Galvanized Compound E. Installation: 1. Install light gage structural framing in accordance with ASTM C1007, unless indicated otherwise, and as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Screw or weld each joint. Welds shall be in accordance with AWS D1.3. 3. Metal framing members shall be saw or shear cut. No torch cutting is permitted. 4. Construct corners with a minimum of 3 studs per corner. 5. Frame both sides of expansion and seismic joints. Do not bridg e joints with p accessories. 6. Provide framing as required to form solid backing for all edges of sheathing, 7. Tolerances: a Plumbness: Plumb within 1/8 inch in 10 feet. b Location: Located within 1/4 inch of the required location. c Alignment: Stud and runner faces to receive finish materials shall not vary from the required plane, with no abrupt jogs or breaks in plane. d. Level: Level within 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 8. Erect studs in one piece full length. Splicing and wire tying of framing components 9. Touch -up field welds and scratched or damaged galvanizing with zinc rich paint. 10. Attach cross studs or furring channels to studs for attachment of wall mounted t1. Install framing between studs for attachment of electrical boxes and other items. F. Field Quality Control: 1. The cold formed metal framing design engineer or his authorized representative inspect the work. Verify and certify that framing sizes and materials are as required, are and that struc ur l properly executed, ' p erl structural integrity of materials has been maintained. DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTIC IL 024119 024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner as required to accommodate the exceeds that indicated, t ed ,verify such demolition with the Architect prior to proceeding. B. Protect existing structural members. Contact the Architect prior to modifying the extent indicated. Cease operations and notify the Architect immediately if operations might endanger the existing structure. C. During demolition operations, notify the Architect of all conditions which differ indicated, specified, or expected. Notify the Architect if previously unknown operational, operational elements, are uncovered during demolition operations. Perform no unless approved by the Architect. 9 p permanent pp p E. Except where noted or specified otherwise, take possession of materials being immediately remove from site. Do not overload existing construction to remain F. Carefully remove, store, and protect all materials and components to be reused. G. Where possible without damage, remove, store, and protect existing materials for removal, which if removed, would facilitate the new construction and reconditioning. H. Carefully remove, protect, and turn over as directed, materials and components salvage. Prior to demolition, contact the Owner to determine which items will I. Where cut edges of the existing construction will be visible in the completed lines. Concrete and masonry shall be saw cut or core drilled. J. Repair all demolition performed in excess of that required, at no additional K. Utility Line Demolition: 1. Verify locations of existing utilities prior to demolition. 2. Abandoned under -slab conduit shall be cut off below the finished surface removed. Patch and fill the opening flush with the finish. 3. Abandoned electrical conductors shall be removed back to the branch circuit otherwise. Abandoned conduit which is exposed and readily accessible shall abandoned conduit which is concealed in existing construction to remain. 4. Abandoned under -slab piping shall be removed and cut off flush with the floor, 5. Abandoned piping which is exposed and readily accessible shall be removed. which is concealed in existing construction to remain. Cap all exposed ends. 6. Indicate location of disconnected utilities on the Project Record Drawings as 9 L. Leave site in a condition acceptable to the Owner at all times. Remove demolished as work progresses. Do not overload existing structure with demolished materials. M. Removal of Bonded Floor Finishes: 1. Scrape, grind and otherwise remove existing floor finish and bonding materials new floor finishes. 2. Prepared surface shall present a uniform flat surface ready to receive the telegraphing and other surface irre ularities. irregularities. 3. New floor finishes shall not be installed over existing floor finish materials DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE W Q v 030133 CONCRETE SLAB PATCHING A. Quality Assurance: Perform work B. Concrete Materials: 1. Cement: ASTM C150, normal 2. Normal Weight Fine and Coarse 3. Accelerator: ASTM C 494, Type C. Concrete Mix: In accordance with D. Reinforcing: 1. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM C615, 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, reinforcement during installation and placement 3. Fabricate as indicated and in 4. Dowel into existing slab at concrete patch area. 5. Place, support, and secure reinforcement 6. Locate reinforcing splices not E. Placement: 1. Coordinate with other trades 2. Ensure that below grade construction 3. Replace existing subgrade materials other similar construction disturbed 4. Recompact existing subgrade 5.,Patch slab with concrete having of 0.40. Use superplasticizer 6. Finish concrete to match adjacent F. Curing: Moisture cure concrete 035416 HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT A. Summary y 1. Cementitious underlayments necessary to meet specified 2. Cementitious toppings as necessary concrete sealer only. 3. Ramps tapers as necessary s and to B. Environmental Requirements 1. Maintain surface and ambient and 24 hours after underlayment 2. Keep traffic out of area in C. Self Leveling Underlayment System: compressive strength 2,000 psi; manufacturer for conditions, or 1. Mapei Corporation "Ultraplan 2. Ardex Inc. "K -15" Self- Leveling 3. Laticrete International, Inc, Self-Leveling D. Trowelable Underlayment System: 1. Mapei Corporation "Mapacem P P P 2. Ardex Inc. "SD -P" Fast - Setting 3. Laticrete International, Inc. "Laticrete Admix," in accordance with ACI 301, as applicable. - Type 1 portland cement; gray color. Aggregates: ASTM C33 C or E, non - corrosive, non - chloride. ASTM C94, minimum 3000 psi 28 day compressive grade 40, unless indicated otherwise. and Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength of concrete. accordance with ACI 315. minimum 18 inches on center but in not less against displacement. indicated on the drawings at points of minimum for installation and bedding of utilities. is complete in the slab area to be patched. to match existing. Replace and make or damaged during demolition or construction to 95 percent of maximum dry density as determined a minimum 28 -day strength of 3000 psi; admixture as necessary for workability. surfaces. for a minimum of 7 days, unless approved otherwise. as necessary for leveling of new or existing concrete tolerances. for leveling new or existing slabs at locations to align y 9 temperature of between 50 and 80 degrees installation. which underlayment is being applied or cured. Self- leveling, pourable, cement based material, minimum bond strength 200 psi; one of the approved. 1' or "Novoplan 1 2." Underlayment Concrete 86 LatiLevel Thin Pour Underlayment.' As recommended by manufacturer for conditions, 100" or "Planitop 10 ". P Underlayment. 220 Medium Bed Mortar mixed with "Laticrete 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Dimension Lumber: 1. Lumber shall be manufactured in accordance with PS 20, and shall be stamped accordance with SPIB, WWPA, WCLIB, or NLGA grading rules. 2. Moisture Content: Kiln dried to 19% maximum moisture content, except for material dimension is 4 inches thick or greater. 3. Species: Southern Pine, Hem -Fir, Spruce - Pine -Fir (SPF), or Douglas Fir Larch, specified otherwise. 4. Architectural Lumber Grades: Unexposed non - structural wood framing and blocking Architectural Drawings shall be graded as follows: a Blocking and Nailers: "Utility - Light Framing," or better. B. Panel Materials: 1. Miscellaneous Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing; CD grade; Exterior; plywood or unless approved otherwise; thickness as indicated. 2. Terminal Backboards: APA AC grade exterior; fire retardant treated. C. Accessories: 1. Fasteners: a Hot - dipped galvanized steel for exterior, high humidity locations. b G -185 galvanized coating or stainless steel fasteners at treated wood locations. D. Wood Treatment: 1. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): a Preservative treat all wood in contact with concrete, masonry, and moist ends with preservative treatment. b Preservative treat all wood and plywood at roof construction or other wood treat sawn ends with preservative treatment. c For above ground use, use AWPA certified Ammonium Cor Quatium Copper ern Hydroxide Sodium Dimethyldithiocarbamate (CDDC) waterborne preservative cubic foot of wood retention. d Treated wood shall have a maximum moisture content of 19 %. e Treated wood shall bear the quality stamp of an inspection agency approved pp code authorities. 2. Fire Retardant Treatment (At Types I and II Construction only): a Fire retardant treat all interior concealed lumber and plywood, and other wood specified. Provide exterior fireproofing at rooftop blocking, nailers, curbs, sheathing, locations subject to wetting during construction operations. b All fire retardant treated wood materials shall bear a UL "FR-S" label, or inspection agency certifying that the material meets the requirements of AWPA lumber and AWPA C -27 Type A for plywood. c Treated lumber shall be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 19 kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 15 % . d Approved Products: e Interior Fireproofing: Clear finish product, Hickson Corporation "Dricon," Hoover Products "Pyro- guard," or Osmose Wood Preserving Co. of America, Inc. "Flame In d I 2 3 I 4 5 6 7 e GI 1 0 I I 12 ; ; ' n O ` a o COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. DATE: x 0 O u � iu O ce 00 I- 0) vi Q s Co g m w w ° W Ell SCALE: V ti 0 E DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 449 as se m 0 f 4 . 0 cn „yam C • C IsC VU ID .c LA O 01 W Z IA V PI CI 0 t cc 05 22 04i SHEET: NTS TMOO DDc:%i Wier 22 10 rn a) - v �� N N Ln v CO C o E co O -= Q 01 u • cn • o In !n u � �s A -14 1 F. MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING 1. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold- formed metallic- coated steel sheet, [ASTM A 653/A 653M, 040 (Z120) hot -dip galvanized] or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless otherwise indicated. 2. Subgirts: Manufacturer's standard C- or Z- shaped sections 0.064 -inch (1.63 -mm) nominal thickness. 3. Zee Clips: 0.079 -inch (2.01 -mm) nominal thickness. Base or Sill [Angles] [Channels]: 0.079 -inch (2.01 -mm) nominal thickness. 4. Hat- Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: 5. Nominal Thickness: [As indicated] [As required to meet performance requirements] [0.025 inch (0.64 mm)] >. 6. Depth: [As indicated] [1 -1/2 inches (38 mm)] 7. Cold - Rolled Furring Channels: Minimum 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm -) wide flange. 8. Nominal Thickness: [As indicated] [As required to meet performance requirements] [0.064 inch (1.63 mm)]< 9. Depth: [As indicated] [ 3/4 inch (19 mm)] < 10. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated -edge type of steel sheet with nominal thickness of 0.040 inch (1.02 . mm) 11. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062- inch - (1.57 -mm -) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048 -inch- (1.22 -mm -) diameter wire. G. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 1. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 2. Fasteners: Self- tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self - locking rivets and bolts, end - welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal -faced composite wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory - applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers. 3. METAL -FACED COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 4. General: Provide factory - formed and - assembled, metal -faced composite wall panels fabricated from two metal facings bonded, using no glues or adhesives, to solid, extruded thermoplastic core; formed into profile for installation method indicated. Include attachment system components and accessories required for weathertight system. 5. Fire - Retardant Core: Noncombustible, with the following surface - burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 6. Flame- Spread Index: 25 or less. 7. Smoke - Developed Index: 450 or less. 8. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ALPOLIC, Division of Mitsubishi Chemical America, Inc.; [ALPOLIC] [ALPOLIC /fr] or a comparable product from one of the following: a Alcan Composites USA Inc.; [Alucobond] b Alcoa Inc.; Reynobond [PE] c CENTRIA Architectural Systems; Formabond Wall System. d Citadel Architectural Products, Inc., Envelope 2000 [(RS)] e Copper Sales, Inc.; UNA -FAB [Series 1000]. f Protean Construction Products, Inc.; ACM 100. 9. Aluminum -Faced Composite Wall Panels: Formed with 0.020 -inch- (0.50 -mm -) thick, coil- coated, aluminum sheet facings. 10. Panel Thickness: [0.157 inch (4 mm)] 11. Core: [Standard] [Fire retardant if required by code]. 12. Exterior Finish: 2 -coat fluoropolymer 13. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of finishes a noted on drawings. 14. Attachment System Components: Formed from material compatible with panel facing. Include manufacturer's standard panel clips and anchor channels H. ACCESSORIES 1. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal -faced composite wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fascia, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, fleshings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items, Match material and finish of metal -faced composite wall panels unless otherwise indicated. 2. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.018 -inch- (0.46 -mm -) minimum thickness, zinc- coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum -zinc alloy- coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fascia, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal -faced composite wall panels. I. FABRICATION 1. General: Fabricate and finish metal -faced composite wall panels and accessories at the factory to re atest g extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. 2. Fabricate metal -faced composite wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel and with joints between panels designed to form weather tight seals. 3. Metal -Faced Composite Wall Panels: Factory form panels in a continuous process with no glues or adhesives between dissimilar materials. Trim and square edges of sheets with no displacement of face sheets or protrusion of core material. 4. Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from warp and buckle. Fabricate panels with sharply cut edges, with no displacement of face sheets or protrusion of core material. 5. Fabricate panels with panel stiffeners, as required to comply with deflection limits, attached to back of panels with structural silicone sealant or bond tape. 6. Dimensional Tolerances: a Panel Bow: 0.5 percent maximum of panel length or width. b Squareness: 0.25 inch (5 mm) maximum. c Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and . trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. J. PREPARATION 1. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous wall panel support members and anchorage according to ASTM C 754 and metal -faced composite wall panel manufacturer's written instructions. K. METAL -FACED COMPOSITE WALL PANEL INSTALLATION 1. Attachment System Installation, General: Install attachment system required to support metal -faced composite wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system, including subgirts, perimeter extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor channels. 2. Include attachment to supports, panel -to -panel joinery, panel -to- dissimilar - material joinery, and panel - system joint seals. 3. Do not begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be concealed by composite panels are installed. 4. Clip Installation: Attach panel clips to supports at each metal -faced composite wall panel joint at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Attach routed - and - returned flanges of wall panels to panel clips with manufacturer's standard fasteners. 5. Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent panels with sealant backing and sealant. Install sealant backing and sealant according to requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 6. Track- Support Installation: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal and vertical tracks that provide support and complete secondary drainage system, draining to the exterior at horizontal joints. Install support system at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Attach panels to wall by interlocking tracks with perimeter extrusions attached to wall panels. Fully engage integral gaskets and leave horizontal and vertical joints with open reveal. 7. Attach routed - and - returned flanges of wall panels to perimeter extrusions with manufacturer's standard fasteners. Attach flush wall panels to perimeter extrusions by engaging panel edges and by attaching with manufacturer's standard structural silicone adhesive, Install wall panels to allow individual panels to "free float" and be installed and removed without disturbing adjacent panels. Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 8. Subgirt - and - Spline Installation: Provide manufacturer's standard subgirts and splines that provide support and complete secondary drainage system, draining to the exterior at horizontal joints. Install support system at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Attach wall panels by interlocking perimeter extrusions attached to routed - and - returned flanges of wall panels with subgirts and splines. Fully engage integral subgirt- and - spline gaskets and leave horizontal and vertical joints with open reveal. 9. Install wall panels to allow individual panels to "free float" and be installed and removed without disturbing adjacent panels. 10. Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 11. Rainscreen- Principle Installation: Provide manufacturer's standard pressure - equalized, rainscreen- principle system with vertical channel that provides support and complete secondary drainage system, draining at base of wall. Notch vertical channel to receive support pins. Install vertical channels supported by channel brackets or adjuster angles and at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Attach wall panels by engaging horizontal support pins into notches in vertical channels and into flanges of wall panels. Leave horizontal and vertical joints with open reveal. 12. Install wall panels to allow individual panels to "free float" and be installed and removed without disturbing adjacent panels. 13. Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. L. ACCESSORY INSTALLATION 1. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide fort thermal rural expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 2. Install components required for a complete metal -faced composite wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. 3. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. M. ERECTION TOLERANCES 1. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal -faced composite wall panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nonaccumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 inch (3 -mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles, N. CLEANING 1. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal -faced composite wall panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal -faced composite wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. After metal -faced composite wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. END OF SECTION 07415 079200 JOINT SEALANTS A. Quality Assurance: Use only skilled installers specially trained in the techniques of sealing, and familiar with the published recommendations of the manufacturers of the sealants being used. B. Sealants: 1, Type S - Neutral Cure Silicone Sealants: a Dow Corning, . 790 Silicone Building Sealant, or 795 Silicone Structural Glazing and Weatherproofing Sealant. b Pecora, 890 Architectural Silicone Sealant. c Tremco "Spectrem 1 or 3." 2. Type PT: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P, class 25; Tremco "THC 901 ", Sonneborn "Sonolastic SL 1 ", Pecora "Urexpan NR- 201 ", or approved. 3. Type PTNS: ASTM C920, Type M, grade NS, Class 25; Pecora "Dynatred," Tremco "HPL," or approved; custom colors to match Architect's samples. 4. Type A: ASTM C834; Tremco "Acrylic Latex Caulk ", Pecora "AC -20 ", Sonneborn "Sonolac" or approved. 5. Type SM: Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant: USDA Approved; Dow Corning 786 by Dow Chemical, GE Sanitary Sealant or approved; clear. C. Accessory Materials: 1. Primer: Non - staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 2. Joint Cleaner: Non - corrosive and non - staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. 3. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyethylene foam; round profile; thickness: 130% of joint width. 4. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 5. Compressible Foam Sealant: Precompressed prefaced self - adhesive open cell polyurethane foam tape; "Backerseal" by Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd., or approved. D. Preparation: 1. Clean and prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove loose materials and other foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. 2. Apply masking tightly around joints to protect adjacent surfaces from excess sealant. 3. Prime as required for proper bond to substrate materials. 4. Place backing materials to achieve proper sealant width /depth ratios. Use bond breaker where required. E. Installation: 1. Perform work in accordance with ASTM C1193, unless specified otherwise or recommended otherwise by the sealant manufacturer. 2. Sealant beads shall have a sectional width to depth ratio of 2 to 1, except that sealant type PT shall be installed full depth without backing. 3. Install Type PTNS sealant full depth in tile expansion joints with no backer rod. 4. Tool joints concave, unless indicated otherwise. Finish free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. F. Protect sealant in joints subject to dirt, moisture, and traffic during the sealant curing process. Protection shall be able to resist traffic while remaining securely in position. G. Schedule: 1. Type S: Provide at all exterior joints unless specified otherwise; standard colors as selected by Architect. 2. Type PT: Provide at all exterior horizontal joints subject to traffic and abrasion; standard colors as selected by Architect. 3. Type PTNS: Provide at all expansion joints in tile; custom colors to match grout samples submitted by tile installer. 4. Type A: Provide at all interior joints, unless specified otherwise; standard colors to match adjacent construction. 5. Type SM: Provide at joints around countertops in Bach of House (BOH) and Restrooms. DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Summary. 1. Interior rolled steel doors and frames. 2. Exterior doors and frames, when indicated on the Drawings. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Where required, installed frame and door assembly shall conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated. 2. Where doors are noted with an hourly fire resistance rating, provide door and frame assemblies labeled by Underwriter's Laboratory (UL), or another testing laboratory approved by the local code authorities, to meet the hourly fire rating noted. Assemblies shall meet code requirements for positive pressure when required. 3. Include "S" label on fire rated door assemblies located at 1 hour rated exit corridors. C. Quality Assurance: 1. Conform to requirements of ANSI A250.8. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: Members of the Steel Door Institute and of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, subject to compliance with specified requirements. E. Materials: Steel sheet, cold rolled ASTM A366, or hot rolled pickled and oiled sheet conforming to ASTM A569, minimum 30% recycled content. F. Interior Door Construction: 1. ANSI A250.8; seamless; minimum 18 gage face sheets, 16 GA at inventory room. 2. Core: Vertical steel stiffeners with sound deadening fill between stiffeners, or resin impregnated kraft paper honey comb core. 3. Provide continuously welded seamless edges. No plastic fillers will be accepted. G. Exterior Door Construction: 1. ANSI A250.8; seamless; minimum 16 gage face sheets. 2. Core: Polystyrene or polyurethane foam core. 3. Special Construction Requirements: a Provide continuously welded seamless edges. No plastic fillers will be accepted. b Close top edges of exterior doors flush with steel filler cap; seal joints watertight. c Cut mortises for butts using appropriate templates; universal non - handed preparation of doors is not acceptable. H. Frames: 1. Design: Double rabbet, except flat, cased opening frame where indicated on plans, unless specified or indicated otherwise; fully welded. 2. gages: a Exterior Frames: Minimum 14 gage. b Interior Frames: Minimum 16 gage for frames of door openings up to and including 4 feet in width; 14 gage for frames greater than 4 feet in width. I. Finish: 1. Interior Frames: Manufacturer's standard rust - inhibitive primer. 2. Exterior Frames: Hot dip galvanized zinc coating conforming to ASTM A653 A60 (.60 oz /sq ft. coating weight), with manufacturer's standard primer to receive coating system specified in Section 099000. J. Installation of Frames: 1. Install frames in accordance with SDI -105 and in accordance with labeling requirements. 2. Coordinate with wall construction for anchor placement. 3. Installation Tolerances; Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 4. Door and hardware installation is specified in Section 087300. 081400 WOOD DOORS A. Solid Core Flush Doors: 1. Approved Manufacturers: One of the following. a Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. (Algoma WI; 920 - 487 -5221; 800 - 678 - 8910). b Eggers Industries (Two Rivers WI; 920 - 793 - 1351). c Vancouver Door (Puyallup WA, 800 - 999 -3667) d Western Oregon Door (Winston OR, 800 - 722 -7269) 2. AN Section 1300, Premium grade. 3. Core: Urea - formaldehyde free, solid particle board core, unless required otherwise for fire labeling requirements. 4. AWI PC -5 (5 or 7 ply construction). 5. Provide labeled doors as required to meet the hourly fire rating indicated. 6. Where intumescent seals are required to meet positive pressure labeling requirements, provide concealed edge sealing system built into the door edge. 7.1 -34 Inch ch thick unless scheduled / otherwise, 8. Frames: Provided under Section 081113. B. Fabrication: 1. Fabricate doors to the configurations indicated, in accordance with the AWI standards specified, and to fire rated labeling requirements. Attach fire rating labels. 2. Bevel lock and hinge edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches on all single acting doors. 3. Bond edge banding to solid core with hot melt or RF cured adhesive. 4. Prefit and premachine doors in accordance with AWI 1300 -S -6. Premachine for hardware specified in Section 087000, and locate as specified in Section 087300. 5. Doors shall be factory prefinished as scheduled to match Architect's sample; AWI Premium Grade, Low VOC, Polyurethane System. 6. Where required to meet labeling requirements, provide metal astragals to meet rating requirements for double fire doors. 7. Factory pre -glaze doors. 8. Flush Door Blocking: For flush doors, provide solid lock blocks and special blocking as required for the hardware components specified elsewhere. Blocking for fire rated doors shall meet the door manufacturer's labeling requirements. C. Installation: 1. Fit and prepare doors for installation in accordance with the door manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Provide clearances of 1/8 inch at jambs and heads and 3/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering, except where threshold is shown or scheduled provide 1/4 inch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 083100 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Quality Assurance: 1. Where access doors are installed in construction with an hourly fire resistance rating, provide door and frame assemblies labeled by Underwriter's Laboratory, Warnock Hersey, or any other testing laboratory approved by the local code authorities to meet the requirements of the fire rated assembly. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Milcor, Inc., Lima, OH. 2. J.L. Industries, Bloomington, MN. 3. Karp Associates, Inc., Maspeth, NY. 4. MM Systems Corporation, Tucker, GA. 5. Nystrom, Minneapolis, MN C. Door Types: 1. Fire Rated Metal Access Door for use at Rated Partitions: a Flush type design. b 16 gage frame; minimum 20 gage steel welded pan door panel insulated with non - combustible filler c Self closing and self latching, with interior latch release d Fully concealed pin type hinges or continuous piano hinge, 175 degree opening. e Ring turn latch. 2. Non Rated Metal Wall and Ceiling Access Door for use at Back -of -House (BOH) Areas: a Flush type design. b 16 gage steel frame; 14 gage steel door panel. c For installation in drywall: Integral attachment flange and drywall bead for flush installation. d Fully concealed pin type hinges or continuous piano hinge, 175 degree opening. e Hardware: Screw driver slot, quarter turn cam lock for interior locations; 2' -0" o.c., maximum. 3, Non Rated Concealed Drywall Access Door for use at Sales Floor areas: a Recessed type design. b Minimum 13 gage steel frame; minimum 16 gage steel door panel recessed to receive drywall. c Integral attachment flange and drywall bead for flush installation. d Fully concealed pivot rod hinge. e Latches: Screw driver operated cam latch. 4. High- Security Wall Access Door: a Karp Associates, Inc., "DSB -123SD Security Access Door," Nystrom "HS -GMZ" or approved. b Size: 24 in x 24 in. c Frames: 3/16" x 2" x 2" angle welded with joints ground smooth; applied 1/8" x 1" x 1" stop on four sides. Door: 10 gage steel plate. d Door: 10 gage steel plate. e Hinges: Provide fully concealed hinge(s). f Lock: prepared for interchangeable 5 -pin cylinder lock, as specified in Section 087100. g Weatherstrip: Provide continuous seal as necessary to maintain assembly watertight when closed. h Finish: Factory primed for field finish with manufacturer's standard rust - inhibitive powder coat, color to match adjacent construction. D. Minimum Sizes: Provide access doors in sizes indicated. When not indicated or specified otherwise, provide 12" x 12" size for hand access, and 24" x 24" size for man entry. E. Installation: 1. Provide access doors in the locations indicated, and for access to balancing and fire dampers, trap primers, valves, fans, terminal units, and other equipment requiring periodic inspection through finished walls or ceiling, whether indicated or not. 2. Coordinate access requirements with other trades. 3. Provide concealed drywall access doors unless fire rated access doors are required because of fire rated construction. 083326 OVERHEAD COILING SHUTTERS A. Overhead coiling shutter assemblies shall include shutters, guides, brackets, counterbalance, hood, motor, control mechanisms, and other accessories required for a complete installation. B. Quality Assurance 1. Installers: Installation shall be performed by a factory trained and authorized representative. C. Approved Manufacturer (one of the following, no substitutions): 1. QMI Security Solutions (Itasca IL; 630 -529 -7111) D. Shutter Type: As indicated and in accordance with T- Mobile national account requirements. E. Examination 1. Prior io starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. 2. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. F. Installation 1. Install shutter and operating equipment complete with accessories in accordance approved shop drawings, and manufacturer's recommendations. G. Field Quality Control 1. Verify that moving parts operate smoothly, coiling shutters are free from warp, twists, or distortion, shutters remain in required position, and safety features function properly. 2. Repair damage to overhead coiling shutters to match manufacturer's original finish. Replace components which cannot be properly repaired. H. Adjust 1. Adjust mechanism so moving parts operate smoothly. I. Color 1. Provide anodized aluminum finish, regardless of storefront window color. SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES, STOREFRONT AND ALL GLASS STOREFRONT A. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Conform to applicable accessibility code for locating hardware. 2. Conform to all applicable energy codes B. FABRICA1ION 1. Aluminum Entrances Doors: Medium stile profile. Aluminum Storefront: Flush glazing system designed to receive 1/4 inch glass; 1 3/4 inch face width x 4 1/2 inch depth. All Glass Storefront: 6" high x 2" wide aluminum bottom rail with 4 inch top rail. Provide satin finish. 2. Door Hardware: a. Pivots: Manufacturer's standard, offset type. b. Closers: Concealed overhead, manufacturer's standard. c. Exit Devices: Manufacturer's standard; cylinders specified in Section 08710. d. Push and Pull hardware: To be selected from manufacturer's standards unless otherwise indicated. C. MATERIALS 1. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, 6063 -T5 alloy and temper. Glass, Glazing Gaskets, and Accessories: Specified in Section 08800. D. FABRICATION 1. Finish: Class 2 anodized; See elevations for color. 084113 ALUMINUM- FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS A. Summary 1. Exterior aluminum framed storefront and window systems. 2. Interior aluminum framed storefront systems. 3. Aluminum framed glass doors. B. References: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 2. B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. 3. B221 - Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes, 4. E283 - Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors. 5. E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 6. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association (AAMA). C. System Description: 1. Performance - Exterior Aluminum Window and Storefront System: a. System shall accommodate expansion and contraction caused by a temperature range of 20 degrees to 140 degrees F. without detrimental effects to components, sealing systems, and surrounding construction, b. Design system with provisions to drain moisture to the exterior of the system. c. Air Infiltration: Shall not exceed .05 CFM pr square foot of fixed area when tested in accordance with ASTM E283. d. Water Infiltration: No water penetration at a test pressure of 6.24 -lb /sq ft. when measured in accordance with ASTM E331. 2. Window and Storefront Structural Design: a. Design and size members to withstand positive and negative wind loads as required by the currently enforced edition of the Building Code. b. Limit mullion deflection to 1/175, or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. D. Warranty Furnish five year written warranty executed to the Owner, from the manufacturer of the storefront system, against defects in materials and workmanship, in accordance with Division 1. E. Materials: 1. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221; 6063 T5 alloy and temper. 2. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209; 5005 -H32 alloy, or approved. F. Components: 1. Exterior Storefront and Window Framing: a. Partial Replacement: Where new entrance or framing is indicated to be installed along with existing to remain, match dimensions, profile, glazing thickness and finish of existing aluminum window framing indicated to remain. b. Where storefront system as indicated on the Drawings is new, provide manufacturer's standard nominal 2? x 4? center - glazed thermally broken storefront framing system. 2. Interior (Mall) Storefront and Window Framing: Manufacturer's standard nominal 2" x 4" center - glazed non - thermally broken storefront framing system. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Kawneer, YKK, EFCO, Arcadia. 4. Doors: Extruded aluminum frame; medium stile; provide with special 10 inch high bottom rail. 5. Door Hardware: a. Provide manufacturer's standard offset pivot hinges, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. b. Manufacturer's standard weatherstripping, including bottom sweep. c. Balance of hardware is listed on the Drawings. 6. Glazing Eeads: Manufacturer's standard EPDM or neoprene glazing beads, for a complete weatherproof seal. Furnish for installation as a part of the work of Section 088000. G. Fabrication: 1. Fabricate frames allowing for shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation. 2. Rigidly fit joints and corners. Accurately fit and secure corners tight. Make corner joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. Seal joints with sealant. 3. Provide drainage holes to allow water to flow to exterior. 4. Prepare components to receive anchorage devices. Fabricate anchorage items. 5. Provide internal reinforcement in mullions with members to maintain rigidity. Provide reinforcing at all door strike jambs. 6. Fabricate storefront system to accommodate hardware using templates furnished from Section 087100. 7. Fabricate custom extrusions, closures, and sheet materials to the shapes indicated; fabricate for attachment with concealed fasteners to the greatest possible extent. 8. Finish: a. Anodized Finish: Manufacturer's standard anodized finish; .7 mil minimum thickness; clear, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Provide at all exposed aluminum surfaces. H. Installation: 1. Install frames, doors, and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Use anchorage devices to securely attach frame to structure. 3. Align frames plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. 4. Install aluminum flashings at head and sill. Finish to match storefront and windows. 5. Perimeter sealant is provided under Section 079200. 6. Adjust hardware installed in this section for smooth operation. 7. Protect aluminum from dissimilar materials with a coating of bituminous paint, a minimum 1 -mil thickness of zinc chromate primer, plastic separator materials, or isolation tape. Keep isolation materials unexposed to view. 8 10 10 1)0 ( 1ft- Del 11 II 12 087100 DOOR HARDWARE A. Supplier: Finish hardware shall be supplied by recognized builders' hardware supplier who has been furnishing hardware in the same area as the project for a period of not less than two years. The supplier's organization shall include a member of the American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants who is available at all reasonable times during the course of the work to meet with the Owner, Architect or Contractor for project hardware consultation. B. Installer: Finish hardware shall be installed only by experienced tradesmen in compliance with trade union jurisdictions, either at the door and frame fabrication plant or at the project site. C. Codes: 1. All finish hardware shall comply with applicable local and /or state current building codes. 2. Hardware for fire -rated openings shall also be in compliance with all fire building codes applicable to the district in which the building is located. Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by UL for the types and sizes of doors required, and which complies with the requirements of the door and doorframe labels. 3. Provide smoke seals as required at each fire -rated opening. D. Delivery Deliver all hardware in manufacturers' original unopened undamaged packages, clearly identifying manufacturer, brand name, and contents. E. In addition to required one year warranty under Conditions of the Contract, furnish 5 -year unconditional guarantees for all door closers, under provisions of Division 1. F. Factory representatives for door closers, exit bolts, and locksets shall be available during the construction to instruct the Contractor on the proper method of installation of their materials. They shall inspect and adjust their materials at the completion of the work, and supply proper maintenance manuals to the Owner. G. Furnish 2 sets of special tools for installation and maintenance of hardware. Tools for maintenance and adjustments are to be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the work. H. In general, unless otherwise indicated, finishes shall be satin chrome US26D. I. General: Construction masterkey all locksets and cylinder items; provide 6 construction masterkeys. J. Keying: Contractor shall be responsible for final keying, as follows: 1. Consult with Owner's authorized representative and prepare detailed keying schedule accordingly. Owner's representative will coordinate keying requirements with authorized representative of Hardware Supplier. 2. Stamp "Do Not Duplicate" on all keys. K. Butts: 1. In the following paragraphs where Hager numbers are listed, equivalent items of Lawrence, McKinney Sales Company, or the Stanley Works may be supplied. 2. Exterior doors (outswing) 38" wide or less shall have Hager 681191 butts, size 4 1/2 x 4 1/2. 3. Interior doors 38" wide or less shall have Hager BB1279 butts, size 4 1/2 x 4 1/2. 4. Provide butts on exterior doors with non - removable pins (set screw in barrel, pin non - removable when door is closed), and safety stud. 5. Provide full threaded wood screws for wood doors and /or jambs. 6. Butt widths listed are minimum. Provide butts of wider throw to suit conditions for 180' operation of doors, structural conditions permitting. 7. Types: As indicated on the Drawings. L. Locksets, Deadlocks, Cylinders and Padlocks: 1. Manufacturer: a Locks and Deadlocks - as noted in hardware schedule on drawings b Cylinders and Padlocks - as noted in hardware schedule on drawings 2. Provide new cylinder at each existing door that has deadlock or lockset. 3. Provide lock strikes with minimum projection to protect trim. 4. Provide wrought boxes for locksets and deadlocks. 5. Provide deadlocks with armored fronts. 6. Function as indicated in hardware groups. 7. Dead bolts at exterior doors shall have a minimum throw of 1 inch and minimum embedment of 3/4 inch 8. Types: As indicated on the Drawings. M. Electronic Hardware 1. Types: As indicated on the Drawings. N. Door Closers: 1. Manufacturers: a Overhead Closers: Corbin Russwin or LCN. b Floor Closers: Rixson. 2. All overhead closers to be mounted on interior side of door. No thru bolts. 3. Provide mounting brackets and proper length arms to suit all conditions. Provide arm options as scheduled or recommended by manufacturer. Finish shall match locksets 4. Sizes shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Closers shall have a 5 -year unconditional guarantee. 5. Provide standard full covers at overhead closers; finish to match arms, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Closure Pressure: Set to 8.5 pounds for exterior doors and 5 lbs for interior doors, per current requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act, unless required otherwise by local jurisdictional authorities. 7. Types: As indicated on the Drawings. 0. Door Stops and Overhead Stops: 1. Manufacturer: a Ives as scheduled. b Rixson 2. Locate floor stops free from foot traffic. 3. Types: As indicated on the Drawings. P. Push /Pull Bars and Sets: 1. Types: As indicated on the Drawings. Q. Weatherstrip, Thresholds, Door Bottom and Gaskets: 1. Manufacturer: Pemko Mfg. Co., or approved equal by Rixson. 2. Types: As indicated on the Drawings. R. Miscellaneous: 1. Provide silencers for all doorjambs, 3 for single jambs and 4 for double jambs. 2. Types: As indicated on the Drawings. S. Furnish for each door the items scheduled within the designated hardware groups as shown on the Drawings. T. Adjustments and Testing: 1. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation of function of every unit. 2. Lubricate moving parts with graphite type lubricant unless otherwise recommended by the hardware manufacturer. 3. Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. 4. Adjust closer pressures as specified in Section 087100, unless otherwise required by jurisdictional authorities. 5. Testing: a Test closer for compliance with requirements of Section 087100, including opening force and closing speed required by jurisdictional authorities. b Provide testing device, operate test at each door, and provide a written report on results of tests. c Testing device shall remain in the possession of the Owner. 087300 DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTALLATION A. Quality Assurance: Installers of doors and finish hardware shall be skilled mechanics regularly employed in the door hardware industry and experienced in the installation of doors and door hardware. B. Doors, Frames, And Hardware: Specified in other Sections. C. Door and Hardware Installation 1. Fit and prepare doors for installation in accordance with the door manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Install doors plumb and square. 3. Provide clearances of 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, 1/8 inch at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 1/2 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering, except where threshold is shown or scheduled provide 1/4 -inch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 4. Install roses, kick plates, closers, and other surface mounted hardware only after door finishing is complete and finishes are completely cured. 5. Fit hollow metal doors in accordance with SDI 100. 6. Finish Hardware Installation a Installer shall receive delivery and unpack, tag, index, and file all keys. Keep hardware in a separate room under lock and key at the site until installation is made. b Verify all dimensions and be responsible for the correct installation and fit of hardware at the locations indicated on the drawings and as specified. c Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. d Wherever cutting and fitting are required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application. After completion of the finishes, reinstall each item. Do not install surface - mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. e Hardware Mounting Heights: As indicated. Where not indicated, comply with recommendations of the National Builders Hardware Association (NBHA). 7. Adjustment and Cleaning: Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation of function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with graphite type lubricant unless otherwise recommended by the hardware manufacturer. Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. 088000 GLAZING A. Glass: Provide the following glass as scheduled on the Drawings: 1. Clear Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, class 1, clear, quality q3 glazing select. B. Plastic Glazing: Acrylic panel as Scheduled on the Drawings. C. Accessories: 1. Silicone Sealant: Dow Corning "795 "; clear color. 2. Setting Blocks: Compatible with silicone sealants; 70 -90 shore A hardness. 3. Spacers: Compatible with silicone sealant. 4. Glazing Tape: Tremco "CCN" sponge, or approved. 5. Glazing Channels: Extruded aluminum; profile as indicated on the Drawings; clear anodized finish. D. Fabrication: 1. Insulating Glass Units: a Dual lite units fabricated from glass as scheduled; 1/2 inch nominal airspace; dual seal system. b Twin seals; polyisobutylene primary seal and silicone secondary seal. Outer seal shall be compatible with glazing system. c Spacer Bar: Mill finish aluminum; fill with desiccant; corners shall be partially miter cut and bent (not cut through), or formed with corner keys ultrasonically soldered in place. d Certified through the Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) in accordance with ASTM E773 and E774; certified to level CBA. e Each piece shall bear certification number, date, and manufacturer's identification mark. fEVIE ED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE JUN 0 4 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIvIstrw RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY -9 2009 PERMIT CENTER 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 449 mcs 2 ill m C C w +� O 40 41 vi VI V ip - a = ^ N 3 Qf h a ai h M m D. a) VI VI z 0 cc DATE: 05.22.0ot SHEET: SCALE: NTS TH00100 IA! Qt tt! m N N N. CA CO � o U 10 MS CC 14 C LI- N Ln `° Co O V O N U '. o 0 . u o -_ U, ° 00 LP: ' -H 4 1 CZ g g as d C l7 = A O 2 E _ 0 N Ds A -15 INTERIOR HEIGHT STUD FLANGE GAGE SPACING 12' - ®i®1 20 24" O.C, 14' -0" iiiKAIWALIII 20 16" O.C. 16' -0" ®OINE 1 8 16" O.C. 18' -O" ®III®CIII 16 12" O.C. EXTERIOR HEIGHT STUD FLANGE GAGE SPACING 12' -0" 6" 2" 18 16" O.C. 14' -0" 6" 2" 16 12" O.C. 16' -0" 6" 2 1/2" 14 12" 0.C. 18' -0" 6" 2 1/2" 12 12" 0.C. 2. Tempered and Heat Strengthened Glass: a. Tempered Glass: Glass which has been heat treated to strengthen glass in bending to not less than 4 times the annealed strength; certified safety glass in accordance with ANSI Z97.1. b. Heat Strengthened Glass: ASTM C1048; glass which has been heat treated to strengthen glass in bending to not less than 2 times annealed strength. c. Fabricate tempered and heat strengthened glass units so that principle distortion will be in the horizontal direction in the finished installation. d, Unless otherwise approved by the building official, provide manufacturer's label on each light, indicating type and thickness of glass. e. Comply with UBC requirements for identification and labeling of safety - glazing materials in hazardous locations subject to human impact loads. E. Preparation: 1. Clean contact surfaces and wipe dry. 2. Seal frame corner joints, and other leakage points with sealant. At insulating glass units the sealant shall be compatible with the seal of the unit. Do not plug weep holes. 3. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant, unless otherwise recommended by the sealant manufacturer. F. Installation: 1. Unless specified otherwise, glaze in accordance with the current edition of Glass Association of North America (GANA): Glazing Manual. 2. Setting Blocks: Place setting blocks in frames for support of glass. Place at quarter points unless approved otherwise. 3. Set glass tightly in position with proper clearances in accordance with the referenced standard. 4. Unless specified otherwise, glaze units with gaskets furnished with the framing systems specified in other sections. 5. Glazing for Interior Non -Rated Doors and Windows, Where Gaskets Are Not Furnished: a. Glaze with glazing tape. b. Pre - measure and cut tapes to required lengths; adhere to fixed stops, setting horizontal tape at heads and sills before vertical tape. c. Install tape with tight butt joints; no overlaps will be accepted. Set tape with straight lines level with frame sight line. d. Position glass, uniformly sealing against tape. Install inside removable stops and place tape in stops forming a uniform seal against glass, level with sight lines. 6. Glazing for Fire Rated Doors and Windows: Glaze in accordance with NFPA 80, unless required otherwise by the labeling requirement of the frame. 7. Adjust glazing materials to form a uniform sight line. G. Schedule: 1. Type 1: Clear tempered glazing where indicated and specified. 2. Type 2: Insulating Glass, double glazed units with 1/2 inch air space betwe en two panes of 1/4 inch glass; outer pane shall be tinted heat strengthened or tempered glass; inner pane shall be clear glass. Provide tempered where indicated and specified. Where not required by code to be tempered, provide annealed, heat - strengthened or tempered glass as determined by glass manufacturer's glass analysis. H. Provide tempered glass in hazardous locations to meet the requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities. DIVISION 9 FINISHES 092200 LIGHT GAGE METAL SUPPORT FRAMING A. Summary Interior partition, ceiling, and soffit construction, not covered by Section 054000. B. System Description: 1. Structural Design: a Select framing systems, gages, supports, bracing, and connections as necessary to meet the structural requirements specified. b Partition framing shall conform to the widths indicated, unless approved otherwise. Provide thicker gages and decreased stud spacing as necessary to meet the design requirements. 2. Design Loads: a Interior Ceiling Assemblies: 5 pounds per square foot uniform live load, plus dead loads. b Interior Partitions: 5 pounds per square foot uniform live lateral load. c Exterior Soffits: 25 pounds per square foot uniform live load. 3. Deflection Requirements: Maximum of 1/240 the span, except maximum 1/360 at tile. C. Code Requirements: 1. Provide assemblies meeting the hourly fire ratings indicated and specified. Assemblies shall been tested in accordance with ASTM E119, and shall be approved by the local jurisdictional code authorities. Coordinate installation of other materials which are a part each assembly. 2. Fire rating requirements take precedence over the construction requirements indicated. In the event of conflict, notify the Architect, and do not begin construction in the area of conflict until the conflict has been resolved. 1. Provide all calculations, drawings, product data, and other verification as required by the jurisdictional code authority to obtain approval of the light gage metal framing installation. D. Materials: 1. Light Gage Metal Framing: ASTM C645; galvanized; provide "C" shaped studs, U shaped runners, hat and "Z" shaped furring channels, and other sizes and shapes as necessary. Minimum 25 gage, except furnish thicker gages as required to meet deflection requirements. 2. Cold Rolled Channels: Rust inhibitive paint coating; sizes in accordance with ASTM C754. 3. Screws: Self- tapping; low profile head. 4. Security Mesh: Amico (Alabama Metal Industries Corp) Birmingham AL (800/366 - 2642); ASM .50 -13F, minimum 13 gage, unless approved otherwise. 5. Proprietary Ceiling Suspension System: a Manufacturer: 1) As specified: Armstrong (800- 207 - 2321). 2) Acceptable Substitutions: a) USG Interiors, Inc. (Chicago, IL; 800 - 874 - 4968). b) Chicago Metallic (Chicago, IL Los Angeles, CA; 800 - 323 - 7164). b Suspension System: Similar to System 650, or 670; ASTM C635 heavy duty classification. (1) Furring Runners: Manufactured from 0.020 inch thick steel 1 -3/8 inch wide with knurled face by 1 -1/2 inches high; factory punched cross tee slots, hanger holes, and non - directional bayonet end tab couplings. (2) Furring Tees: Manufactured from 0.020 inch thick 1 -3/8 inch wide with knurled face by 1 -1/2 inches high; factory punched cross tee slots and hanger holes. (3) Furring Cross Channel: 0.020 inch thick steel; 1 -3/8 Inch wide with knurled face by 7/8 inches high by 48 inches long with straight locking end tabs. (4) Cross Tees: 0.020 inch thick steel 15/16 inch wide by 1 -1/2 inches high; with staked -on dip end tab couplings, factory punched cross tee slots. (5) Moldings: Manufacturer's standard. 6. Partition Head Compensating Channel (Non- Rated): Design for minimum ±1 /2 inch deflection. Profiles as indicated; one of the following. a 20 gage deep leg track; 2 inch legs. b Slip Track Systems Inc. (Anaheim, CA; 714 - 761 -1921) "SLP -TRK." 7. Other Framing Materials: Furnish in accordance with ASTM C754. C. Partition Framing: 1. Runners: a Secure runners with fasteners at maximum 24 inches oc. b At concrete floors, use powder driven fasteners or drilled in concrete anchors. c Top Runner: Use proprietary compensating channel or deep leg track at Contractor's option, as necessary to accommodate building deflection. d Align to tolerances specified. 2. Unless indicated otherwise, install studs vertically at 16 inches oc, and not more than 2 inches from abutting construction, at each side of openings, and at corners. 3. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs at spacing of wall studs. 4. Brace partition framing system and make rigid. 5. Install double studs continuous from floor to ceiling track at the jamb of each door frame and cased opening. Studs shall be the same gage as the adjacent studs, but no less than 20 gage. Provide diagonal steel stud bracing to structure at each jamb at partitions which do not extend to structure. 6. Coordinate erection of stud system with requirements of door and window frames, fire extinguisher cabinets, recessed toilet accessories, access doors, and other construction within mounted partition construction. 7. Coordinate the installation of framing with the gypsum board installer to ensure support at all board edges. Provide framing immediately either side of expansion joints. 8. Stud splicing not permissible. 9. At non -load bearing full height partitions subject to compression caused by overhead structural deflection, cut studs 1/2 inch short from full height, except as otherwise indicated. Do not rigidly connect stud to top runner. 10. Stud Bridging: a At interior partitions greater than 4 feet in length, and with rigid facing material on one stud flange only, provide 3/4" bridging channels in horizontal rows at a maximum of 5' -0" on center for the full height of the partition. b Interior full height partitions (studs extending from the floor to the structure above) with rigid facing material stopping 3' -0" or more below top of studs - Provide one row 3/4" bridging channel horizontally at termination of gypsum board material, and one additional row for each 5' -0" of exposed studs. c Install stud bridging channels in long lengths, wire tying and lapping the joints a minimum of 12." Attach bridging channel to each stud as shown in manufacturer's printed instructions. 11. Install security mesh at all walls of the Inventory Room per section 092200. D. Ceiling and Soffit Framing: 1. Coordinate locations of hangers and supports with the work of other Sections. 2. Provide ceiling and soffit framing as indicated. Where not indicated provide, stud and runner framing, suspended framing, or proprietary suspended framing. 3. Proprietary Suspended Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Stud and Runner Framing: a Secure runners to structure above with fasteners at a maximum of 24 inches on center. Size fasteners and use reinforcements as necessary to support the dead loads applied. b Screw fasten framing at each flange joint. c Space studs at 16 inches on center at horizontal locations. d Select members to meet the structural requirements specified. 5. Light gage Suspended Framing: a Install in accordance with ASTM C754, unless indicated or specified otherwise. b Suspend ceiling from overhead structural elements only. Do not support from any electrical, HVAC, plumbing, or sprinkler system components. c Space carrying channels 4 feet on center with splices lapped 12 inches and tied. d Support cold rolled carrying channels with hanger wires spaced at 3 feet on center for lath and plaster ceilings and 4 feet on center for gypsum board ceilings. Loop hanger wire around support element and tightly wrap around vertical wire 3 times; cut off neatly. e Space furring channels 16" o.c. with splices lapped 12 ", minimum and tied; clip or saddle tie to runner channels with 16 -gage tie wire. 2 5 f Where overhead obstructions prevent the regular spacing of hangers, provide secondary carrying members for indirect support of the suspension system, or reinforce the nearest adjacent hangers and related framing components as required to span the required distance. 6. Stabilize suspended ceiling, soffit, and fascia framing against lateral movement by means of diagonal bracing. At locations where partitions extend to ceiling, only, install supplementary bracing at maximum 8' -0" o.c. along length of partition, and above each door hinge and strike jamb. 7, Form openings in ceilings and frame openings for recessed light fixtures, air diffusers, access doors, hatches, etc. 8. Install supplementary hanger wires for support of ceiling mounted equipment. E. Backing: 1. Provide steel backing where indicated. At Contractor's option steel backing plates may be substituted for wood blocking, except wood blocking shall be used at the following locations: Handrails, guardrails, grab bars, and similar safety items. 2. Unless indicated otherwise, steel backing shall consist of minimum 4 inch wide 16 gage steel plate screwed rigidly to the studs. F. Installation Tolerances: 1. Install members to provide surface plane with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. 2. Locate assemblies within 1/4 inch of required locations. Metal Stud Schedule 092200 INVENTORY ROOM SPECIFICATIONS A. Walls and Ceiling 1. Inventory rooms should not be installed adjacent to non -T- Mobile space (i.e., adjacent tenant space /shared common walls). 2. Walls must be deck -to -deck or ceiling to hard deck ceiling as described in the wall types on sheet A -2. 3. Hardening: Expanded carbon steel and fiber - cement backerboard materials must be installed on the interior side of the inventory room wall studs. a Expanded Carbon Steel (1) Install mill- finished, 13- gauge, expanded carbon steel specifically used for security purposes on the interior side of the wall studs. (a) Steel must meet or exceed ASTM A -569 HSLA Steel. Conventional expanded carbon steel that is not manufactured specifically for security purposes is not acceptable for this use. (b) Carbon steel (mesh) size openings may not exceed the following dimensions: 0.5 inch x 1.26 inches. (2) Anchor the expanded carbon steel (including all seams) to each stud using secure clips (fasteners with an expanded surface area) with flat head, phillips, one -way, steel screws spaced no more than 12 inches apart vertically (drywall screws are unacceptable). Steel screws must penetrate through the studs by at least 0.25 inch. (3) End joints must be butted and occur over studs. If overlapping is necessary, a longer screw must be used to maintain a 0.25 inch stud penetration. b Fiber - Cement Backerboard (1) Install 0.5 inch fiber - cement Hardibacker (James Hardie Building Products, Inc.) backerboard on the interior side of the wall studs (but directly over the expanded carbon steel). (2) Hardibacker fiber - cement backerboard must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Hardibacker information can be found at: h ttp: / /www.jameshardie.com /backerboard /homeowner /hardibacker500.php (3) End joints must be butted and occur over studs. 4. Avoid Vents in the inventory rooms. If required, vents or louvers must be: a No greater than 24 square inches and b Located behind (exterior side of) the expanded carbon steel described in Section 1.3,1 (above). Supply / return ducts shall not exceed 24" square. Install burglar bars if opening exceeds the recommended sizes. B. Inventory Room Door (see door schedule and below) 1. Inventory rooms may only have one (1) access point /door. 2. Dutch doors must not be installed. 3. The door must be metal or of solid core wood construction, and a minimum of 1.75 inches thick. a A metal door must be of 16 gauge steel. e-016; b A solid core wooden door requires a 16 -gauge steel skin. c The door may not have vents, louvers, or contain any openings other than those necessary to affix the door hardware /handle. 4. The door frame must be steel and reinforced to ensure durability. a The steel frame must be anchored to the wall in accordance with manufacturer instructions or best practices; b Supporting wall structures must consist of double studding or framing of equivalent strength; and c There must not be more than 0.125 inch clearance between the door and the frame. 5. The door must be equipped with a properly functioning, commercial grade, automatic door closer device. 6. If the door hinges are accessible from the exterior side, the hinge must be a heavy duty continuous (piano or Roton) hinge. 7. The door must be equipped with a latch guard covering the exterior latch exposure. C. Locks/ Keys 1. Inventory room doors must be equipped with high quality, commercial grade locks that: a Use manufacturer - restricted keyways (including InstaKey) and b Cannot be set in an unlocked state (i.e., storeroom function). 2. The Securitech 4840 MP 4 Police Lock (4 -point security lock) locking system must be installed on the interior side of the inventory room to secure the inventory room door after hours. Securitech 4840 information can b e found at: a http: / /www.securitech.com /D01 -mp- police- lock.html and b http: / /www.securitech.com/ Web% 20Catalog /4 %20Multi- Point %20Locking /D18.pdf 092813 GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Materials: 1. Gypsum Sheathing: One of the following: a. G -P Gypsum Corporation "Dens -Glass Gold "; glass mat faced; ASTM C1177; 1/2 inch thick b. USG FIBEROCK? Brand Sheathing with Aqua - Tough(TM); 1/2 inch thick. 2. Screws: Galvanized; self - drilling; self - drilling, bugle head screws; minimum 1 -1/4 inch long. B. B. Installation: 1. Install square edge boards parallel or perpendicular to framing. Install boards parallel to framing at fire rated walls. Apply sheathing with joints staggered. All edges shall be firmly supported. 2. Install sheathing with coating towards exterior. 3. Screw to framing. Space fasteners 8 inches o.c. in field and 4 inches o.c. at ends along each framing member. 4. Do not bridge expansion or seismic joints. 092900 GYPSUM BOARD A. Quality Control: 1. Provide assemblies meeting the hourly fire ratings indicated. Assemblies shall be approved by the local jurisdictional code authorities. B. Materials: 1. Synthetic Gypsum Board: c. Manufacturers: National Gypsum Co. ?Gold Bond Brand ?; USG Corporation, ?Sheetrock Brand ?, Temple- Inland Gypsum, ?Synthetic Gypsum ?. d. 5/8 inch thick unless noted otherwise; provide type X in fire rated partitions. e. Standard Board: ASTM C36. 2. Accessories: a. Trim: Concealed flange screw -on type; metal; GA 216. b. Joint Compound, Tape, and Finishing Compound: ASTM C475 and GA 216. c. Screws: ASTM C1002. d. Proprietary Skim Coat: USG "Tuff -Hide Sheetrock Brand Primer - Surfacer." C. Installation: 1. Installation Standard: Unless specified otherwise, perform work in accordance with Gypsum Association 216, "Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Wallboard." 2. Install water resistant board restroom walls as a substrate for surfaces 3. Screw fasten board to framing, unless approved otherwise. 4. Trim: a. Use longest practical lengths, with no piece less than 2 feet long for continuous runs greater than 8 feet. Securely fasten and align trim ends at joints. b. Place concealed flange corner beads at all external corners. At angles other than 90 degrees, bend the flange to conform to the angle. c. Place concealed flange type L trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. d. Use J trim at exposed gypsum board edges (including light coves) where sealant joint is indicated. 5. Control Joints: a. Position control joints to intersect light fixtures, air diffusers, door openings, and other areas of stress concentration. b. Position control joints at locations where expansion or control joints occur in the building structure. c. Locate control joints to form rectangular or square sections, in "L," "U," "T," or other irregularly shaped areas. 6. Finishing: a. Provide finishing in accordance with GA 214. b. Where necessary to sand, do so without damaging the face of the gypsum board. c. Levels of Finish: (1) Level 5: Provide at the following locations: (a) Surfaces perpendicular and adjacent to or near (within 24 inches of) exterior windows, and surface mounted light fixtures. (b) Surfaces to receive deep tone colors. (c) Curved surfaces. (2) Level 4: Provide unless indicated or specified otherwise. (3) Level 3: Provide at the following locations: (a) Surfaces to receive fabric wall covering. (b) Surfaces to receive textured finishes. (4) Level 2: Provide at the following locations: (a) Storage rooms. (b) Mechanical rooms. (c) Janitors closets. (d) Surfaces to receive tile or other thick finish materials applied to gypsum board surfaces. (5) Level 1: Provide at the following locations: (a) Surfaces of fire rated assemblies concealed from view in the finished work ( ?firetaping ?). (b) Surfaces of acoustical assemblies concealed form view in the finished work (6) Level 0: Provide at the following locations: (a) Surfaces of non -fire rated assemblies concealed from view in the finished work, including surfaces to be covered by casework, wood paneling, d. Level 4 and 5 finishes: Return to the site after primer is applied, and touch -up surface defects. e. Proprietary skim coat material may be used in lieu of joint compound as skim coat at Level 5 surfaces. 093105 CERAMIC TILE A. GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS a. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. b. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: c. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. d. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as shown on finish material schedule. a. Tile- Setting and - Grouting Materials: As shown on finish material schedule. 2. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with Standard Grade requirements of ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 3. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with referenced ANSI standards. 4. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: For tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, comply with the following requirements: a. Match colors, textures, and patterns indicated by referencing manufacturer's standard designations for these characteristics. 5. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. 6. Floor Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements: a. Composition: as noted in drawings. b. Facial Dimensions: as noted in drawings. c. Thickness: as noted in drawings d. Face: as noted in drawings. e. For latex - portland cement mortared and grouted paver tile, precoat with temporary protective coating. 7. Well Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements: a Module Size: as noted in drawings b Thickness: as noted in drawings c Face: as noted in drawings d Mounting: Pregrouted sheets of tiles factory assembled and grouted with manufacturer's standard silicone rubber complying with ANSI A118.6. 8. Waterproofing for Thin -Set Tile Installations: Provide products that comply with ANSI A118.10. 9. Setting Materials: As follows: a Latex - Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, composed as follows: ; dry, (1) Prepackaged Dry- Mortar Mix: Factory prepared mixture of portland cement; p ersible , ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to which only water needs to be added at Project site. (2) Mixture of Dry- Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of prepackaged dry- mortar mix and liquid -latex additive complying with the following requirements: (a) Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber. (b) Latex Additive: Acrylic resin. b Chemical- Resistant, Water - Cleanable, Ceramic Tile- Setting and - Grouting Epoxy. ANSI A118.3. (1) Provide product capable of resisting continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 deg F (60 deg C) and 212 deg F (100 deg C), respectively, as certified by mortar manufacturer for intended use. c Water - Cleanable, Tile- Setting Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3. d Grout for Exterior: Laticrete 4237 Latex thin set mortar additive with 211 crete filler powder or Laticrete 3701 Latex admixture with Laticrete floor and wall thin set. Provide Laticrete 9235 waterproof membrane per mfr. recommendations. 10. Grouting Materials: As follows: a Latex - Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6 for materials described in Section H -2.4, composed as follows: (1) Mixture of Dry -Grout Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of factory - prepared, dry -grout mix and latex additive complying with the following requirements: (a) Unsanded Dry -Grout Mix: Dry -set grout complying with ANSI A118.6 for materials described in - Section H-2.3, for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and narrower. (b) Sanded Dry -Grout Mix: Commercial portland cement grout complying with ANSI A118.6 for materials described in Section H -2.1, for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and wider. (c)Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber. (d) Latex Additive: Acrylic resin. b Chemical- Resistant Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, color as indicated. (a) Provide product capable of resisting continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 deg F (60 deg C) and 212 deg F (100 deg C), respectively, as certified by mortar manufacturer for intended use. 11. Elastomeric Sealants: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." a One -Part, Mildew- Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, 0; formulated with fungicide. 12. Cementitious Backer Units: Provide products complying with ANSI A118.9, of thickness and width indicated, and in maximum lengths available to minimize end -to -end butt joints. 13. Miscellaneous Materials: As follows: a Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex - modified, portland - cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile- setting materials for installations indicated. b Metal Edge Strips: White- zinc -alloy terrazzo strips, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) wide at top edge with integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate, unless otherwise indicated. (3) C. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with dry -set or latex - portland cement mortars that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. a Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile- setting material manufacturer's written instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions. b Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. 2. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. 3. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated or required. 4. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated or required. 5. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. 6. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built -in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. 7. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both ' directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. 8. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant - filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw -cut joints after installing tiles. a Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. b Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 9. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards: a For ceramic tile grouts (sand - portland cement, dry -set, commercial portland cement, and latex- portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10. 10. Floor Tile Installation: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards. a Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths: (1) Paver Tile: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm). b Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards. i meets carpet, tile flooring edge of the 0 r where exposed locations indicated P at locate r' s: Install 9 Stl c Metal Edge p P 9 wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. 11. Wall Tile Installation: Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with manufacturers requirements, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting -bed standards. a Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths: (1) Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards. 12. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. Use cleaning materials and methods that comply with tile and grout manufacturers' written instructions. 096403 WOOD FLOORING A. GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS a Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. SUMMARY a Acrylic -wood, strip or plank flooring. b Engineered wood floor. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE a Hardwood Flooring: Comply with NOFMA grading rules for species, grade, and cut. Certification: Provide flooring that carries NOFMA grade stamp on each bundle or piece. b Maple Flooring: Comply with MFMA grading rules for species, grade, and cut. Certification: Provide flooring that carries MFMA mark on each bundle or piece. c Southern Pine Flooring: Comply with SPIB grading rules for species, grade, and cut. d Softwood Flooring: Comply with WCLIB No. 17 grading rules for species, grade, and cut. 4. PROJECT CONDITIONS a Conditioning: Maintain relative humidity planned for building occupants and an ambient temperature between 65 and 75 deg F (18 and 24 deg C) in spaces to receive wood flooring for at least seven days before installation, during installation, and for at least seven days after installation. After post - installation period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for building occupants. b Move wood flooring into spaces where it will be installed, at least seven days before i c For unfinished products, open sealed packages to allow wood flooring to acclimatize. d Do not install flooring until it adjusts to the relative humidity of and is at the same the space where it is to be installed. e Install factory- finished wood flooring after other finishing operations, including painting completed. B. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. ENGINEERED -WOOD STRIP OR PLANK FLOORING a Products: As indicated on the finish material schedule b Engineered -Wood Strip or Plank Flooring: ANSI /HPVA LF. (1) Species: as indicated on drawings. (2) Grade: Manufacturers standard. Thickness: as noted in drawings (4) Construction: as noted in drawings (5) Width: as noted in drawings (6) Length: as noted in drawings. (7) Edges: as noted in drawings. (8) Finish: as noted in drawings. 2. ACCESSORY MATERIALS a Wood Flooring Adhesive: Mastic recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers for application indicated. b Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer, but not less than that recommended in NOFMA's "Installing Hardwood Flooring." c Cork Expansion Strip: Composition cork strip complying with FS HH -C -576, Type I -B, Class 2. d Wood Feature Strips: 2 -inch- (51 -mm -) wide, square -edged walnut strips furnished in lengths as long as practical and in thickness to match wood flooring. e Metal Feature Strips: 1/8- by -1/8 -inch (3- by -3 -mm) solid brass strip, designed for inlaying into routed reveal in wood flooring surface. f Wood Trim: In same species and grade as wood flooring, unless otherwise indicated. (1) Wood Base: 3/4 inch (16 mm) thick by 6 inches (100 mm) high. (2) Base Shoe Molding: 1/2 by 3/4 inch (13 by 19 mm). (3) Threshold: Tapered on each side and routed at bottom of one side to accommodate wood flooring. (4) Reducer Strip: 2 inches (51 mm) wide, tapered on one side, and in thickness matching flooring. C. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. INSTALLATION a Comply with flooring manufacturer's written installation instructions, but not less than recommendations in NOFMA's "Installing Hardwood Flooring. b Concrete Substrates: Verify that slabs are dry according to test methods recommended by flooring manufacturer or, if none, by test methods in NOFMA's "Installing Hardwood Flooring." c Where wood flooring is installed directly over concrete slabs, grind high spots and fill low spots to provide a maximum 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) deviation in any direction when checked with a 10 -foot (3 -m) straight edge. d Where wood flooring is adhesively attached to concrete slabs, verify that slabs are free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. e Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of flooring of not less than directed by manufacturer. f Engineered -Wood Flooring: Set in adhesive per manufacturer's instructions. g Wood Trim: Nail baseboard to wall and nail shoe molding or other trim to baseboard; do not nail to flooring. bOO8 10 11 nstallation. 12 temperature as h REVIEWED Fan CODE C01PLIANCE JUN 0 4 2669 City of Tukwila B UL „ " 01' . 12 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKVi LA MAY 2'9. 2009 PERMIT CENTER COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subJeot to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. re 0 O I- Co 0 ix rn o u • < ai CO m w o N � E N LJ 1 w • CO to • t0 O � a h co .,i C o .E CO 410 ce VI - a g a H V .+ Emi M t0 t0 M O. w > W VI VI DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 449 z 0 N cc 05.22 .0c1 SHEET: TMOO; AAr se 19 0 V L NTS 176 A -16 x 4 097733 REINFORCED PLASTIC PANEL WALL COVERINGS A. Summary: Fiberglass reinforced polyester panel (FRP) wall covering. B. Submittals: Product data, including adhesives and sealants. C. Panel System Components: 1. Panel Material: a Marlite (as noted in drawings). b Panel Type: As scheduled in the Finish Legend. c Thickness: 3/32 inch. d Size: 48 inches x length required for conditions Indicated. e Fire Rating: Maximum 25/450 flame spread / smoke developed in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Moldings: Manufacturer s standard PVC cap, corner, and division moldings; color to match panels. Omit bottom trim where panel abuts flash coved base. 3. Panel and Molding Installation Adhesive: As recommended by the FRP panel manufacturer. 4. Sealant: Flexible waterproof silicone sealant for bedding panel edges; white color. D. Installation 1. Cutting and Fitting a Cut panels accurately to size with proper allowance for expansion and moldings. b Sand or file all edges smooth without chipping. c Cut openings for penetrations in accurate location with approximate 1/8 -inch clearance around penetrations. 2. Establish centerline of each distinct flat area to be covered. Trim division moldings to mate with base moldings; install in solid bed of adhesive, either on centerline, or offset 24 inches from center, as necessary to maximize panel widths at corners. Molding shall be installed straight and plumb. 3. Cut top cap and division or corner moldings to shape, with edges trimmed to fit to adjacent moldings. 4. Apply sealant into installed moldings in sequence with panel installation. 5. Apply adhesive to backs of panels in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Maintain lines and levels of panel edges and moldings. 7. Install panels tight to flash -coved base trim. 8. Allow 1/8 -inch gap between top cap, corner, or division molding posts, and panel edge; all edges shall be firmly bedded to the moldings in sealant. 9. Promptly remove sealant squeeze out with a damp cloth, as work progresses; remove adhesive with appropriate solvent. 10. Install sealant behind flanges and at penetrations through paneling, and between top cap of panel and substrate. 11. Cleaning: Remove excess adhesive from face of laminate using solvent recommended b manufacturer. 098100 ACOUSTIC INSULATION A. Summary. Acoustic insulation and sealants. B. Materials: 1. Manufacturers: Johns Manville ?Sound Control Batts ?, CertainTeed ?Greenguard Certified ?, Owens Corning ?sound sound control batts?. 2. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I; unfaced glass fiber batts, blankets, or rolls; minimum fire hazard classification rating of 25/50 per ASTM E84; minimum 3 -inch thick, unless required otherwise to meet the STC requirements indicated or specified; widths to friction -fit between studs, where indicated for installation in stud walls. 3. Acoustical Sealant: Non - hardening, non - skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board; similar to USG "Acoustical Sealant." 4. Accessories: Furnish other accessories such as fasteners and retainers, not specifically described, but required for a complete installation. C. Insulation: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as indicated. 2. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. install without gaps or voids. D. Seal penetrations through acoustical assemblies, except for penetrations in fire rated construction to receive firestopping. 099000 PAINTING AND COATING A. Summary: Site applied paint coatings, except as otherwise noted. B. Quality Assurance: 1. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with a minimum of three years documented experience. 2. Visual Standards: Each distinct area of the finished work shall be free of variations in color and sheen, orange peel, runs, sags, blistering, checking, cracking, scratches, dust, dirt, bugs, and other contaminants. C. Site Conditions: 1. Weather Conditions: a Do no exterior work on unprotected surfaces when raining, or other moisture is present or expected, or before applied paints can dry or attain proper cure. b Allow wetted surfaces to dry and attain temperatures and condition specified hereinafter before proceeding with previously started work. 2. Temperature: a Do no painting work when surface and air temperatures are below 40 degrees F or below those temperatures recommended by the manufacturer for the material type used. b Minimum temperatures for latex finishes: 45 degrees F for interior work and 50 degrees F. for exterior work, unless approved otherwise. 3. Lighting: Maintain a lighting level of minimum 50 foot - candles on the surfaces to be painted or finished. 4. Ventilation: Provide adequate continuous ventilation. D. Maintenance: 1. Furnish overage of paint materials equal to 10 percent minimum of quantity of each paint and transparent finish system component, color and sheen required for the work, but furnish not more than five full one gallon cans, nor less than two full one quart cans, of each type. Overruns in excess of five gallons may be furnished to the Owner at the Contractor's option. Overage shall be taken from the batch mix furnished for the work. Overage shall be furnished in completely filled, properly labeled, sealed cans. A. Materials: 1. General Requirements: Paints not specifically listed shall be "first quality" commercial products from one of the following: a Benjamin Moore Paint Company. b Pittsburgh Paints. (Available nationally) c Pratt & Lambert. (Available nationally) d The Sherwin - Williams Company. e ICI Paints North America. f Cardinal Industrial Finishes 2. Acrylic Wall Size: One of the following: a ICI Devoe "Wonderprime" DR51701 vapor barrier primer /sealer. b ICI Dulux "Ultra- Hide" 1060 vapor barrier primer /sealer. c Sherwin - Williams "Harmony Primer 0 VOC" B11W900 . d Benjamin Moore Paint Company "Moore's Wall -Grip 203." e Parker Paint Mfg. Co., Inc. "Perm Gard" Interior Latex Vapor Barrier. f Zinsser Co, Inc. (Somerset NJ; (732) 469 -8100) "Shieldz Universal Pre -Wall Covering Primer "; acrylic primer /sealer B. Surface Preparation: an 1. Prepare surfaces by removing all dirt, dust, grease, oil, moisture, and other contaminants which will impair the proper adhesion of the finish. 2. Ferrous Metal Shop Primed under other Sections: Clean previously primed surfaces with non - petroleum based solvent to remove oil and grease. Remove loose rust, blistered and peeling paint to bare metal by scraping, sanding, and wire brushing in accordance with SSPC -SP2 and SSPC -SP3. immediately apply touch up prime damaged or abraded surfaces. Lightly sand all shop prime painted surfaces to receive paint finish. 3. Galvanized Ferrous Metal: Clean with non - petroleum based in accordance with SSPC -SP1; abrade surface with 3M "Scotchbrite Heavy Duty" (brown) pad, as necessary to achieve sufficient profile for paint adhesion. 4. Unprimed Ferrous Metal: a Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP -1. b Commercial blast per SSPC SP6. 5. Wood - Opaque paint finish: a Spot coat knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. b Fill all nail holes and cracks. Sand filler smooth and level with wood surface. 6. Wood - Transparent Finish: Fill all exposed finish nail holes and cracks with matching color filler after prime coat is applied. Sand filler smooth and level with adjacent surfaces. 7. Concrete and Concrete Masonry Units: Remove all contaminants by washing and wire brushing. Sandblast if necessary. 8. Gypsum Plaster and Wall Board: Remove all light dust and dirt. 9, Existing Finished Surfaces To Be Repainted: a Remove loose, blistered, scaled, or crazed finishes to bare substrate; feather new work into existing work. Prepare surfaces to the nearest break line if necessary to blend new finishes with old finishes. b Wash and rinse surfaces with trisodium phosphate and water or other solution required to remove remaining film, wax, oil, grease, smoke or foreign matter which will impair bond, or cause bleed through, of newly applied finishes. c Lightly sand, or apply a liquid deglosser on existing semi -gloss and high -gloss finishes before refinishing. C. Special Application Requirements: 1. Unless specified or indicated otherwise, follow paint manufacturer's label directions for general application procedures and coverage rates. 2. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Make sure each coat of finish is dry and hard before a following coat is applied unless the manufacturer's directions state otherwise. 3. Tint filler to match stain when clear finishes are specified; work filler well into grain and, before it has set, working perpendicularly to the grain, wipe the excess from the surface. 4. Opaque Finishes: a Apply number of coats scheduled for each application, except that additional finish coats shall be applied as necessary for complete hiding of substrate colors. b Apply primer coats un- tinted. Where more than one coat of paint is required, tint each succeeding coat up to the final coat similar in tint, but slightly lighter in value (shade). c Sand lightly between coats if necessary to achieve required finish; sand between all coats applied to wood substrates. 5. Rollers for application and backrolling of latex paints shall have a nap of 3/8 inch or less. 6. Where roller texture is scheduled for application to gypsum board surfaces, finish coats may be roller applied, or spray applied and backrolled at Contractor's option. 7. Factory Primed Surfaces: Apply scheduled finish system, less primer coat, except as necessary to for patching damage to factory prime coating. 8. Except where scheduled or indicated otherwise, the intent is to paint all new rooms and areas. Existing areas which have not been remodeled or do not have patched surfaces are not to be repainted. Where existing surfaces have been remodeled or patched the entire room is to be repainted, including the associated access panels, electrical panels, hollow metal doors and frames (both sides), and similar elements within the room. 4 5 5 6 6 U_ 111 v ta 1 2 3 2. CLEANING AND PROTECTION a Cover wood flooring before and after finishing during remainder of construction period. Use heavy kraft -paper or other suitable covering. Do not use plastic sheet or film that could cause condensation. b Clean and buff per manufacture s recommendation immediately prior to building occupancy. 095300 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS A. Submittals: 1. Submit product literature for each acoustical ceiling tile and suspension system proposed. B. Quality Assurance: 1. Codes: Conform to the requirements of the AHJ, seismic zone as indicated on the Drawings, CISCA, and the requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities. C. Products: 1. Acoustical Panels: As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Suspension System: Exposed T System: ASTM C635, heavy duty classification; direct hung; exposed "T" design; factory baked on finish to match acoustical panels. Furnish stabilizer bars, splices, edge and wall moldings, and other items as necessary to complete suspended ceiling grid system. D. Installation: 1. Install after major above - ceiling work is complete. 2. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636, IBC 1621.2.5 and CISCA, the manufacturer's instructions, and as supplemented in this Section. 3. Install grid to produce finished ceiling true to lines and levels indicated, within the specified tolerances. 4. Install suspension systems in a manner to support all superimposed loads, with maximum permissible deflection of 1/270 of span. At locations where partitions extend to ceiling, only, install supplementary diagonal bracing to structure at maximum 8' -0" o.c. along length of partition, and above each door hinge and strike jamb 5. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, provide secondary carrying members for indirect support of the suspension system, or reinforce the nearest adjacent hangers and related carrying channels as required to span the required distance. 6. Center system on room axis according to reflected ceiling plans. 7. Anchorage: a Provide all anchors required for the installation of the ceiling system unless otherwise noted. b Do not fasten to the upper flutes of metal decking. Do not use fasteners in steel deck which penetrate more than 1 inch. c Verify location of all conduit in poured concrete construction before making attachments. 8. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. Fabricate edge moldings to fit the surfaces encountered. 9. Form expansion joints as detailed. Maintain visual closure. 10. Fit acoustic lay -in panels in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. Fit border units neatly against abutting surfaces. Scribe and mill recessed regular wall molding. ular edge into partial border units supported at edge by g 9 9 P PP 9 Y 11. Adjust sags or twists which develop in the ceiling system and replace parts which are damaged or defective. 12. Install hold -down clips to retain panels tight to grid system within 20 ft of an exterior door. 13. Tolerances: a Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 12 ft. b Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees maximum. 096500 RESILIENT FLOORING A. Summary: 1. Resilient sheet flooring. 2. Resilient base. i B. Submittals: t r nsition strips, ' t flooring, t a e illen , including base, product c P 1. Submit product literature for each pr proposed, g 9• and adhesives. 2. Submittals: Submit samples of each type of resilient flooring, and each type of rubber base for color selection by the Interior Designer. C. Materials: 1. Resilient Sheet Flooring: As indicated on the Drawings 2. Rubber Base: a Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TPR Thermoplastic rubber; 1/8 inch thick; roll stock; coved and straight base as specified; 4 inch height, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3. Accessories: a Subfloor Filler: Portland cement based latex filler, mixed with water to produce a self leveling underlayment, or cementitious paste, as appropriate to project requirements. b Adhesives: Types recommended by resilient flooring and base manufacturers for specific application. c Transition Strips: Vinyl; products as indicated; color as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard. d All other materials not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation of resilient flooring, shall be only as recommended by the manufacturer of the material to which it is applied and shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. D. General Resilient Flooring Installation Requirements: 1. Install subfloor filler to fill low spots, cracks, construction joints, holes and other defects, and as required to adjust level to meet adjacent finishes. Feather to maximum slope of 1/8 inch in 3 feet; float to smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic over filler. 2. Install all resilient flooring where scheduled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Unless indicated otherwise, install resilient flooring with joints and seams as indicated on the Drawings. 4. Terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door at door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar, and where no threshold is indicated. 5. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates. 6. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 7. Clean substrate. Spread cement evenly in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure adhesion over entire area of installation. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of flooring before initial set. 8. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to ensure full adhesion. 9. Seal joint between flooring and adjacent materials at restrooms, bathrooms, kitchens, and other moist areas with clear silicone sealant. E. Special Requirements for Sheet Flooring: 1. Install sheet flooring to a minimum 1/3 full material width, with length of sheet parallel to length of room. Where cutting is required, double cut and weld as specified. Trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Seams in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 3. Unless indicated otherwise, lay flooring with seams parallel to building lines to produce minimum number of seams. F. Special Flashed Coved Base Requirements: 1. Provide cove fillet at intersection of floor and wall to ease transition. 2. Miter cut, fit, and heat weld all seams, joints, penetrations, and transitions. Extend flooring to elevation above finished floor level as indicated. 3. Cut top exposed edge straight and level. 4. Cap top edge with cap trim. Miter all trim corner joints. Install trim in maximum practical lengths with no piece shorter than 18 inches for continuous runs longer than 18 inches. G. Rubber Base Installation: 1. Adhesively install resilient base tightly to wall and floor surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Fit joints tight, vertical, and in accurate alignment. Install base in maximum lengths, with minimum number of joints in each run. No section may be shorter than 48 inches, except as required by wall conditions. 3. Install base to walls, columns, and casework toe kicks in all areas where resilient base is scheduled. 4. Miter or cope inside corners for accurate fit. Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions. 5. Outside Corners: a Score back of base material with grooving tool and accurately align to corner. b Firmly adhere to wall at both sides of corner, with no visible gaps at top of base. c Stretch toe of coved base for smooth transition around corner, with toe in uniform contact with the finish flooring. 6. Remove excess adhesive from surfaces without damage. H. Cleaning 1. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. 2. Clean base and floor in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 096813 CARPETING A. Quality Assurance: Carpet Installer shall have minimum of 3 years experience in carpet installations of similar size and scope. B. Warranty Furnish manufacturer's standard 5 -year warranty against wear and deterioration. C. Materials: 1. Carpet: As scheduled on the drawings. 2. Pad: As scheduled on the Drawings. 3. Walk -Off Mat: As scheduled on the Drawings. 4. Accessories: a Carpet Grippers: Roberts Architectural "22- 333 ", or approved. b Pad Tape: Non -paper tape recommended by pad manufacturer. c Edge Strips: Reducer strips; size and configuration as appropriate for conditions; color as selected by Architect from manufacturers standard line. d Walk -Off Mat Screed: Schluter; aluminum; profile as indicated on the Drawings, and to suit job conditions. e Adhesives: Type as recommended by carpet, mat or screed manufacturer for intended use. Use waterproof adhesive at Walk -Off Mat. f Latex Underlayment: White premix latex filler. g Backing: As indicated on the Drawings. D. Preparation: 1. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster, and other substances which would be detrimental to the proper performance of adhesive and carpet. 2. Fill low spots and cracks over 1/8 inch in width with latex underlayment. E. Installation: 1. Install carpets in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Verify matching of carpet prior to cutting and ensure that there is no visible variation between dye lots. 3. Cut carpet, where required in a manner to allow proper seam and pattern match. Ensure cuts are straight and true and unfrayed. 4. Make seams straight and uniform. 5. Seaming shall be by hand sewing or with hot melt tape methods. 6. Do not change run of pile in any one room. 7. Ensure monolithic color, pattern and texture match within each distinct room. 8. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. Use full length pieces only. Butt tight to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided, butt ends tight, flush, and accurately aligned. F. Remnants: Upon completion of the installation, contact the Architect for selection of carpet remaining after trimming. Carefully wrap and mark separately the selected remnants. Remove and dispose of remainder at a legal off -site location. G. Cleanup: 1. The premises shall be kept free from unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment and surplus materials during the progress of the work. 2. Remove threads with sharp scissors. Remove spots with manufacturer's recommended spot remover. 3. Thoroughly power vacuum entire surface using equipment with motor driven brushes. 1 2 1 D. Interior Systems: 1. Gypsum Board - Latex System: a System: Three coats - first coat latex primer sealer (un- tinted), second and third coat latex paint. b Sneen: Roller texture, satin sheen, except provide flat sheen at light coves, ceilings, skylight areas, clerestory areas, interior fascias, and other light sensitive surfaces. Verify locations of each sheen with Architect before proceeding with work. c Application: 1) Use on all exposed gypsum board surfaces, including the exposed portions of wall surfaces between adjacent wall- mounted fixtures. 2) Provide prime coat only behind permanently mounted mechanically wall mounted fixtures. 3) Do not apply primer or paint coatings to surfaces to receive adhesively mounted a. mirrors or tile. 2. Gypsum Board - Surfaces to Receive Wall covering: Apply one coat of acrylic wall size. E. Color Schedule: Provide paint colors to match those indicated on the drawings. Where a paint color is listed from a specific manufacturer, paint products from other approved manufacturers may be used, provided the color exactly matches the specified color, and the paint system meets the specified requirements. Where no paint color is indicated, provide color and sheen as selected by the Architect. 1. Install sealant behind flanges and at penetrations through paneling, and between top cap of panel and substrate. 2. Cleaning: Remove excess adhesive from face of laminate using solvent recommended by manufacturer. DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 101402 REST ROOM SIGNAGE A. Summary: 1. Code - required interior signage. 2. Installation of signage. B. System Description: 1. Accessibility Signage: Provide acrylic plastic reverse silk screened signs with international symbol of accessibility, raised letters, and Braille, at accessible toilet facilities; one for each sex. C. Quality alit Assurance: 1. Regulatory Requirements: Signage shall conform to the requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities. D. Materials: 1. Plastic Sheet: 1/8 inch thick acrylic sheet; low gloss finish. 2. Double Stick Tape: 3M "Scotch brand #665" double- stick, double- coated tape, 1/4" wide. 4 1 SECTION 10810 - TOILET ACCESSORIES A. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Conform to applicable accessibility code for locating accessories. MATERIALS B. M 1. Stainless steel: sheet - in accordance with ASTM a 167, type 304. 2. Stainless steel: tubing - in accordance with ASTM a 269. 3. Galvanized steel: in accordance with ASTM a 366. 4. Mirror glass: in accordance with ASTM c 1036, type I, class 1, quality q1. C. ACCESSORIES 1. Fasteners: stainless steel where exposed, hot dip galvanized where concealed; type best suited to substrate conditions. 2. Framed Mirror: Bobrick B- 1652436 3. Waste Receptacle: Provided by owner, installed by GC. 4. Seat Cover Dispenser: Health Guards item# 420660, model #HG12- furnished by owners vendor, installed by GC 5. Grab Bar: Bobrick B -6806 6. Paper Towel Dispenser: 49403 Georgia Pacific model Combi -fold vista c- fold /multifold dispencer.15 -1/2 "x11 "x5 -1/2" D unit, model #56650 furnished by owners vendor installed by GC 7. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Bobrick B -76857 D. FABRICATION 1. Use stainless steel for exposed surfaces; galvanized steel may be used in concealed locations. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free from joints, and flat without distortion. Weld joints of fabricated components and grind smooth. Fabricate grab bars of tubing, free of visible joints, return to wall with end attachment flanges. Knurl grip surfaces. Fabricate soap dispensers to operate with less than 5 pound force. Provide hangers, adapters, anchor plates and accessories required for installation. Key locks alike; furnish six (6) keys. 2. Framed mirrors: one coat of organic mirror backing compound to the back surface of the glass. 3. Backing: galvanized sheet steel. Isolate glass from frame and backing with resilient, waterproof padding 4. Finishes: a Stainless steel: no. 4 satin. b Galvanizing: ASTM a 123 to 1.25 ounces per square foot. c Chrome plating: ASTM b 456, type sc 2, polished finish 5. Shop assemble units and package complete with anchors and fittings. E. INSTALLATION 1. Set plumb and level, square and rigidly anchored. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS A. Submittals: Product literature, including extinguisher dimensions. B. Extinguishers: Multi- Purpose Dry Chemical Type: Heavy Duty DOT Steel tank; UL rating 2A- 10B;C, 5 lb capacity, FM approved; red enamel finish; pressure gage; metal valves and siphon tubes. C. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: 1. Type (one of the following): Potter - Roemer, Inc. #7023- DV -VB -RR or #7023 -DV -VB - RR-FRC at rated construction, Larsen's Manufacturing Company #2409 -R3 or #FS- 2409 -R3 at rated construction, J.L Industries #1817V17 or #1817V17 FIRE -FX at rated construction.. 2. Style: Semi - recessed (approximately 2 -1/2" projection; rolled edge); steel frame and door with contemporary 2 inch wide double strength glass insert. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked white enamel interior; furnish to Section 099000 for field painting. 4. Lettering: Black lettering in vertical format. D. Fire Extinguisher Brackets: Manufacturer's standard J -type. Provide at fire extinguisher locations where no cabinet is indicated. E. Installation: 1. Install brackets 48 inches from finished floor to top of bracket. 2. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings in locations as indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, instcll 30 inches from finished floor to inside bottom of cabinet. 4. When recessed cabinets are installed in fire rated walls, maintain fire resistance rating continuously behind the cabinet. 5. Install in locations as indicated on the drawings. 105623 WIRE STORAGE SHELVING A. Manufacturer: Metro Shelving (Wilkes -Barre PA; 570 - 825 - 2741). B. Type: 4 shelf wire units; 18" deep by 48" wide by 74" high. C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard bright zinc chromate finish with clear acrylic coating. DIVISION 11 through DIVISION 14 A. Not Used JUN 0 4 2 0 09 APpRovet .J Of T 4 t 3 10 SECTION 15000 - MECHANICAL, PLUMBING & FIRE PROTECTION A. MECHANICAL 1. Installation and materials of all systems shall conform to the requirements of the City, County, State, and National Codes. 2. The contractor shall be responsible for and required to visit the site, verify dimensional data and review existing conditions before proceeding with the work. Any conflicts with the existing conditions shall be brought to the attention of the Architect. 3. A complete and operable system shall be provided. This Is defined as one which has been furnished, mounted, installed, placed in operation, balanced for air and water, tested for conformance to the capacities corresponding to the design criteria. 4. The system shall be installed and adjusted in accordance to the manufacturer's recommendations, tested for sequence of control including fail safe and life safety considerations and available in a clean condition. 5. Coordinate locations of all visible devices with the lighting plan. B. DESIGN CRITERIA - HVAC System 1. Maintain an average temperature of 68 to 70 degrees during the winter. 75 to 77 degrees during the summer. 2. Interior zones shall be designed to serve 1,800 square feet each. Exterior zones shall be designed to serve 700 square feet each. 3. Exhaust all toilet rooms to the outside at a rate of 2 CFM per sq. ft. C. DESIGN CRITERIA - Plumbing System 1. Provide complete plumbing systems necessary to operate the devices shown in these documents. D. DESIGN CRITERIA - Fire Protection System 1. Provide the necessary fire sprinkler systems and fire alarm systems to give complete protection as required by code. SECTION 16000 - ELECTRICAL A. ELECTRICAL 1. Installation and materials National Codes. 2. The contractor shall be responsible for and required to visit the site, verify dimensional data and review existing conditions before proceeding with the work. Any conflicts with the existing conditions shall be brought to the attention of the Architect. A complete and operable system shall be provided. This is defined as one which has been furnished, mounted, installed, placed in operation, and tested for conformance to the capacities corresponding to the design criteria. 3. The system shall be installed and adjusted in accordance to the manufacturer's recommendations, tested for sequence of control including fail safe and life safety considerations and available in clean condition. 4. Refer to the Architectural drawings for locations of all visible devices. JOE B. DESIGN CRITERIA - Electrical System 1. The contractor is responsible for all equipment wiring. 2. The contractor is responsible for all wiring, devices, secondary distribution panels units. All luminaires are furnished by the tenant and installed by the Contractor. to 3. Verify the existing primary electrical service t the building. g C. MEP / Sprinkler Notes 1. All fire sprinkler work shall be performed by a base building approved contractor. Sprinkler heads in Gypsum Board and mall fronts shall be concealed head type. Semi - recessed or concealed type may be used in lay -in ceilings visible to customers. Surface mounted heads are acceptable in the Back Area. 2. Fire sprinkler design shall be performed by a state licensed designer. 3. Paint all diffusers and grills to match adjacent surfaces. 4. Battery packs for emergency lights shall be remote or recessed. 5. If ceiling access panels are required, paint to match adjacent surface. 6. All track lights mounted on P1 finish shall be white. 7. Verify locations of demising walls, clear heights, columns, mall fronts and any other significant components with those indicated on the plan. Notify the architect of any differences. 8. Ceiling heights indicated on sheet A -3 are intended to represent an "if possible" scenario. If the existing structure, major ductwork or other obstructions prohibit the referenced heights, provide as much height as possible, maintaining a 6" difference from the gypsum board surround to the lay -in ceiling. Notify the architect of the differences prior to installation. SEC110N 16720 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. PART 1 - GENERAL 1. CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT a The general conditions and supplementary conditions shall apply to and form part of this division. 2. SCOPE a This section includes all labor, material, equipment and related services necessary to furnish, install and connect a complete fire alarm system. b A fire alarm system shall be provided where required by local codes and /or as required by the AHJ. c Provide complete system design and submittal including product data and shop drawings and submit to Owner for approval. Upon Owner approval, submit to the AHJ for approval and permit. Coordinate all inspections and perform system testing per the AHJ requirements. B. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. PRODUCTS a Comply with NFPA 72 and the NEC as applicable to construction and installation of fire alarm and detection system components and accessories. Provide components and systems which are UL listed and labeled for fire alarm. Provide fire alarm and detection systems and accessories which are FM approved. Comply with State and local requirements as applicable. b Acceptable Manufacturers: Edwards, Notifier, Siemens, Simplex. Where part of the landlord system provide devices manufactured by and compatible with landlord system. c Where part of the landlord system provide devices manufactured by and compatible with landlord system. Comply with all requirements as established by the AHJ and landlord for tenant spaces. d The system shall operate as a low voltage, INTELLIGENT, point identification fire management system. The fire detection and control system shall monitor Intelligent (ANALOG) and Addressable (DIGITAL) devices, traditional initiating devices, point identify the alarm location and transmit a signal to the monitoring agency. e An alarm shall be displayed on an 80 character alphanumeric display at the main panel. When required by the AHJ, provide remote 80 character keypad annunciator at approved location. f Provide required interface connection to fire sprinkler system tamper switches, flow switches and high /low air pressure alarm switches. Include connection to tamper switches in exterior vaults. g Provide connection from duct smoke detectors to fan starter control circuit. Fans shall be shut down on local detection only. Provide interface relay to control system. h Provide F.A. power and fire closure signal connection to all fire shutters in corridors. Shutters shall be powered from fire alarm panel. i Provide manual stations where required. Manual stations shall be die -cast aluminum with white lettering and red finish. Equip with plastic guards. Provide smoke detectors where required. Smoke detectors shall be photoelectric type with visual indication of detector actuation. Detectors shall be addressable and intelligent type. k Duct Smoke Detectors shall be photoelectric type and shall operate at air velocities of 300 feet per minute to 2000 feet per minute. An integral filter system shall be included to reduce dust and residue accumulation. An air flow monitor shall be included to indicate the presence and direction of air flow through the detector. Provide for all fan supplying air to building with CFM totals of 2000 CFM or greater. Provide at supply and /or return duct as required by local code. I Horn /strobes shall be solid state construction and shall produce a broadband horn sound output of 96 dBA (103 peak dBA) at 10 feet in an anechoic chamber. The strobes shall produce 8000 peak candlepower at one flash per second. C. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. INSTALLATION a Provide the system in accordance with the plans and specifications, all applicable codes and the manufacturer's recommendations. All wiring shall be installed in strict compliance with all the provisions of NEC: Article 760 A and C, Power - Limited Fire Protective Signaling Circuits or, if required, may be reclassified as non -power limited and wired in accordance with NEC: Article 760 A and B. Upon completion, the Contractor shall so certify in writing to the Owner and General Contractor. b The supplier shall have the capabilities of responding to a service call with a factory trained Technical Representative within 24 hours. Also, this supplier shall maintain an adequate stock of all parts necessary for the repair of this equipment on hand at all times. c The system, upon completion of installation by the Contractor, shall be checked out and all connections to initiating and indicating devices shall be supervised by factory trained technicians in the employ of a factory franchised dealer for the product installed. Each individual device shall be checked out and tested for operation by a factory trained technician. d The completed Fire Alarm System shall be fully tested in accordance with NFPA 72H by the Contractor in the presence of the Owner's Representative and the local Fire Marshal. Upon completion of a successful test, the Contractor shall so certify in writing to the Owner. END 10 11 12 of all systems shall conform to the requirements of the City, County, State, and Doi -asp and power for the HVAC RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY 2'9 2009 PERMIT CEN 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection Includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. m C (11 2 2 C a1 mum �u . 13 42 O In 1. en to as 12) cl al Vf H DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 449 z 0 cc DATE: 05.22.04i SHEET: SCALE: TM00 10Q z 0 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII� ✓ W m N s- OD a) ' v co e7 N 00 V c o Li • 0 CI E P o a s a cup VI CL d � tp O ▪ c0 P. C 0 NAT 2E U11 NTS A -17 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. ...11111.. 0 0 u- w° o E I- o < 6 °� o m w. N j a - N w CT cv w m C i 4a 4a 3 C 0 CU in V 1 • O M (CI 73 C 0 CO 01 C N t N ea co z 0 L w ac DATE 'AR Tr,,., .,., .,., SHEET: sc� EERMII f AM) . Dirt tI R tn PROJECT No.: T•009009 LA e- a) In C tV al co . N d E s Q CO u o N °' m `r t0 in H M -1 F+1 480 998 7223 I 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 10 I I 12 0 SHEET NOTES 0 PROVIDE NEW SPLIT SYSTEM UNIT WITH AN INSULATED ROOF CURB. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH THE LANDLORD. \ PROVIDE NEW DUCT MOUNTED SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR AS PART OF THE 'QUEST CONTROLS" PACKAGE. MOUNT SENSOR (QUEST P/N 300199) PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS AT LOCATION SHOWN. \3 PROVIDE NEV ROOF MOUNTED CENTRIFUGAL EXHAUST FAN. SEE SCHEDULE. O PROVIDE NEW DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTOR WITH REMOTE TEST STATION IN THE RETURN DUCTWORK AT LOCATION SHOWN. DETECTOR SHALL SHUT DOWN UNIT UPON DETECTION OF SMOKE. INSTALL REMOTE TEST STATION IN CEILING GRID BENEATH UNIT. O NEW WALL MOUNTED ZONE TEMPERATURE SENSOR ZTS3 BY "QUEST CONTROLS, INC." FOR TEMPERATURE CONTROL OF EXHAUST FAN EP-2. 0 PROVIDE NEW 12 "x12" DOOR GRILLE IN TELGOM ROOM DOOR. O PROVIDE NEW WALL MOUNTED ZONE TEMPERATURE SENSOR BY "QUEST CONTROLS, INC." PART #150148. ® NEW ROOFTOP UNIT REMOTE MONITORING SYSTEM BY "QUEST CONTROLS, INC", MODEL QSRTU TO BE FURNISHED BY T- MOBILE AND INSTALLED BY THE CONTRACTOR. SYSTEM PROVIDED WITH CONTROL PANEL, 24 VOLT POWER SUPPLY, REQUIRED TEMPERATURE SENSORS, 2- BUTTON MANUAL OVERRIDE PANEL AND REQUIRED SOFTWARE. SOFTWARE TO BE INSTALLED ON COMPUTER PROVIDED BY T- MOBILE. CONTACT QUEST CONTROLS (941) '729 -4'199 FOR INFORMATION AND REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A FUNCTIONING REMOTE RTU MONITORING SYSTEM AS SPECIFIED BY QUEST CONTROLS. ® PROVIDE NEW RETURN AIR TRANSFER DUCT. SIZE INDICATED ON PLAN. 0 UNDERCUT DOOR A MINIMUM OF I ". ® I 14"0 OUTSIDE AIR DUCT TO PROVIDE 465 GFM. T.G.G. TO COORDINATE WITH LANDLORD FOR OUTSIDE AIR DUCT TAP LOCATION. 12 NOT USED 13 T.G.G. TO ROUTE CONDENSATE LINE TO APPROVED RECEPTOR. 14 PROVIDE REFRIGERANT LINES 4 OIL LOOP AND REFRIGERANT CHARGE PER MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS. GOORD NATE ALL WITH HVAG'� SUPPLIER. 15 CONDENSING UNIT PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY T.G.G. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION IN FIELD WITH MALL OPERATIONS MANAGER. FIELD VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS SPLIT SYSTEM BY T.C.G. DESIGN DRAWINGS ARE SCHEMATIC. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE PRIOR TO BIDDING OR AWARD OF CONTRACT TO INSPECT EXISTING FIELD CONDITIONS. THIS CONTRACT SHALL INCLUDE ALL LABOR AND MATERIALS NECESSARY FOR FIELD MODIFICATIONS DUE TO EXISTING CONDITIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT THE ARCHITECT, ENGINEER OR OWNER PRIOR TO BIDDING FOR INTERPRETATIONS AND CLARIFICATIONS OF THE DESIGN AND INCLUDE IN HIS BID ALL COSTS TO MEET THE DESIGN INTENT. CLARIFICATIONS MADE BY THE ARCHITECT, ENGINEER OR OWNER AFTER BIDDING WILL BE FINAL AND SHALL BE IMPLEMENTED AT CONTRACTOR'S COST. BIDDING CONTRACTORS SHALL HAVE A WORKING KNOWLEDGE OF LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES AND SHALL INCLUDE IN THEIR BIDS THE COSTS FOR ALL WORK INSTALLED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH GOVERNING CODES. THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS NOT WITHSTANDING, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ALERT ARCHITECT, ENGINEER OR OWNER OF ANY APPARENT DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN GOVERNING CODES AND DESIGN INTENT. MARK MANUFACTURER MODEL CFM SP HP COOLING CAPACITY HEATING KW EER VOLTAGE/ PHASE MCA MOGP O.S.A GFM WEIGHT (LB) NOTES: I AHU -I YORK MA MA62 COIL 2 000 .5 STD 60,000 18.0 208/3 43.5 45 465 98 I. HORIZONTAL HANGING KIT. GU -I YORK TGGD60 .5 STD 13 208/1 33.5 50 200 2. MIXING BOX. GRILLE REGISTER AND DIFFUSER SCHEDULE SYMBOL MANUFACTURER MODEL SERVICE MODULE (L" X W „ ) FACE SIZE (L” X W „ ) FRAME TYPE FINISH MOUNTING N.G. NOTES 0' TITUS TMSA SUPPLY DIFFUSER 24” X 24" 24" X 24" SEE PLANS OFF WHITE CEILING <55 A, B, C IL \B TITUS TMSA SUPPLY DIFFUSER 12" X 12" 12" X 12" SEE PLANS OFF WHITE CEILING <35 A, B, C \ TITUS 5OF RETURN GRILLE 24" X 24' 24" X 24" SEE PLANS OFF WHITE CEILING <55 A, B O TITUS 5OF RETURN /EXHAUST GRILLE 12" X 12' 12" X12" SEE PLANS OFF WHITE CEILING <55 A, B VENTILATION SCHEDULE NOTES: A. FRAME A ND FACE BLADES SHALL HAVE BAKED ENAMEL O FF- W HITE FINISH. B. COORDINATE EXACT FRAME MOUNTING TYPE WITH ARCHITECTURAL CEILING PLAN. C. BRANCH DUCT SIZE SHALL BE SAME AS NECK SIZE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ROOM NAME OCCUPANT LOAD O.A. PER PERSON /SQ. FT SQ. FT. OUTSIDE AIR REQUIRED (GFM) SERVED BY SALES - .3 GFM /50. FT. 1138 342 AHU -I GENERAL - I5 GFM /SQ. FT. 344 52 AHU -I EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE RESTROOMS - 50 GFM PER FIXTURE (I) FIXTURES 50 AHU -I SYMBOL MANUFACTURER MODEL TYPE PERFORMANCE ELECTRICAL APPROX. WEIGHT (LBS.) NOTES TELCO - .05 GFM /SQ. FT. 63 3 AHU -I DRIVE TYPE AIR FLOW (GFM) EXT. STATIC (IN W.G.) FAN SPEED 50NE5 (RPM) VOLTS /Q� /HZ. FAN MOTOR HP INVENTORY - .15 GFM /SQ. FT. 114 17 AHU -I TOTAL - 464 NOTES: EF -I GREENHEGK 65- 011 -6 ROOF CENTRIFUGAL BELT 150 .125 1093 4.5 115/1/60 I/6 64 I, 2 I. SET OUTSIDE AIR FOR AHU -I TO465 GFM 2. OUTSIDE AIR BASE ON TABLE 403.3. EF -2 GREENHEGK GB -071 -6 ROOF CENTRIFUGAL BELT 100 .125 1093 4.5 115/1/60 I/6 64 I, 2 NOTES: I. PROVIDE INSULATED ROOF CURB FOR MOUNTING. 2. PROVIDE WITH BAGKDRAFT DAMPER. r D FOR OMPLIANCE APPROVED Z00� � � ���c D V s r i —J I LANDLORD NOTES Hi • NO ROOF MOUNTED REFRIGERANT PIPING SHALL BE INSTALLED HORIZONTALLY OVER 5 - TOTAL LENGTH. • DO NOT ATTACH ANYTHING DIRECTLY TO SLAB OR ROOF DECK ABOVE. • TENANT SHALL MAINTAIN A MINIMUM OF 6" UNOBSTRUCTED CLEARANCE HEIGHT IN RETURN AIR PLENUM ABOVE CEILING ALLOWING FOR AIR FLOW BACK TO LANDLORD AIR CONDITIONING UNIT. • ALL TENANT EQUIPMENT, ON ROOF, SHALL BE LABELED WITH TENANT'S NAME AND SPACE NUMBER. • TENANT'S CONTRACTOR SHALL ARRANGE WITH LANDLORD'S APPROVED ROOFING CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL WALKWAYS AROUND ALL ROOFTOP MOUNTED HVAG EQUIPMENT AT TENANT'S EXPENSE. j • �. "" r � ___ ----- 1 _ _ i A * ' A / /% 1 ..J 6 115 5"0 A � 1'15 r 5"0 A' i 225 Et j i EFT2 — 6 w GENERAL LANDLORD NOTES = -' o X , " . \\ 1 f _ r 0 1 _ l f00 or- E- 15 [ :, o • EFFECTIVE JULY I, 200 THE CITY OF TUKWILA WILL BE UNDER THE 2006 INTERNATIONAL CODES AND ALL PERMIT SUBMITTALS NEED TO BE IN CONFORMANCE WITH THIS EDITION. r. a {' 12 - 1 26 x16 1 „OI> C j / - - - Oil x4° 9 INF r � 8 - 0 01 • TENANT'S CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE WITH ALL WITHIN THE LANDLORD'S TENANT CRITERIA MANUAL INCLUDING ITS RULES AND REGULATIONS. • TENANT SHALL PROPERLY SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS TO COMPLY WITH CODE REQUIREMENTS. THE FIRE RATED FLOOR ASSEMBLY SHALL. BE F11XI "NG BOX -- = " 515 - � 200 v ~ \ I j I 14 0.A: 13 MAINTAINED. ALL. PLUMBING, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DEVICES PENETRATING FLOOR SHALL BE FIRE RATED. • TENANT ON THE GROUND FLOOR REQUIRING BELOW GRADE WORK SHALL COORDINATE WITH LANDLORD PRIOR TO ANY SLAB DEMOLITION TO PREVENT DISTURBANCE OF LANDLORD'S BELOW GRADE UTILITIES. ON COMPLETION OF BELOW GRADE WORK, TENANT SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR RECONSTRUCTION AND PATCHING OF THE SLAB ON GRADE INCLUDING GRAVEL LAYERS, VAPOR BARRIER AND CONCRETE. • TENANTS CONTRACTOR IS TO VERIFY LOCATION; GET APPROVAL AND REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL TRENCHING WITH WESTFIELD'S ON TENANT COORDINATORS BEFORE PRECEDING WORK. • TENANTS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A FIRE WATCH AND PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER WHERE EVERY WELDING IS DONE WITHIN THE DEMISED PREMISES. THE PERSON PERFORMING THE FIRE WATCH SHALL REMAIN IN THE TENANT SPACE FOR AT LEAST I HOUR AFTER THE COMPLETION OF ANY WELDING. THIS SHALL BE COORDINATED THROUGH THE CITY OF AHU 14 I 0 , / , \ ° 14) Si -I — '�<<� , I 8 ' ' > < "," % --- 300 "" I ( ; - X 16 " 80 " a � 150 �► �� ti ! ®� �0 " A GENERAL NOTES - - --, ? �\ / - I _ 22 A. PROVIDE INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS TO DIFFUSERS. FLEX DUCT LENGTH NOT TO EXCEED 5 FT. B ALL ROOF WORK 15 TO BE DONE BY THE LANDLORD'S ROOFING CONTRACTOR AND AT THE TENANT'S EXPENSE. G. MODIFY THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (WHERE EXISTING) TO ACCOMMODATE NEW FLOOR PLAN LAYOUT PER NFPA 13. REPLACE SPRINKLER HEADS AS REQUIRED. ALL HEADS IN THE SALES AREA ARE TO BE CONGEALED PENDANT TYPE. NON -SALES AREAS ARE TO BE PENDANT TYPE. CONTACT THE LANDLORD FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND A LIST OF APPROVED FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTORS. VERIFY THE EXACT MOUNTING FRAME REQUIRED FOR EACH DIFFUSER. E. PROVIDE ALL MANUAL BALANCE DAMPERS REQUIRED TO BALANCE THE ENTIRE SYSTEM. F. ALL INTERIOR DUCT WORK SHALL BE INSULATED WITH A MINIMUM R -5 INSULATION AND ALL EXTERIOR DUCTWORK SHALL B INSULATED WITH A MINIMUM R -S INSULATION PER 2003 IEGG GRAFTER 8. G. RESTROOM DOOR SHALL BE UNDERCUT A MINIMUM I ". SEE DOOR SCHEDULE. H. SEE SUPPLEMENTAL SHEET M3 FOR INFORMATION ON QUEST CONTROLS SYSTEM. I. ALL DUCTWORK SHALL BE GALVA NIZEDREMEDL PER SMAGNA STANDARDS. NO DUG kI TU LA PERMITTED. MAY -`9 2009 PERMS° CENTER 19 i L - I6 „ „ „ T T \ S t / \ :nom I 24 „ I - -- � 2O � x12 Li x12 xl2 -- '” 12 xl ,. _ -.._._ \\ cu-I 15 _ f /.- f [Q D 8” �� f 200 ; \ \ U \ 9 il I f ; 9 TUKWILA. �� L t I 4 ( - �, \ ;\ f� `��`�� 1f -'' _. __ Cpl .. I ( r. .... t: - _} r__ 1E1 I 75 1 ..._ -. 50 - . ` v r II 8 „ O RTU -I 08"41) 1.75 ..... r \ _ 8 A - - -- � 225 � ................ EF-I - - .. ._ 1. _ (it 41, J f ` 1 I d .._.. - -.... w, j I �' I Al M-1 1/4" = 1' -0” MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 10 I I 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. ...11111.. 0 0 u- w° o E I- o < 6 °� o m w. N j a - N w CT cv w m C i 4a 4a 3 C 0 CU in V 1 • O M (CI 73 C 0 CO 01 C N t N ea co z 0 L w ac DATE 'AR Tr,,., .,., .,., SHEET: sc� EERMII f AM) . Dirt tI R tn PROJECT No.: T•009009 LA e- a) In C tV al co . N d E s Q CO u o N °' m `r t0 in H M -1 F+1 480 998 7223 t SIDEWALL SUPPLY GRILLE OR REGISTER WITH AIR EXTRACTOR t A.F.F. ABOVE FINISHED F LOOR A.H.U. AIR HANDLING UNIT SUPPLY DUCT RISER ■■ ■■ CABINET HEATER G.U. RETURN, EXHAUST OR OUTSIDE AIR DUCT RISER G.F.M. CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE E.A.T. ' E.B.H. ELECTRIC BASEBOARD HEATER E.D.H. DOOR GRILLE E.E.R. ENERGY EFFICIENCY RATIO E.F. EXHAUST FAN E.S.P. EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE F.G.U. FAN COIL UNIT F.F.C.H. -1-, MANUAL BALANCING DAMPER FULL LOAD AMPS ilL1 KILOWATT I MD MOTORIZED DAMPER M.G.A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPACITY N.G. NOISE CRITERIA FIRE DAMPER OUTSIDE AIR P.5.1. I FD R.L.A. RUNNING LOAD AMPS ,- FD S.E.E.R. SEASONAL ENERGY EFFICIENCY RATIO U.H. UNIT HEATER U.N.O. UNTIL NOTED OTHERWISE V.F. • FSD WATER COLUMN W.G. • F5D COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER WITH SMOKE DETECTOR la 150 SMOKE DAMPER (AUTOMATIC) WITH SMOKE DETECTOR DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTOR `- i RETURN AIR DUCT / CEILING RETURN AIR GRILLE OR REGISTER / AND/ OR VI / SUPPLY AIR DUCT / SUPPLY DIFFUSER( DIFFUSER j AND/ 0 OR I EXHAUST AIR DUCT / CEILING MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN \ /� AND/ OR CANVAS CONNECTOR WITH VIBRATION ta _ CONNECT TO EXISTING REMOVE TO THIS POINT FLEXIBLE CONNECTION IL---M MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ABBREVIATIONS A.G.U. OR A.G. AIR CONDITIONING UNIT (SPLIT -DX OR WATER COOLED) A.F.F. ABOVE FINISHED F LOOR A.H.U. AIR HANDLING UNIT B.T.U.H. BRITISH THERMAL UNIT / HOUR G.H. CABINET HEATER G.U. CONDENSING UNIT (SPLIT -DX SYSTEMS) G.F.M. CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE E.A.T. ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE E.B.H. ELECTRIC BASEBOARD HEATER E.D.H. ELECTRIC DUCT HEATER E.E.R. ENERGY EFFICIENCY RATIO E.F. EXHAUST FAN E.S.P. EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE F.G.U. FAN COIL UNIT F.F.C.H. FORGED FLOW CABINET HEATER F.L.A. FULL LOAD AMPS K.W. KILOWATT L.A.T. LEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE M.G.A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPACITY N.G. NOISE CRITERIA O.A. OUTSIDE AIR P.5.1. POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH R.L.A. RUNNING LOAD AMPS R.T.U. ROOF TOP UNIT S.E.E.R. SEASONAL ENERGY EFFICIENCY RATIO U.H. UNIT HEATER U.N.O. UNTIL NOTED OTHERWISE V.F. VENTILATION FAN W.C. WATER COLUMN W.G. WATER GAUGE n m O Vi F p ° 0t n U z 6 in 0 E0 g z° Laa lL VI 1 I 1L W v (Q 0 2 MECHANICAL LEGEND SINGLE LINE p DESCRIPTION 10° ELBOW DOWN 90° ELBOW UP ROUND RADIUS ELBOW 10° STRAIGHT TEE 10° CONICAL TEE 45° BRANCH 45° CONICAL TEE SIZE OR SHAPE TRANSITION ROUND FLEXIBLE DUCT 10° ELBOW DOWN 90° ELBOW UP RECTANGULAR RADIUS ELBOW RECTANGULAR ELBOW WITH TURNING VANES BRANCH TAKE -OFF WITH 45° TAP DOUBLE LINE 111 IIIII� I LINED DUCTWORK UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE) 0 // O.A. - �► SENSOR UNIT HEATER EXHAUST FAN CONDENSING UNIT FAN COIL UNIT / AIR HANDLER UNIT ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNIT OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE TRANSFER GRILLE DUCT SLEEVE 0 THERMOSTAT ALL SYMBOLS ON THIS LIST ARE NOT NECESSARILY USED ON THIS PROJECT. 2 S 0 B 4 5 ALL ABBREVIATIONS ON THIS LIST ARE NOT NECESSARILY USED ON THIS PROJECT. NOTES: I. TOTALINE MODEL #P210 -20001 UL 265A LISTED OR EQUIVALENT 2. RUGGED NORYL HOUSING WITH STRONG CLEAR POLYCARBONATE INSPECTION COVER S. ACCOMMODATES ION (IONIZATION) OR PHOTO HEADS (PHOTOELECTRIC) 4. SUITABLE FOR 4 WIRE 14 -IS AWG WIRE, 24VAC /DG OR 120/220 VAC OPERATION 5. REMOTE TEST STATION OPTION 6. POWERED OUTPUTS FOR REMOTE LED AND AUDIBLE ALARM 1. AIR VELOCITY RATING FROM 500 TO 4000 FPM 5. EQUIPPED WITH A DPDT AUXILIARY RELAY DRILL (2) HOLES IN DUCTWORK FOR INSERTING DETECTOR TUBES FASTEN DETECTOR TO SIDE OF DUCTWORK WITH HOUSING MOUNTING SCREWS O -RING OAM GASKETS DUCT DETECTOR HOUSING CONDU I T OPENINGS A4 NTS DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR 4 5 1 S I 12 CONDENSING UNIT ROOF -\ FLOOR SEE CONDENSING UNIT ON ROOF MOUNTING DETAIL SERVICE VALVES (PROVIDE BY MRGR) SIGHT GLASS REFRIGERANT PIPING FILTER DRYER SUPPORT RODS WITH VIBRATION ISOLATORS RS RL U U TRAP- SEE PIPE PENETRATION DETAIL SEE ROOF CURB DETAIL GOND. DRAIN NOTES: I. SET ROOF CURB ON STRUCTURAL STEEL - SHIM DEAD LEVEL. SECURE ROOF CURB TO METAL DECK AND A/C UNIT TO ROOF CURB. 2. TRANSITION TO CONNECTION SIZES IN DUCT RISE, REFER TO PLANS FOR SIZES. 3. I" ACOUSTIC LINED IN SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTS FROM FAN DISCHARGE TO POINT INDIGATED ON MECHANICAL DRAWINGS (10' -0" MIN.). DUCT SIZES INDICATED ON PLAN ARE EXTERIOR AND INCLUDE LINING. PAINT DUCTWORK TO MATCH CEILING. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR COLOR SCHEME. 4. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR JOIST LOCATIONS, SIZES, AND DIRECTION. 5. INSULATED ROOF CURB. 6. FLEXIBLE CONNECTION - TYPICAL. T.G.G. SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL CONDENSATE. EXTEND ROOFTOP CONDENSATE DRAINS TO /INTO MOP SINK. 7. S. 2- POSITION (OPEN /CLOSED) OPPOSED BLADE BACKDRAFT DAMPER. DAMPER TO OPEN WHEN UNIT 15 RUNNING AND CLOSE WHEN UNIT SHUTS OFF. ACUATOR SHALL FAIL CLOSED. G6 NTS D6 NTS SPILT SYSTEM DETAIL 1/2" (15 MM) ROUND ROD PIN INSULATION STAND -OF HANDLE WITH f'4 �•� [411 -'.r LOCKING I I QUADRANT ► II► INSIDE END BEARIN INSULATION 10111111011110110011011110013 ' e r �1 ~ 02111110 01111111111//1111/101110 SECTION 1111111 /1111/1111111111 / 1ii111111/lll1 110011011000000 00000001 1 SIDE ELEVATION INSULATION DUCT DAMPER BLADE 1 OUTSIDE END BEARING I /5" (6 MM) CLEARANCE ALL AROUND STIFFEN BLADE AS REQUIRED DAMPER BLADE DUCT City of Tukwila BUILDING' DIvicla m HANDLE WITH LOCKING QUADRANT JUN 0 4 2009 NOTES: I. DETAIL SHOWS SINGLE BLADE DAMPER. DAMPER INSTALLATION SHALL BE SIMILAR FOR MULTI -BLADE DAMPERS 4 ROUND DAMPERS. DETAI L HANGER STRAP SCREWS SCREWS MAY BE OMITTED IF HANGER LOOPS •1 60" MAX. I" A8 NTS —MIN. TYP. HANGER STRAP DUCT HANGING WRAPPED INSULATION COVERING RIGID ROUND DUCT (REFER TO NOTE 4) RIGID ROUND SHEET METAL DUCT BALANCING DAMPER INSULATED SUPPLY DUCT PROTECTION SADDLE BALANCING HANDLE. LOCK INTO POSITION AND MARK PERMANENTLY. DIFFUSER STARTER COLLAR (REFER TO NOTE 5) NOTES: I. PROVIDE AT FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION METAL OR "PANDUIT" DRAWBAND ON THE INTERIOR FLEXIBLE DUCT HELIX. SECURE THE INSULATION OVER THE DRAWBAND WITH AN ADDITIONAL DRAWBAND. 2. PROVIDE BEADING ON ROUND METAL DUCT 12" OR LARGER IN DIAMETER. S. PROVIDE MINIMUM 4" COLLARS FOR ATTACHMENT OF THE FLEXIBLE DUCT TO ROUND DUCT, DAMPERS AND DIFFUSERS. 4. BAND RIGID ROUND DUCT INSULATION TO DUCT AND PROVIDE TAPE FOR INSULATION OVERLAP. Dc» 0 8ct FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION (REFER TO NOTE I) I" X 20 GAUGE GALVANIZED SUPPORT STRAP INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT - 5 FOOT MAXIMUM REFER TO NOTE I SQUARE TO ROUND ADAPTOR (IF REQUIRED) CEILING SUPPLY DIFFUSER WITH LAY -IN FRAME. (SURFACE MOUNT FRAME SIMILAR). RECEIVED CITY OF TIJKWMLA MAY. 2' 2009 PERMIT CENTER SUPPLY DIFFUSER S D9 NTS D O1 M P ,IAAICE I COD I MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER 10 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. A a) ' C 5 i ,, d' . 0 C N .s o v °� a T fa � E m 0. w > D Vf VI tri 0 U, W DATE3EPARAT x xx.x ScAPEHMIT (JD S PROJECT No.: I !RE T 100' 00 SHEET: Lrl O) 7 Co 0 aJ to 0 V N t 0 z L to to Ln N Ui oo m N N N CO rn rn co 0 U- E 0 M -2 z w v u 41 INSTALLATION NOTE( #1) - RTU CONFIGURATION: *PRIOR TO TURN UP SET RTU MODULE BUS ADDRESS. RTU #1 SALES AREA - SW1 1-8 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF SW2 1 -8 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF *OFF *OFF S W1 RTU #2 EMPLOYEE AREA - SW1 1-8 OFF OFF OFF ON SW2 1-8 ON OFF ON OFF SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF P/N 300199 - 8" (SUPPLY) DUCT MNT TEMPERATURE SENSOR, BELL BOX, THERMISTOR TYP (STS1) INCLUDED W /P /N 150744 1 2 3 4 5 67 8 J 1 2 3 4 5 617 S INSTALLATION NOTE( #5): REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING OF EQUIPMENT. TYPE STANDARD AC (DX) HEAT PUMP OFF (HP) HEAT PUMP ON *SEE NOTE (HP2) ON OFF GAS HEAT *OFF *OFF (GH) SW2 *SEE NOTE CRED /1 - Q3BMS:TB2:A) --0 SEE DRAWING BMS 1.1 (BLK /1- Q3BMS:TB2:B) --∎ (WHT /2- Q3BMS:TB2:0-■ *NOTE - SWITCH SETTINGS FOR HVAC TYPE // SW2.7 OFF INSTALLATION NOTE( #3): TERMINATE BUS CABLE SHIELD(S) TO CHASSIS GROUND AT Q3BMS ONLY. CARRY AND INSULATE SHIELD DRAIN THROUGH TO EACH RTU. TAPE OFF CABLE SHIELD AT END OF LINE RTU. 2 1 SPARE 348" STS1 281 TYPICAL FOR EACH HVAC SYSTEM CABLE LEGEND: RED /1 BLK /1 = PAIR 1 WHT /2 BLK /2 = PAIR 2 SW2.8 OFF ON SINGLE COMPRESSOR - (Y1) IS COMPRESSOR, (W1 /B) IS REVERSING VALVE IF "ENERGIZED" FOR HEATING. (0) IS REVERSING VALVE IF "ENERGIZED" FOR COOLING. (W2) IS EMERGENCY HEAT. OFF DUAL COMPRESSOR - (Y1) IS 1ST COMPRESSOR. (Y2) IS 2ND COMPRESSOR. (W1 /B) IS REVERSING VALVE IF "ENERGIZED" FOR HEATING. (0) IS REVERSING VALVE IF "ENERGIZED" FOR COOLING. (W2) IS EMERGENCY HEAT. ON ON STAGE 1 HEAT (W1) NOT- INTERLOCKED WITH FAN (G). ASSUMES THE HVAC UNIT INTERNALLY WILL TURN ON FAN (G) BASED ON SUPPLY TEMPERATURE. RED /1- RTU:TB4:A BLK/1 - RTU:TB4:B ) WHT /2- RTU:TB4:C ) 4 200' 1 �J 2,71' ' -1,31 DESCRIPTION STANDARD DX HVAC WITH AUX. HEAT INSTALLATION NOTE( #2): ON THE LAST RTU CONNECTED, OR IF THERE IS ONLY ONE RTU BOARD, ENSURE JUMPER J5 IS SET 1-2 FOR INTERMEDIATE RTU BOARDS, LEAVE JUMPERS SET AT 2 -3. WHT} -) III . BELDEN 5441FE 2 PAIR, 20AWG, STRND, SHLD (BELDEN 6441FE — FOR PLENUM) INSTALLATION NOTE( #4): TERMINATE SENSOR CABLE SHIELD(S) TO GROUND AT RTU ONLY. TAPE OFF CABLE SHIELD AT SENSOR. BLK /1 - RTU:TB3: +SPL\D- WHT) —) 1--- (RED /1 - RTU:TB3: - SPLY) -- 2 SPARE TAPE SHIELD (TYP.) 096" 4,5C *NOTE - CABLE /WIRE LIST (PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR) # DESCRIPTION A. CABLE, 2 PAIR, 20AWG, STRND, SHLD B. TSTAT, 8 COND, 18 AWG, SLD C. WIRE, 16 AWG D. WIRE, 14 AWG ZTS1 Cool I.- Warm STANDARD PLENUM BELDEN BELDEN 5441FE 6441 FE COLEMAN COLEMAN 55308 55508 THHN N/A THHN N/A P/N 150744 - Q3RTU CONTROLLER (RTU1) a 0 O 0 O 0 O 0 0 0 a 0 0 RESET COLD START 0 3 2 1 J5 CUR OUT - + m we C C SW3 10 01 J2 T R O O C ewe m BELDEN 5441FE 2 PAIR, 20AWG, STRND, SHLD (BELDEN 6441FE — FOR PLENUM) O 0 0 O 0 0 ACCEPTABLE CROSS STANDARD — BELDEN 5341FE, 5341PT, & 5541PT. STANDARD — ALPHA 5610B2002, 5610B1802, 2242C, & 6427. PLENUM — ALPHA 57632 ANY COMPARABLE 8 CONDUCTOR T —STAT CABLE. Quest Controls Inc. RTU Controller P/N 130440 ( J6 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 01 JTES7 FT ) 625" J1A 0 0 O O C ewe O O C ewe O O C ewe C C ew V) A B C + - + - + - + - + - + /�/ B U S ZONE SPLY ADJ FAN FLTR OVR BELDEN 5441FE 2 PAIR, 20AWG, STRND, SHLD (BELDEN 6441FE — FOR PLENUM) (TB2:SET:1) ( BLK /2- RTU:TB3: +ADJ ( TB2:SET:1) CWHT /2- RTU:TB3: -ADJ (TB1:TMP: +) (BLK/1 -RTU:TB3:+ZONE (TB1:TMP: RED /1 - RTU:TB3: -ZONE 275" P/N 150748 - ZONE TEMPERATURE SENSOR W /COOL /WARM ADJ (ZTS1) INCLUDED W /P /N 150744 ( J1I3 1 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 B 8 8 B B m C C ew m DO NOT CONNECT POWER TO THESE TERMINALS. ATTACH TO EARTH GROUND TAPE SHIELD (TYP.) NOTE BUS CABLE TO RTU #2 IF PRESENT. RED /1 -RTU.1 :TB4:A BLK /1 -RTU.1 :TB4:B WHT /2- RTU.I:TB4:C 1 SPARE TAPE SHIELD (TYP.) INSTALLATION NOTE( #1) 1 1 3 4 6 6 7 8 B 11 8 B 8 8 75.0 1 F9 ) ( F2 ) ( F4 ) ( F1 ) ( F3 ) ( F5 O O C ewe O O C ewe O O ew 24+ 24 C R G Y1 Y2 W11B W2 0 VAC FAN COOL HEAT DISPI I SW2 F6 G Y2 WIB 0 FL OR BELDEN 5441FE 2 PAIR, 20AWG, STRND, SHLD (BELDEN 6441FE — FOR PLENUM) •- (RED /1 - RTU.2:TB4:A ►� BLK /1 - RTU.2:TB4:B 0- (WHT /2- RTU.2:184:C) 3,2" COLEMAN 55308 8 COND 18AWG SLD F—STAT P/N 150744 - Q3RTU KIT KIT INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING ITEMS: P/N 150440 - Q3RTU P/N 300199 - 8" DUCT MOUNT TEMP SENSOR P/N 150748 - ZONE COOL /WARM ADJ INSTALLATION NOTE( #6): MOUNT RTU CONTROLLER IN RTU /HVAC CONTROL PANEL USING 3" TDK SNAP -TRACK PROVIDED. IF IT IS A SPLIT SYSTEM, MOUNT THE RTU CONTROLLER IN THE AIR HANDLER UNIT. IF COMMUNICATIONS WITH Q3 CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, EACH RTU CONTROLLER IS CAPABLE OF MAINTAINING THE TEMPERATURE OF THE HVAC ZONE INDEPENDENTLY. INSTALLATION NOTE( #7): N INSTALLATION CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR USING CABLE /WIRE THAT EITHER MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE WIRE SPECIFIED IN THIS DRAWING. ANY DEVIATIONS FROM THE WIRE SPECIFIED COULD AFFECT THE PROPER OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM. !! INSTALLATION NOTE( #8): ** CONTACT T- MOBILE PROJECT MANAGER IF THERE ARE MORE THAN TWO HVAC UNITS TO REQUEST ADDITIONAL RTU CONTROLLERS OR TO REPLACE DAMAGED OR MISSING PARTS. BRN- RTU:TB2:C) RED- RTU:TB2:R GRN- RTU:TB2:GD YEL- RTU:TB2:Y1 III BLU- RTU:TB2:Y2) --- J WHT- RTU:TB2:WON ORN- RTU:TB2:W2)1 III J INSTALLATION NOTE( #9): TERMINATE SENSOR CABLE SHIELDS) TO GROUND AT RTU ONLY. TAPE OFF CABLE SHIELD AT SENSOR. P/N QTY DESCRIPTION 150744 1 Q3RTU CONTROLLER (RTU1) 150748 1 ZONE TEMP SENSOR W /ADJ (ZTS1) 300199 1 SPLY AIR DUCT TEMP SENSOR (STS1) III III III RED J GRN (YEL) BLU TERMINA L BLOCK VAC#1 - (VA I I I r .. FIELD WIRING LEGEND RED /1- RTU:TB3: +SPLY I POSISITION CABLE PAIR LEGEND RED /1 BLK/1 = PAIR 1 WHT /2 BLK/2 = PAIR 2 , (E /V C R G FAN Y1 COMP #1 Y2 COMP #2 W1 /B HEAT #1 /RVLV W2 HEAT #2 0 RVLV 24 VAC ooci O8'1 WIRE COLOR/PAIR# DEVICE FIELD WIRING TERMINALS TORQUE ALL FIELD WIRING TERMINALS TO 7 IN-LBS REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED JUN 0 4 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING G DIVISI N! RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY. 2 9 Z00 PERMIT CENTER 2 2 5 5 4 4 5 5 a 10 Io 12 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. 0 u. E I-=o 0 I — co o mw rn w r CO to 73 lr- m C a � V L. o Q) N (1) e AS NOTED CAW DATE: C�I!•'nw 0 N s W N v r CL V) z 0 MIT AMk o" `bVAL MOORED TMOO'o XX.XX.XX SHEET: Ln N Ln 00 W Cn W 3 E l7 = o E o m N N N 00 00 IL 0 V JC 0 M -3 El 1/2"=I'-0" Al 1/2"=1'-0" FRY REGLET - 1/2" REVEAL MOLDING - DRM -50 -50 - M -5 FINISH. LEASE LINE METAL PANEL OVER NEW STOREFRONT CONSTRUCTION. M -3 FINISH. I/2" BLACK METAL REVEAL EXISTING MALL CONSTRUCTION STOREFRONT ELEVATION LEASE LINE J ENLARGED STOREFRONT PLAN L I/2" 2' -ct 3/4" 1/ " II 1/2" 1/2" FRY REGLET - 1/2" REVEAL MOLDING - DRM -50 -50 - M -3 FINISH. 5' -I I/4" 6" CLEAR ANODIZED BASE (M -2) LINE OF HEADER ABOVE. SEE SHEET A -5. NEW STOREFRONT CONSTRUCTION WITH METAL PANELS LINE OF DISPLAY GABLE SYSTEM ATTACHMENT 4 1/2" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS BY TENANT G.G. 1/2" (2) EQUAL 6LAZIN6 PANELS =10' -3 3/4" 5' -2" 1/2" IN- I M -3 1 LINE OF LINE OF FLOOR TRANSITION 5' -0" X 10' -0" "HERGULITE" GLASS AND ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOORS 52'- INTERNALLY ILLUMINATED SIGNAGE BY OTHERS 3' -0" X 10' -0" "HERCULITE" GLASS AND ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOORS 1 in I' -O" 1 i 1/2" METAL PANEL OVER NEW STOREFRONT CONSTRUCTION. M -3 FINISH. 2" DIA. GLASS CLIPS W/ M -2 FINISH. m obile -- }Mahile • 5" t in FRY REGLET - 1/2" REVEAL MOLDING - DRM -50 -50 - M -5 FINISH. J 7 ild, 5' -I 1/2" 6" CLEAR ANODIZED BASE (M -2) 1/2" EXISTING STRUGTRUAL COLUMN 4 ENCLOSURE. PAINT P -I. LINE OF DISPLAY GABLE SYSTEM ATTACHMENT LEASE LINE (2) EQUAL 6LAZIN6 PANELS = IQ' -3 3/4" 5' -I 1/4" 2" DIA. GLASS CLIPS W/ M -2 FINISH. E NEW 1 STOREFRONT CONSTRUCTION WITH METAL PANELS 1/2" I /2" II I/2" II I/2" 1 /2 12 -' 1' -4" 1 FRY REGLET - 1/2" REVEAL MOLDING - DRM -50 -50 - M -5 FINISH. METAL PANEL OVER NEW STOREFRONT CONSTRUCTION. M -3 FINISH. 1/2" STAINLESS STEEL METAL REVEAL LEASE LINE METAL PANEL OVER NEW STOREFRONT CONSTRUCTION. M -3 FINISH. 1/2" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS BY TENANT G.G. -NEW NEUTRAL PIER BY '"' TEN. G.G. (TO MACH MALL FINISHES) TENANT IS TO INSTALL ADDRESS VINYL. VINYL TO BE INSTALLED ON 2ND SURFACE (INTERIOR SIDE OF GLASS). NUMBERS TO BE 4" HIGH, ARIAL FONY, MOUNTED ON LOWER RIGHT HAND OF STOREFRONT FLAZING; 5" FROM THE EDGE OF GLASS 18" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR LEASE LINE NEW NEUTRAL PIER BY TEN. G.G. (TO MACH MALL FINISHES) Zo N 1 1 (0 i0 I EP -1 I I EP -2 I I EP -3 I I M -1 I I M-21 I M -3 I I M-41 All in PANTONE COOL GRAY ciU BENJAMIN MORE PAINT #2124 -30 DEEP SILVER (MED DARK GRAY) SHERMAN WILLIAMS PAINT ORDER #1045-00554/5 MAGENTA KAWNEER CO. CLEAR ANODIZED #14 BRUSHED ANODIZED ALUMINUM FINISH 12 NEW TENANT SIGN CONTRACTOR TO REVIEW THE LANDLORD'S SIGN CRITERIA AND SUBMIT SHOP DINGS. FOR THE PROPOSED SIGN TO THE L.L. AND ANY OTHER GOVERNING AUTHORITIES. THE S.G. SHALL SECURE ANY AND ALL PERMITS REQ'D. FOR THE INSTALLATION AND DISPLAY OF THE PROPOSED SIGNAGE. SIGN MANUFACTURER'S SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE REVIEWED UNDER SEPARATE SUBMITTAL. ALL MATERIALS TO BE A CLASS A RATING WITH A FLAME SPREAD INDEX OF 0 -25 AND A SMOKE DEVELOPED INDEX OF 0 -450. REVI IOftN D09- 0 PANTONE COOL GRAY 1U BENJAMIN MORE PAINT #2121 -30 PEWTER (MED LIGHT GRAY) CARDINAL INDUSTRIAL FINISHED TO09 -WH I I POLYESTER TGIG POWDER COATI FULL GLOSS SMOOTH EXTERIOR DURABLE CARDINAL INDUSTRIAL FINISHED CO51 - WHI20 POLYESTER POWDER COATING SEMI GLOSS TEXTURE EXTERIOR DURABLE NOT ALL ARE USED AT THIS LOCATION REVIEWED FOF CODE COMPLIAN+ E APPROVED JUL 16 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKVVILA JUL 15 2009 PERMIT CENTER STOREFRONT FINISHES 12 cc 0 9 Li. 0 0 1•- Q N O rn O w E Lu O w tT � m DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 449 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protectlon as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. RI I V m to o :1-1 r to 40 N h V "15 fi • Q N w &NI & al IA 05.22.Oci 1/2 " =1' -0" DG TM00100c i SHEET: a Z 0 ce LL W Z � H Q W J W Z Z Q TT r- a 5 0 CL N cv 0 0 N • N O O Z Lnril t t o JUL 7 U9 Lfl N L(1 CO O 0 N • 00 O Ol O 7 1— A -6 z 0 Lu SWITCHING SINGLE POLE SWITCH (WITH FOLLOWING SWITCH DESIGNATIONS) WALL MOUNTED AT 42" a = SWITCH LEG 3 = THREE WAY M = MANUAL MOTOR STARTER WITH THERMAL OVERLOADS. E = EMERGENCY PULL. SWITCH K = KEYED SWITCH D = DIMMER SWITCH T = TIMED OVERRIDE SWITCH TIME CLOCK LC QUEST LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL II MOTOR STARTER COMBINATION MOTOR STARTER /DISCONNECT LEGEND IS USED FOR REFERENCE OF SYMBOLS SHOWN ON PLANS. POWER DISTRIBUTION DEVICES I PANELBOARD - SURFACE MOUNTED, 12" TO TOP C DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, 20A, IS" AFF UNO FOURPLEX RECEPTACLE, 20A, IS" AFF UNO GFI RECEPTACLE WITH GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER (;)c WP WEATHERPROOF RECEPTACLE, IS" AFF UNO ( -) TAGS XX SHEET NOTE NOTE: NOT ALL SYMBOLS LISTED ABOVE ARE SHOWN ON PLANS. THE SYMBOL FOURPLEX FLOOR RECEPTACLE, 20A RECESSED RECEPTACLE FOR "TV BOX" RECEPTACLE FOR SHOW WINDOW LIGHTING MOTOR OR EQUIPMENT CONNECTION DISCONNECT SWITCH METER TRANSFORMER SHEET IDENTIFIER GENERAL WIRING DEVICES CONDUIT SYSTEM UNDER FLOOR HOMERUN. CONDUIT SYSTEM TO PANEL AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS Q JUNCTION BOX O- CONDUIT UP •--- CONDUIT DOWN SECURITY AND COMMUNICATION T.T.B. TELEPHONE TERMINAL BOARD - SEE DETAIL ON SHEET E -5 1,1XX X )( I KPI TELEPHONE /DATA OUTLET LOCATION, 5/4" CONDUIT WITH PULLWIRE TO ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING, CABLE 15 BY OWNER. RECESSED DATA BOX FOR "TV BOX" NOTE: XX DESIGNATES QTY. OF JACKS 4 CAT 5e CABLES TO EQUIPMENT CABINET. (PROVIDED BY OWNER) TELEPHONE /DATA OUTLET FLOORBOX ROUGH -IN FOR ADT KEY PAD @ 48 "A.F.F. II G1 2 3 4 5 6 1 ELECTRICAL LEGEND 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 A. FIELD VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS. B. DESIGN DRAWINGS ARE SCHEMATIC. CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE PRIOR TO BIDDING OR AWARD OF CONTRACT TO INSPECT EXISTING FIELD CONDITIONS. INCLUDE ALL LABOR AND MATERIALS NECESSARY FOR FIELD MODIFICATIONS DUE TO EXISTING CONDITIONS. C. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT THE ARCHITECT, ENGINEER OR OWNER PRIOR TO BIDDING FOR INTERPRETATIONS AND CLARIFICATIONS OF THE DESIGN AND INCLUDE IN THE BID ALL COSTS TO MEET THE DESIGN INTENT. CLARIFICATIONS MADE BY THE ARCHITECT, ENGINEER OR OWNER AFTER BIDDING WILL BE FINAL AND SHALL BE IMPLEMENTED AT CONTRACTORS COST. D. BIDDING CONTRACTORS SHALL HAVE A WORKING KNOWLEDGE OF LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES AND SHALL INCLUDE IN THEIR BIDS THE COSTS FOR ALL WORK INSTALLED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH GOVERNING CODES, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS NOT WITHSTANDING. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ALERT ARCHITECT, ENGINEER OR OWNER OF ANY APPARENT DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN GOVERNING CODES AND DESIGN INTENT. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. 0. P. Q. R. 5. T. U. V. X. Y. Z. ALLOWANCES SHALL BE INCLUDED FOR UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS THAT MAY EFFECT THE CONTRACTOR'S SCOPE OF WORK. MINOR VARIATIONS REQUIRED FOR ACCOMPLISHING THE INTENT OF THIS DESIGN SHALL SE INCLUDED IN THAT ALLOWANCE. PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED PERMITS. CONTRACTOR'S INSTALLATION SHALL CONFORM TO ALL LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS. VERIFY EXACT PLACEMENT OF ALL DEVICES SHOWN ON THE DOCUMENTS WITH ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING DRAWINGS PRIOR TO FINAL PLACEMENT. BECOME FAMILIAR WITH REQUIRED DEMOLITION WORK PRIOR TO BIDDING AND START OF WORK. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO PROVIDE ALL DEMOLITION AS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW WORK. COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL WORK ABOVE THE CEILING TO PROVIDE THE GREATEST POSSIBLE CLEARANCE FOR INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL. CONDUIT RUNS SHALL BE RUN THROUGH TRUSSES WHERE POSSIBLE AND PERPENDICULAR OR PARALLEL TO BUILDING STRUCTURE. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF DEVICES SERVING CASEWORK WITH FIXTURE CONTRACTOR. COORDINATE ALL LOW VOLTAGE CONDUIT AND ROUGH -IN REQUIREMENTS WITH LOW VOLTAGE CONTRACTORS. SWITCHBOARDS, PANELBOARDS, DISCONNECT SWITCHES, TRANSFORMERS AND CONTACTORS SHALL BE "LISTED" AND "IDENTIFIED" AS RATED FOR A MINIMUM OF 15 °C CONDUCTOR TERMINATION. INCLUDE A COPPER EQUIPMENT GROUND CONDUCTOR IN ALL RACEWAYS. SIZE RACEWAYS AS NECESSARY TO COMPLY WITH NEC. ALL EMPTY CONDUITS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A PULL WIRE. ALL 20A BRANCH CIRCUITS BETWEEN 100' AND 150' IN LENGTH, #10 AWG COPPER WIRE SHALL BE USED. FOR ALL 20A BRANCH CIRCUITS OVER 150' IN LENGTH, #S AWG COPPER WIRE SHALL BE USED. ALL 20A BRANCH CIRCUITS LESS THAN 100' IN LENGTH, SHALL BE #I2 COPPER CONDUCTORS, #12 CND., 5/4" UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. TYPE MC CABLE MAY BE USED FOR BRANCH CIRCUITS ABOVE CEILINGS AND IN WALLS. DO NOT USE TYPE MC EXPOSED. CIRCUITING INDICATED ON PLAN IS DIAGRAMMATIC FOR CLARITY. CIRCUITING SHALL BE "THRU- WIRING" WHERE /WHEN POSSIBLE. MULTI - CONNECTIONS TO A SINGLE LIGHT FIXTURE FOR FIELD CONDITIONS OR VOLTAGE DROP FACTORS MAY BE REQUIRED (FIXTURES SHALL BE MANUFACTURED TO ACCOMMODATE "THRU- WIRING "), AND RELATED COSTS SHALL BE INCLUDED IN BID. MAKE ALL FINAL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERATING SYSTEM. WHERE DRYWALL CEILINGS ARE USED, CONTRACTOR SHALL ARRANGE CIRCUITING 50 THAT JUNCTION /BOXES ACCESS PANELS ARE NOT INSTALLED IN THESE DRYWALL CEILING AREAS. (THE USE OF JUNCTION BOXES IN THESE DRYWALL CEILINGS IS NOT PERMITTED, ARRANGE CIRCUITS TO AVOID THIS SITUATION). FIELD COORDINATE WITH TENANT'S CONSTRUCTION MANAGER PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN TO AVOID CONFLICTS. JUNCTION BOXES MAY BE PLACED ABOVE LAY -IN CEILINGS. FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS OF ALL HVAC EQUIPMENT WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR, PRIOR TO ORDERING RELATED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. PLACEMENT OF ALL RECEPTACLES SHALL BE INTENTIONAL (I.E. CENTERED ON COLUMNS OR WALL FEATURES, OR TIGHT TO CORNER). IF RECEPTACLE 15 NOT SHOWN IN A DESIRABLE LOCATION, FIELD VERIFY EXACT PLACEMENT OF RECEPTACLE WITH TENANT'S CONSTRUCTION MANAGER PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY COMPONENTS TO MAKE A COMPLETE WORKING SYSTEM. VERIFY ROW LENGTHS, FEED POINT AND MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO ORDERING. TAKE ADEQUATE CARE TO CORRECTLY LOCATE ALL ELECTRICAL STUBOUTS, FLOOR BOXES, J- BOXES, TRACK, ETC. PRECISE LOCATIONS OF FLOOR OUTLETS AND J -BOXES ARE VERY IMPORTANT. NO PIPING, DUCTS OR EQUIPMENT FOREIGN TO ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SHALL BE PERMITTED TO BE LOCATED WITHIN THE DEDICATED SPACE ABOVE THE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. NEC 110.26(0). FUSES SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH REJECTION TYPE FUSE HOLDERS. NEC 240.605 PROVIDE LOCK -ON DEVICE FOR CIRCUITS SUPPLYING EMERGENCY UNIT EQUIPMENT. NEC 100.12(e). AA. ATTAIN EXISTING BUILDING LOAD INFORMATION AND VERIFY AMPACITY AND DEMAND FOR BUILDING TO ENSURE THAT ALL LOADS (EXISTING AND NEW) DO NOT EXCEED THE AMPACITY OF THE SERVICE FEEDER(S) OR RATING OF THE SERVICE, PER NEC 220.55. AB. ALL DEDICATED RECEPTACLES SHALL BE RATED TO NOT LESS THAN THE RATING OF THE BRANCH CIRCUIT SERVING THE RECEPTACLE. AC. SUPPORT VERTICAL CABLE RUNS PER NEC 300.19. AD. CIRCUIT BREAKERS USED AS SWITCHES IN 120 OR 211V FLR LIGHTING CIRCUITS SHALL BE LISTED AND MARKED "SWD" OR "HID" PER NEC 240.85(d). REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE " ROV JUN 0 4 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION I RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY 2'9 Z009 PERMIT CENTER A8 10 12 GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES 8 1 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. v co m w tri 0 N Q1 N Q w C W J J w m PROJ NM 4. mo = � = N t in u °6 ea m fa 3 csi i t V I tY1 a: I VI 3 v7 z 0 w DATE: SEPA RATX.XX.X SHEET: �; .! VAL T 00 W 121 J W tri I U cS z W W Ln rn a, 5 0 cc • t N N Lfl O N • E v.) co 0 Q rn u O ▪ a, Ln • `�- ° Q Q Q a, a pt , 3 : `^ ca l9 = s -0 o = I o E -1 n 0 Al 1/4" = 1' -0" 2 LIGHTING FLOOR PLAN 2 1_ B 3 A -14 A -14 EM A -12 A -14 EM A -12 EM (4) O EX( $ A-12 EX � (4 > EM A EM -12 EX A - 1 2 IE2 A -14 EXI \\ A� A -10 AIf A -S AM A -10 A -S 0 AM I 0 A -S a AMI a 0 0 c2 ... _.- ... -.. _. 6 - 1 GSMlNAlRE S H U, GALLOUT AMI AM2 GI A E2 EE EM EMR EX FFI FF2 SYMBOL 0 cO 0 DESCRIPTION Semi - Recessed 4.5" sq aperture,white trim Semi- Recessed 4.5x9.25" rectangular aperture, white 6" Recessed Down Light 2x2 Recessed Lensed Luminaire 2x4 Recessed Lensed Luminaire 1X4 Fluorescent Wrap Recessed Emergency Salesf loor Em Back of House Wall- mounted Emergency Unit Exterior Emergency Single Sided Clear Edgelit Exit 4 -ft Dia. fluorescent Cloud 2.2 ft Dia. Surface Mtd. Pendant MODEL Amerlux GYLSR -I - 39 -T4GU6 h- E- ST- 120V -NF -WT Amerlux GYL5R- 2- 39- T46U6.5 -E - 5T - 120 NF - NF - WT Amerlux SVA I I -39 -T6 -E- 120 -SDW -F L Lightolier XA2GVA26UNVS0 Lightolier XP26VA232UNVH1 Lightolier 11434B -2 -32- 120 -SO Lightolier SOLUTION W GL Exitronics LL9OHW621SWG2 Extronix TR -WB -BR Exitronix V902- R- WB -6C - WH Light Energy LE -CS- 43122 -3XF21 T5 Kartell Kart -09031 Cardinal Red Suspension LAMP (I) CMH39T/U930 GU6.5 (2) CMH39T- 0930606.5 (I) CMH39T- UVG -U- 830612 (2) F32TSSP3O/U6 (2) 2SW F2STS -835 (2) F2STS /S35 (2) 35MRI6 (2) 9W (2) 6w Xenon (0) LED (5) F2IT5/555 K1 100 watt INPUT WATTS 40 SO 40 56 56 56 '10 IS 15 15 63 100 BALLAST ELECTRONIC ELECTRONIC ELECTRONIC GE232MAX - NNLTRA - UNV GE232MAX - NNLTRA -UNV ELECTRONIC ELECTRONIC ELECTRONIC BATTERY N/A ELECTRONIC N/A VOLTS 120V IP 2W 120V IP 2W 120V IP 2W 120V IP 2W 120V IP 2W 120V IP 2W 120V IP 2W 120V IP 2W 120V IP 2W 120V IP 2W 120V IP 2W 120V IP 2W MOUNTING CEILING CEILING RECESSED RECESSED RECESSED SURFACE RECESSED WALL WALL WALL SURFACE PENDANT NOTE I Check all applicable codes to determine whether Red or Green face is required T.G.G. to provide blocking in ceiling to support fixture. T.G.G. to provide blocking in ceiling to support fixture. I. ALL RECESSED LUMINAIRES IN SALES AREA AND SURFACE MOUNTED LUMINAIRES IN THE FITTING ROOMS SHALL BE CENTERED IN /ON CEILING TILE. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL SUPPORT PER MFG. RECOMMENDATIONS FROM STRUCTURE ABOVE FOR ALL LUMINAIRES ATTACHED TO HUNG CEILINGS. 2. SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR ACTUAL LUMINAIRE LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS. 3. ALL FLUORESCENT LAMPS SHALL BE HIGH CRI, 5500K. 4. ALL FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES THAT UTILIZE DOUBLE -ENDED LAMPS SHALL INCLUDE THE DISCONNECTING MEANS AS REQUIRED BY 410.15(6) IN THE 2005 NEC; 410.130(6) IN THE 2005 NEC 5. LUMINAIRES 4 LAMPS LISTED ABOVE ARE FURNISHED BY OWNER THROUGH VILLA LIGHTING. A -S a AMI A -10 O C I A -10 0 G I A -10 0 l A -10 O G I A -10 �G I (EMR A -12 10 10 12 0 SHEET NOTES 1. JUNCTION BOX FOR EXTERIOR SIGNAGE. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH SIGN VENDER. HOME RUN THROUGH QUEST LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL (LGG). 2. QUEST LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL (LGG). SEE SHEET E -1 4 E -S FOR DETAILS. 3. QUEST LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL (LGG) OVERRIDE. SEE SHEET E -1 4 E -8 FOR DETAILS. 4. ALL EMERGENCY EGRESS LIGHTING SHALL BE ON A SEPARATE CIRCUIT FROM GENERAL LIGHTING AND CIRCUITED AHEAD OF ANY SWITCHING INCLUDING THE "LGG" 5. T.G.G. SHALL PROVIDE WALL MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS FOR TOILET ROOM OVERRIDE CONTROL. EVIE'L,, O CODE COMPLIANCE APP D JUN 194 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING GENERAL NOTES A. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LISTED BY A RECOGNIZED TESTING LAB (i.e. U.L., ETC.) B. LUMINAIRES IN CONTACT WITH INSULATION SHALL BE U.L. LISTED FOR THERMAL BARRIER OR PROVIDED WITH 5" MINIMUM CLEARANCE. G. ALL LIGHTING CONTROLLED THROUGH QUEST LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL (LGG). EMPLOYEE BACK OF HOUSE LIGHTING CONTROLLED BY 02, SALES FLOOR LIGHTING CONTROLLED THROUGH Cl. SEE SHEET E -1 FOR DETAILS. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWIL.A MAY 2'9 2009 PERMIT CENTER 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. oc 0 w ° o E 00 � cn o ` ai m 119 w o N m V L co 5 � C w c . 0 oa N o 3vi IN u - 13 :5 p ai Ei m 4 M 0.C)) V SCALE: DRAWN BY: STAFF E. Z a 0 0 LL L.9 Z 2 PROJECT No.: TM009009 NEW PANEL A Service: 120/208 Volts 3 Phase 4 Wire Cabinets: Surface Mounted Mains: 225 Amp 200 AMP MCB Total Watts: 65,949 NEMA 1 CONNECTED LOAD (WATTS) RFM CKT DESCRIPTION WATTS WIRF RKR A B C RKR WIREDESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION WATTS CKT RFM RFM 1 MICROWAVE 1200 12 1/20 X 4 MISC. 3/100 1 PANEL B 9484 2 24968 9484 4 HR HR 3 COFFEE MAKER 700 12 1/20 WH -1 X 6 8500 6 5 LD 5 REFRIGERATOR 700 12 1/20 1/20 X X C2 7 FIXTURE LIGHTING 1400 12 1/20 X 9 1/20 12 SALES LIGHTING 875 8 C1 9 MANAGER'S DESK 800 12 1/20 X 11 1/20 12 SAI FS I IGHTING 760 10 C2 X 11 PRINTER/COPIER 1600 12 1/20 X 1/20 12 EMERG. LIGHTING 496 12 LD (HR)HACR RATED CB 13 SPARE 1/20 X 1/20 12 BOH LIGHTING. EF -1 540 14 C1 15 CART 1800 12 1/20 X 1/20 12 SIGNAGE 1200 16 C3 17 BOH RECEPT. EF -2 1230 12 1/20 X 1/20 12 LIFESTYLE WALL 1800 18 19 BOH RECEPT 1800 12 1/20 X 1/70 SPACE 20 LD 21 TELE BOARD RECEPT 1080 12 1/20 X 1/20 10 SPACE 22 LD 23 QUEST RECEPT 760 12 1/20 X 1/20 12 LIFESTYLE LTG 1600 24 C1 25 SERVICE BAR (SB1) 1800 12 1/20 X 1/20 12 SHOW WINDOW 720 26 LD 27 SERVICE BAR (SB1) 1600 12 1/20 X 1/20 SPACE 28 29 BP KIOSK 900 12 1/20 X 1/20 12 ROIMND) PI AY TABI F 1000 30 31 RECTANGULAR TABLE 1800 12 1/20 X 1/20 12 VIDEO MONITORS 720 32 33 LINEUP WALL 1800 12 1/30 X 1/20 12 QUEST LIGHTING CC RECEPT 180 34 LD C1 35 LINEUP LTG 1600 12 1/20 X 1/20 12 VIDEO MONITORS 1080 36 37 ROUND PLAY TABLE 1000 12 1/20 X 1/20 12 PRINTER RECEPT 360 38 39 RECEPT. 1600 12 1/20 X 1/20 12 VIDEO MONITOR PC RECEPT 180 40 41 RATE WALL 1800 12 1/20 X 1/20 SPACE 42 REMARKS (C #)VIA (LD)LOCK (DED)DEDICATED (HR)HACR (SD)SWITCHING ALL TOTAL LOAD PHASE 'A' 21699 TOTAL LOAD PHASE 'B' 21184 TOTAL LOAD PHASE 'C' 23066 CONTACTOR- REF.E400 -ON DEVICE TOTAL LOAD ALL PHASES 65949 WATTS GROUND 183.19 AMPS RATED CB DUTY CB BREAKERS TO BE 20A BOLT -ON UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE NEW PANEL B 10,000 AIC Service: 1201208 Volts 3 Phase 4 Wire Cabinets: Surface Mounted Mains: 100 Amp MLO Total Watts: 27,468 NEMA 1 CONNECTED LOAD (WATTS) RFM CKT DESCRIPTION WATTS WIRF RKR A B C RKR WIRF DESCRIPTION WATTS CKT RFM 1.25 1 AHU -1 6000 6 3/45 X 4 MISC. 2/50 1/30 6 10 CU -1 3484 2 24968 3484 4 HR HR 3 6000 X X WH -1 2500 6 LD 5 6000 7 SPARE 65949 — 1/20 X NOTES: 1. 100% OF FIRST 10,000 WATTS , PLUS 50% OF REMAINING LOAD. 2. 100% OF A/C LOAD, PLUS 25% OF HIGHEST LOAD. 1/20 SPARE 8 9 SPARE 1/20 X 1/20 SPARE 10 11 SPARE 1/20 X 1/20 12 HVAC. RECEPT 360 12 TOTAL LOAD PHASE A' 9484 REMARKS TOTAL LOAD PHASE B' 9484 'C' (TC)TIME CLOCK CONTROLLED TOTAL LOAD PHASE 8500 (C #)VIA CONTACTOR -REF. E400 (LD)LOCK -ON DEVICE TOTAL LOAD ALL PHASES 27468 WATTS ( DED)DEDICATED GROUND 76.30 AMPS (HR)HACR RATED CB (SD)SWITCHING DUTY CB ALL BREAKERS TO BE 20A BOLT -ON UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ELECTRICAL LOAD SUMMARY 120/208 3 PH - 4W LOAD DESCRIPTION CONNECTED LOAD (WATTS) DEMAND FACTOR DEMAND LOAD (WATTS) DEMAND LOAD (AMPS) LIGHTING 7271 1.25 9089 25 RECEPTACLES 29910 NOTE #1 19955 55 WATER HEATERS 0 1.25 0 0 SIGNAGE 1200 1.25 1500 4 MISC. 2600 1.00 2600 7 HVAC 24968 NOTE #2 25893 72 TOTAL 65949 — 59037 164 NOTES: 1. 100% OF FIRST 10,000 WATTS , PLUS 50% OF REMAINING LOAD. 2. 100% OF A/C LOAD, PLUS 25% OF HIGHEST LOAD. x 0 I� 1 IU 111 Al 1/4" = I' -O" 2 2 3 S 4 4 5 5 6 6 6 S 10 B -6 0 I /2 "C,I #10 #ION #10 5 -2,4 I "G,3 #4, #1 OG WP 5 -12 Y CU-1A—ti ON ROOF A -I9 q5W A -17 +& "AFF A -17 +& "AFF 12" U) +12" +12" 13-1,3 1"0,3#4,#10G A -3 A -5 N A,- / +,4�2�, "G,�F},CI GP+ 1--T- '! =- N' TTY Provide compliance with NEC 110.26 "Spaces About Electrical Ecjuipment" Provide compliance with NEC 4OS.4 "Circuit Directory or Circuit Identification" WP — AHU -I 1A-32 ON ROO A -17 6 -12 LI i +1&" A -15 CA I A -40 A -33,35 6 ' S" 3,35 +16" A-18,24 A -41 FV1 +16" ________ ___ t 3335 L U I +20" `33,35 L ui ,_ +20" A -3o A- 31- -- 53,35 +20" LlUI Y 2O„ O A -26 A -26 A -26 2' -6" 1 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APO JUN 0 4 2009 City of Tukwila a BUILDING DIVISION I POWER FLOOR PLAN & SCHEDULES 10 12 O SHEET NOTES I. EXHAUST FAN EF -I CONTROLLED WITH SOH LIGHTING. EF -2 CONTROLLED WITH TEMPERATURE SENSOR. EXTEND POWER FOR EF -2 THROUGH RELAY K4 IN LCP. 2. SHOW WINDOW RECEPTACLE(S). LOCATE IS" FROM WINDOW.(NEC 210.62) . 3. HVAC EQUIPMENT MEANS OF DISCONNECT AND WP GFGI RECEPTACLE ARE INTEGRAL. T.G.G. SHALL INSTALL IF NOT EXISTING ON EXISTING HVAC UNITS. 4. SAW GUT (TRENCH) TO NEAREST SECTION AND PROVIDE STUB UP WITH FLEX CONDUIT(5) CONNECTING TO A QUAD FLEX RECEPTACLE FOR EACH SECTION. RECEPTACLES SURFACE MOUNT TO FLOOR INSIDE TOE KICK OF EACH SECTION. 5. SAW CUT (TRENCH) TO SPECIFIED TABLE LEG AND PROVIDE FLUSH MOUNTED FLOOR BOX WITH OUTLETS CONGEALED BELOW THE SCREWED DOWN COVER PLATE. RTI 4 GTI GET FOURPLEX POWER EACH. 6. NOT USED. 'I. PROVIDE (2) CIRCUITS FOR POWER TO ALL SECTIONS. POWER CONNECTION 15 VIA J -BOX AT 16" AFF IN END SECTION. PROVIDE WIRING 4 CONNECTIONS AND ONE FOURFLEX RECEPTACLE (ONE ALARM CKT, ONE LIGHTING CKT) IN EACH SECTION. LIGHTING CIRCUITED THROUGH LCG(02). EACH CIRCUIT 15 RUN TO EACH QUAD. WHEN LINE -UP WALL IS FREE STANDING, SAW CUT (TRENCH) TO SPECIFIED LOCATION AND PROVIDE FLEX CONDUIT WHIP. PROVIDE POWER BOXES AND MAKE ALL CONNECTIONS COORDINATED WITH IDX FIXTURE INSTALLATION. &. PROVIDE (2) CIRCUITS FOR POWER TO ALL SECTIONS. POWER CONNECTION 15 VIA J -BOX AT 20" AFF IN RIGHT END SECTION. PROVIDE WIRING 8 CONNECTIONS AND ONE QUAD RECEPTACLE (ONE ALARM CKT, ONE LIGHTING CKT) IN EACH SECTION. LIGHTING IS CIRCUITED THROUGH LCC(CI). EACH CIRCUIT IS RUN TO EACH QUAD. PROVIDE POWER BOXES AND MAKE ALL CONNECTIONS COORDINATED WITH IDX FIXTURE INSTALLATION. q. PROVIDE RECESSED "TV BOX" (PASS#SEYMOUR MODEL #TVSWTVSS) IN WALL. 10. SEE VIDEO WALL DETAIL ON SHEET E -6. SEE PANEL SCHEDULE FOR ASSOCIATED CIRCUITS. II. PROVIDE CONNECTION TO FIXTURE LIGHTING. CIRCUIT SHALL BE CONTROLLED VIA LCC(C2). RECESSED FLOOR BOX SPECIFICATION WIREMOLD 6 GANG STEEL RECESSED 06 FLOOR BOX - RFB6 -OG GVR ASSEMBLY FLUSH PLATE - S381313TCBS GVR ASSY - S38PPTCBS GENERAL NOTES A. ALL WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH THE CURRENTLY ADOPTED CODES, ORDINANCES, AND AMENDMENTS. B. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LISTED BY A RECOGNIZED TESTING LAB (i.e. U.L., ETC.) G. PROVIDE PLENUM RATED WIRING WHERE REQUIRED. COMPLY WITH NEC 500.22. o89% RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWII A MAY 2 2009 PERMIT CENTER 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. W We ILI c ? (93 ZtigKE W W d i' < z Call CD z-0CV zi II z G -I '� Na P crle 0 o� � 0 i® L m 4'r C 5 o CO C N (.1 a IA u r CL CU MD v VI z 0 W SERRATE xxxx.xx POINT AND 1► —o, A R /1 III a'-«. APP TMO SHEET: a) In - o co cc N 76 0 c O 0 V) •c -C a O • a, Z f6 'o LI) in Tr o 1.0 N N co co Ol Ol + Ln N In co O O co rn rn 0 co t E -3 ' a LGI +20" +20" +20" r= - I - -' ■ 1&24..— i - -- ___ �.'1 &,24 --- ________ lon Is.24_ x 0 I� 1 IU 111 Al 1/4" = I' -O" 2 2 3 S 4 4 5 5 6 6 6 S 10 B -6 0 I /2 "C,I #10 #ION #10 5 -2,4 I "G,3 #4, #1 OG WP 5 -12 Y CU-1A—ti ON ROOF A -I9 q5W A -17 +& "AFF A -17 +& "AFF 12" U) +12" +12" 13-1,3 1"0,3#4,#10G A -3 A -5 N A,- / +,4�2�, "G,�F},CI GP+ 1--T- '! =- N' TTY Provide compliance with NEC 110.26 "Spaces About Electrical Ecjuipment" Provide compliance with NEC 4OS.4 "Circuit Directory or Circuit Identification" WP — AHU -I 1A-32 ON ROO A -17 6 -12 LI i +1&" A -15 CA I A -40 A -33,35 6 ' S" 3,35 +16" A-18,24 A -41 FV1 +16" ________ ___ t 3335 L U I +20" `33,35 L ui ,_ +20" A -3o A- 31- -- 53,35 +20" LlUI Y 2O„ O A -26 A -26 A -26 2' -6" 1 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APO JUN 0 4 2009 City of Tukwila a BUILDING DIVISION I POWER FLOOR PLAN & SCHEDULES 10 12 O SHEET NOTES I. EXHAUST FAN EF -I CONTROLLED WITH SOH LIGHTING. EF -2 CONTROLLED WITH TEMPERATURE SENSOR. EXTEND POWER FOR EF -2 THROUGH RELAY K4 IN LCP. 2. SHOW WINDOW RECEPTACLE(S). LOCATE IS" FROM WINDOW.(NEC 210.62) . 3. HVAC EQUIPMENT MEANS OF DISCONNECT AND WP GFGI RECEPTACLE ARE INTEGRAL. T.G.G. SHALL INSTALL IF NOT EXISTING ON EXISTING HVAC UNITS. 4. SAW GUT (TRENCH) TO NEAREST SECTION AND PROVIDE STUB UP WITH FLEX CONDUIT(5) CONNECTING TO A QUAD FLEX RECEPTACLE FOR EACH SECTION. RECEPTACLES SURFACE MOUNT TO FLOOR INSIDE TOE KICK OF EACH SECTION. 5. SAW CUT (TRENCH) TO SPECIFIED TABLE LEG AND PROVIDE FLUSH MOUNTED FLOOR BOX WITH OUTLETS CONGEALED BELOW THE SCREWED DOWN COVER PLATE. RTI 4 GTI GET FOURPLEX POWER EACH. 6. NOT USED. 'I. PROVIDE (2) CIRCUITS FOR POWER TO ALL SECTIONS. POWER CONNECTION 15 VIA J -BOX AT 16" AFF IN END SECTION. PROVIDE WIRING 4 CONNECTIONS AND ONE FOURFLEX RECEPTACLE (ONE ALARM CKT, ONE LIGHTING CKT) IN EACH SECTION. LIGHTING CIRCUITED THROUGH LCG(02). EACH CIRCUIT 15 RUN TO EACH QUAD. WHEN LINE -UP WALL IS FREE STANDING, SAW CUT (TRENCH) TO SPECIFIED LOCATION AND PROVIDE FLEX CONDUIT WHIP. PROVIDE POWER BOXES AND MAKE ALL CONNECTIONS COORDINATED WITH IDX FIXTURE INSTALLATION. &. PROVIDE (2) CIRCUITS FOR POWER TO ALL SECTIONS. POWER CONNECTION 15 VIA J -BOX AT 20" AFF IN RIGHT END SECTION. PROVIDE WIRING 8 CONNECTIONS AND ONE QUAD RECEPTACLE (ONE ALARM CKT, ONE LIGHTING CKT) IN EACH SECTION. LIGHTING IS CIRCUITED THROUGH LCC(CI). EACH CIRCUIT IS RUN TO EACH QUAD. PROVIDE POWER BOXES AND MAKE ALL CONNECTIONS COORDINATED WITH IDX FIXTURE INSTALLATION. q. PROVIDE RECESSED "TV BOX" (PASS#SEYMOUR MODEL #TVSWTVSS) IN WALL. 10. SEE VIDEO WALL DETAIL ON SHEET E -6. SEE PANEL SCHEDULE FOR ASSOCIATED CIRCUITS. II. PROVIDE CONNECTION TO FIXTURE LIGHTING. CIRCUIT SHALL BE CONTROLLED VIA LCC(C2). RECESSED FLOOR BOX SPECIFICATION WIREMOLD 6 GANG STEEL RECESSED 06 FLOOR BOX - RFB6 -OG GVR ASSEMBLY FLUSH PLATE - S381313TCBS GVR ASSY - S38PPTCBS GENERAL NOTES A. ALL WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH THE CURRENTLY ADOPTED CODES, ORDINANCES, AND AMENDMENTS. B. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LISTED BY A RECOGNIZED TESTING LAB (i.e. U.L., ETC.) G. PROVIDE PLENUM RATED WIRING WHERE REQUIRED. COMPLY WITH NEC 500.22. o89% RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWII A MAY 2 2009 PERMIT CENTER 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. W We ILI c ? (93 ZtigKE W W d i' < z Call CD z-0CV zi II z G -I '� Na P crle 0 o� � 0 i® L m 4'r C 5 o CO C N (.1 a IA u r CL CU MD v VI z 0 W SERRATE xxxx.xx POINT AND 1► —o, A R /1 III a'-«. APP TMO SHEET: a) In - o co cc N 76 0 c O 0 V) •c -C a O • a, Z f6 'o LI) in Tr o 1.0 N N co co Ol Ol + Ln N In co O O co rn rn 0 co t E -3 U— ul Q 1/4" = 2 2 S 4 I Al SIGNAL FLOOR PLAN S 4 5 5 1 1 S S q 1 0 1 0 0 SHEET NOTES I. PROVIDE DATA BOX ABOVE CEILING FOR SHOPPER TRACKER. OWNER'S VENDOR WILL EXTEND CABLING BACK TO TELEPHONE BACK BOARD. 2. ROUGH IN FOR ADT KEYPAD. 3. SAW CUT (TRENCH) TO NEAREST SECTION AND PROVIDE STUB UP WITH FLEX CONDUITS) TO A FOURPLEX DATA RECEPTACLE FOR EACH SECTION. DATA RECEPTACLES SURFACE MOUNT TO FLOOR INSIDE THE TOE KICK OF EACH SECTION OF THE FIXTURE. 4. SAW CUT (TRENCH) TO SPECIFIED TABLE LEG AND PROVIDE FLUSH MOUNTED FLOOR BOX. PROVIDE DATA BOXES AND MAKE ALL CONNECTIONS ON LAST DAY OF IDX FIXTURE INSTALLATION. 5. PROVIDE DATA RACEWAY TO THE 2ND AND 4TH SECTIONS OF LINE -UP WALL. WHEN LINE -UP WALL IS FREE STANDING, SAW GUT (TRENCH) TO SPECIFIED LOCATION. 6. PROVIDE RECESSED "TV BOX" (PASS4SEYMOUR TV3WTVSS). 1. SEE VIDEO WALL DETAIL ON SHEET E -6. 8. PROVIDE I -I/4" OR 2" CONDUIT WITH PULL CORD FROM FLOOR BOX TO ABOVE CEILING. 4 1. PROVIDE 2" CONDUIT PULL CORD FROM LANDLORD TELEPHONE BACKBOARD TO THE TENANT TELEPHONE BACKBOARD. 10. PROVIDE 12 WIRE BASKET, TYPICAL OF COOPER 5-LINE FROM TOP OF EQUIPMENT CABINET TO TELEPHONE BACKBOARD. o q REVI CODE COMPLIANCE APPROV JUN o 4 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION I RECESSED FLOOR BOX SPECIFICATION WIREMOLD 6 GANG STEEL RECESSED OG FLOOR SOX - RFB6 -OS CVR ASSEMBLY FLUSH PLATE - 538BBTCBS CVR ASSY - S38PPTCBS GENERAL NOTES A. ALL WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH THE CURRENTLY ADOPTED CODES ORDINANCES, AND AMENDMENTS. B. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LISTED BY A RECOGNIZED TESTING LAB (i.e. U.L., ETC.) C. PROVIDE PLENUM RATED WIRING WHERE REQUIRED. COMPLY WITH NEC 300.22. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY 2',9 2U09 PERMIT CENTER 12 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. 0 LL 1= • o CD ce 00 H o W D r CR m L m 4.1 C : N .0 cn U °6 mi a "5 3 O a. U 16 m ma) s w L1.1 z?rgI Z a s zz rt ED V a I'll 11 'gill z 0 cc cc ° SEPARATE xx s jRMITAN.D.» ddA EVV VAL REt 11OCn PROJECT Vol.! i LV M00 O0 Z a O O J LL J z SHEET: Lfl N In co m N N N co Ol Ol O co 7- 1 LL O O N co Ol Ol co co .1 I— E -4 I IL al tn TYPICAL INSTALL GUIDELINES FOR MUZAK: Al NTS 2' -0" 2 2 S GE NERAL. NOTES A. TELEPHONE SERVICE TO BUILDING IS PROVIDED BY LOCAL TELEPHONE COMPANY. FIELD VERIFY LOCATION OF BUILDING DEMARCATION POINT AND PROVIDE RACEWAY TO TENANT TELEPHONE BOARD AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS. B. ALL WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH THE CURRENTLY ADOPTED CODES, ORDINANCES, AND AMENDMENTS. G. ALL. EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LISTED BY A RECOGNIZED TESTING LAB (i.e. U.L., ETC.) D. PROVIDE PLENUM RATED WIRING WHERE REQUIRED. COMPLY WITH NEC 500.22. A. NO SPEAKER IN BACK ROOM B. TOUCH UP DAMAGED CEILING TILES AFTER SPEAKER INSTALLS G. SHELF SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR FOR MUZAK EQUIPMENT D. SATELLITE OR ANTENNA MUST BE APPROVED BY LANDLORD OR BUILDING ASSOCIATION E. ALL DEVICES /PLATECOVERS SHALL BE WHITE IN COLOR. F. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL DEMARG SIGN FROM MG SIGNS IN LOCATION SHOWN IMMEDIATELY UPON INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD. ' -0" MUZAK PROVIDE A S/4" 2' -0" X S' -O" PLYING° BOARD, PAINTED WHITE 6 "A.F.F. PARTNER PHONE SYSTEM RJ31 X SECURITY ADT WIRELE APs I -1/4" CONDUIT FROM LANDLORD TELEPHONE — \\ BACKBOARD QUEST QS I 11 POWER SUPPLY s • • . G 8 ds u T- I T - I 1 PROVIDE A 5/4 ",6' -0" X S' -O" PLYWOOD BOARD, PAINTED WHITE, 6" A.F.F. FLOOR ■ B 4 4 5 G5 NTS 5 6 FULL SIZE 61RO UNDIN6� ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR PER N.E.G. TABLE 250.94 EQUIPMENT BONDING JUMPER (NEC 250.36(6) DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD, PANELBOARD ELECTRICAL TRANSFORMER N MAIN ELECTRICAL SWITCH 6 UL APPROVED GROUND LU6 OR EXOTHERMIC WELD 5/4" X 10' COPPER ROD STRUCTURAL STEEL ALL METAL PIPE WATER PIPE 6AS PIPE BOND NEUTRAL AND GROUND BUS 1 ONLY AT MAIN SWITCH METAL WATER r'IPE BUILDING GROUND FLOOR EQUIPMENT CABINET (24 "Wx56' "H) 6 STATION CABLING DVR RECORDER SERVERS 4 24A HIGH VOLTAGE PDUS TELEPHONE BOARD ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS 1 S E8 1 12 E NEMA 3R EXISTING WIREJNAY 12 "XI2"XI4' 1 EXISTING i 2LP XISTIN L 200A 1 L_ J L J EXISTING j-E:XISTIN6 T FUTURE EXISTING 1 LM 17M1 LMJ LMT I J 1 1 1 LF r20: LOO 1 LJLI L_ J APPROX. DISTANCE TO SERVICE IS 50' - 0" COORDINATE WITH MALL MANAGEMENT 200AS 2000 J - (N) (4) #3 /o, #6 6ND, 2" G. T.G.G. TO COORDINATE METER WITH LANDLORD AND UTILITY (N) (4) #3/O, CND, 2" G. NEW 3P/2OO AMP DISC. SY T.G.G. (N) (4) #3/0, #6 CND, 2" G. NEW PANEL A 2O8/120V REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVE JUN 0 4 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING Divlsi ih! (N) (4) #I, sci #6 CND, I -I/2" G. NEW PANEL 208/12OV ONE -LINE DIAGRAM 6' -O" { } 7 WIRE BASKET FOR CABL I NG 2'- O' = I0' -0" CE ILING HEIGHT 8' o" 3' -6" L NETWORK SWITCH /ROUTER SERVERS /KVM PDUs PATCH PANELS /STATION CABLING PBX EQUIPMENT CABINET (24 "Wx36 "Dx75 "H) 205/120V PANEL A 205/120V PANEL B NEC REQUIRED CLEARANCE 3' O" LOCKABLE CABINET LAYOUT IS SHOWN FOR CLEARANCES ONLY REFERENCE PLAN FOR EQUIPMENT LAYOUT. O c Y io6 R (2)LADDER HOOKS AT ?2" AFF FOR 8' LADDER HUNG VERTICALLY D00R MUST OPEN OUT TO ALLOW ACCESS TO FRONT OF EQUIPMENT CABINET LOCKABLE DOOR RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY - 9 2009 PERMIT CENTER A8 NTS TELCO ROOM S 1 12 0 O lD O O 00 F- 41 O L 0 00 0 > -fl m O N I j ■ O w • J N L11 • CO COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. b.. m a la C 0 s 1 • 1 CO CFI 3 = N t rat ( u °� N C N w M tri to Cc ell CI. CD VI VI z 0 W cc D A: EPARAT E XX.XX.XX 11 T� SRMITAt - , D ROVAL f1Pi+. . pR�JE ctioliHE`TM00,1 Oq SHEET: W Z Z 0 V) J H W In rn VI 0 cc • Ln N - In -a o0 � o in _ N t E Q O .0 O Q Ol �a � + J o lJ E -5 0 H- lU v 111 1 Al NTS 1 2 N 00 POWER FOR MONITORS(TYP) / N N N 2 GANG BOX WITH PLASTER RING / / / N 2 3 1' -6 -1/4 °(TYP) k 2 GANG BOX WITH PLASTER RING r • 2 "G 2' -6" + et- 1. _POWER/DATA A FOR VIDEO MONITOR PG 3 k 1' -6 -1/4 "(TYP) DATA CONDUIT WITHIN WALL TO BACK WRAP BELOW, PENETRATION BY FIXTURE VENDOR(TYP) BAGKWRAP / / N N N N N N N 4 5 G5 NTS POWER /DATA FOR OWNER EQUIPMENT(TYP) 6 LABEL LABEL "ALARM "LIGHTS" 0 0 a' 20A WHITE DUPLEX O a 10 0. 7 . 20A RED D UPLEX FOURPLEX LABELING MOUNTING DETAIL 20A WHITE DUPLEX LABEL LABEL "ALARM" "LIGHTS" THRU BOLT 4- II /16" SQUARE METAL BOX BRACKET 4 SURF COVER 20A RED DUPLEX CENTER MEMBER OF WALL FRAME THRU BOLT E5 NTS JUNCTION BOX MOUNTING DETAIL VIDEO WALL /BACKWRAP POWER & DATA DETAIL 5 C FA I T c,IT,P , 1 MUG (UKt 65 (TYP.) QUADPLEX 15" CENTERED FROM RIGHT SIDE OF STRUCTURE — IE" CENTERED 16" AFF IL IL G6 NTS JUNCTION BOX 22" FROM END OF CABINET 1EWED FOR COMPLIANCE PROVED 0 4 2009 of Tukwila NG Di1, ijnisi E6 NTS A6 NTS 6 1 7 8 8 1 0 10 12 LIFESTYLE WALL LINEUP WALL I 0 in HOUSING LENS TRIM FLAT OPAL WHITE ARGRYLIG LENS 45" NOM BALLAST, ELECTRONIC (2) LAMPHOLDER, G5 LAMP, F2IT5 (5), (BY OTHERS) SPRING RETAINER bocfo8ct RECEIVED CITY OF TUKIMLA MAY - 9 ZU09 PERMIT CENTER MOUNTING DETAIL FOR LUMINAIRE FF1 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. E O ✓ N O O E nu m (1) C 0 MC tiv■ C N c v (5 #., rsi 4 n W E lm o i M CU Z 0 N W — J W J z 0 w In rn 0 o d ▪ - CG O N co 03 0 n C O N • 0 O -c Q 0 Gl v O ▪ N s Z CO W Lc, PROJECT No.: DATE: PgRCX.XX SHEET: TM00'100' E -6 RED 2 GKT AP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 / •\ / •\ / � • G5 • •\ \ /�\ � \ �\ Ai / }� \ a fi e r m f TYP. se II \ x / / ; 2 ; IL 0 (1 \ a o e o A Vi�� i1A� � rtl 0 H- lU v 111 1 Al NTS 1 2 N 00 POWER FOR MONITORS(TYP) / N N N 2 GANG BOX WITH PLASTER RING / / / N 2 3 1' -6 -1/4 °(TYP) k 2 GANG BOX WITH PLASTER RING r • 2 "G 2' -6" + et- 1. _POWER/DATA A FOR VIDEO MONITOR PG 3 k 1' -6 -1/4 "(TYP) DATA CONDUIT WITHIN WALL TO BACK WRAP BELOW, PENETRATION BY FIXTURE VENDOR(TYP) BAGKWRAP / / N N N N N N N 4 5 G5 NTS POWER /DATA FOR OWNER EQUIPMENT(TYP) 6 LABEL LABEL "ALARM "LIGHTS" 0 0 a' 20A WHITE DUPLEX O a 10 0. 7 . 20A RED D UPLEX FOURPLEX LABELING MOUNTING DETAIL 20A WHITE DUPLEX LABEL LABEL "ALARM" "LIGHTS" THRU BOLT 4- II /16" SQUARE METAL BOX BRACKET 4 SURF COVER 20A RED DUPLEX CENTER MEMBER OF WALL FRAME THRU BOLT E5 NTS JUNCTION BOX MOUNTING DETAIL VIDEO WALL /BACKWRAP POWER & DATA DETAIL 5 C FA I T c,IT,P , 1 MUG (UKt 65 (TYP.) QUADPLEX 15" CENTERED FROM RIGHT SIDE OF STRUCTURE — IE" CENTERED 16" AFF IL IL G6 NTS JUNCTION BOX 22" FROM END OF CABINET 1EWED FOR COMPLIANCE PROVED 0 4 2009 of Tukwila NG Di1, ijnisi E6 NTS A6 NTS 6 1 7 8 8 1 0 10 12 LIFESTYLE WALL LINEUP WALL I 0 in HOUSING LENS TRIM FLAT OPAL WHITE ARGRYLIG LENS 45" NOM BALLAST, ELECTRONIC (2) LAMPHOLDER, G5 LAMP, F2IT5 (5), (BY OTHERS) SPRING RETAINER bocfo8ct RECEIVED CITY OF TUKIMLA MAY - 9 ZU09 PERMIT CENTER MOUNTING DETAIL FOR LUMINAIRE FF1 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. E O ✓ N O O E nu m (1) C 0 MC tiv■ C N c v (5 #., rsi 4 n W E lm o i M CU Z 0 N W — J W J z 0 w In rn 0 o d ▪ - CG O N co 03 0 n C O N • 0 O -c Q 0 Gl v O ▪ N s Z CO W Lc, PROJECT No.: DATE: PgRCX.XX SHEET: TM00'100' E -6 IL w d NTS Al NTS 2 ELEVATION FOCAL FEATURE/ SLAT WALL SHELF (AMI)LUMI NAI RES (NOTES 14 2) NOTES: I. AIM LUMINAIRE AT CENTER OF WALL TO PROVIDE UNIFORM ILLUMINATION. 2. AIM LUMINAIRE AT CENTER OF SHELF TO PROVIDE UNIFORM ILLUMINATION. I O' -6 "AFF RATE WALL(RW1),ACCESSORY WALL(RW2) 2 S 5 4 10'-6 "AFF E4 RECTANGULAR TABLE (RT1) NT5 4 5 RTI NOTES: ELEVATION 5 El I O' -6 "AFF LUMINAIRES (NOTE I) NOTES: I. AIM LUMINAIRE AT CENTER OF TABLE TO PROVIDE UNIFORM ILLUMINATION. CIRCULAR TABLE (CT1) LUMINAIRES (NOTE I) I. AIM LUMINAIRES AT CENTER OF TABLE TO PROVIDE UNIFORM ILLUMINATION. NTS ELEVATION NTS 1 S LUMINAIRES (NOTES I) NOTES: I. AIM LUMINAIRES AT CENTER OF BILLPAY SCREEN TO PROVIDE UNIFORM I I I I IAAIAI AT V1A1 E7 BILLPAY KIOSK (BP1) LUMINAIRES (NOTES I) El0 SLAT WALL (SW1,SW2) REVIEWEO FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED JUN 0 4 2009 NOTES: City Of Tukwila t� �#� yy p� I. AIM LUMINAIRES AT CENTER OF SLAT WAL L °I!DING PROVIDE UNIFORM ILLUMINATION. ELEVATION NTS ELEVATION T- MOBILE SIGN BEHIND CASHWRAP LAYOUT ONLY. NO LIGHTS SHOULD BE AIMED AT THE VIDEO WALL BACK WRAP COUNTER TOP (AM2)F IXTURE FLOOD LUMINAIRES (NOTE 2) (AM2)FIXTURE FLOOD LUMINAIRES (NOTE 2) .ASHWRAP COUNTER TOP NOTES: FIXTURE FLOOD WALLWASI-1 LUMINAIRES (NOTE I) LUMINAIRES (NOTE 2 \� N BWX I. AIM LUMINAIRES AT CENTER OF T- MOBILE SIGN TO PROVIDE UNIFORM ILLUMINATION. 2. AIM LUMINAIRES AT CENTER OF BACKWRAP COUNTER TO PROVIDE UNIFORM ILLUMINATION. 1 0'- 6 " AF F tO9 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWIlA MAY I 9 iuuy PERMIT CENTER A4 CASHWRAP /BACKWRAPS & T- MOBILE WALL SIGN S 10 10 12 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. Ks so L m t 5 2 o S wd' = C N s Vnu 73 4a la 7 � N � u p `^ v v 6 M �.w lE imil > to In VI z 0 cc SOARATE xx..xx P MRM'T ANP/ 4 ARAWAL �F a�e�Gd TMOOcf00'1 ?-J SHEET: E -7 E 0 L v= 11- Lu P/N QTY DESCRIPTION 150435 1 Q3BMS CONTROLLER (Q3BMS) 150211 -3 1 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL (LCC) 300747 1 24/120 VAC DUAL POWER SUPPLY (PS1) 150745 1 OUTDOOR TEMP /LIGHT LVL (OLT1) 150677 1 OVERRIDE PNL 2- BUTTON (OVR1) 350059 1 CAT5E 10' PATCH CBL, BLUE INSTALLATION NOTE( #1): REFER TO SITE DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFIC LIGHTING LOAD CONNECTIONS, ELSE REFER TO SECTION 3.5 OF THE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS LOCATED ON DRAWING E -9. 120" 0 SERVER ROOM EXHAUST FAN PNL# BRKR# EXTERIOR LIGHTS PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# INTERIOR GENERAL LIGHTS #2 PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# INTERIOR GENERAL LIGHTS #1 PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# SEE DRAWING BMS 1.2 TO LIGHTING LOAD ) P/N 150211-3 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL (LCC) REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATION DRAWING NOTES: RED/ 1- RTU:TB4:A BLK /1- RTU:T84:6 ( EXHAUST FAN -K4:2 )- ( BRKR PNL -K4:4 ) D EXTERIOR LIGHTS (C3) EMPLOYEE LIGHTS (C2) CUSTOMER LIGHTS (C1) PREWIRED ® FACTORY: NEUTRAL - 1 4AWG/WHITE 120 VAC - 14AWG /BLACK GROUND - 14AWG /GREEN 24VAC - 20AWG /RED 24VAC RETURN - 20AWG /BLACK 24V - 20AWG /RED 1 SPARE TERMINAL BLOCK TYPICAL CONNECTIONS TO LOCAL SWITCHES LOCAL SWITCHES -SEE LIGHTING• DRAWINGS RED/1 -Q3BMS:TB2:A BLK /1 WHT /2- Q3BMS:T62:C THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND /OR TRADE SECRET INFORMATION WHICH IS THE PROPERTY OF QUEST CONTROLS INC. (QUEST). IT EMBODIES A PROPRIETARY DESIGN WHICH SHALL NOT BE DISCLOSED, SOLD, LOANED, DUPLICATED OR USED FOR PROCUREMENT, MANUFACTURING OF ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT FOR WHICH THIS DOCUMENT WAS SUPPLIED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION BY QUEST. THIS DOCUMENT SHALL BE RETURNED TO QUEST UPON COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT FOR WHICH IT WAS PROVIDED AND /OR AT THE REQUEST OF QUEST. FIELD WIRING LEGEND RED /1- RTU:TB3: +SPLY POSISITION CABLE PAIR LEGEND: RED /1 BLK /1 = PAIR 1 WHT /2 BLK /2 = PAIR 2 12.0" TOP Q3BMS:TB2:B BOTTOM xxx xxx XXX REFERENCE DRAWINGS XXX WIRE COLOR /PAIR DEVICE i LIGHT FIXTURES CABLE LEGEND: RED /1 BLK /1 = PAIR 1 WHT /2 BLK /2 = PAIR 2 G 1 10 G S TB2 0 I K4 K3 K2 K1 O O TB1 *NOTE - CABLE /WIRE LIST (PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR) DESCRIPTION STANDARD PLENUM ACCEPTABLE CROSS A. CABLE, 2 PAIR, BELDEN BELDEN STANDARD - BELDEN 5341FE, 5341PT, & 5541PT. 20AWG, STRND, SHLD 5441 FE 6441FE STANDARD - ALPHA 561002002, 561061802, 2242C, & PLENUM - ALPHA 57632 B. TSTAT, 8 COND, COLEMAN COLEMAN ANY COMPARABLE 8 CONDUCTOR T -STAT CABLE. 18 AWG, SLD 55308 55508 C. WIRE, 16 AWG THHN N/A D. WIRE, 14 AWG THHN N/A FIELD WIRING TERMINALS TORQUE ALL FIELD WIRING TERMINALS TO 7 IN -LBS — 24 VAC — 24 VAC (RTN) —24V — K4 - - K3 — K2 — K1 120 VAC SUPPLIED TO PANEL BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PNL# BRKR# 120 VAC - -. NEUTRAL GROUNI MARK R1 R2 R3 R4 THHN, RED, 16 AWG, STRND 0 THHN, BLK /GRN /WHT, L4'N 14 AWG, STRND ( RED- Q3BMS:TB3:1A ( BLU- Q3BMS:TB3:4B ) ( BLK- Q3BMS :TB3:3B ( GRN- Q3BMS:TB3:2B WHT- Q3BMS:TB3:1 B NOTE: INSTALL JUMPER 1A->2A 2A ->3A 3A->4A COLEMAN 55308 8 COND, 18AWG, SLD, T -STAT 3 SPARE 3 SPARE INSTALLATION NOTE( #4): TERMINATE BUS CABLE SHIELD TO CHASSIS GROUND AT Q3BMS ONLY CARRY AND INSULATE SHIELD DRAIN THROUGH TO EACH RTU. TAPE OFF CABLE SHIELD AT END OF LINE RTU ONLY. INSTALLATION NOTE( #3): 4 * CONTACT T- MOBILE PROJECT MANAGER IF THERE ARE MORE THAN TWO HVAC UNITS TO REQUEST ADDITIONAL RTU CONTROLLERS OR TO REPLACE DAMAGED OR MISSING PARTS. 1 SPARE REVISION HISTORY FOR APPROVAL RELEASED RELEASED 11 0" 01 6427. BELDEN 5441FE 2 PAIR, 20AWG, STRND, SHLD (BELDEN 6441FE - FOR PLENUM) REFERENCE DRAWINGS RELEASED RED- LCC:TB2:24V(RTN) RED- LCC:TB2:24VAC Psi:AUX /75VAWHT /BLU(COM) PS 1:AUX /75VAWHT/YEI(24V) BY SCH SCH SCH SCH P/N 150435 Q3BMS (Q3BMS) REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATION DATE 03/31/06 06/10/06 08/01/06 12/18/08 SCALE: NONE eve p eve 1 TB6 v -B- e o v . Q � EXP.3us TB o J 000 TB7 DOD 0 RESET 0 0 MODEM PORT DRAWING NOT TO SCALE UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLARENCES ARE: FRACTIONS DECIMALS ANGLES X1/16 f.01 1° L .005 INSTALLATION NOTE( #2): ** INSTALLATION CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR USING CABLE /WIRE THAT EITHER MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE WIRE SPECIFIED IN THIS DRAWING. ANY DEVIATIONS FROM THE WIRE SPECIFIED COULD AFFECT THE PROPER OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM. J5 F2 RV11 11.0 THHN, RED, 16 AWG, STRND 0 00000 4 0 000000 0 REVIEW EXIT 4 Q3BMS JANUARY 1, 2009 YES COMFORT OCCUPIED NO LEADILAG SWITCH PROGRAM ENTER NOTE: UPON COMPLETION OF THE INSTALLATION, VERIFY THE STORE ROUTER HAS BEEN INSTALLED AND HAS NETWORK CONNECTIVITY. CONNECTIVITY TO THE ROUTER IS ESSENTIAL FOR VERIFYING THE OPERATION OF THE RTU CONTROLLERS. CONTACT QUEST CONTROLS MONITORING CENTER TO COORDINATE TESTING AND VERIFICATION OF THE SYSTEM AT LEAST 24 HOURS PRIOR TO PUNCH -DOWN. THE MONITORING CENTER CAN BE REACHED AT (941) 723 -4130 OR (866) 799 -0812. APPROVALS SCH DRAWN BY CHECKED BY DRFTG. SUPVR. 0 JO ® B1 0 0000000000000000 NETWORK MODULE la.aeeaya © 00000000o) O 11 \ \ RS232 PORT INTIALS ETHERNET PORT 6 '\ 1 12V IN12 N13 G 12V N14 N15 12V N16 G 12V DO � v Diu 0) 0 c1O Q v C2° v O e Q v DATE 03/31 RED- Q3BMS:TBI:NEG RED- Q3BMS:TB1:POS 0 10' CAT 5E PATCH CABLE, BLU (SUPPLIED BY QUEST) -J L— PS1:AUX /40VAWHT /BLU(COM) PSIAUX /40VA:WHT/YEI(24V) INSTALLATION NOTES( #5): PROVIDE GROUND WIRE FROM BONDED ELECTRICAL PANEL FEEDING THE Q3 /LCC POWER SUPPLY (PS1) TAPE SHIELD (TYP.) EDE CISCO ROUTER @ (TBD) PORT# PROVIDED BY OTHER 120 VAC SUPPLIED TO PANEL BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PNL# BRKR# RESET OFF RED /1- Q3BMS:TB4:IN1 BLK/ 1- Q3BMS:TB4:12V BLK /2- Q3BMS:TB4:GND WHT /2- Q3BMS:TB4:IN2 INSTALLATION NOTE( #6): TERMINATE SENSOR CABLE SHIELD(S) TO CHASSIS GROUND AT Q3BMS ONLY. TAPE OFF CABLE SHIELD AT SENSOR. BELDEN 5441FE 2 PAIR, 20AWG, STRND, SHLD (BELDEN 6441FE - FOR PLENUM) Quest Controls, Inc. Smart Control Solutions for Buildings www.q uestcontrols.com /commercial TRANSFORMER: 24Vac, 40ve, CLASS 2 TRANSFORMER PRIMARY: COM 120 BLK WHT Insulate unused wires separately. INPUT POWER: 120Vac any: Line black wire, Neutral white wire, Ground green wire. SECONDARY: O 24Vac40VA White/yellow (24Vac), W hite/blue (COM) 3 1/2' NPT Knockout BELDEN 5441FE 2 PAIR, 20AWG, STRND, SHLD (BELDEN 6441FE - FOR PLENUM) RESET OFF 8.3" A n . LTLVL:BLK LTLVL:WHT )- ® ` — ( 1 ( TEMP:W-IT ) TAPE SHIELD (TYP.) RED /1- Q3BMS:TB4:IN4 BLK /1- Q3BMS:TB4:12V WHT /2- Q3BMS:TB4:IN5 BLK /2- Q3BMS:TB4:12V SERVER ROOM 2 SPARE, TAPE SHIELD (TYP.) (f BLK /1- Q3BMS:TB4:GND MAIN POWER 0wil hlBreekor 10A LoM wla (elw) bad M E ¢.wad 9A LTLVL:GRN RED / 1- Q3BMS:TB4:IN 10 THHN, BLK /GRN /WHT, 14 AWG, STRND TEMP:WHT )— TRANSFORMER: 24Vac, 75va, CLASS 2 TRANSFORMER PRIMARY: COM 120 208 240 277 480 BLK WHT RED ORG BRN GRY Insulate unused wires separately. INPUT POWER: 120Vac only: Line black wire, Neutral white wire, Ground Breen wire. SECONDARY: 24Vac 75VA: White/yellow (24Vac), White /blue (COM) I I- - 2.23" — INT:BLK )— EXT•BLK )-- INT:BLK EXT:BLK TB1:TMP•+ )— TBI.TMP: ) — D09�o89 O 7.90" RESET OFF OVERRIDE PANEL 0 INTERIOR LIGHTS 0 EXTERIOR LIGHTS 2.81 ZTS3 2.35" I P/N 300747 24/120VAC DUAL POWER SUPPLY (PS1 REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATION 3.82" J TITLE T- MOBILE TYPICAL Q3BMS APPLICATION DWG INPUT /OUTPUT SCHEMATIC CODE VI tbEC R COMPLIANCE APPROVED JUN 0 4 2009 City of Tukw Ia BUILDING DIVISIoN P/N 150745 OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE/ LIGHT LEVEL SENSOR (OTL1 ) REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATION 4.50" 4.59" 4.58" —I 0.96" — P/N 150677 TWO BUTTON OVERRIDE PANEL (OVR1) REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATIOF P/N 150748 — ZONE TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ZT3) I REFER TO SITE DRAWINGS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY' 2)9 2009 PERMIT CENTER PROJ. NO. QUEST -T- MOBILE DWG. NO. BMS -1.1 REVISION REV 4.5 SHEET 1 OF 3 IF 2 2 5 4 4 5 5 a 1 10 12 12 ■■I■rr COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. 0 L.. cp F- LL a �oo (/) m w Lu V) o w J o J N w ,- E 0 U CI; 0 0 E L m 5 2 o = _ N s In u °� ea mo ii 4 ii: a ,„ � N . `n u r ni L. re, m ryI GI N <n z 0 W Lf) cn - 0 Ev aJ ca 0 0 U t 0 z Lfl �o J F�- Z 0 V vri a H W m N N N 00 CO rn 0 ct 1: Ln N Ln co co 0 C 0 0 "Zr Q co rn (1) 6 o vi L U F- .7 n o v vo r�v n L vg V g a 11- Lu P/N QTY DESCRIPTION 150435 1 Q3BMS CONTROLLER (Q3BMS) 150211 -3 1 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL (LCC) 300747 1 24/120 VAC DUAL POWER SUPPLY (PS1) 150745 1 OUTDOOR TEMP /LIGHT LVL (OLT1) 150677 1 OVERRIDE PNL 2- BUTTON (OVR1) 350059 1 CAT5E 10' PATCH CBL, BLUE INSTALLATION NOTE( #1): REFER TO SITE DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFIC LIGHTING LOAD CONNECTIONS, ELSE REFER TO SECTION 3.5 OF THE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS LOCATED ON DRAWING E -9. 120" 0 SERVER ROOM EXHAUST FAN PNL# BRKR# EXTERIOR LIGHTS PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# INTERIOR GENERAL LIGHTS #2 PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# INTERIOR GENERAL LIGHTS #1 PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# SEE DRAWING BMS 1.2 TO LIGHTING LOAD ) P/N 150211-3 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL (LCC) REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATION DRAWING NOTES: RED/ 1- RTU:TB4:A BLK /1- RTU:T84:6 ( EXHAUST FAN -K4:2 )- ( BRKR PNL -K4:4 ) D EXTERIOR LIGHTS (C3) EMPLOYEE LIGHTS (C2) CUSTOMER LIGHTS (C1) PREWIRED ® FACTORY: NEUTRAL - 1 4AWG/WHITE 120 VAC - 14AWG /BLACK GROUND - 14AWG /GREEN 24VAC - 20AWG /RED 24VAC RETURN - 20AWG /BLACK 24V - 20AWG /RED 1 SPARE TERMINAL BLOCK TYPICAL CONNECTIONS TO LOCAL SWITCHES LOCAL SWITCHES -SEE LIGHTING• DRAWINGS RED/1 -Q3BMS:TB2:A BLK /1 WHT /2- Q3BMS:T62:C THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND /OR TRADE SECRET INFORMATION WHICH IS THE PROPERTY OF QUEST CONTROLS INC. (QUEST). IT EMBODIES A PROPRIETARY DESIGN WHICH SHALL NOT BE DISCLOSED, SOLD, LOANED, DUPLICATED OR USED FOR PROCUREMENT, MANUFACTURING OF ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT FOR WHICH THIS DOCUMENT WAS SUPPLIED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION BY QUEST. THIS DOCUMENT SHALL BE RETURNED TO QUEST UPON COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT FOR WHICH IT WAS PROVIDED AND /OR AT THE REQUEST OF QUEST. FIELD WIRING LEGEND RED /1- RTU:TB3: +SPLY POSISITION CABLE PAIR LEGEND: RED /1 BLK /1 = PAIR 1 WHT /2 BLK /2 = PAIR 2 12.0" TOP Q3BMS:TB2:B BOTTOM xxx xxx XXX REFERENCE DRAWINGS XXX WIRE COLOR /PAIR DEVICE i LIGHT FIXTURES CABLE LEGEND: RED /1 BLK /1 = PAIR 1 WHT /2 BLK /2 = PAIR 2 G 1 10 G S TB2 0 I K4 K3 K2 K1 O O TB1 *NOTE - CABLE /WIRE LIST (PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR) DESCRIPTION STANDARD PLENUM ACCEPTABLE CROSS A. CABLE, 2 PAIR, BELDEN BELDEN STANDARD - BELDEN 5341FE, 5341PT, & 5541PT. 20AWG, STRND, SHLD 5441 FE 6441FE STANDARD - ALPHA 561002002, 561061802, 2242C, & PLENUM - ALPHA 57632 B. TSTAT, 8 COND, COLEMAN COLEMAN ANY COMPARABLE 8 CONDUCTOR T -STAT CABLE. 18 AWG, SLD 55308 55508 C. WIRE, 16 AWG THHN N/A D. WIRE, 14 AWG THHN N/A FIELD WIRING TERMINALS TORQUE ALL FIELD WIRING TERMINALS TO 7 IN -LBS — 24 VAC — 24 VAC (RTN) —24V — K4 - - K3 — K2 — K1 120 VAC SUPPLIED TO PANEL BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PNL# BRKR# 120 VAC - -. NEUTRAL GROUNI MARK R1 R2 R3 R4 THHN, RED, 16 AWG, STRND 0 THHN, BLK /GRN /WHT, L4'N 14 AWG, STRND ( RED- Q3BMS:TB3:1A ( BLU- Q3BMS:TB3:4B ) ( BLK- Q3BMS :TB3:3B ( GRN- Q3BMS:TB3:2B WHT- Q3BMS:TB3:1 B NOTE: INSTALL JUMPER 1A->2A 2A ->3A 3A->4A COLEMAN 55308 8 COND, 18AWG, SLD, T -STAT 3 SPARE 3 SPARE INSTALLATION NOTE( #4): TERMINATE BUS CABLE SHIELD TO CHASSIS GROUND AT Q3BMS ONLY CARRY AND INSULATE SHIELD DRAIN THROUGH TO EACH RTU. TAPE OFF CABLE SHIELD AT END OF LINE RTU ONLY. INSTALLATION NOTE( #3): 4 * CONTACT T- MOBILE PROJECT MANAGER IF THERE ARE MORE THAN TWO HVAC UNITS TO REQUEST ADDITIONAL RTU CONTROLLERS OR TO REPLACE DAMAGED OR MISSING PARTS. 1 SPARE REVISION HISTORY FOR APPROVAL RELEASED RELEASED 11 0" 01 6427. BELDEN 5441FE 2 PAIR, 20AWG, STRND, SHLD (BELDEN 6441FE - FOR PLENUM) REFERENCE DRAWINGS RELEASED RED- LCC:TB2:24V(RTN) RED- LCC:TB2:24VAC Psi:AUX /75VAWHT /BLU(COM) PS 1:AUX /75VAWHT/YEI(24V) BY SCH SCH SCH SCH P/N 150435 Q3BMS (Q3BMS) REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATION DATE 03/31/06 06/10/06 08/01/06 12/18/08 SCALE: NONE eve p eve 1 TB6 v -B- e o v . Q � EXP.3us TB o J 000 TB7 DOD 0 RESET 0 0 MODEM PORT DRAWING NOT TO SCALE UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLARENCES ARE: FRACTIONS DECIMALS ANGLES X1/16 f.01 1° L .005 INSTALLATION NOTE( #2): ** INSTALLATION CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR USING CABLE /WIRE THAT EITHER MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE WIRE SPECIFIED IN THIS DRAWING. ANY DEVIATIONS FROM THE WIRE SPECIFIED COULD AFFECT THE PROPER OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM. J5 F2 RV11 11.0 THHN, RED, 16 AWG, STRND 0 00000 4 0 000000 0 REVIEW EXIT 4 Q3BMS JANUARY 1, 2009 YES COMFORT OCCUPIED NO LEADILAG SWITCH PROGRAM ENTER NOTE: UPON COMPLETION OF THE INSTALLATION, VERIFY THE STORE ROUTER HAS BEEN INSTALLED AND HAS NETWORK CONNECTIVITY. CONNECTIVITY TO THE ROUTER IS ESSENTIAL FOR VERIFYING THE OPERATION OF THE RTU CONTROLLERS. CONTACT QUEST CONTROLS MONITORING CENTER TO COORDINATE TESTING AND VERIFICATION OF THE SYSTEM AT LEAST 24 HOURS PRIOR TO PUNCH -DOWN. THE MONITORING CENTER CAN BE REACHED AT (941) 723 -4130 OR (866) 799 -0812. APPROVALS SCH DRAWN BY CHECKED BY DRFTG. SUPVR. 0 JO ® B1 0 0000000000000000 NETWORK MODULE la.aeeaya © 00000000o) O 11 \ \ RS232 PORT INTIALS ETHERNET PORT 6 '\ 1 12V IN12 N13 G 12V N14 N15 12V N16 G 12V DO � v Diu 0) 0 c1O Q v C2° v O e Q v DATE 03/31 RED- Q3BMS:TBI:NEG RED- Q3BMS:TB1:POS 0 10' CAT 5E PATCH CABLE, BLU (SUPPLIED BY QUEST) -J L— PS1:AUX /40VAWHT /BLU(COM) PSIAUX /40VA:WHT/YEI(24V) INSTALLATION NOTES( #5): PROVIDE GROUND WIRE FROM BONDED ELECTRICAL PANEL FEEDING THE Q3 /LCC POWER SUPPLY (PS1) TAPE SHIELD (TYP.) EDE CISCO ROUTER @ (TBD) PORT# PROVIDED BY OTHER 120 VAC SUPPLIED TO PANEL BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PNL# BRKR# RESET OFF RED /1- Q3BMS:TB4:IN1 BLK/ 1- Q3BMS:TB4:12V BLK /2- Q3BMS:TB4:GND WHT /2- Q3BMS:TB4:IN2 INSTALLATION NOTE( #6): TERMINATE SENSOR CABLE SHIELD(S) TO CHASSIS GROUND AT Q3BMS ONLY. TAPE OFF CABLE SHIELD AT SENSOR. BELDEN 5441FE 2 PAIR, 20AWG, STRND, SHLD (BELDEN 6441FE - FOR PLENUM) Quest Controls, Inc. Smart Control Solutions for Buildings www.q uestcontrols.com /commercial TRANSFORMER: 24Vac, 40ve, CLASS 2 TRANSFORMER PRIMARY: COM 120 BLK WHT Insulate unused wires separately. INPUT POWER: 120Vac any: Line black wire, Neutral white wire, Ground green wire. SECONDARY: O 24Vac40VA White/yellow (24Vac), W hite/blue (COM) 3 1/2' NPT Knockout BELDEN 5441FE 2 PAIR, 20AWG, STRND, SHLD (BELDEN 6441FE - FOR PLENUM) RESET OFF 8.3" A n . LTLVL:BLK LTLVL:WHT )- ® ` — ( 1 ( TEMP:W-IT ) TAPE SHIELD (TYP.) RED /1- Q3BMS:TB4:IN4 BLK /1- Q3BMS:TB4:12V WHT /2- Q3BMS:TB4:IN5 BLK /2- Q3BMS:TB4:12V SERVER ROOM 2 SPARE, TAPE SHIELD (TYP.) (f BLK /1- Q3BMS:TB4:GND MAIN POWER 0wil hlBreekor 10A LoM wla (elw) bad M E ¢.wad 9A LTLVL:GRN RED / 1- Q3BMS:TB4:IN 10 THHN, BLK /GRN /WHT, 14 AWG, STRND TEMP:WHT )— TRANSFORMER: 24Vac, 75va, CLASS 2 TRANSFORMER PRIMARY: COM 120 208 240 277 480 BLK WHT RED ORG BRN GRY Insulate unused wires separately. INPUT POWER: 120Vac only: Line black wire, Neutral white wire, Ground Breen wire. SECONDARY: 24Vac 75VA: White/yellow (24Vac), White /blue (COM) I I- - 2.23" — INT:BLK )— EXT•BLK )-- INT:BLK EXT:BLK TB1:TMP•+ )— TBI.TMP: ) — D09�o89 O 7.90" RESET OFF OVERRIDE PANEL 0 INTERIOR LIGHTS 0 EXTERIOR LIGHTS 2.81 ZTS3 2.35" I P/N 300747 24/120VAC DUAL POWER SUPPLY (PS1 REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATION 3.82" J TITLE T- MOBILE TYPICAL Q3BMS APPLICATION DWG INPUT /OUTPUT SCHEMATIC CODE VI tbEC R COMPLIANCE APPROVED JUN 0 4 2009 City of Tukw Ia BUILDING DIVISIoN P/N 150745 OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE/ LIGHT LEVEL SENSOR (OTL1 ) REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATION 4.50" 4.59" 4.58" —I 0.96" — P/N 150677 TWO BUTTON OVERRIDE PANEL (OVR1) REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATIOF P/N 150748 — ZONE TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ZT3) I REFER TO SITE DRAWINGS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY' 2)9 2009 PERMIT CENTER PROJ. NO. QUEST -T- MOBILE DWG. NO. BMS -1.1 REVISION REV 4.5 SHEET 1 OF 3 IF 2 2 5 4 4 5 5 a 1 10 12 12 ■■I■rr COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. 0 L.. cp F- LL a �oo (/) m w Lu V) o w J o J N w ,- E 0 U CI; 0 0 E L m 5 2 o = _ N s In u °� ea mo ii 4 ii: a ,„ � N . `n u r ni L. re, m ryI GI N <n z 0 W Lf) cn - 0 Ev aJ ca 0 0 U t 0 z Lfl �o J F�- Z 0 V vri a H W m N N N 00 CO rn 0 ct 1: Ln N Ln co co 0 C 0 0 "Zr Q co rn (1) 6 o vi L U F- j8 V g C. P ON / u/ V g a tl 0 ta Cl 11- Lu P/N QTY DESCRIPTION 150435 1 Q3BMS CONTROLLER (Q3BMS) 150211 -3 1 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL (LCC) 300747 1 24/120 VAC DUAL POWER SUPPLY (PS1) 150745 1 OUTDOOR TEMP /LIGHT LVL (OLT1) 150677 1 OVERRIDE PNL 2- BUTTON (OVR1) 350059 1 CAT5E 10' PATCH CBL, BLUE INSTALLATION NOTE( #1): REFER TO SITE DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFIC LIGHTING LOAD CONNECTIONS, ELSE REFER TO SECTION 3.5 OF THE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS LOCATED ON DRAWING E -9. 120" 0 SERVER ROOM EXHAUST FAN PNL# BRKR# EXTERIOR LIGHTS PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# INTERIOR GENERAL LIGHTS #2 PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# INTERIOR GENERAL LIGHTS #1 PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# SEE DRAWING BMS 1.2 TO LIGHTING LOAD ) P/N 150211-3 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL (LCC) REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATION DRAWING NOTES: RED/ 1- RTU:TB4:A BLK /1- RTU:T84:6 ( EXHAUST FAN -K4:2 )- ( BRKR PNL -K4:4 ) D EXTERIOR LIGHTS (C3) EMPLOYEE LIGHTS (C2) CUSTOMER LIGHTS (C1) PREWIRED ® FACTORY: NEUTRAL - 1 4AWG/WHITE 120 VAC - 14AWG /BLACK GROUND - 14AWG /GREEN 24VAC - 20AWG /RED 24VAC RETURN - 20AWG /BLACK 24V - 20AWG /RED 1 SPARE TERMINAL BLOCK TYPICAL CONNECTIONS TO LOCAL SWITCHES LOCAL SWITCHES -SEE LIGHTING• DRAWINGS RED/1 -Q3BMS:TB2:A BLK /1 WHT /2- Q3BMS:T62:C THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND /OR TRADE SECRET INFORMATION WHICH IS THE PROPERTY OF QUEST CONTROLS INC. (QUEST). IT EMBODIES A PROPRIETARY DESIGN WHICH SHALL NOT BE DISCLOSED, SOLD, LOANED, DUPLICATED OR USED FOR PROCUREMENT, MANUFACTURING OF ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT FOR WHICH THIS DOCUMENT WAS SUPPLIED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION BY QUEST. THIS DOCUMENT SHALL BE RETURNED TO QUEST UPON COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT FOR WHICH IT WAS PROVIDED AND /OR AT THE REQUEST OF QUEST. FIELD WIRING LEGEND RED /1- RTU:TB3: +SPLY POSISITION CABLE PAIR LEGEND: RED /1 BLK /1 = PAIR 1 WHT /2 BLK /2 = PAIR 2 12.0" TOP Q3BMS:TB2:B BOTTOM xxx xxx XXX REFERENCE DRAWINGS XXX WIRE COLOR /PAIR DEVICE i LIGHT FIXTURES CABLE LEGEND: RED /1 BLK /1 = PAIR 1 WHT /2 BLK /2 = PAIR 2 G 1 10 G S TB2 0 I K4 K3 K2 K1 O O TB1 *NOTE - CABLE /WIRE LIST (PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR) DESCRIPTION STANDARD PLENUM ACCEPTABLE CROSS A. CABLE, 2 PAIR, BELDEN BELDEN STANDARD - BELDEN 5341FE, 5341PT, & 5541PT. 20AWG, STRND, SHLD 5441 FE 6441FE STANDARD - ALPHA 561002002, 561061802, 2242C, & PLENUM - ALPHA 57632 B. TSTAT, 8 COND, COLEMAN COLEMAN ANY COMPARABLE 8 CONDUCTOR T -STAT CABLE. 18 AWG, SLD 55308 55508 C. WIRE, 16 AWG THHN N/A D. WIRE, 14 AWG THHN N/A FIELD WIRING TERMINALS TORQUE ALL FIELD WIRING TERMINALS TO 7 IN -LBS — 24 VAC — 24 VAC (RTN) —24V — K4 - - K3 — K2 — K1 120 VAC SUPPLIED TO PANEL BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PNL# BRKR# 120 VAC - -. NEUTRAL GROUNI MARK R1 R2 R3 R4 THHN, RED, 16 AWG, STRND 0 THHN, BLK /GRN /WHT, L4'N 14 AWG, STRND ( RED- Q3BMS:TB3:1A ( BLU- Q3BMS:TB3:4B ) ( BLK- Q3BMS :TB3:3B ( GRN- Q3BMS:TB3:2B WHT- Q3BMS:TB3:1 B NOTE: INSTALL JUMPER 1A->2A 2A ->3A 3A->4A COLEMAN 55308 8 COND, 18AWG, SLD, T -STAT 3 SPARE 3 SPARE INSTALLATION NOTE( #4): TERMINATE BUS CABLE SHIELD TO CHASSIS GROUND AT Q3BMS ONLY CARRY AND INSULATE SHIELD DRAIN THROUGH TO EACH RTU. TAPE OFF CABLE SHIELD AT END OF LINE RTU ONLY. INSTALLATION NOTE( #3): 4 * CONTACT T- MOBILE PROJECT MANAGER IF THERE ARE MORE THAN TWO HVAC UNITS TO REQUEST ADDITIONAL RTU CONTROLLERS OR TO REPLACE DAMAGED OR MISSING PARTS. 1 SPARE REVISION HISTORY FOR APPROVAL RELEASED RELEASED 11 0" 01 6427. BELDEN 5441FE 2 PAIR, 20AWG, STRND, SHLD (BELDEN 6441FE - FOR PLENUM) REFERENCE DRAWINGS RELEASED RED- LCC:TB2:24V(RTN) RED- LCC:TB2:24VAC Psi:AUX /75VAWHT /BLU(COM) PS 1:AUX /75VAWHT/YEI(24V) BY SCH SCH SCH SCH P/N 150435 Q3BMS (Q3BMS) REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATION DATE 03/31/06 06/10/06 08/01/06 12/18/08 SCALE: NONE eve p eve 1 TB6 v -B- e o v . Q � EXP.3us TB o J 000 TB7 DOD 0 RESET 0 0 MODEM PORT DRAWING NOT TO SCALE UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLARENCES ARE: FRACTIONS DECIMALS ANGLES X1/16 f.01 1° L .005 INSTALLATION NOTE( #2): ** INSTALLATION CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR USING CABLE /WIRE THAT EITHER MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE WIRE SPECIFIED IN THIS DRAWING. ANY DEVIATIONS FROM THE WIRE SPECIFIED COULD AFFECT THE PROPER OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM. J5 F2 RV11 11.0 THHN, RED, 16 AWG, STRND 0 00000 4 0 000000 0 REVIEW EXIT 4 Q3BMS JANUARY 1, 2009 YES COMFORT OCCUPIED NO LEADILAG SWITCH PROGRAM ENTER NOTE: UPON COMPLETION OF THE INSTALLATION, VERIFY THE STORE ROUTER HAS BEEN INSTALLED AND HAS NETWORK CONNECTIVITY. CONNECTIVITY TO THE ROUTER IS ESSENTIAL FOR VERIFYING THE OPERATION OF THE RTU CONTROLLERS. CONTACT QUEST CONTROLS MONITORING CENTER TO COORDINATE TESTING AND VERIFICATION OF THE SYSTEM AT LEAST 24 HOURS PRIOR TO PUNCH -DOWN. THE MONITORING CENTER CAN BE REACHED AT (941) 723 -4130 OR (866) 799 -0812. APPROVALS SCH DRAWN BY CHECKED BY DRFTG. SUPVR. 0 JO ® B1 0 0000000000000000 NETWORK MODULE la.aeeaya © 00000000o) O 11 \ \ RS232 PORT INTIALS ETHERNET PORT 6 '\ 1 12V IN12 N13 G 12V N14 N15 12V N16 G 12V DO � v Diu 0) 0 c1O Q v C2° v O e Q v DATE 03/31 RED- Q3BMS:TBI:NEG RED- Q3BMS:TB1:POS 0 10' CAT 5E PATCH CABLE, BLU (SUPPLIED BY QUEST) -J L— PS1:AUX /40VAWHT /BLU(COM) PSIAUX /40VA:WHT/YEI(24V) INSTALLATION NOTES( #5): PROVIDE GROUND WIRE FROM BONDED ELECTRICAL PANEL FEEDING THE Q3 /LCC POWER SUPPLY (PS1) TAPE SHIELD (TYP.) EDE CISCO ROUTER @ (TBD) PORT# PROVIDED BY OTHER 120 VAC SUPPLIED TO PANEL BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PNL# BRKR# RESET OFF RED /1- Q3BMS:TB4:IN1 BLK/ 1- Q3BMS:TB4:12V BLK /2- Q3BMS:TB4:GND WHT /2- Q3BMS:TB4:IN2 INSTALLATION NOTE( #6): TERMINATE SENSOR CABLE SHIELD(S) TO CHASSIS GROUND AT Q3BMS ONLY. TAPE OFF CABLE SHIELD AT SENSOR. BELDEN 5441FE 2 PAIR, 20AWG, STRND, SHLD (BELDEN 6441FE - FOR PLENUM) Quest Controls, Inc. Smart Control Solutions for Buildings www.q uestcontrols.com /commercial TRANSFORMER: 24Vac, 40ve, CLASS 2 TRANSFORMER PRIMARY: COM 120 BLK WHT Insulate unused wires separately. INPUT POWER: 120Vac any: Line black wire, Neutral white wire, Ground green wire. SECONDARY: O 24Vac40VA White/yellow (24Vac), W hite/blue (COM) 3 1/2' NPT Knockout BELDEN 5441FE 2 PAIR, 20AWG, STRND, SHLD (BELDEN 6441FE - FOR PLENUM) RESET OFF 8.3" A n . LTLVL:BLK LTLVL:WHT )- ® ` — ( 1 ( TEMP:W-IT ) TAPE SHIELD (TYP.) RED /1- Q3BMS:TB4:IN4 BLK /1- Q3BMS:TB4:12V WHT /2- Q3BMS:TB4:IN5 BLK /2- Q3BMS:TB4:12V SERVER ROOM 2 SPARE, TAPE SHIELD (TYP.) (f BLK /1- Q3BMS:TB4:GND MAIN POWER 0wil hlBreekor 10A LoM wla (elw) bad M E ¢.wad 9A LTLVL:GRN RED / 1- Q3BMS:TB4:IN 10 THHN, BLK /GRN /WHT, 14 AWG, STRND TEMP:WHT )— TRANSFORMER: 24Vac, 75va, CLASS 2 TRANSFORMER PRIMARY: COM 120 208 240 277 480 BLK WHT RED ORG BRN GRY Insulate unused wires separately. INPUT POWER: 120Vac only: Line black wire, Neutral white wire, Ground Breen wire. SECONDARY: 24Vac 75VA: White/yellow (24Vac), White /blue (COM) I I- - 2.23" — INT:BLK )— EXT•BLK )-- INT:BLK EXT:BLK TB1:TMP•+ )— TBI.TMP: ) — D09�o89 O 7.90" RESET OFF OVERRIDE PANEL 0 INTERIOR LIGHTS 0 EXTERIOR LIGHTS 2.81 ZTS3 2.35" I P/N 300747 24/120VAC DUAL POWER SUPPLY (PS1 REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATION 3.82" J TITLE T- MOBILE TYPICAL Q3BMS APPLICATION DWG INPUT /OUTPUT SCHEMATIC CODE VI tbEC R COMPLIANCE APPROVED JUN 0 4 2009 City of Tukw Ia BUILDING DIVISIoN P/N 150745 OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE/ LIGHT LEVEL SENSOR (OTL1 ) REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATION 4.50" 4.59" 4.58" —I 0.96" — P/N 150677 TWO BUTTON OVERRIDE PANEL (OVR1) REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATIOF P/N 150748 — ZONE TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ZT3) I REFER TO SITE DRAWINGS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY' 2)9 2009 PERMIT CENTER PROJ. NO. QUEST -T- MOBILE DWG. NO. BMS -1.1 REVISION REV 4.5 SHEET 1 OF 3 IF 2 2 5 4 4 5 5 a 1 10 12 12 ■■I■rr COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. 0 L.. cp F- LL a �oo (/) m w Lu V) o w J o J N w ,- E 0 U CI; 0 0 E L m 5 2 o = _ N s In u °� ea mo ii 4 ii: a ,„ � N . `n u r ni L. re, m ryI GI N <n z 0 W Lf) cn - 0 Ev aJ ca 0 0 U t 0 z Lfl �o J F�- Z 0 V vri a H W m N N N 00 CO rn 0 ct 1: Ln N Ln co co 0 C 0 0 "Zr Q co rn (1) 6 o vi L U F- j8 "P ot 61 P / u/ 11- Lu P/N QTY DESCRIPTION 150435 1 Q3BMS CONTROLLER (Q3BMS) 150211 -3 1 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL (LCC) 300747 1 24/120 VAC DUAL POWER SUPPLY (PS1) 150745 1 OUTDOOR TEMP /LIGHT LVL (OLT1) 150677 1 OVERRIDE PNL 2- BUTTON (OVR1) 350059 1 CAT5E 10' PATCH CBL, BLUE INSTALLATION NOTE( #1): REFER TO SITE DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFIC LIGHTING LOAD CONNECTIONS, ELSE REFER TO SECTION 3.5 OF THE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS LOCATED ON DRAWING E -9. 120" 0 SERVER ROOM EXHAUST FAN PNL# BRKR# EXTERIOR LIGHTS PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# INTERIOR GENERAL LIGHTS #2 PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# INTERIOR GENERAL LIGHTS #1 PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# PNL# BRKR# SEE DRAWING BMS 1.2 TO LIGHTING LOAD ) P/N 150211-3 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL (LCC) REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATION DRAWING NOTES: RED/ 1- RTU:TB4:A BLK /1- RTU:T84:6 ( EXHAUST FAN -K4:2 )- ( BRKR PNL -K4:4 ) D EXTERIOR LIGHTS (C3) EMPLOYEE LIGHTS (C2) CUSTOMER LIGHTS (C1) PREWIRED ® FACTORY: NEUTRAL - 1 4AWG/WHITE 120 VAC - 14AWG /BLACK GROUND - 14AWG /GREEN 24VAC - 20AWG /RED 24VAC RETURN - 20AWG /BLACK 24V - 20AWG /RED 1 SPARE TERMINAL BLOCK TYPICAL CONNECTIONS TO LOCAL SWITCHES LOCAL SWITCHES -SEE LIGHTING• DRAWINGS RED/1 -Q3BMS:TB2:A BLK /1 WHT /2- Q3BMS:T62:C THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND /OR TRADE SECRET INFORMATION WHICH IS THE PROPERTY OF QUEST CONTROLS INC. (QUEST). IT EMBODIES A PROPRIETARY DESIGN WHICH SHALL NOT BE DISCLOSED, SOLD, LOANED, DUPLICATED OR USED FOR PROCUREMENT, MANUFACTURING OF ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT FOR WHICH THIS DOCUMENT WAS SUPPLIED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION BY QUEST. THIS DOCUMENT SHALL BE RETURNED TO QUEST UPON COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT FOR WHICH IT WAS PROVIDED AND /OR AT THE REQUEST OF QUEST. FIELD WIRING LEGEND RED /1- RTU:TB3: +SPLY POSISITION CABLE PAIR LEGEND: RED /1 BLK /1 = PAIR 1 WHT /2 BLK /2 = PAIR 2 12.0" TOP Q3BMS:TB2:B BOTTOM xxx xxx XXX REFERENCE DRAWINGS XXX WIRE COLOR /PAIR DEVICE i LIGHT FIXTURES CABLE LEGEND: RED /1 BLK /1 = PAIR 1 WHT /2 BLK /2 = PAIR 2 G 1 10 G S TB2 0 I K4 K3 K2 K1 O O TB1 *NOTE - CABLE /WIRE LIST (PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR) DESCRIPTION STANDARD PLENUM ACCEPTABLE CROSS A. CABLE, 2 PAIR, BELDEN BELDEN STANDARD - BELDEN 5341FE, 5341PT, & 5541PT. 20AWG, STRND, SHLD 5441 FE 6441FE STANDARD - ALPHA 561002002, 561061802, 2242C, & PLENUM - ALPHA 57632 B. TSTAT, 8 COND, COLEMAN COLEMAN ANY COMPARABLE 8 CONDUCTOR T -STAT CABLE. 18 AWG, SLD 55308 55508 C. WIRE, 16 AWG THHN N/A D. WIRE, 14 AWG THHN N/A FIELD WIRING TERMINALS TORQUE ALL FIELD WIRING TERMINALS TO 7 IN -LBS — 24 VAC — 24 VAC (RTN) —24V — K4 - - K3 — K2 — K1 120 VAC SUPPLIED TO PANEL BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PNL# BRKR# 120 VAC - -. NEUTRAL GROUNI MARK R1 R2 R3 R4 THHN, RED, 16 AWG, STRND 0 THHN, BLK /GRN /WHT, L4'N 14 AWG, STRND ( RED- Q3BMS:TB3:1A ( BLU- Q3BMS:TB3:4B ) ( BLK- Q3BMS :TB3:3B ( GRN- Q3BMS:TB3:2B WHT- Q3BMS:TB3:1 B NOTE: INSTALL JUMPER 1A->2A 2A ->3A 3A->4A COLEMAN 55308 8 COND, 18AWG, SLD, T -STAT 3 SPARE 3 SPARE INSTALLATION NOTE( #4): TERMINATE BUS CABLE SHIELD TO CHASSIS GROUND AT Q3BMS ONLY CARRY AND INSULATE SHIELD DRAIN THROUGH TO EACH RTU. TAPE OFF CABLE SHIELD AT END OF LINE RTU ONLY. INSTALLATION NOTE( #3): 4 * CONTACT T- MOBILE PROJECT MANAGER IF THERE ARE MORE THAN TWO HVAC UNITS TO REQUEST ADDITIONAL RTU CONTROLLERS OR TO REPLACE DAMAGED OR MISSING PARTS. 1 SPARE REVISION HISTORY FOR APPROVAL RELEASED RELEASED 11 0" 01 6427. BELDEN 5441FE 2 PAIR, 20AWG, STRND, SHLD (BELDEN 6441FE - FOR PLENUM) REFERENCE DRAWINGS RELEASED RED- LCC:TB2:24V(RTN) RED- LCC:TB2:24VAC Psi:AUX /75VAWHT /BLU(COM) PS 1:AUX /75VAWHT/YEI(24V) BY SCH SCH SCH SCH P/N 150435 Q3BMS (Q3BMS) REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATION DATE 03/31/06 06/10/06 08/01/06 12/18/08 SCALE: NONE eve p eve 1 TB6 v -B- e o v . Q � EXP.3us TB o J 000 TB7 DOD 0 RESET 0 0 MODEM PORT DRAWING NOT TO SCALE UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLARENCES ARE: FRACTIONS DECIMALS ANGLES X1/16 f.01 1° L .005 INSTALLATION NOTE( #2): ** INSTALLATION CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR USING CABLE /WIRE THAT EITHER MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE WIRE SPECIFIED IN THIS DRAWING. ANY DEVIATIONS FROM THE WIRE SPECIFIED COULD AFFECT THE PROPER OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM. J5 F2 RV11 11.0 THHN, RED, 16 AWG, STRND 0 00000 4 0 000000 0 REVIEW EXIT 4 Q3BMS JANUARY 1, 2009 YES COMFORT OCCUPIED NO LEADILAG SWITCH PROGRAM ENTER NOTE: UPON COMPLETION OF THE INSTALLATION, VERIFY THE STORE ROUTER HAS BEEN INSTALLED AND HAS NETWORK CONNECTIVITY. CONNECTIVITY TO THE ROUTER IS ESSENTIAL FOR VERIFYING THE OPERATION OF THE RTU CONTROLLERS. CONTACT QUEST CONTROLS MONITORING CENTER TO COORDINATE TESTING AND VERIFICATION OF THE SYSTEM AT LEAST 24 HOURS PRIOR TO PUNCH -DOWN. THE MONITORING CENTER CAN BE REACHED AT (941) 723 -4130 OR (866) 799 -0812. APPROVALS SCH DRAWN BY CHECKED BY DRFTG. SUPVR. 0 JO ® B1 0 0000000000000000 NETWORK MODULE la.aeeaya © 00000000o) O 11 \ \ RS232 PORT INTIALS ETHERNET PORT 6 '\ 1 12V IN12 N13 G 12V N14 N15 12V N16 G 12V DO � v Diu 0) 0 c1O Q v C2° v O e Q v DATE 03/31 RED- Q3BMS:TBI:NEG RED- Q3BMS:TB1:POS 0 10' CAT 5E PATCH CABLE, BLU (SUPPLIED BY QUEST) -J L— PS1:AUX /40VAWHT /BLU(COM) PSIAUX /40VA:WHT/YEI(24V) INSTALLATION NOTES( #5): PROVIDE GROUND WIRE FROM BONDED ELECTRICAL PANEL FEEDING THE Q3 /LCC POWER SUPPLY (PS1) TAPE SHIELD (TYP.) EDE CISCO ROUTER @ (TBD) PORT# PROVIDED BY OTHER 120 VAC SUPPLIED TO PANEL BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PNL# BRKR# RESET OFF RED /1- Q3BMS:TB4:IN1 BLK/ 1- Q3BMS:TB4:12V BLK /2- Q3BMS:TB4:GND WHT /2- Q3BMS:TB4:IN2 INSTALLATION NOTE( #6): TERMINATE SENSOR CABLE SHIELD(S) TO CHASSIS GROUND AT Q3BMS ONLY. TAPE OFF CABLE SHIELD AT SENSOR. BELDEN 5441FE 2 PAIR, 20AWG, STRND, SHLD (BELDEN 6441FE - FOR PLENUM) Quest Controls, Inc. Smart Control Solutions for Buildings www.q uestcontrols.com /commercial TRANSFORMER: 24Vac, 40ve, CLASS 2 TRANSFORMER PRIMARY: COM 120 BLK WHT Insulate unused wires separately. INPUT POWER: 120Vac any: Line black wire, Neutral white wire, Ground green wire. SECONDARY: O 24Vac40VA White/yellow (24Vac), W hite/blue (COM) 3 1/2' NPT Knockout BELDEN 5441FE 2 PAIR, 20AWG, STRND, SHLD (BELDEN 6441FE - FOR PLENUM) RESET OFF 8.3" A n . LTLVL:BLK LTLVL:WHT )- ® ` — ( 1 ( TEMP:W-IT ) TAPE SHIELD (TYP.) RED /1- Q3BMS:TB4:IN4 BLK /1- Q3BMS:TB4:12V WHT /2- Q3BMS:TB4:IN5 BLK /2- Q3BMS:TB4:12V SERVER ROOM 2 SPARE, TAPE SHIELD (TYP.) (f BLK /1- Q3BMS:TB4:GND MAIN POWER 0wil hlBreekor 10A LoM wla (elw) bad M E ¢.wad 9A LTLVL:GRN RED / 1- Q3BMS:TB4:IN 10 THHN, BLK /GRN /WHT, 14 AWG, STRND TEMP:WHT )— TRANSFORMER: 24Vac, 75va, CLASS 2 TRANSFORMER PRIMARY: COM 120 208 240 277 480 BLK WHT RED ORG BRN GRY Insulate unused wires separately. INPUT POWER: 120Vac only: Line black wire, Neutral white wire, Ground Breen wire. SECONDARY: 24Vac 75VA: White/yellow (24Vac), White /blue (COM) I I- - 2.23" — INT:BLK )— EXT•BLK )-- INT:BLK EXT:BLK TB1:TMP•+ )— TBI.TMP: ) — D09�o89 O 7.90" RESET OFF OVERRIDE PANEL 0 INTERIOR LIGHTS 0 EXTERIOR LIGHTS 2.81 ZTS3 2.35" I P/N 300747 24/120VAC DUAL POWER SUPPLY (PS1 REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATION 3.82" J TITLE T- MOBILE TYPICAL Q3BMS APPLICATION DWG INPUT /OUTPUT SCHEMATIC CODE VI tbEC R COMPLIANCE APPROVED JUN 0 4 2009 City of Tukw Ia BUILDING DIVISIoN P/N 150745 OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE/ LIGHT LEVEL SENSOR (OTL1 ) REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATION 4.50" 4.59" 4.58" —I 0.96" — P/N 150677 TWO BUTTON OVERRIDE PANEL (OVR1) REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATIOF P/N 150748 — ZONE TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ZT3) I REFER TO SITE DRAWINGS FOR PROPER MOUNTING LOCATION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY' 2)9 2009 PERMIT CENTER PROJ. NO. QUEST -T- MOBILE DWG. NO. BMS -1.1 REVISION REV 4.5 SHEET 1 OF 3 IF 2 2 5 4 4 5 5 a 1 10 12 12 ■■I■rr COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. 0 L.. cp F- LL a �oo (/) m w Lu V) o w J o J N w ,- E 0 U CI; 0 0 E L m 5 2 o = _ N s In u °� ea mo ii 4 ii: a ,„ � N . `n u r ni L. re, m ryI GI N <n z 0 W Lf) cn - 0 Ev aJ ca 0 0 U t 0 z Lfl �o J F�- Z 0 V vri a H W m N N N 00 CO rn 0 ct 1: Ln N Ln co co 0 C 0 0 "Zr Q co rn (1) 6 o vi L U F- U Q IL 111 2 5 4 5 0 0 To Circuit Breaker Panel (120V single phase) 1. Mounting the Q3BMS: © (� In1 Power Supply 24VAC 2 -Stage (Quest P/N 300747) 1.1 Location 1.1.1 03 mounting location, to ensure uniformity throughout the T- Mobile sites the Q3 will be mounted eye level on the Telco equipment board provided as identified in site drawings. Usually this is in maintenance or other non - public location near the circuit breaker panel. Ensure the area is well lit and free from excessive vibration and moisture. Sufficient area around the system must allow for routing of conduit and cable. GROUNDING STUDS DRAWING NOTES: Inl rrr ?Br`r7 • • 1 ) TOP MOUNTING HOLES MODEM 03BMS 1.3.1 03/05/07 (41 SMOKED MOE ( �1 0 DHSS WEB BOTTOM MOUNTING HOLES N O 1.2 Securing to the wall 1.2.1 Using appropriate hardware ( #8 x 3 /4 pan head wood screw or equivalent) fix the top mounting hardware to wall approximately 70" above the floor 9.5" apart and level. Remove cover from the Q3 and slip the Q3 onto the top mounting hardware and slide down until it stops. Install the bottom mounting hardware. 1.2.2 Using terminal lug, run 16 awg (or larger) ground wire from Q3 ground stud to building ground and connect using appropriate hardware. Select most convenient ground stub, all grounding studs and ground bus are common. THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND /OR TRADE SECRET INFORMATION WHICH IS THE PROPERTY OF QUEST CONTROLS INC. (QUEST). IT EMBODIES A PROPRIETARY DESIGN WHICH SHALL NOT BE DISCLOSED, SOLD, LOANED, DUPLICATED OR USED FOR PROCUREMENT, MANUFACTURING OF ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT FOR WHICH THIS DOCUMENT WAS SUPPLIED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION BY QUEST. THIS DOCUMENT SHALL BE RETURNED TO QUEST UPON COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT FOR WHICH IT WAS PROVIDED AND /OR AT THE REQUEST OF QUEST. XXX XXX XXX REFERENCE DRAWINGS XXx Q3BMS (Quest P/N 150435) 03MMS CAC 03/05/07 PROOPAII DMA LEGEND # ## = WIRE MARKER WHT /YEL - 24VAC WHT /BLU - COM 3. LCC installation: 40VA Output to Q3BMS MARK R1 R2 Remove these two screws and carefully tilt the power supply down and pull it away from the back panel mounting plate 120VAC Input White - Neutral Black - 120VAC Green - Ground REVISION HISTORY FOR APPROVAL RELEASED BY SCH SCH 0 0 0 NEVI Br 0 0 0 O � 0 Mount back panel securely to wall using these holes O 0 d 1/8" 2. Power Supply Installation 2.1 Mounting Location 2.1.1 Locate the power supply on the left side of the Q3 as per installation drawings. 2.1.2 Attention must be paid to the location of the power supply when to protection of switches. Ensure inadvertent traffic near or by the supply will not accidentally switch the power supply off. 2.2 Mounting the power supply 2.2.1 Remove two screws identified in diagram, tilt power supply down and slide off plate 2.2.2 Ensure 1/8" gap is maintained between wall and plate to allow for power supply tangs to slip into tee slots. 2.2.3 Make power connections using appropriate wire nuts or insulated crimps. Power supply circuit breaker is designated in site drawings. 75VA Output to LCC WHT /YEL - 24VAC WHT /BLU - COM it comes power 2.2.4 Slip tangs into tee slots and tilt power supply up into place. Return retaining screws and tighten. 2.3. Wiring for 120vac, use 20a single phase breaker as identified in site drawings. Connect to the power supply using appropriate wire. 2.4 Low voltage wiring to power Q3, connect low voltage 24vac power from power supply 40 VA output to the Q3 input power connector using 16awg stranded wire. 2.5 Label power supply with circuit breaker panel designation and breaker number. 2.6 Turn on circuit breaker and power supply switches, verify Q3 is powered up and LCD display is lit. 3.1 Location 3.1.1 As identified in site drawings. Remove cover, mount LCC using appropriate hardware. 3.2 Powering LCC from 120v circuit 3.2.1 A 20a single phase circuit breaker is identified in the site drawings. Connect to the 120vac feed from the circuit breaker to TB2 of the LCC using appropriate wire. REFERENCE DRAWINGS DATE 09/28/07 11/01/07 SCALE: NONE DRAWING NOT TO SCALE UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLARENCES ARE: FRACTIONS DECIMALS ANGLES ±1/16 ±.01 1° ±.005 O 24VAC 24VAC (ION) 24V K3 K2 K1 Connecting Low Voltage control to LCC Connecting Line Voltage to LCC 3.3 Label LCC with circuit breaker panel designation and breaker number. 3.4 Connecting Line Side 3.4.1 Connect dedicated circuits to line side of contactor across from the load connection. The contactors can be oriented either direction, check contactor connection designations (L -line, T -load) 3.5 Connect Load Side 3.5.1 Connect Customer lighting circuits to Contactor 1 = customer lights. 50% of sales floor down lights + accent lights. Up to four individual circuits. 3.5.2 Connect Employee lighting circuits to Contactor 2 = employee lights - office lights, 50% sales (minus night lights) and bathroom exhaust fans. Bathroom exhaust fans can be controlled by add tional switches downstream, the feed will be controlled to ensure the fans are not running after the store is closed. If there is only one fan, wire directly and the Q3 will turn the fan on and off when scheduled. Up to four individual circuits. 3.5.3 Connect Exterior lighting circuits to Contactor 3 = exterior lights - all exterior sign, soffit and building ckts. Up to four individual circuits. .3.5.4 Emergency lights are not controlled by the LCC, check site drawings. 3.6 Wire of low voltage control to Q3 using 18awg TSTAT cable. 4. Override Buttons: 4.1 Install Override Button (QUEST PN 150677 ) at location identified in site 4.1.1 Location - Typically mounted near the manager's office or a light 4.2 Connect to Q3 using 2 pair 20 5. Light Level & Outside Air Sensor: 5.1 Location: See site drawings for mounting location 5.1.1 Mounting location considerations 5.1.1.1 North facing exterior wall. 5.1.1.2 Avoid locating the OA temperature sensor near windows, doors, louvers, exhaust -air discharges, or other sources that will influence the temperature 5.1.1.3 Away from exterior lighting 5.2 Connect to Q3 using 2 pair 20 awg shielded cable per the site drawings. 6. ADT Interface: 6.1 Wiring from Q3 to ADT junction box. Terminate wiring on the Q3 and at the ADT junction box per site drawings. ADT to have provided a cable with appropriate color coding and labeling. Mark & leave wire coiled at ADT location if ADT has not installed yet. 6.2 Junction Box to be installed by ADT. ADT will run cable to junction box. 7. Arm -A -Dor Interface: 7.1 Wire a 2 pair 20 AWG shielded cable from the Q3 to the Arm -A -Dor system. The Arm -A -Dor is to be configured with optional contact switch for monitoring status of the door. Wire per installation drawings. 8. Server Room Zone Temperature Sensor (optional not on all locations): 8.1 Wire a 2 pair 20AWG shielded cable to the server room. Wire per installation drawings. 8.2 Location of Zone - mount the zone sensor in the server room. Refer to the site drawings for proper location. APPROVALS DRAWN BY CHECKED BY DRFTG. SUPVR. 120V AC NEUTRAL GROUND TO 24V PWR SUPPLY TO 24V PWR SUPPLY TO 03BMS OUTPUT /XX TO Q3BMS OUTPUT I XX TO Q3BMS OUTPUT 100 TO Q3BMS OUTPUT IXX Light Level Sensor 2 Pair 20 awg Back to Q3BMS awg shielded cable. Outside Temperature Sensor INTIALS SCH DATE 09/28 0 v Exterior Sign Typical LCC connection to serviced circuits, check site drawings for specific connections Exhaust Fan Interior Central Lights #1 Interior Accent Lights Exterior Lights (LCC3) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Interior Central Lights #2 Employee Lights (LCC2) 0 0 0 Customer Lights (LCC1) 0 0 0 C3 C2 C1 drawings. CODE COMPLIANCE A Pr I JUN 0 4 2009 City of Tukwila 1 ^ ( Dl l'9SIO .1 Quest Controls Inc. Smart Control Solutions for Buildings www.questcontrols.com /commercial 9. RTU Installation - the RTU installation consists of the RTU, a Supply duct sensor, and a Zone temperature sensor with adjustment 9.1 The RTU controller mounts inside the roof top HVAC unit. For split systems mount the RTU controller in the Fan Coil Unit. 9.1.1 Separate the RTU controller from the snap trak. 9.1.2 Mount Snap Trak 9.1.3 Insert RTU Ensure Jumpers J1A and J1B are connecting the top set of pins. 11A II 00 JIB 9.2 Connect Power to RTU 9.2.1 Check jumper J1A and J1B for HVAC power 9.2.2 Connect C and R to the HVAC 24vac. 9.2.3 Check that the RTU LEDs light and begin cycling between Zone (Sc Sup. 9.3 Installation of supply air sensor (QUEST PN 300199) 9.3.1 Select an appropriate location on the supply duct close to the air handler. 9.3.2 If the area is insulated, peel back the insulation until an area the size of the probe box is clear. 9.3.3 Drill a small hole into the duct large enough to insert the probe into the duct. 9.3.4 Secure the probe box using sheet metal screws or appropriate hardware. 9.3.5 The sensor is not polarity sensitive so connect one lead from the supply sensor to the + of the RTU SPLY input and the other to the - of the RTU SPLY input. The recommended wiring is 20 AWG twisted shielded pair. 0 0 0 24+ 24- 0 UAC Connect the C & R Power to the HVAC 24VAC 0 0 0 C R C FAN 9.4 Zone Sensor 9.4.1 Mount zone sensor in store according to drawing. If location is not identified, select an area out of direct sunlight and away from HVAC duct airflow, but near the return air grille. Installation locations should be selected to avoid the effects of exterior wall - surface temperatures, solar radiation from windows, and heating or cooling sources such as heating convectors or air diffusers. Consideration should be given to locations of furniture and equipment, especially office copiers, light dimming switches, and other heat producing equipment. Sensor should be mounted at a height accessible by staff to adjust temperature settings. 9.4.2 Connect zone sensor to RTU using 2 pair 20awg shielded cable. Connect the Zone + and - to the RTU Zone + and -, Connect the SET on the Zone sensor to the ADJ on the RTU. This connection is not polarity sensitive. 9.4.3 If either the Zone or Supply sensors are not wired correctly an error message will be displayed on RTU controller. If the display "SSE" there is a short in the line or if there is an open in the line the display will read "OSE ".. 9.5 Setting of address switch for RTU. 9.5.1 When only one RTU is installed. 9.5.1.1 Ensure SW1 -6 &7 and SW2 -1 &3 are set to on. 9.5.2 When a second RTU is installed 9.5.2.1 Follow the above instruction on the 1st RTU 9.5.2.2 On the second RTU, move switch 4 on switch block SW1 up to the on position. 9.5.2.3 Contact Quest Controls if you have more than two RTU for additional address settings. 10. Communications Bus: 10.1 Wiring from Q3 to RTU 10.1.1 Using 2 pair 20 awg shielded connect the A terminal on the Q3 to the A terminal on the RTU. Connect the B terminal on the Q3 to the B terminal on the RTU and connect the C terminal on the Q3 to the C terminal on the RTU. 10.1.2 Terminate the shield at the Q3 chassis only. 10.2 Wiring from RTU to RTU 10.2.1 Daisy chain the bus connections from RTU 1 to RTU 2. 10.2.2 Carry the shield wire through ensuring it is insulated insulate the shield wire on the last RTU. 10.3 End of line resistor 10.3.1 On the last RTU connected, or if there is only one RTU is set 1 -3 and 2 -4. For intermediate RTU boards, leave the 09- D Zone Temperature Sensor w /Slide Adjust TITLE T- MOBILE INSTALLATION NOTES SW1 -6 &7 ON, SW2 -1 &3 ON 12. Start up and Checkout: 12.1 Ensure the Q3 and the RTU has power. 12.2 Refer to : T- Mobile NSC Verification Check List 12.3 Complete as much of the check list as possible. � 12.4 Contact Quest Controls after the installation is complete to setup aPi. 11 Supply Duct Temperature Sensor When only one RTU is installed SW1 -4,6 &7 ON, SW2 -1 &3 ON I II 1 SW Jumpers installed between pins 1 - 3 and 2 - 4 for the last RTU on the BUS or if only one RTU is used 0 T RC 11. Ethernet (CATS) Connection: 11.1 Connect the supplied Ethernet cable to the RJ45 connector on the bottom of the Q3. Connect the other end to the store's router in the assigned spot. If the router is not present then route the cable to the area where the router will be installed and label the cable. BNZ $02 Settings on the second RTU is ❑nn, 0 0 0 ® ® A B C BUS from ground. Cut, tape, and board, ensure jumper J5 jumpers off. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY I9- 2009 AirnOrPRER store checkout at least 1 day prior to the date. Allow approximately 1 hour to complete the system checkout with Quest. This assumes that a network connection can be established with the system. PROJ. NO. QUEST -T- MOBILE DWG. NO. BMS -1.3 REVISION REV2.0 SHEET 3 OF 3 2 5 4 5 a a 1 10 12 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. 0 u- I-- O cc cc> O aj rn 0 w N LLI 0 O N .--m L 5 2 V co an _ 4 CI ' c O W cV . Q N u M �. a, Li) 0 Vf ° 'SEPARATE xx.xx. SPRMIT AR DRAEFFIOVAL ramnI110 r STA Pliorallr. TMO0 nimmor -C 0 Z to to In N Ln 00 Co c 0 N ` 0) co 0 0 O O - 0 _ TOP MOUNTING HOLES _ O timmonni I I V n IIII = I�m�� 4Vec - �IMU IIIIIIIIUM IIIIIIUM. I o 11 311110 MmIPll tli l ��lf�J� a III III o e 2■VAC (RTN> z•• K3 ® - C 0 0 i - - C3 C2 C1 I II • II' I 1 o ® c; t° 0 K3 K2 IC 0 ;e 1R „® r. .• � ' 1 0 1 0 - Ii MBEWEE 0 U IIII . IIII y2ov . manna n , IIII "TRAE IEMMCIEM w.. BOTTOM MOUNTING HOLES U Q IL 111 2 5 4 5 0 0 To Circuit Breaker Panel (120V single phase) 1. Mounting the Q3BMS: © (� In1 Power Supply 24VAC 2 -Stage (Quest P/N 300747) 1.1 Location 1.1.1 03 mounting location, to ensure uniformity throughout the T- Mobile sites the Q3 will be mounted eye level on the Telco equipment board provided as identified in site drawings. Usually this is in maintenance or other non - public location near the circuit breaker panel. Ensure the area is well lit and free from excessive vibration and moisture. Sufficient area around the system must allow for routing of conduit and cable. GROUNDING STUDS DRAWING NOTES: Inl rrr ?Br`r7 • • 1 ) TOP MOUNTING HOLES MODEM 03BMS 1.3.1 03/05/07 (41 SMOKED MOE ( �1 0 DHSS WEB BOTTOM MOUNTING HOLES N O 1.2 Securing to the wall 1.2.1 Using appropriate hardware ( #8 x 3 /4 pan head wood screw or equivalent) fix the top mounting hardware to wall approximately 70" above the floor 9.5" apart and level. Remove cover from the Q3 and slip the Q3 onto the top mounting hardware and slide down until it stops. Install the bottom mounting hardware. 1.2.2 Using terminal lug, run 16 awg (or larger) ground wire from Q3 ground stud to building ground and connect using appropriate hardware. Select most convenient ground stub, all grounding studs and ground bus are common. THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND /OR TRADE SECRET INFORMATION WHICH IS THE PROPERTY OF QUEST CONTROLS INC. (QUEST). IT EMBODIES A PROPRIETARY DESIGN WHICH SHALL NOT BE DISCLOSED, SOLD, LOANED, DUPLICATED OR USED FOR PROCUREMENT, MANUFACTURING OF ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT FOR WHICH THIS DOCUMENT WAS SUPPLIED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION BY QUEST. THIS DOCUMENT SHALL BE RETURNED TO QUEST UPON COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT FOR WHICH IT WAS PROVIDED AND /OR AT THE REQUEST OF QUEST. XXX XXX XXX REFERENCE DRAWINGS XXx Q3BMS (Quest P/N 150435) 03MMS CAC 03/05/07 PROOPAII DMA LEGEND # ## = WIRE MARKER WHT /YEL - 24VAC WHT /BLU - COM 3. LCC installation: 40VA Output to Q3BMS MARK R1 R2 Remove these two screws and carefully tilt the power supply down and pull it away from the back panel mounting plate 120VAC Input White - Neutral Black - 120VAC Green - Ground REVISION HISTORY FOR APPROVAL RELEASED BY SCH SCH 0 0 0 NEVI Br 0 0 0 O � 0 Mount back panel securely to wall using these holes O 0 d 1/8" 2. Power Supply Installation 2.1 Mounting Location 2.1.1 Locate the power supply on the left side of the Q3 as per installation drawings. 2.1.2 Attention must be paid to the location of the power supply when to protection of switches. Ensure inadvertent traffic near or by the supply will not accidentally switch the power supply off. 2.2 Mounting the power supply 2.2.1 Remove two screws identified in diagram, tilt power supply down and slide off plate 2.2.2 Ensure 1/8" gap is maintained between wall and plate to allow for power supply tangs to slip into tee slots. 2.2.3 Make power connections using appropriate wire nuts or insulated crimps. Power supply circuit breaker is designated in site drawings. 75VA Output to LCC WHT /YEL - 24VAC WHT /BLU - COM it comes power 2.2.4 Slip tangs into tee slots and tilt power supply up into place. Return retaining screws and tighten. 2.3. Wiring for 120vac, use 20a single phase breaker as identified in site drawings. Connect to the power supply using appropriate wire. 2.4 Low voltage wiring to power Q3, connect low voltage 24vac power from power supply 40 VA output to the Q3 input power connector using 16awg stranded wire. 2.5 Label power supply with circuit breaker panel designation and breaker number. 2.6 Turn on circuit breaker and power supply switches, verify Q3 is powered up and LCD display is lit. 3.1 Location 3.1.1 As identified in site drawings. Remove cover, mount LCC using appropriate hardware. 3.2 Powering LCC from 120v circuit 3.2.1 A 20a single phase circuit breaker is identified in the site drawings. Connect to the 120vac feed from the circuit breaker to TB2 of the LCC using appropriate wire. REFERENCE DRAWINGS DATE 09/28/07 11/01/07 SCALE: NONE DRAWING NOT TO SCALE UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLARENCES ARE: FRACTIONS DECIMALS ANGLES ±1/16 ±.01 1° ±.005 O 24VAC 24VAC (ION) 24V K3 K2 K1 Connecting Low Voltage control to LCC Connecting Line Voltage to LCC 3.3 Label LCC with circuit breaker panel designation and breaker number. 3.4 Connecting Line Side 3.4.1 Connect dedicated circuits to line side of contactor across from the load connection. The contactors can be oriented either direction, check contactor connection designations (L -line, T -load) 3.5 Connect Load Side 3.5.1 Connect Customer lighting circuits to Contactor 1 = customer lights. 50% of sales floor down lights + accent lights. Up to four individual circuits. 3.5.2 Connect Employee lighting circuits to Contactor 2 = employee lights - office lights, 50% sales (minus night lights) and bathroom exhaust fans. Bathroom exhaust fans can be controlled by add tional switches downstream, the feed will be controlled to ensure the fans are not running after the store is closed. If there is only one fan, wire directly and the Q3 will turn the fan on and off when scheduled. Up to four individual circuits. 3.5.3 Connect Exterior lighting circuits to Contactor 3 = exterior lights - all exterior sign, soffit and building ckts. Up to four individual circuits. .3.5.4 Emergency lights are not controlled by the LCC, check site drawings. 3.6 Wire of low voltage control to Q3 using 18awg TSTAT cable. 4. Override Buttons: 4.1 Install Override Button (QUEST PN 150677 ) at location identified in site 4.1.1 Location - Typically mounted near the manager's office or a light 4.2 Connect to Q3 using 2 pair 20 5. Light Level & Outside Air Sensor: 5.1 Location: See site drawings for mounting location 5.1.1 Mounting location considerations 5.1.1.1 North facing exterior wall. 5.1.1.2 Avoid locating the OA temperature sensor near windows, doors, louvers, exhaust -air discharges, or other sources that will influence the temperature 5.1.1.3 Away from exterior lighting 5.2 Connect to Q3 using 2 pair 20 awg shielded cable per the site drawings. 6. ADT Interface: 6.1 Wiring from Q3 to ADT junction box. Terminate wiring on the Q3 and at the ADT junction box per site drawings. ADT to have provided a cable with appropriate color coding and labeling. Mark & leave wire coiled at ADT location if ADT has not installed yet. 6.2 Junction Box to be installed by ADT. ADT will run cable to junction box. 7. Arm -A -Dor Interface: 7.1 Wire a 2 pair 20 AWG shielded cable from the Q3 to the Arm -A -Dor system. The Arm -A -Dor is to be configured with optional contact switch for monitoring status of the door. Wire per installation drawings. 8. Server Room Zone Temperature Sensor (optional not on all locations): 8.1 Wire a 2 pair 20AWG shielded cable to the server room. Wire per installation drawings. 8.2 Location of Zone - mount the zone sensor in the server room. Refer to the site drawings for proper location. APPROVALS DRAWN BY CHECKED BY DRFTG. SUPVR. 120V AC NEUTRAL GROUND TO 24V PWR SUPPLY TO 24V PWR SUPPLY TO 03BMS OUTPUT /XX TO Q3BMS OUTPUT I XX TO Q3BMS OUTPUT 100 TO Q3BMS OUTPUT IXX Light Level Sensor 2 Pair 20 awg Back to Q3BMS awg shielded cable. Outside Temperature Sensor INTIALS SCH DATE 09/28 0 v Exterior Sign Typical LCC connection to serviced circuits, check site drawings for specific connections Exhaust Fan Interior Central Lights #1 Interior Accent Lights Exterior Lights (LCC3) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Interior Central Lights #2 Employee Lights (LCC2) 0 0 0 Customer Lights (LCC1) 0 0 0 C3 C2 C1 drawings. CODE COMPLIANCE A Pr I JUN 0 4 2009 City of Tukwila 1 ^ ( Dl l'9SIO .1 Quest Controls Inc. Smart Control Solutions for Buildings www.questcontrols.com /commercial 9. RTU Installation - the RTU installation consists of the RTU, a Supply duct sensor, and a Zone temperature sensor with adjustment 9.1 The RTU controller mounts inside the roof top HVAC unit. For split systems mount the RTU controller in the Fan Coil Unit. 9.1.1 Separate the RTU controller from the snap trak. 9.1.2 Mount Snap Trak 9.1.3 Insert RTU Ensure Jumpers J1A and J1B are connecting the top set of pins. 11A II 00 JIB 9.2 Connect Power to RTU 9.2.1 Check jumper J1A and J1B for HVAC power 9.2.2 Connect C and R to the HVAC 24vac. 9.2.3 Check that the RTU LEDs light and begin cycling between Zone (Sc Sup. 9.3 Installation of supply air sensor (QUEST PN 300199) 9.3.1 Select an appropriate location on the supply duct close to the air handler. 9.3.2 If the area is insulated, peel back the insulation until an area the size of the probe box is clear. 9.3.3 Drill a small hole into the duct large enough to insert the probe into the duct. 9.3.4 Secure the probe box using sheet metal screws or appropriate hardware. 9.3.5 The sensor is not polarity sensitive so connect one lead from the supply sensor to the + of the RTU SPLY input and the other to the - of the RTU SPLY input. The recommended wiring is 20 AWG twisted shielded pair. 0 0 0 24+ 24- 0 UAC Connect the C & R Power to the HVAC 24VAC 0 0 0 C R C FAN 9.4 Zone Sensor 9.4.1 Mount zone sensor in store according to drawing. If location is not identified, select an area out of direct sunlight and away from HVAC duct airflow, but near the return air grille. Installation locations should be selected to avoid the effects of exterior wall - surface temperatures, solar radiation from windows, and heating or cooling sources such as heating convectors or air diffusers. Consideration should be given to locations of furniture and equipment, especially office copiers, light dimming switches, and other heat producing equipment. Sensor should be mounted at a height accessible by staff to adjust temperature settings. 9.4.2 Connect zone sensor to RTU using 2 pair 20awg shielded cable. Connect the Zone + and - to the RTU Zone + and -, Connect the SET on the Zone sensor to the ADJ on the RTU. This connection is not polarity sensitive. 9.4.3 If either the Zone or Supply sensors are not wired correctly an error message will be displayed on RTU controller. If the display "SSE" there is a short in the line or if there is an open in the line the display will read "OSE ".. 9.5 Setting of address switch for RTU. 9.5.1 When only one RTU is installed. 9.5.1.1 Ensure SW1 -6 &7 and SW2 -1 &3 are set to on. 9.5.2 When a second RTU is installed 9.5.2.1 Follow the above instruction on the 1st RTU 9.5.2.2 On the second RTU, move switch 4 on switch block SW1 up to the on position. 9.5.2.3 Contact Quest Controls if you have more than two RTU for additional address settings. 10. Communications Bus: 10.1 Wiring from Q3 to RTU 10.1.1 Using 2 pair 20 awg shielded connect the A terminal on the Q3 to the A terminal on the RTU. Connect the B terminal on the Q3 to the B terminal on the RTU and connect the C terminal on the Q3 to the C terminal on the RTU. 10.1.2 Terminate the shield at the Q3 chassis only. 10.2 Wiring from RTU to RTU 10.2.1 Daisy chain the bus connections from RTU 1 to RTU 2. 10.2.2 Carry the shield wire through ensuring it is insulated insulate the shield wire on the last RTU. 10.3 End of line resistor 10.3.1 On the last RTU connected, or if there is only one RTU is set 1 -3 and 2 -4. For intermediate RTU boards, leave the 09- D Zone Temperature Sensor w /Slide Adjust TITLE T- MOBILE INSTALLATION NOTES SW1 -6 &7 ON, SW2 -1 &3 ON 12. Start up and Checkout: 12.1 Ensure the Q3 and the RTU has power. 12.2 Refer to : T- Mobile NSC Verification Check List 12.3 Complete as much of the check list as possible. � 12.4 Contact Quest Controls after the installation is complete to setup aPi. 11 Supply Duct Temperature Sensor When only one RTU is installed SW1 -4,6 &7 ON, SW2 -1 &3 ON I II 1 SW Jumpers installed between pins 1 - 3 and 2 - 4 for the last RTU on the BUS or if only one RTU is used 0 T RC 11. Ethernet (CATS) Connection: 11.1 Connect the supplied Ethernet cable to the RJ45 connector on the bottom of the Q3. Connect the other end to the store's router in the assigned spot. If the router is not present then route the cable to the area where the router will be installed and label the cable. BNZ $02 Settings on the second RTU is ❑nn, 0 0 0 ® ® A B C BUS from ground. Cut, tape, and board, ensure jumper J5 jumpers off. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY I9- 2009 AirnOrPRER store checkout at least 1 day prior to the date. Allow approximately 1 hour to complete the system checkout with Quest. This assumes that a network connection can be established with the system. PROJ. NO. QUEST -T- MOBILE DWG. NO. BMS -1.3 REVISION REV2.0 SHEET 3 OF 3 2 5 4 5 a a 1 10 12 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. 0 u- I-- O cc cc> O aj rn 0 w N LLI 0 O N .--m L 5 2 V co an _ 4 CI ' c O W cV . Q N u M �. a, Li) 0 Vf ° 'SEPARATE xx.xx. SPRMIT AR DRAEFFIOVAL ramnI110 r STA Pliorallr. TMO0 nimmor -C 0 Z to to In N Ln 00 Co c 0 N ` 0) co 0 0 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. MEW 111111111111•111111111111 OC W W �s 0N F cc <MX Z z E,,, W W z z�g 4 r Ei 4 0 � GUvaro cc 0 O L 1- c. o E cc Co_ o s ai 00 o m N j Cn 0w N W • m PSI u DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: C u 5 s � 3 = N t 0 W ° � v "0 -5, .. prV N 44,1 C L z 0 W ce XX.XX.XX 1/4" = 1' -0" STAPP TM00 SHEET: rn .~ ro ro cc ul N N U as O o N o a, Z in Z oc 0 0 J LPL L9 Z J P -1 F+1 480 998 7223 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 S q 10 11 12 n SHEET NOTES SUPPLY FIXTURE UNITS : DRAINAGE FIXTURE UNITS O PROVIDE SANITARY PIPING TO NEW PLUMBING FIXTURES AS SHOWN. CONNECT NEW PIPING TO EXISTING 4" SANITARY LINE WITHIN THE TENANT SPACE. INFORMATION ON THE EXISTING SANITARY LINE 15 NOT AVAILABLE. FIELD VERIFY CONNECTION LOCATION, INVERT, AND DIRECTION OF FLOW PRIOR TO BID. IS EXISTING I" VALVEDD SHOWN. CONNECT TO E DOMESTIC O STUB-IN SERVING TENANT SPACE. FIELD VERIFY LOCATION PRIOR TO BID. O3 PROVIDE NEW VENT PIPING AS SHOWN. CONNECT TO EXISTING VENT PIPING SYSTEM SERVING THE TENANT SPACE. FIELD VERIFY CONNECTION LOCATION PRIOR TO BID. IF NO VENT PIPING SYSTEM IS PRESENT PROVIDE NEW 3" VENT THRU ROOF. LOCATE VENT A MINIMUM OF I0' -0" FROM ALL OUTSIDE AIR INTAKES. SEE DETAIL. O PROVIDE NEW SHELF MOUNTED ELECTRIC WATER HEATER. PIPE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE TO MOP SINK. SEE DETAIL, SHEET P -2. (2) O ;/E TRAP PRIMER TI MUSTT BE CAPABLE RESTROOM FLOOR DRAINS. TAG QUANTITY GOLD FU'S HOT FU'S TAG QUANTITY DRAINAGE FU'S WC 1 a - WC I 4 LAV I I 2 LAV 1 1 51 I 1.25 1.25 FD 1 2 M5 1 1.5 1.5 MS 1 3 TOTALS 6 .75 4.15 SI I 2 3/4 / ^ 3/4" 0 1 1 IGI rn - I G 3/4" O TOTALS 12.0 iv 1 1/2" r 2 " CO " I LAV ® 3 "-T / I <3" I 3 4 n / / I 2 .. -)1 I ( 5" 3 .. WC N I ( 1/2" M5 4 I CO SI 2 1/2" I LAV f I/2 A. -' WC I 51 GENERAL NOTES MS WH 1/2 - -1-11 A. CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE PRIOR TO SID AND VERIFY ALL WORKING CONDITIONS, CLEARANCES, AND REQUIREMENTS FOR PROVIDING A COMPLETE AND FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM. NO CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT OR CONTRACT SUM WILL BE MADE DUE TO THE FAILURE TO THOROUGHLY EXAMINE THE SITE AND CONDITIONS. B. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL SAWGUTTING REQUIRED FOR THIS JOB. COORDINATE BACKFILLING AND CONCRETE PATCHING RESPONSIBILITIES WITH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. PLUMBING FIXTURE DATA 2 ... 3 III Fn Oer CODE O JV� �,+ 4 AV J U N 4 2O8 i of ''k ��� . �, � WC WATER CLOSET - "TOTO" DRAKE MODEL .1445L, ELONGATED BOWL, ADA COMPLIANT, TWO PIECE, lb GPF, SG534 OPEN END TOILET SEAT, 5T'1435 TANK 4 COVER. LAV LAVATORY - "AMERICAN STANDARD" LUCERNE, ADA al COMPLIANT, WALL MOUNTED. PROVIDE WITH "AMERICAN STANDARD" METERING FAUCET #1340.225, OFFSET TRAP WITH INSULATED "TRAP WRAP" PROTECTIVE KIT 5005 BY BROGAR. SE�M TEMPERATURE� THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE. 51 SINK - FURNISHED BY THE FIXTURE MANUFACTURER AND INSTALLED BY THE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR. FD FLOOR DRAIN - "ZURN" MODEL #ZN- 415 -P -63 CAST IRON, POLISHED BRONZE. INSTALL FLUSH WITH FLOOR. PROVIDE "PRECISION PLUMBING PRODUCTS" #P2 -500 AUTOMATIC TRAP PRIMER WITH ANTI SIPHON PORTS, SERVES 2 FLOOR DRAINS EA., 1/2" CONNECTION. WH ELECTRIC WATER HEATER - A.D. SMITH "PROMAX" MODEL #EJSG -20, 11 GALLON, 120 /IPH, 2500W ELEMENT, 22" TALL, I1" DIA., 5/4" INLET /OUTLET, 65 LBS. MS MOP SERVICE BASIN - FLORESTONE #MSR -2424 WITH "CHICAGO FAUCET" #MCP WITH 361 LEVER HANDLES. RCP FAUCET WITH 8126 ELEVATED VACUUM BREAKER. ENG ELECTRIC WATER COOLER - ELKAY MODEL EZSTLSC, El WASTE & VENT ISOMETRIC E6 WATER RISER DIAGRAM NTS NTS CI EXISTING 2" CW y 1 111 Ilp BARRIER FREE, 8 GALLONS PER HOUR, 1/4 H.P., 115/1/60, 4.6 FLA. PIPING MATERIALS SANITARY (BELOW GRADE) - PVC SCHEDULE 40 OR SERVICE WEIGHT CAST IRON JOINING - SOLVENT WELDED ASTM D2564 WATER PIPING (ABOVE GRADE) - ASTM B88, TYPE L HAW DRAWN COPPER JOINING - ANSI /ASTM B52 "LEAD- FREE" SOLDER INSULATION - 5/4" OR LE55, 1/2" THICK FIBERGLASS, I" OR MORE, I" FIBERGLASS CONDENSATE PIPING (WHERE REQUIRED) - ASTM B506, COPPER JOINING - SOLDER GRADE 50B INSULATION -I/2" THICK ARMAFLEX THREADED ON PIPE RECEIVED CITY OF TUOCII�L�+ �1A F 2009 PERMIT CENTER 8 C t !I1 REQUIRED 1"15 - I S - / SI a �l - 5 \ Le-4_4, <), II 7" 1 /�. ( \ / r � 1 ' � -: - - - -_:. �� ?r _. _. -._. [i _ - 111) • • • l ) WG ' FD WG tri I . _ -..... -.. � CQ LAV 1 Io( <` LAV / / ` l (_ I t) 0 C l.,.. 0 4 Al PLUMBING SANITARY FLOOR PLAN A6 PLUMBING DOMESTIC WATER FLOOR PLAN 1/4"=I'-0" 1/4"r-r-0" 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 5 g l 10 I I 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. MEW 111111111111•111111111111 OC W W �s 0N F cc <MX Z z E,,, W W z z�g 4 r Ei 4 0 � GUvaro cc 0 O L 1- c. o E cc Co_ o s ai 00 o m N j Cn 0w N W • m PSI u DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: C u 5 s � 3 = N t 0 W ° � v "0 -5, .. prV N 44,1 C L z 0 W ce XX.XX.XX 1/4" = 1' -0" STAPP TM00 SHEET: rn .~ ro ro cc ul N N U as O o N o a, Z in Z oc 0 0 J LPL L9 Z J P -1 F+1 480 998 7223 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C, As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. I 2 2, C cn N t H u 0 3 vi fi 3 u Q N a DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 449 Z O Fri (IM) 05.22.0c1 SHEET: AS NOTED DG TM00 JUL 7 1J9 W CI 0 ce LL W 0 H tn v o O N Ln co co Vo C O N , a E t coli O '2 ° o tn a Q a Q g G J .2 ro 3 cn O. fa �a W O ttl E 0 1= A -6.2 06.24.09 - PER LANDLORD F+1 480 998 7223 CONSULTING ENGINEER 1 2 3 4 5 6 "i 8 q 1 0 1 1 12 LEASE -NE N EXISTING MALL CONSTRUCTION 5/8" TYPE "X" - GYP BD 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUDS @ 16" O.G. 5/8" TYPE "X" GYP BD - _ LEASE LINE STUDS @ 16 O.G. TENANT Il�r� BLOCKING AS REQUIRED 5/8" TYPE "X" GYP BD TENANT FOR BEAM TYPE AND SIZE SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. NEW NEUTRAL PIER BY TEN. G.G. (TO MATCH MALL FINISHES) „ I/2 BLACK METAL REVEAL FOR BEAM TYPE AND 7 SIZE SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. ■ t p4 SOFFIT D 6 1 1.1•■•- ■ 1/2" MP' , � ■ 1, ❑ .E .. ABOVE. SEE SHEET A -3. METAL REVEAL 20 GA. SHEET METAL PANEL W/ ADHESIVE BACKING OVER 3/8" MDF. OVER 1/2" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. OVER 3 5/8" X 20 A. METAL STUDS a) I6 O.G. STOREFRONT BASE BELOW. REFER TO Al /A -6.2 . 3.w.. , ��! iii STOREFRONT r BASE BELOW. . , -� �'� 51M I/2" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS BY TENANT G.G. REFER TO /- Ai /A -6.2 .., ........ r 0 1/2" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS / BY TENANT G.G. / 20 GA. SHEET METAL PANEL W/ ADHESIVE BACKING OVER 3/8" MDF. OVER 1/2" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GA. MALL MALL METAL STUDS @ 16" O.G. G1 NOT USED G4 NOT USED G7 NEUTRAL PIER DETAIL G10 NEUTRAL PIER DETAIL 6" =1' -O" 6"=1 !I- !U . . " e 3 5/8" X 20 GA. /- METAL STUD •1 , : I 3 5/8" X 20 GA / -3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL /� STUDS 16" o.G. / I/2" TYPE 'X' / GYP. S. — TENANT . Al • • : : : ' :1 : • . : : i METAL STUD I DIAGONAL I BRACING @ 48" j O.G. ® 45° TO FRAMING ABOVE j (AS SHOWN) I -20 GA. SHEET METAL PANEL i w/ ADHESIVE BACKING OVER 3/8" MDF. OVER I/2 TYPE 'X I OVER 3 5/8" X � 20 A. METAL STUDS @ 16" O.G. 5/8" TYPE "X" GYP BD OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GA. METAL STUDS AT 16" O.G. LINE OF SO ABOVE STOREFRONT BASE BELOW. REFER TO • • • ' • ' • • • • \ \ , // J FRAMI @ 16" O.G. 1.. ∎_.._____.. 1 ' I 1 1 I 1 .:.:. .:::: :.::::::::::::::::::::::::::: 1 _ _ _ _= - = ---=------------------- - - - - -- ' CONTINUOUS BLOCKING AS REQUIRED 1 1 \ \ \ ----------- -------------------- ----- - - - -.n 3/8" FR MDF 20 GA. SHEET METAL 1 FOR BE TYPE AND SIZE SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. ' 1 1 I PANEL W/ ADHESIVE BACKING. \ \ . . , • • • 1 \ \ =- ■- =� '__ i ► \ \ \ • FRY REGLET - I/2 "- REVEAL MOLDING • • DRM -50 -50 - FINISH • 6063 T5 ALUMINUM BLOCKING A5 REQUIRED ' -' _:_:- -: :_:_: -: -: -: - - 20 GA. SHEET METAL PANEL W/ ADHESIVE " BACKING OVER 3/8 M. OVER I/2 TYPE X GYP. P. OVER 3 5/8" X 20 A. METAL STUDS 16" O.G. , � � � I • • • Al/A-6.2 1/2" CLEAR TEMPERE GLASS BY TENANT G.G. • • • � i,i ' • . i 5/8 TYPE X GYP I/2 CLEAR TEMPERED BD OVER 3 5/8 X GLASS BY TENANT 20 GA. METAL STUD FRAMING @ 16" O.G. MALL EN n G.G. 11/2" x 3/4" CONT. ALUMINUM "U" CHANNEL /— / —/ � � /— /— // MALL 1/2" TENANT D1 METAL PANEL VERTICAL REVEAL D4 ENLARGED STOREFRONT PIER DETAIL D7 GLAZING ATTACHMENT DETAIL D10 NOT USED 6 " =1' -0" 6 "= 1' -0 v IQ tO 0 89 TENANT MALL 1/2" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS IN ALUM. BASE BY TENANT LINE OF STOREFRONT BASE BELOW LEASE LINE 1/4" TENANT G.G. 6" M -2 STOREFRONT BASE LOCATION OF 1 I p ' i� I 1 I ' MALL FLOORING REVIEWED ruin CODE V ®IVIPr� ��°1N JL 6 20 A 09 ROVED C Tukwila �UIL r ,j N T►.JK LA 1/2" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS IN ALUM. BASE BY TENANT G.G. DISPLAY GABLE SYSTEM TENANT'S FLOORING .< MALL JUL 1 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER I -0 �� 1111 Al NOT USED A4 BUTT GLAZING A7 STOREFRONT BASE DETAIL A10 NOT USED 1/2 " =1' -0" 6 " =1' -O" I 2 3 4 5 1 6 1 8 ci 10 11 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C, As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. I 2 2, C cn N t H u 0 3 vi fi 3 u Q N a DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 449 Z O Fri (IM) 05.22.0c1 SHEET: AS NOTED DG TM00 JUL 7 1J9 W CI 0 ce LL W 0 H tn v o O N Ln co co Vo C O N , a E t coli O '2 ° o tn a Q a Q g G J .2 ro 3 cn O. fa �a W O ttl E 0 1= A -6.2 06.24.09 - PER LANDLORD F+1 480 998 7223 CONSULTING ENGINEER VATS HA•MER ARRESTOR SI Z I NG CHART FIXTURE UNIT RATING CONNECTION TO SUPPLY LINE I -I1 3/4" 12 -32 I" 33 - 60 I " 61 -113 I I14 -154 I" 155 -330 I" 0 IL [Il d 2 2 3 3 4 NTS A4 NTS 4 5 6 1 RUNOUTS TO LAST FIXTURE SHALL NOT BE SMALLER THAN SIZE REQUIRED FOR ARRESTORS E4 WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR TO FIXTURES NOTE: USE TABLE 10 -I UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE FOR FIXTURE UNITS, FOR SIZING WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS. TABLE APPLIES TO BOTH UPC 4 IPC. WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS PIPING TO LAST FIXTURE FLASHING AND COUNTER FLASHING OF VENT THRU ROOF 15 BY ROOFING CONTRACTOR. ROOF INSULATION CORE DRILL ROOF OR PROVIDE SLEEVE IF REQUIRED BY TYPE OF ROOF DECK. PROVIDE FIRE STOP SEAL BETWEEN PIPE AND SLEEVE OR DECK. PROVIDE PIPE INCREASER IF /WHERE CODE REQUIRES A MINIMUM 3" VENT THRU ROOF. I I MINIMUM 12" ABOVE ROOF NORMALLY. EXTEND TO HEIGHT OF PARAPET WHEN WITHIN 10 FEET OF PARAPET. ROOF DECK ANCHOR PIPE TO ROOF DECK WITH U -BOLT AROUND PIPE AND ANGLE IRON WELDED OR SCREWED TO ROOF DECK OR JOIST. MINIMUM 12" BELOW ROOF. NO -HUB PIPE CONNECTORS ON CAST IRON PIPE OR BELL AND SPIGOT IF PVC. REFER TO PLANS FOR VENT THRU ROOF PIPE SIZES AND LOCATIONS. LOCATE VENT THRU ROOF MINIMUM THREE FEET FROM PROPERTY LINE, OR TEN FEET HORIZONTAL OR THREE FEET VERTICAL ABOVE ANY BUILDING OPENING OR FRESH AIR INTAKE, OR ONE FOOT FROM ANY VERTICAL SURFACE. LOCATE VENT THRU ROOF MINIMUM 15" FROM PARAPET, EXPANSION JOINT, EQUIPMENT CURB, ETC. OFFSET IN CEILING SPACE WHERE REQUIRED TO MEET THESE CONDITIONS. VENT THRU ROOF 5 6 S CHECK VALVE (TYPICAL) BALL VALVE (TYPICAL) PROVIDE ASME TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE RATED AT 210 °F /ISO P516. ELECTRIC WATER HEATER. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS AND SCHEDULE. DRAIN VALVE OATEY 34152 22" DIAMETER ALUMINUM DRAIN PAN WITH I" CAST IRON DRAIN FITTING —s— A i DH DG A l- E8 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATER (SHELF) THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE. SET DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE DHW TO 110 °. I" 3/4" DCW PIPE HANGER WITHIN 3" OF ELBOW AUTOMATIC VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (WHEN REQUIRED) - PROVIDE PIPE UNION, DIELECTRIC IF REQUIRED FOR DISSIMILAR METALS. WELDED STEEL EXPANSION TANK WITH POLYPROPYLENE LINING, FDA APPROVED FOR DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE. PREGHARGE TANK TO MATCH WATER PRESSURE AS PER TANK MANUFACTURER. * SEISMIC STRAP, TYP. SEE NOTE. PROVIDE HARD COPPER DRAIN FOR PRV /DRAIN PAN OUTLET. ROUTE DISCHARGE LINES FULL SIZE TO SERVICE SINK COMPLETE WITH MINIMUM 2 1/2" AIR GAP. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS, SCHEDULES AND NOTES FOR MORE INFORMATION. PIPING ARRANGEMENT SHOWN 15 SCHEMATIC. VERIFY ALL CONNECTION SIZES AND LOCATIONS PER MANUFACTURERS REQUIREMENTS. ADJUST TO SUIT FIELD CONDITIONS. FOLLOW MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION TANK. REFER TO FLOOR PLANS FOR PIPE SIZES. PROVIDE SEISMIC STRAP OR BRACING, HEAT TRAP AND AUTOMATIC VACUUM RELIEF VALVE WHEN REQUIRED SY LOCAL AUTHORITIES. ( PROVIDE 11/2" x I/5" STEEL BAND AROUND THE TOP AND BOTTOM OF WATER HEATER. BEND ENDS OF STRAP AND ANCHOR SECUELY TO WALL. SET TANK AS CLOSE TO WALL AS POSSIBLE. PROVIDE WOOD BLOCKS FOR SPACERS BETWEEN WALL AND WATER HEATER. IIEJIEWE,j FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APP OVER JUN 0 4 2009 ?a_ Hy 07 1 UkwiIa BUILDINn nlinr,r‘a, NTS A8 NTS S TRAP PRIMER WITH INTEGRAL VACUUM BREAKER. PROVIDE COUPLING FLOOR 1/2" TYPE "K" SOFT COPPER TUBE BELOW FLOOR SLAB WITHOUT JOINTS. SLOPE TOWARD FLOOR DRAIN TRAP. PROVIDE 1/2" ELASTOMERIC INSULATION FROM TRAP TO ABOVE FLOOR SLAB. AUTOMATIC TRAP PRIMER 10 DOMESTIC GOLD WATER LINE IN PLUMBING CHASE OR UNDER FIXTURE. MAKE BRANCH TO TRAP PRIMER OFF TOP OF THIS PIPE. TRAP PRIMER IN CHASE OR UNDER FIXTURE. INSTALL PRIMER MINIMUM SIX INCHES ABOVE FLOOD RIM OF FIXTURE BEING SERVED. PROVIDE DISTRIBUTION UNITS WHERE MORE THAN ONE TRAP IS SERVED BY A PRIMER. PRIMER MAY BE LOCATED ABOVE CEILING WHERE ACCESSIBLE. IF LOCATED IN A CHASE OR WALL, PROVIDE A HINGED, LOCKABLE, PRIME COATED ACCESS DOOR IN AN ACCESSIBLE BUT INCONSPICUOUS PLACE. A, • •:II 10 — FLOOR DRAIN OR FLOOR SINK P -TRAP WITH TRAP PRIMER CONNECTION. DETAIL SHOWS TRAP PRIMER INSTALLATION CONGEALED FOR PUBLIC AREAS, SUCH AS TOILETS. IN NON - PUBLIC AREAS, SUCH AS EQUIPMENT ROOMS, TRAP PRIMERS MAY BE INSTALLED THIS WAY ALSO, OR IN EASILY - ACCESSIBLE, EXPOSED BUT INCONSPICUOUS LOCATIONS, THEREBY OMITTING THE ACCESS DOOR. INSULATION ONLY ABOVE GROUND ON "M" OR "L" COPPER. DoQ Os';? 12 V r. „ PI M i RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY 19 2009 PERMIT CENTER SEPARAT PFasA„s ... APP R QU1R4n NENIMr COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: L. CD C c C w a. 3 C N t tip u °� a - 0 - +S 4 0U 3 N 5. I' u Zaj U Al 0. > to to to W L I- W W zleg e Lucg z Zi 0 z —tip W Lu—IPNA 2 o . 1 z 0 XX.XX.XX SHEET: 1/4" = 1' -0" STAFF P-2 T MOO Wi00 c1 rn v CO 0 0 cc N N 0 U t t 0 z in E O U t T 7 ? AT SOUTHCENTER MALL SAP #449 SOUTHCENTER MALL SPACE 975 & 977 TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 TOTAL LEASED AREA: 1,749 SQ. FT. TOTAL RETAIL AREA: 1,139 SQ. FT. TOTAL INCIDENTAL USE AREA: 610 SQ. FT. TENANT IMPROVEMENT PLAYGROUND CONCEPT Project #TM009009 ORIGINAL ISSUE - 05.22.09 ITC cibe Timothy G. Pleger RA AIA 16435 North Scottsdale Road Suite 195 Donald J. Hasulak RA ADA Scottsdale Arizona 85254 T +1 480 998 4200 F +1 480 998 7223 www.fitch.com ur 22 . 09 SEPARATE PERMIT REQUIRED FOR: I 'Mechanical ►y' d Electrical Plumbing Gas Piping City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION REVISIONS No changes shall be made to the scope of work without prior approval of Tukwila Building Division. NOTE: Revisions will require a new plan submittal and may include additional plan review fees. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED JUN 0 4 2009 A v City of T wile BUILDING DIVISION FILE COPY Permit No._ ..2 ' ° 1 Plan review approval is subject to errors and omissions. Approval of construction documents does not authorize the violation of any adopted code or ordinance. Receipt of approved Field Copy and conditions Is acknowledged: By _ -- Date 7• / 1 - 6 - ) 2 0 7 City Of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY ;2i 9 2009 PERMIT CENTER Ei-ai '1)09 0 VI INSTALLED BY: -1 tl W AB ACT ACC AW ACOUST ADJ AHJ AL,ALUM ALT AP APPROX ARCH AW B BD BG BLDG BLK BLKG BM BOT COL COM CONC COND CONSTR CONT CONTR CORR CPT, C CT CTR D DET DIA DIFF DIM DISP DO DR DWG(S) DWR D1 Al NTS ANCHOR BOLT ACOUSTICAL CEILING ACCESSORY HUTCH ACOUSTICAL WALLCOVERING ACOUSTICAL ADJACENT, ADJUSTABLE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION ALUMINUM ALTERNATE ACCESS PANEL APPROXIMATE ARCHITECTURAL AWNING FABRIC BASE BOARD BUMPER GUARD BUILDING BLOCK BLOCKING BEAM BOTTOM CAB CABINET CB CONCRETE BLOCK CEM CEMENT CER CERAMIC CF CONCRETE FINISH CG CORNER GUARD CJ CONTROL JOINT CKT CIRCUIT CL CLOSET CLKG CAULKING CLG, CEIL CEILING CLR CLEAR CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT COLUMN CUSTOM HUTCH CONCRETE CONDITION CONSTRUCTION CONTINUOUS CONTRACTOR CORRIDOR CARPET CERAMIC TILE CENTER DOWN DETAIL DIAMETER DIFFUSER DIMENSION DISPENSER DOOR OPENING DOOR DRAWING, DRAWINGS DRAWER E EAST EA EACH EIFS EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM EJ EXPANSION JOINT EL, ELEV ELEVATION ELEC ELECTRIC, ELECTRICAL ELEV ELEVATOR EMER EMERGENCY ENCL ENCLOSURE EQUIP EQUIPMENT EWC ELECTRIC WATER COOLER EXH EXHAUST EXIST EXISTING EXP EXPANSION, EXPOSED EXT EXTERIOR FA FIRE ALARM FB FLAT BAR FD FLOOR DRAIN FDN FOUNDATION FE FIRE EXTINGUISHER FEC FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET FIN FINISH FIX, FIXT FIXTURE FL, FLR FLOOR FLASH FLUOR FOC FOF FOS FOW FR FRP FRT FT FURR G GROUT GA GAUGE GALV GALVANIZED GB GRAB BAR GEN GENERATOR GL GLASS GND,GRND GROUND GWB GYPSUM WALLBOARD GYP GYPSUM HB HC HD HDWE HDWR HM HORIZ HR HT HVAC ID IN INSUL INT JAN JHA JST JT KIT KP LAM LAV LL LT MIR MISC MO M /R M TD MTG MUL N NEO NIC NO NOM N TS OA OBS OC OD OFF OPNG VICINITY MAP TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 2 FLASHING FLUORESCENT FACE OF CONCRETE FACE OF FINISH FACE OF STUDS FACE OF WALL FIRE RATED /RETARDANT FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYESTER PANEL FIRE RETARDANT TREATED FOOT, FEET FURRING HOSE BIBB HANDICAPPED HEAD HARDWOOD HARDWARE HOLLOW METAL HORIZONTAL HOUR HEIGHT HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING INSIDE DIAMETER INCH INSULATION INTERIOR KITCHEN KICK PLATE ABBREVIATIONS JANITOR JURISDICTION HAVING AUTHORITY JOIST JOINT LAMINATE, LAMINATED LAVATORY LANDLORD LIGHT M MOLDING MACH MACHINE MATL MATERIAL MAX MAXIMUM MECH MECHANICAL MEMB MEMBRANE MET, MTL METAL MFR MANUFACTURER MH MANHOLE MIN MINIMUM MIRROR MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY OPENING MOISTURE RESISTANT MOUNTED MEETING, MOUNTING MULLION NORTH NEOPRENE NOT IN CONTRACT NUMBER NOMINAL NOT TO SCALE OVERALL OBSCURE ON CENTER OUTSIDE DIAMETER OFFICE OPENING 2 OPP P PL P. LAM, PL PLAS PLYWD PNL PP PR PROP P.T. PT PTD PTN PWR QT QTY RF RM RO RWL S SC SCHED SD SECT SF SH SHT SI M SL SPEC SQ SST ST STD STL STOR STRUCT SUSP SYM T TEL TELCO TEMP THK TMO TOS TOW TT TYP UNF UON VCT VERT VEST VWC W W/ WC WD WDO WF WM W/0 WP WR WT OPPOSITE PAINT PLATE QUARRY TILE QUANTITY R RISER RAD, R RADIUS RD ROOF DRAIN REFL REFLECTED REINF REINFORCED REQ, REQD REQUIRED RESIL RESILIENT 5 PLASTIC LAMINATE PLASTER PLYWOOD PANEL, PANEL BOARD PREFINISHED PANELS PAIR PROJ PROJECT PROPERTY PRESSURE TREATED POINT PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER PARTITION POWER RESILIENT FLOORING ROOM ROUGH OPENING RAIN WATER LEADER SOUTH SOLID CORE SCHEDULE SOAP DISPENSER SECTION SQUARE FEET SHELF SHEET SIMILAR SLIDING SPECIFICATION SQUARE STAINLESS STEEL STAIN STANDARD STEEL STORAGE STRUCTURAL SUSPENDED SYMMETRICAL TILE TELEPHONE TELE— COMMUNICATIONS TEMPERED THICK, THICKNESS T— MOBILE TOP OF STEEL TOP OF WALL TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER TYPICAL UNFINISHED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED VINYL COMPOSITION TILE VERTICAL VESTIBULE VINYL WALLCOVERING WEST WITH WALL COVERING, WATER CLOSET WOOD WINDOW WOOD FLOOR WALK —OFF MAT WITHOUT WATERPROOF WATER RESISTANT WEIGHT 5 DOOR SHEET NOTES FIXTURE / FURNITURE TAG EXISTING DOOR / PARTITION KEY PARTITION TYPES COLUMN REFERENCE GRIDS OR INTERIOR ELEVATION INDICATOR P - 1 FINISHES / FINISH NUMBER ROOM NAME ROOM 101 `DETAIL) DETAIL 4 ROOM NUMBER SECTION NUMBER SHEET NUMBER DETAIL NUMBER SHEET NUMBER D3 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS NTS SOUTHCENTER MALL 4 ITEM 5 LOW VOLTAGE: (POS, TELEPHONE, SECURITY, AUDIO SYSTEM) LOW VOLTAGE CONDUIT LOW VOLTAGE WIRING TELEPHONE SYSTEM HARDWARE SECURITY SYSTEM HARDWARE AUDIO SYSTEM HARDWARE BACK -OF -HOUSE ITEMS: MICROWAVE LOCKERS SAFE MANAGER'S DESK CASEWORK KITCHENETTE CASEWORK (INCLUDING SINK) TRAINING STATION(S) FILE CABINET WHITE BOARD CART TABLE AND CHAIRS UNDER CABINET REFRIGERATOR WATER COOLER EQUIPMENT CABINET INVENTORY ROOM SHELVING INVENTORY ROOM PEG BOARD PRINTER QUEST CONTROLS MOP HOLDER MANAGER'S CHAIR RETAIL AREA (SALES FLOOR) ITEMS: SALES AND DISPLAY FIXTURES FURNITURE VIDEO WALL MONITORS VIDEO WALL MONITOR BRACKETS BILL PAY KIOSK SECURITY SHUTTER WINDOW FILM CUSTOMER TRACKING SYSTEM INTERIOR SIGNAGE CARPET WOOD BASE (IF USED) WINDOW WRAP 5 FURNISHED BY: 6 GC OWNER LL • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • A3 KEY PLAN GC OWNER LL • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • A6 ITEM -r DOORS AND HARDWARE: INTERIOR DOORS / FRAMES / HARDWARE STOREFRONT DOORS / FRAME / HARDWARE STOREFRONT ENTRY DOOR LOCKS REAR EXIT DOOR / FRAME / HARDWARE REAR EXIT DOOR SECURE EXIT HARDWARE INVENTORY ROOM LOCKS INVENTORY ROOM DOOR/FRAME PREP CORES / KEYING RESTROOM ACCESSORIES: MIRROR PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER GRAB BARS SEAT COVER DISPENSER COAT HOOK WASTE RECEPTACLE MISCELLANEOUS: LIGHT FIXTURES (THROUGHOUT) FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (IF REQUIRED) FIRE EXTINGUISHER(S) EXTERIOR SIGNAGE ACCESS PANELS DEMISING WALL STUDS DEMISING WALL/GYP GENERAL FURRING INTERIOR MALLS: NEUTRAL PIERS REVEALS MALL FLOORING FURNISHED BY: GC OWNER LL • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A NOTES: - UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, ALL CONSTRUCTION IS BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR - "OWNER" SHALL MEAN T- MOBILE OR T- MOBILE VENDOR. 8 INSTALLED BY: GC OWNER I LL • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • D4 RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX 1. PROJECT DESCRIPTION: 2. PROJECT LOCATION: 3. GOVERNING CODES: ALL WORK SHALL BE IN CONFORMANCE WITH, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE FOLLOWING: AND ANY OTHER STATE AND LOCAL CODES HAVING JURISDICTION. 4. CONSTRUCTION TYPE: 5. OCCUPANCY: 6. GROSS LEASED PREMISES: 7. OCCUPANT LOAD: 8. EXIT REQUIREMENTS: 9. EXIT ILLUMINATION: 10. MUNICIPAL REVIEW: It WORK BY OTHERS UNDER SEPARATE PERMIT: TENANT IMPROVEMENT MOBILE PHONE & SERVICE SALES (RETAIL) SOUTHCENTER MALL 633 SOUTHCENTER MALL SPACE 975 & 977 TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 BUILDING: MECHANICAL: PLUMBING: ELECTRICAL: ENERGY: HANDICAP: FIRE: 1,749 SQ. FT II —B (FULLY SPRINKLERED) M (MERCANTILE) PUBLIC AREA: BACK —OF— HOUSE: ACCESSORY: (HALLWAY TOILET ROOM(S) WINDOW DISPLAY) TOTAL NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS = CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 SOUTHCENTER BLVD, #100 TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 PHONE: (206) 431 -3670 SIGNAGE FIRE SPRINKLER DRAWINGS FIRE ALARM 2006 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE 2006 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE 2006 UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE 2005 NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE 2006 WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE ANSI 117.1 2006 INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE 1,139 491 119 S.F. ± 30 = 38 S.F. = 300 = 2 0 TWO EXITS REQUIRED WHEN OCCUPANT LOAD IS GREATER THAN 50 OR COMMON PATH OF TRAVEL EXCEEDS 75 FT. ONE EXITS REQUIRED. ONE EXITS PROVIDED. EMERGENCY EXIT ILLUMINATION SHALL BE PROVIDED AS SHOWN ON SHEET E2. 40 CODE NOTES 10 A. ALL WORK AND MATERIALS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL CODES HAVING JURISDICTION. B. ALL WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE BUILDING MANAGEMENT'S RULES AND REGULATIONS. C. MODIFICATIONS TO THE BASE BUILDING STRUCTURE, CORE AREAS AND UTILITY SYSTEMS ARE NOT IN THIS CONTRACT, EXCEPT AS NOTED ON THESE DRAWINGS OR AS REQUIRED TO COMPLETE THE WORK INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS. D. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ALL ARRANGEMENTS AND PAY FOR ALL FEES, CHARGES AND PERMITS REQUIRED AS WELL AS FOR HAULING, RIGGING AND TRANSPORTATION CHARGES. E. THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS CONSIST OF THE AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR (HEREINAFTER REFERRED TO AS THE AGREEMENT) WITH CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT (GENERAL, SUPPLEMENTARY AND OTHER CONDITIONS). DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, ADDENDA ISSUED PRIOR TO THE EXECUTION OF THE AGREEMENT, OTHER DOCUMENTS LISTED IN THE AGREEMENT AND MODIFICATIONS ISSUED AFTER EXECUTION OF THE AGREEMENT. F. THE INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IS TO INCLUDE ALL ITEMS NECESSARY FOR THE PROPER EXECUTION AND COMPLETION OF THE WORK BY THE CONTRACTORS. PERFORMANCE BY THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE REQUIRED ONLY TO EXTENT CONSISTENT WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND REASONABLY INFERABLE FROM THEM AS BEING NECESSARY TO PRODUCE THE INTENDED RESULTS. G. THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SHALL NOT BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE A CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP OF ANY KIND (1) BETWEEN THE ARCHITECT AND CONTRACTOR, (2) BETWEEN THE OWNER AND A SUBCONTRACTOR OR SUB — SUBCONTRACTOR, OR (3) BETWEEN ANY PERSONS OR ENTITIES OTHER THAN THE OWNER AND CONTRACTOR. H. EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT BY CONTRACTOR IS A REPRESENTATION THAT THE CONTRACTOR HAS VISITED THE SITE AND HAS BECOME FAMILIAR WITH THE LOCAL CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH THE WORK IS TO BE PERFORMED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS BEFORE COMMENCING WORK AND SHALL NOTIFY ARCHITECT AND /OR ENGINEER IF A CONDITION EXISTS WHICH PREVENTS THE CONTRACTOR FROM ACCOMPLISHING THE INTENT OF THE DRAWINGS. I. THE TERM "WORK" MEANS THE CONSTRUCTION AND SERVICES REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, WHETHER COMPLETED OR PARTIALLY COMPLETED, AND INCLUDES ALL OTHER LABOR, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SERVICES PROVIDED OR TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR TO FULFILL THE CONTRACTOR'S OBLIGATIONS. THE WORK MAY CONSTITUTE THE WHOLE OR PART OF THE PROJECT. F9 GENERAL NOTES CLIENT (OWNER): T - Mobile 12920 SE 38th STREET, 4th FLOOR BELLEVUE, WASHINGTON 98006 CONSTRUCTION PROJECT MANAGER: JOHNSON CONTROLS INC. 12920 SE 38th STREET, 4th FLOOR BELLEVUE, WASHINGTON 98006 CONTACT: TICE HAMBLET PHONE: (425) 297 -3824 EMAIL: Tice.Hamblet0T— Mobile.com LANDLORD CONTACT: WESTFIELD 11601 WILSHIRE BLVD, 14TH FLOOR LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA 90024 CONTACT: JOSH KIMMEL PHONE: (818) 559 -9501 ARCHITECT OF RECORD: FITCH 16435 NORTH SCOTTSDALE ROAD SUITE 195 SCOTTSDALE, ARIZONA PHONE: 480.998.4200 FAX: 480.998.7223 CONTACT: SHANE MOLNAR E —MAIL: shane.molnar©fitch.com ENGINEERING FIRM: DON PENN CONSULTING ENGINEER 635 WESTPORT PARKWAY SUITE 300 GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051 PHONE: 817.410.2858 FAX: 817.251.8411 CONTACT: BRANDON BALLINGER E —MAIL: bballinger©donpenn.com A9 PROJECT TEAM 10 11 12 1. BUILDING IS SPRINKLERED. GC TO PROVIDE SPRINKLER DESIGN/ BUILD DRAWINGS BY A CERTIFIED SPRINKLER INSTALLER AND OBTAIN PERMIT. 2. PROVIDE OCCUPANCY SIGNS CONFORMING TO APPLICABLE BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS. 3. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL EXIT SIGNS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS IN TYPE, NUMBER AND LOCATION AS DIRECTED BY THE FIRE DEPARTMENT FIELD INSPECTOR. 4. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY, COORDINATE AND /OR INSTALL ANY SMOKE DETECTION AND /OR FIRE ALARM CONNECTORS AS REQUIRED PER GOVERNING MUNICIPALITY. PROVIDE DESIGN BUILD DRAWINGS FOR SEPARATE APPROVAL. 5. PROVIDE ANY REQUIRED FIRE DAMPER ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING SLEEVES AND INSTALLATION. PROCEDURES SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE BUILDING INSPECTOR PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 6 PROVIDE FIRE DAMPER WITH FUSIBLE LINK WHEREVER DUCT WORK PENETRATES 1 —HR WALL, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 7. ALL REQUIRED PERMITS AND APPROVALS MUST BE OBTAINED FROM THE FIRE DEPARTMENT BEFORE SPACE IS OCCUPIED. 8. DURING CONSTRUCTION, THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS TO PROVIDE A PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER WITH A RATING OF NOT LESS THAN 2 —A WITHIN 75 FOOT TRAVEL DISTANCE TO ALL PORTIONS OF THE SPACE. 9. CONTACT OPERATING MANAGER REGARDING FIRE ALARM REQUIREMENTS AND INSTALLATION. INSTALLATION AND DEVICES AT GC'S EXPENSE. TENANTS SPACE MUST MEET A.D.A. FIRE ALARM REQUIREMENTS. Gil FIRE DEPT. NOTES REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED JUN 0 4 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION 1 DWG. # COVER A -0 A -1 A -1.1 A -2 A -3 A -4 A -5 A -8 A -6.1 A -6.2 A -7 A -8 A -9 A -10 A -11 A -12 A -13 A -14 A -15 A -16 A -17 M -1 M -2 M -3 E -1 E -2 E -3 E -4 E -5 E -6 E -7 E -8 E -9 P -1 P -2 All 11 DRAWING TITLE ARCHITECTURE COVER ARCHITECTURAL DATA SHEET EXIST. CONDITION & DEMOLITION PLAN BARRICADE PLAN & ELEVATION FLOOR PLAN REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FIXTURE PLAN DOOR SCHEDULE MALL STOREFRONT ELEVATIONS MALL STOREFRONT SECTIONS MALL STOREFRONT DETAILS INTERIOR ELEVATIONS TOILET ROOM PLAN, ELEV, AND DETAILS ADA ACCESSBLITY DETAILS DOOR DETAILS BASE AND FLOORING DETAILS CEILING DETAILS INTERIOR DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS ENGINEERING MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN MECHANICAL LEGEND & DETALS QUEST CONTROL SYSTEM LEGEND & SCHEDULES LIGHTING FLOOR PLAN POWER FLOOR PLAN SIGNAL FLOOR PLAN DETAILS & ONE -LINE DETAILS & ELEVATIONS LUMINAIRE AIMING DETAILS QUEST CONTROLS QUEST CONTROLS PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING DETAILS RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY Ora 2n0a MI DRAWING INDEX 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright proteotion as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. rr 0 O 0 0 c 1- o � o L ? aj m w o VW Cu- o rn � sm 449 AI ra ▪ m c eo 0 w 4• 41) i N an u -v 4.0 O �. in a z m to as II a- n Z 0 11A1 2t '09 m N 00 rn rn 0 E 0 s 4: DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 05.22.OQ SHEET: TMOOQOOQ NTS A-0 DG 1I 111 J CORRIDOR ADJACENT TENANT ADJACENT TENANT MALL REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVE JUN 0 4 2009 C 1 D SOWN D1 1/4"=1'-o" 2 4 5 7 EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DEMOLITION PLAN 2 5 4 0 EXISTING STOREFROTN SYSTEM TO BE REMOVED BY LANDLORD. O EXISTING DEMISING WALL TO REMAIN. PATCH AND REPAIR AS REQUIRED. O EXISTING STRUCTURAL COLUMN AND ENCLOSURE TO REMAIN. PREPARE FOR NEW PAINT FINISH. O EXISTING SERVICE DOOR TO REMAIN. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE FOR NEW HARDWARE. O LEASE LINE O EXISTING SERVICE DOOR TO BE WELDED SHUT. REMOVE ALL HARDWARE. O EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR SURFACE PREPARE FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW FLOORING MATERIALS AS INDICATED IN THESE PLANS. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL FLOOR PREPARATION NOTES. O EXISTING INTERIOR WALL PARTITION TO BE REMOVED BY LANDLORD. O EXISTING TOILET ROOM TO BE REMOVED BY LANDLORD. EXISTING 2" SPRINKLER LINE @ 14' -6" A.F.F. EXISTING 2" SPRINKLER LINE @ 14' -0" A.F.F. 0 EXISTING 4" SPRINKLER MAIN @ I2' -6" A.F.F. 0 EXISTING ELECTRICAL PANEL TO BE REMOVED BY LANDLORD 14 EXISTING DUCT WORK TO BE REMOVED BY LANDLORD 0 m A5 KEYED NOTES 5 7 8 REMOVE ALL ITEMS AS INDICATED ON PLANS. 2. CARE SHALL BE TAKEN DURING DEMOLITION SO AS NOT TO DAMAGE OR ALTER ANY EXISTING STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. THE ARCHITECT AND OWNER SHALL BE NOTIFIED IMMEDIATELY IF ANY DAMAGE OCCURS OR IS DISCLOSED DURING DEMOLITION. B. IN ALL WALLS AND CEILINGS THAT ARE REMOVED, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR DISCONNECTING AT SOURCE AND REMOVING OR GAPPING ANY ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING, GAS LINES AND MECHANICAL DUCTWORK THAT IS DISCLOSED AND NOT SCHEDULED FOR REUSE. REROUTE AND CONTINUE ANY SYSTEM THAT MUST SE RETAINED FOR ADJACENT BUILDING AREAS THAT ARE NOT IN THIS CONTRACT. 4. ALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS FOR EQUIPMENT THAT IS TO BE REMOVED SHALL BE DISCONNECTED AT SOURCE AND REMOVED. 5. ALL GAS, WATER AND DRAIN LINES SUPPLYING EQUIPMENT THAT IS TO BE REMOVED SHALL BE DISCONNECTED, REMOVED AND GAPPED ABOVE CEILING OR BELOW FLOOR. IF CONTINUITY OF SYSTEM MUST BE MAINTAINED FOR USE BY ADJACENT AREAS, CONTRACTOR SHALL REROUTE, AS NECESSARY, TO BE BEHIND NEW CONSTRUCTION. (PATCH FLOOR BACK PRIOR TO TOPPING) 6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVING FROM THE SITE, ALL RUBBLE AND DEBRIS CAUSED BY DEMOLITION, AND DISPOSING OF IT IN A PROPER MANNER. 1. DEMISING PARTITION WORK TO BE REMOVED SHALL BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH LANDLORD'S CRITERIA. ALL INTERIOR DEMOLITION WORK TO Be BY TENANT'S G.G. 5. REMOVE OR RELOCATE ANY SPRINKLER/SEWER/PLUMBING LINES, AS REQUIRED, IN FIELD PER LANDLORD'S AND /OR LOCAL AUTHORITY APPROVALS. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE WITH THE OWNER AND ARCHITECT AS TO THE DISPOSITION OF ALL ITEMS TO BE REMOVED. 10. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PATCH AND REPAIR ALL CEILINGS, WALLS AND FLOORS, AS REQUIRED, TO RECEIVE NEW FINISHES. (G.G. TO MAINTAIN I -HOUR FIRE RATED CONSTRUCTION THROUGHOUT TENANT'S SPACE WHEN REQUIRED). A8 I0 GENERAL NOTES S I0 GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND /OR SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL REVIEW THE EXISTING FACILITY TO DETERMINE THE EXTENT OF DEMOLITION REQUIRED TO INSTALL THE NEW WORK. A WRITTEN OUTLINE OF ALL REQUIRED DEMOLITION SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE OWNER DESCRIBING THE FOLLOWING (BUT NOT LIMITED TO). I. CONDITION OF EXISTING POWER PANELS AND TRANSFORMERS; FEASIBILITY FOR RELOCATION AND REFURBISHING, OR NEED FOR REPLACEMENT DUE TO AGE OR EXISTING CONDITION. 2. CONDITION OF EXISTING GYP. BD. ON EXISTING DEMISING WALLS AND RECOMMENDATION OF WHETHER TO REMOVE EXISTING OR REUSE TO BE DETERMINED IN FIELD. 3. CONDITION OF EXISTING MECHANICAL SYSTEM; FEASIBILITY OF REUSING, RELOCATION, OR RE- FURBISHING EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND DUCTWORK; AND RECOMMENDATION OF REPLACEMENT, IF NECESSARY, PRIOR TO BID. 4. SUMMARIZE RECOMMENDATIONS FOR REUSE OF EXISTING MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES, ONCE REFURBISHED TO A LIKE -NEW CONDITION, ITEMIZE THE CREDIT TO THE CONTRACT. 5. TENANT G.G SHALL NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY UN -NOTED EXISTING CONDITION WHICH GONFLICTS WITH THE PROJECT REQUIREMENTS AND MAY REQUIRE MODIFICATION, RELOCATION OR REMOVAL TO COMPLETE THE PROJECT WITHIN 24 HOURS 50 THE NECESSARY DRAWING REVISIONS MAY BE INCORPORATED INTO THE PROJECT REQUIREMENTS. 6. IN ADDITION TO THE ABOVE, REFER TO GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES INDICATED ON SHEET A -14, DIVISION 2 - DEMOLITION /BUILDING ALTERATION. DPI -o89 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY i Q iuuy PERMIT CENTER All REMOVAL SUMMARY 12 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to oopyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. to mu 1. c ita CI E al ta riff CL VI VI DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 449 N Z 0 DATE: 05.22.0 SHEET: SCALE: T MOO 11A1 22 1! a g g , 2 a � 6 = O to E C 1= G m N N rn rn 0 ur 1/4" =1' -0" DG A -1 2 o tr O O et o< GI I/4 " =1' -0" Cl 1/2 " =1' -0" BARRICADE ELEVATION Al TENANT 3/4" PLYWOOD WITH NON- ABBRASIVE I /4 "± CUSHION BACKING (I.E. STYROFOAM, CARPET, CARPET PADDING, ETC.) TAPE JOINTS TO PREVENT DUST PASS -THRU FLOOR SLAB 3 T 2" x 4" PLATE SECURE FRAMING A5 REQUIRED FOR LATERAL STABILITY. 5/8" GYP BD (INT) OR 5/8" EXTERIOR GRADE PLYWOOD (EXT) ON 3 -5/8" x 25ga METAL STUDS 0 24" OC. LEASE LINE MALL 3 -5/8" X 2590 METAL TRACK; SECURE TO 2" x 4" PLATE 2" x 4" PLATE - SECURE TO PLYWOOD FROM UNDERSIDE. FASTENERS TO BE SET FLUSH. MINMINION010000010111::::: A. l A A. A. 6' -0" TYP. Stink loge 6' -6" 'ref". oming oort prin dream together I REMOVE ALL ITEMS AS INDICATED ON PLANS. 2. CARE SHALL BE TAKEN DURING DEMOLITION 50 AS NOT TO DAMAGE OR ALTER ANY EXISTING STRUCTURAL MEMBERS, THE ARCHITECT AND OWNER SHALL BE NOTIFIED IMMEDIATELY IF ANY DAMAGE OCCURS OR IS DISCLOSED DURING DEMOLITION. 3. IN ALL WALLS AND CEILINGS THAT ARE REMOVED, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR DISCONNECTING AT SOURCE AND REMOVING OR GAPPING ANY ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING, GAS LINES AND MECHANICAL DUCTWORK THAT IS DISCLOSED AND NOT SCHEDULED FOR REUSE. REROUTE AND CONTINUE ANY SYSTEM THAT MUST BE RETAINED FOR ADJACENT BUILDING AREAS THAT ARE NOT IN THIS CONTRACT. 4. ALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS FOR EQUIPMENT THAT I5 TO BE REMOVED SHALL BE DISCONNECTED AT SOURCE AND REMOVED. 5. ALL GAS, WATER AND DRAIN LINES SUPPLYING EQUIPMENT THAT I5 TO BE REMOVED SHALL BE DISCONNECTED, REMOVED AND CAPPED ABOVE CEILING OR BELOW FLOOR. IF CONTINUITY OF SYSTEM MUST BE MAINTAINED FOR USE BY ADJACENT AREAS, CONTRACTOR SHALL REROUTE, AS NECESSARY, TO BE BEHIND NEW CONSTRUCTION. (PATCH FLOOR BACK PRIOR TO TOPPING.) 6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVING FROM THE SITE, ALL RUBBLE AND DEBRIS CAUSED BY DEMOLITION, AND DISPOSING OF IT IN A PROPER MANNER. 1. DEMISING PARTITION WORK TO BE REMOVED SHALL BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH LANDLORD'S CRITERIA. ALL INTERIOR DEMOLITION WORK TO BE BY TENANT'S G.G. S. REMOVE OR RELOCATE ANY SPRINKLER/SEWER/PLUMBING LINES, AS REQUIRED, IN FIELD PER LANDLORD'S AND /OR LOCAL AUTHORITY APPROVALS. . GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE WITH THE OWNER AND ARCHITECT AS TO THE DISPOSITION OF ALL ITEMS TO BE REMOVED. 10. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PATCH AND REPAIR ALL CEILINGS, WALLS AND FLOORS, AS REQUIRED, TO RECEIVE NEW FINISHES. (G.G. TO MAINTAIN I -HOUR FIRE RATED CONSTRUCTION THROUGHOUT TENANT'S SPACE WHEN REQUIRED). C6 I/2 " =1' -0" A6 I/2 " =1' -0" GENERAL NOTES i{F.:a„rt, d:itfi;frdC:lt1 BARRICADE PLAN GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND /OR SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL REVIEW THE EXISTING FACILITY TO DETERMINE THE EXTENT OF DEMOLITION REQUIRED TO INSTALL THE NEW WORK. A WRITTEN OUTLINE OF ALL REQUIRED DEMOLITION SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE OWNER DESCRIBING THE FOLLOWING (BUT NOT LIMITED TO). I. CONDITION OF EXISTING POWER PANELS AND TRANSFORMERS; FEASIBILITY FOR RELOCATION AND REFURBISHING, OR NEED FOR REPLACEMENT DUE TO AGE OR EXISTING CONDITION. 2. CONDITION OF EXISTING GYP. BD. ON EXISTING DEMISING WALLS AND RECOMMENDATION OF WHETHER TO REMOVE EXISTING OR REUSE TO BE DETERMINED IN FIELD. 3. CONDITION OF EXISTING MECHANICAL SYSTEM; FEASIBILITY OF REUSING, RELOCATION, OR RE- FURBISHING EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND DUCTWORK; AND RECOMMENDATION OF REPLACEMENT, IF NECESSARY, PRIOR TO BID. 4. SUMMARIZE RECOMMENDATIONS FOR REUSE OF EXISTING MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES, ONCE REFURBISHED TO A LIKE -NEW CONDITION, ITEMIZE THE CREDIT TO THE CONTRACT. 5. TENANT G.G. SHALL NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY UN -NOTED EXISTING CONDITION WHICH CONFLICTS WITH THE PROJECT REQUIREMENTS AND MAY REQUIRE MODIFICATION, RELOCATION OR REMOVAL TO COMPLETE THE PROJECT WITHIN 24 HOURS SO THE NECESSARY DRAWING REVISIONS MAY BE INCORPORATED INTO THE PROJECT REQUIREMENTS. 6. IN ADDITION TO THE ABOVE, REFER TO GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES INDICATED ON SHEET A -14, DIVISION 2 - DEMOLITION / BUILDING ALTERATION. 1/2 " =1' -0" 8 1 REMOVAL SUMMARY q 10 10 8. I I �1. 12 JUN 04 2009 City nf 71,s l TENANT GC TO FURNISH AND CONSTRUCT A TEMPORARY BARRICADES) OF 3 -5/8" X 2090 METAL STUDS 0 24" OG WITH (I) LAYER OF 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP BD (MALL SIDE) TAPED, SPAGKLED AND SANDED SMOOTH. INSTALL GYP BD ON TOP OF BARRICADE, BACK TO MALL BULKHEAD, TO CREATE DUST - PROOF= CONDITION. BARRICADES ARE TO BE ADEQUATELY SECURED AND BRACED TO MALL BULKHEAD FRAMING FOR LATERAL STABILITY AND MUST BE STRUCTURALLY SOUND NOTE: FOR EXTERIOR LOCATIONS (EXPOSED TO WEATHER), TENANT GC TO SUPPLY AND INSTALL 5/8" EXTERIOR GRADE PLYWOOD ON VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL SURFACES (IN LIEU OF GYP BD). 2. PAINT - (I) GOAT PRIMER AND (2) GOATS P -I. 3. TENANT GC TO COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF GRAPHIC WITH TENANT'S VENDOR 4. TENANT GC 15 RESPONSIBLE FOR MAINTAINING BARRICADE DURING CONSTRUCTION. 5. TENANT GC TO CONSULT WITH MALL REPRESENTATIVE FOR HOURS IN WHICH WORK ON BARRICADE CAN OCCUR. 6. REMOVE BARRICADE WHEN 100% OF STOREFRONT 15 COMPLETE OR A MINIMUM OF (2) NIGHTS PRIOR TO OPENING. CARE 15 TO BE TAKEN WHEN DISASSEMBLING AND REMOVING BARRICADE. PAPER WINDOWS WITH GRAFT CONSTRUCTION PAPER OVER GLAZING ONLY. TRIM 1/2" OFF EDGES AND TAPE CONTINUOUSLY AROUND PERIMETER WITH WHITE TAPE. TENANT GC TO RESTORE MALL FLOORING, NEUTRAL PIERS, AND BULKHEAD TO A 'LIKE NEW' CONDITION AND FINISH. ALL DELIVERIES TO SPACE DURING MALL HOURS SHALL BE MADE THROUGH SECONDARY EXIT. BARRICADE DOORS FOR FIXTURE AND OVERSIZED MATERIAL DELIVERY AFTER MALL HOURS. IF BARRICADE 15 EXISTING, TENANT GC IS TO PREPARE FACE OF BARRICADE PER TENANT'S STANDARDS FOR GRAPHIC INSTALLATION. 10. BARRICADE IS TO BE 10036 COMPLETE AND READY FOR TENANT'S GRAPHICS TO BE INSTALLED NOT MORE THAN FOUR DAYS AFTER CONSTRUCTION START. TENANT GC TO CONTACT CONSTRUCTION MANAGER UPON COMPLETION TO COORDINATE GRAPHIC INSTALLATION WITH GRAPHIC VENDOR. C10 1/2 " =1'-O" TEMPORARY BARRICADE NOTES OT �39 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY_ 2/9 7009 PERMIT CEPS 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE; These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as on "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright act, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result in cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 449 ` m CV IC V IV ^ an c V t0 El . 8 CP/ m M to to CL t0 VI VI v1 z 0 N 5 DATE: 0.22.0t SHEET: 1/4 " =1' -0" DG A -1.1 TM00g00q 1A1 ot nv m N N Ln al co m N 01 H - a .- ct w N cu 0 IP V .° E _C • o w p u titnI - B a T- !t- IW La VGT -1 VGT -I LEASE LINE ELECT. PANEL LOC. SEE ELECT. DWGS. VGT -1 INVENTORY BACK OF HOUSE HALLWAY 8 °i fisF,im t 3 3. 1` a fT1a Diaz =11=fM= LEASE LINE 15' -10 1/4" 20' -0" NOTE: AREA DENOTES 44" ACCESSIBLE ROUTE SALES AREA VGT -I ADJACENT TENANT 3I' -8 1/4" LEASE LINE ,etr�r �II�e3I�W. �e>r uo r ?a? . 4147,e tee ,, . veil t a yis v.3�.:i?dv,�...t3s+ , r 31 tiat 3 ALIGN . 44". 5I' -10" s]TJ Danz vw d4ft£�ai f:F:cs k I CPT -1 1 CORRIDOR ADJACENT TENANT Bl D1 FLOOR PLAN 1/4 " =1' -0" CPT -1 CPT -2 CPT -3 CPT -4 FT -1 LVT -1 ML -1 DESCRIPTION SALES AREA, HALLWAYS, SALES AREA COLUMNS, AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS - PAINT: BENJAMIN MOORE 4 COMPANY COLOR: #2136 -10 - "WHISPERING SPRING" FINISH WALLS: EGGSHELL FINISH DOOR FRAMES: DTM LATEX SEMI -GLOSS SALES FLOOR - CARPET: (T- MOBILE PLAYGROUND) MFR: J4J; REG # 152- 54161'1- 002 -10; 100% NYLON: ENCORE®SD / ANTRON LUMENA ®; TEXTURED LOOP; 24 "X24 "; SOLUTION DYED; PRIMARY BACKING: NEXUS® MODULAR; SECONDARY BACKING: EKOTM' MODULAR SALES FLOOR - CARPET: (T- MOBILE GRASS) MFR: J *J; REQ # a82- 54161°1- 001 -1a; 100% NYLON: ENCORE®SD / ANTRON LUMENA ®; PATTERNED LOOP; 24 "X24 "; SOLUTION DYED PRIMARY BACKING: NEXUS® MODULAR; SECONDARY BACKING: EKOTM' MODULAR ENTRANCE - CARPET WALK -OFF MAT: RUNAWAY MODULAR: STYLE ( COLOR: 1421 FRESH FACE SIZE: 24" X 24" FIBER CONTENT: 100% NYLON: J8J ENSORE SD ULTIMA® (WITH RECYCLED CONTENT), TEXTURED LOOP, SOLUTION DYED BACKING: NEXUS® MODULAR OFFICE / CONFERENCE ROOM - CARPET: MILLIKIN COLOR ACCENTS P /2105 COLOR: 110 TOILET ROOM - PORCELAIN TILE WITH COVED BASE: IS "XIS" CERAMIC TILE, BLACK GALAXY, HORNED FINISH, LATICRETE T -8e;1- 1106 -ARCH COLOR CHANNEL #8 SMOKE GRAY. INSTALL WITH MATCHING COVE BASE ENTRANCE - WOOD FLOORING: PARTERRE FLOORING; 4" X 36" X 5MM; APIRONDAGK OAK - 11258 FINISH SCHEDULE FLAME SPREAD / SMOKE DEVELOPED GLASS A CLASS A GLASS A GLASS A N/A GLASS A SYMBOL P -1 P -2 P -3 P -4 SV -1 RB -1 RB -2 VCT -1 WB -1 TOILET ROOMS, BACK OF HOUSE AS NOTED, SALES AREA AS NOTED, AS NOTED ON D RAWIN65 - PAINT: BENJAMIN MOORE 4 COMPANY COLOR: #0C -61 "WHITE DIAMOND" FINISH WALLS: EGGSHELL FINISH CEILING: FLAT FINISH DOOR FRAMES: DTM LATEX SEMI -GLOSS SALES AREA, AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS - PAINT: BENJAMIN MOORE 4 COMPANY COLOR: #2136 -60 - "HARBOR HAZE" FINISH: FLAT STOREFRONT (EXTERIOR) - PAINT: COLOR: TO MATCH NEW STOREFRONT, FINISH: TO MATCH NEW STOREFRONT TOILET ROOM - SHEET VINYL FLOORING WITH INTEGRAL BASE: ARMSTRONG STYLE: CONNECTION GORLON, COLOR: #88104 "STONE HARBOR ", THICKNESS: .080" BACK -OF- HOUSE, HALLWAYS - RUBBER BASE: ARMSTRONG COLOR INTEGRATED RUBBER WALL BASE COLOR: #61 - "GRAPHITE GRAY" INCLUDE COVE CORNER BASE I /8" GA. X 6" H 4 COVE ROLL I /8" GA. X 120' X 6" H SALES AREA, HALLWAYS - RUBBER BASE: ROPPE COLOR: BLACK -BROWN P115 TP /PIG'S 1/8" TPR RUBBER BASE, HEIGHT: 6" BACK OF HOUSE, TELECOM ROOM, INVENTORY - FLOORING: ARMSTRONG STANDARD EXGELON COLOR: #51804 "STERLING" SIZE: 12" X 12" X I/8" SALES AREA - WOOD BASE: MATERIAL: MDF FINISH: PAINT TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL SIZE: 5 I /2 "H x 5/4 "D - FLAME SPREAD / SMOKE DEVELOPE WALL TYPE NOT ALL USED AT THIS LOCATION 4 WALL TYPES 5 NOT ALL USED AT THIS LOCATION '7 A9 GENERAL NOTES 8 1 12 COPYRIGHT NOTICE: These drawings and specifications are copyrighted and subject to copyright protection as an "architectural work" under sec. 102 of the copyright aot, 17 u.S.C. As amended december 1990. The protection includes, without limitation, the overall form, arrangement and composition of spaces, and elements of the design. Under such protection, unauthorized use of these drawings and specifications may result In cessation of construction, building seizure, and /or monetary liability. E V 0 E DATE: SCALE: DRAWN BY: PROJECT No.: 449 z 0 TMO0 NAY 22 '09 05.22.Ovt SHEET: m N N as ▪ co m m o 0 CU FL U • t N !7 75 co c o 0 N Ct N 0 aJ O1 z 0 Lrt �vt a -.. . 1/4" = D& A -2